JP7744574B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, a game begins when a predetermined number of medals are inserted and a start lever (start signal) is operated, causing multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged on the periphery to spin. When the spinning is stopped by a stop button (stop button), if a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on a winning line, the machine typically transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small prize or the like is higher than normal) that is more profitable for the player than the normal game state. In addition to these basic gameplay features, slot machines also offer various effects to enhance overall entertainment value.
In addition, when game medals are paid out, a payout sound is output, the number of medals won is displayed, and a backlight effect is activated, allowing the player to recognize that the game medals have been paid out properly.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-217068

Improvements in the performance of this type of gaming machine are desired.

The present invention provides
It has a start switch,
It has a stop switch,
having an information display means capable of displaying information,
having an internal lottery means;
A predetermined counter is provided,
Main processing can be executed,
The timer interrupt process can be executed when a predetermined counter times out .
The main processing has a predetermined interrupt disable period from a first instruction that disables interrupts to a second instruction that enables interrupts,
The timer interrupt process has a second instruction that enables the interrupt;
When the designed processing time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt process is "P" and the period at which a predetermined counter times out is "T", T/2>P is satisfied,
The processing time of the second instruction in the main processing is the same as the processing time of the second instruction in the timer interrupt processing,
When a predetermined counter times out at timing A during a predetermined interrupt disable period, timer interrupt processing is not executed at timing A, but the value of the predetermined counter is updated even after timing A, and timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing B after the predetermined interrupt disable period has ended, and thereafter timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing C,
When the period at which a predetermined counter times out is "T" and timing B is a specific timing before T has elapsed since timing A, timing C is the timing at which T has elapsed since timing A,
In a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, stop operation information corresponding to a predetermined stop operation mode can be displayed on the information display means;
As the stop operation information, first stop operation information which is information relating to the first stop operation, second stop operation information which is information relating to the second stop operation, and third stop operation information which is information relating to the third stop operation can be displayed,
The display mode of the first stop operation information includes at least a normal mode and a success mode,
The display mode of the second stop operation information includes at least a normal mode and a success mode,
The success mode is a display mode that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game in which a start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by an internal lottery means, when stop operation information corresponding to the predetermined stop operation mode is displayed on an information display means, a stop switch corresponding to the first stop operation information is operated as a first stop operation, the first stop operation information is displayed in a successful mode and then hidden, and the second stop operation information is being displayed, a power outage occurs, and after power is restored, the first stop operation information can be re-displayed on the information display means in a successful mode, and the second stop operation information can be re-displayed on the information display means.
In a modified example of the present invention, a plurality of storage areas capable of storing information regarding the number of extensions are provided,
In the first gaming state, predetermined information including playable number information for determining the playable number of a predetermined gaming state and memory area information for determining which memory area among a plurality of memory areas the playable number is to be accumulated in can be updated for each game;
In a certain game resulting from a predetermined internal lottery, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the determined number of available games can be stored in a predetermined storage area;
In the second gaming state, the gaming machine may be such that, if a specific condition is met, the number of available plays stored in any one of the multiple memory areas can be granted to the player.

This invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the outside of the cabinet of the slot machine PS1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the back surface of the front panel PS2. FIG. 2 is a view showing the inner surface of the cabinet PS3. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating functional blocks. 10 is a flowchart showing a program start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-off process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-off recovery process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main game progress. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. A flowchart showing the advantageous zone clear counter management process. 1 is a diagram illustrating a reel arrangement in the present embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a condition device according to the present embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. This is an example of a push button effect. 10 is an example of a display mode of a display device when a push button effect is executed. This is an example of a step-up preview in normal presentation mode. This is an example of a line preview in a normal presentation state. This is an example of a line preview during a continuous performance. This is an example of a switch image for effect when the front panel PS2 is open. 10 is an example of a switch image for effect in a demo screen. 10 is an example of a switch image for effect in a demo screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the case where a MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the case where a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the dispensing process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where no gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the case where a gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where payout is performed normally. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program showing interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time chart of an 8-bit counter and timer interrupt processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the execution timing of a timer interrupt process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a stage change effect. A figure showing an example of a first continuous performance. A figure showing an example of a second continuous performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a caption is displayed in a continuous performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the flow until the next image is displayed in a continuous performance. A figure showing an example of the form of a push order navigation image. This is a diagram showing an example of a push order navigation image displayed on a liquid crystal display. This figure shows an example of when a specified error occurs while the push order navigation image is being displayed. This is a time chart for when the MAX bet switch is not inserted after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart for when the MAX BET switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart when a MAX BET switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart for when no gaming medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart for when a payout is not made normally after a cherry win (when a hopper empty error occurs). This is a time chart for when payout is not performed normally after a cherry win (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a reel arrangement used to explain the correct operation challenge presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of condition devices used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations used to explain the correct operation challenge performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations used to explain the correct operation challenge performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the condition devices and the symbol combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the condition devices and the symbol combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the condition devices and the symbol combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of game screens when the normal mode is set and when the distribution mode is set. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing each area stored in a main control ROM. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an interrupt initial setting area and automatic allocation according to the priority of the interrupt initial setting area. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between power-on processing and interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between interrupt vector addresses of power-on processing and timer interrupt processing and other programs. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications across advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications across advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications across advantageous zones. A flowchart showing the advantageous zone clear counter management process corresponding to the difference counter. A flowchart showing the advantageous zone clear counter management process corresponding to the difference counter. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. A figure showing an example of the presentation of the operation advance notification state and the end notification state. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the reel arrangement in Specification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a condition device in specification 1. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 1. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 1. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 1. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 1. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 1. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the reel arrangement in specification 2. A diagram explaining the pattern combinations in specification 2. A diagram explaining the pattern combinations in specification 2. A diagram explaining the pattern combinations in specification 2. A diagram explaining the pattern combinations in specification 2. A diagram explaining the pattern combinations in specification 2. A diagram explaining the pattern combinations in specification 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a condition device in Specification 2. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 2. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 2. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 2. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 2. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 2. A diagram explaining the number of internal lottery placements in specification 2. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 2. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the LCD screen during the introduction period of specification 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the LCD screen during the introduction period of specification 2. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the liquid crystal screen of another presentation mode using a presentation switch. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the liquid crystal screen of another presentation mode using a presentation switch.

<Terminology>
"Medals (number of medals),""game media (number of game media)," and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet,""BET," and "input" regarding game media are synonymous, and all refer to the act of betting (placing a bet) on game media. Hexadecimal numbers are written as "0x00" or "00h," and binary numbers are written as "00000000b" or "00000000B." Unless otherwise specified before or after the number, it is expressed in decimal. "Reels" are sometimes called "machines," and all are synonymous. "Storage means" are sometimes called "RWM,""RAM," or "storage area," and all are synonymous. "Awarding," as used in "awarding game media" or "awarding points," etc., can also be called "payout" or "acquisition," and all are synonymous. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" depending on its function, but in both cases, they refer to the same switch. The "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may be provided as different switches. When a small combination with a high payout or a small combination with a low payout stops depending on the operation mode, the small combination with a high payout may be called a high combination (high combination bell and high combination small combination are also synonymous), and the small combination with a low payout may be called a low combination (low combination bell and low combination small combination are also synonymous). When a symbol combination with no payout stops at this time, it may be called a drop combination (drop combination is also synonymous).

An embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as the present embodiment) will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Explanation of the slot machine PS1>
The components of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

The slot machine PS1 can be broadly divided into two sections, with the necessary components and circuit boards mounted on the front panel PS2 side and the cabinet PS3 side. The sides of the front panel PS2 and cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and the locking device side can be opened by inserting a lock key into the locking device provided on the front panel PS2 and rotating it in a specific direction. In other words, the front panel PS2 functions as a door to the cabinet PS3.

<Front panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as the front door PS2, front surface door PS2, or front door PS2) is a plate-like member with a design, and on the front side (player side) there are provided a middle panel (including a display window 4, operation indicator lamps 24, etc.), an operation panel 11 (including a bet number display lamp 25, credit number display 26, number of coins won display 27, etc.), a lower panel 5 (also referred to as the lower panel 5), upper or both side performance lamps, etc., and on the back side there are provided a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., and a setting display LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a setting value display LED, setting display device, setting value display device, or setting value display device).

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided in the front panel PS2, and when the front panel PS2 is closed, the symbols drawn on the reels are visible. The symbols printed on the outer periphery of each reel tape fixed to the reel rim of each of the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c are configured to be visible from the front (player side) through the display window 4. When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of 21 symbols (which may be freely designed as 20, 16, or other symbols depending on the specifications) are visible. In other words, a total of nine symbols (3 symbols x 3 reels) are visible through the display window 4. Here, of the stop positions where the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is referred to as the upper row, the center stop position is referred to as the middle row, and the lowermost stop position is referred to as the lower row.

<Valid line>
The activated line is a symbol combination line that is the target of the winning determination process (described later) when the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c come to a stop. In this embodiment, the activated line is visible through the display window 4 and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) that passes through the middle of each reel. When the winning determination process determines that a symbol combination that has come to a stop on the activated line corresponds to one of the winning combinations, processing is performed according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination such as a bell has come to a stop, a payout process for game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) and a credit addition process are performed, and when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has come to a stop, an automatic bet process is performed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, five pay lines may be set: an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, an upward-right line, and a downward-right line. Alternatively, six or more pay lines may be set, including non-straight, roughly mountain-shaped lines (lower left reel 8a, upper middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), roughly valley-shaped lines (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, upper right reel 8c), and roughly L-shaped lines (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c). Pay lines may also be set to change depending on the number of coins bet, and can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1. Straight lines other than pay lines may also be called inactive lines.

<Operation indicator lamp 24>
The operation indicator lamps 24 are provided around the display window 4 and instruct the player on the order of operating the stop switches 13 (described later) while the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c are spinning. That is, when the left operation indicator lamp 24a is lit (the center operation indicator lamp 24b and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, when the center operation indicator lamp 24b is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the center stop switch 13b should be operated, and when the right operation indicator lamp 24c is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the center operation indicator lamp 24b are off), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bet number display lamp 25>
The bet number indicator lamps 25 (also referred to as bet number indicator lamps 25, bet number indicator lamps 25, bet number indicator lamps 25, bet number indicator lamps 25, or bet number indicator lamps 25) are provided on the operation panel 11 and have the function of displaying the number of coins bet by the player. They are also comprised of a 1 bet lamp 25a (not shown), a 2 bet lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3 bet lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a lights up. When a total of two medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a and the 2 bet lamp 25b light up. When a total of three medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c light up. Furthermore, although not shown, after a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed, when the automatic bet process is executed, the bet number indicator lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay won is illuminated, and the replay lamp is also illuminated. The timing of lighting the bet number display lamp 25 and the timing of lighting the replay lamp may be simultaneous, or one may be configured to light up first.

<Credit number display 26>
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 26a (not shown) which is made up of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the upper digits of the credit number, and a segment display 26b (not shown) which is made up of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the lower digits of the credit number. The credit number refers to the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and up to 50 can be stored. Furthermore, when normal gameplay cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, a message regarding the error may be displayed.

<Acquired coin count indicator 27>
The earned coin count indicator 27 (also referred to as earned coin count indicator, earned number indicator, payout coin count indicator, or payout number indicator) is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment indicator 27a (not shown) consisting of seven segments and dot points (DP) that mainly displays the upper digits of the earned coin count, and a segment indicator 27b (not shown) consisting of seven segments and dot points (DP) that mainly displays the lower digits of the earned coin count. The earned coin count refers to the number of medals paid out to the player (including those stored in the credit number indicator 26) based on the results of the game on the slot machine PS1. Furthermore, when normal gameplay cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, a message regarding the error may be displayed.

In addition to displaying their respective information using segment displays 26a, 26b, 27a, and 27b, the credit number display 26 and the acquired coin number display 27 may also display information other than the credit number or acquired coin number depending on whether the DP is lit or not. For example, information indicating that the player is in a favorable zone (described below) or that a specified external signal is being output may be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. The acquired coin number display 27 may also have the ability to notify the player of the order in which to press buttons using the display for the upper and lower digits. When the acquired coin number display 27 is used to notify the player of the order in which to press buttons, the acquired coin number display 27 is sometimes referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation panel 11>
The operation panel 11 is provided in approximately the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped configuration with a substantially horizontal section and a vertical section extending substantially vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal section, with a start switch 12 and a stop switch 13 (described later) provided on the vertical section, and a medal insertion slot 17 (described later), multiple bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub-switch 20, a sub-cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a settlement switch (not shown), and a performance switch (not shown) provided on the horizontal section.

<Start switch 12>
The start switch (also referred to as a start lever) 12 is located on the vertical portion of the operation panel 11. It is a lever-shaped operation unit. The start switch sensor is ON when the switch is not operated, and when the switch is operated, the start switch sensor turns OFF, determining that the start switch has been operated. The start switch 12 is activated when the number of coins bet reaches a predetermined number. When the start switch 12 is operated, it executes an internal lottery process, a process related to the instruction function, a reel rotation process, or the like. In this embodiment, the input signal is low active. Therefore, when the start switch sensor is ON when the switch is not operated, the start switch input signal turns OFF. When the start switch sensor changes from ON to OFF when the switch is operated, the start switch input signal turns ON. However, the start switch input signal may be turned ON when the start switch sensor is ON. In other words, the predetermined number refers to the number of bets required to start a game.

Hereinafter, when we simply say "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated," it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON.

<Stop switch 13>
The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. When the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of the lamp provided on the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamps around it changes, indicating that the stop switch 13 is active. For example, the light may be blue when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and red when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated. Another example is that the light may be on when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and off when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated.

<Medal slot 17>
The medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal slot, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. Multiple types of medal slots 17 are manufactured to correspond to the standard sizes of multiple types of medals, but the installation standards for the various medal slots 17 are the same so that they can be installed on the operation panel 11 in a common manner.

Regarding the insertion of gaming media, the gaming media is not limited to the medals mentioned above, but may also be, for example, gaming balls (known as Parrots) used in pachinko gaming machines, or gaming media information stored on an electrical storage medium such as a magnetic card or flash memory, which is input into the gaming machine, and the number of bets set and the amount added when a prize is won are based on the input gaming media information.

<Bet Switch (MAX BET Switch 18, 1 BET Switch 19)>
The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated when there are medals stored in the credits, a bet process is executed and the bet number is set as if medals were inserted into the medal insertion slot 17. However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no medals stored in the credits, the bet process is invalid (the operation of the bet switch is not accepted). The MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player, a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part, and a light-emitting part (also called a MAX bet lamp) that illuminates the push-down part, and the 1 bet switch 19 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player and a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part (the 1 bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting part).

The MAX BET lamp notifies the player that a bet can be made when the MAX BET switch is operated, and various notification methods are possible, such as lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specified color or flashing the MAX BET lamp at a specified interval. Conversely, if the MAX BET switch is operated but a bet cannot be made, the MAX BET lamp may light in a specific color or not light at all.

The slot machine PS1 is also equipped with a MAX BET switch 18 that allows the user to bet the maximum number of coins set for each slot machine PS1 (three coins in this embodiment), and a 1 BET switch 19 that allows the user to bet one coin. The MAX BET process is executed when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated, and the 1 BET process is executed when the 1 BET switch 19 is operated. The MAX BET process is executable when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently placed is three or more, and the number of bets currently placed is less than three. The MAX BET process cannot be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently placed is less than three (in other words, when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated, the number of bets is less than three), or when three bets have already been placed. The 1 BET process is executable when the number of credits is one or more, and the number of bets currently placed is less than three, but cannot be executed when three bets have already been placed.

Furthermore, each time the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, one bet is processed; if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated three times from a state where no bets have been placed, three bets will be placed; three operations of the 1 bet switch 19 are equivalent to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18.

Furthermore, while an embodiment has been described in which the 1 bet switch 19 is disabled when 3 bets have been made, the system may also be configured so that when 3 bets have been made and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated once, the state changes to 1 bet and 2 credits are returned.

Furthermore, while an embodiment has been described in which the max bet process, which is executed when the max bet switch 18 is operated, is not executed when the number of bets is less than three, a process in which the maximum number of bets that can currently be made is also conceivable. In other words, a process in which two credits are bet when the max bet switch 18 is operated when no bets have been made and the number of credits is two is also conceivable.

The maximum number of coins that can be bet may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state, such that the maximum number of coins that can be bet during non-bonus periods is 3, and the maximum number of coins that can be bet during bonus periods is 2.

<Sub switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is located on the operation panel 11 and consists of a push-button made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detector for detecting operation of the push-button, and a sub-switch lamp for illuminating the push-button of the sub-switch. The sub-switch 20 is primarily used to display a menu screen on the display device 32 (described below). In addition to the sub-switch 20, the sub-control board 1000 also provides input devices such as a sub-cross key switch 21 (up switch, down switch, left switch, right switch) and a presentation switch (a switch operated by instructions during gameplay). The sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger for activating a linkage system with a mobile device (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile-device linkage system), described below. While the sub-switch 20 is shown as a menu display function and the presentation switch is shown as a switch for operation during gameplay, they may be combined into a single switch.

The menu screen displays winning combination items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light intensity adjustment items, and items related to the mobile linkage system, and the cursor selecting an item is controlled to move up or down by operating the up or down switch of the sub-cross key switch 21. Furthermore, when the sub-switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on one of the items, details of that item are displayed. For example, when the sub-switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted using the left or right switch of the sub-cross key switch 21.

The menu screen can also be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 after a game has finished and no bets have been placed. The menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 regardless of whether the presentation state at that time is normal presentation, continuous presentation, automatic time display, or demo screen (a screen that appears 60 seconds after a game has finished, displaying the manufacturer's name and an introduction to the presentation as a moving image). However, this is not limiting to the present embodiment, and the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous presentation or automatic time display.

<Show switch>
The effect switch is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a push-down section made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection section that detects that the push-down section has been operated, and an effect switch lamp that illuminates the push-down section of the effect switch. When the effect switch is operated in a situation in which operation of the effect switch is valid, an effect based on the operation is executed. For example, when a series of effects is being executed on the display device (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "LCD") 32, one possible mode is to display "success" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "successful effect"), which means that a bonus will be awarded in the final game of the series of effects, or "failure" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "failed effect"), which means that a bonus will not be awarded.

In addition, when the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp lights up, thereby notifying the player that the operation of the effect switch is valid. The lighting mode of the effect switch can be set to be unlit when the operation of the effect switch is invalid, and lit when the operation of the effect switch is valid. Another lighting mode when the operation of the effect switch is valid may be set to alternately turn on and off at regular intervals.

In addition, when operation of the effect switch is valid, a display simulating the effect switch is displayed on the LCD to notify the user that operation of the effect switch is valid. When displaying the effect switch on the LCD, it is displayed based on a command received from the main control means 100. For example, it is possible to display the effect switch simulating the effect switch based on a start switch reception command, or to display the effect switch simulating the effect switch based on a command to stop all reels.

In addition, by pressing the performance switch, the detectable piece attached to the performance switch can be moved to a detection position (ON position) where it is detected by a sensor attached to the performance switch, and by releasing the performance switch while the sensor is detecting the detectable piece (an operation that uses the expanding force of the spring attached to the performance switch to return the spring to its natural length), the detectable piece can be moved to a non-detection position (OFF position) where it is not detected by the sensor.

Note that while the effect switch has been described as a push-button switch, it is not limited to this and may also be a jog dial switch. Other structures may also be used as long as they can detect the on and off positions.

<Settlement switch>
The settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When operated after a game is completed, the settlement switch executes a process (settlement process) of paying out to the player the number of gaming media bet and the number of gaming media accumulated in the credit. Note that in this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated under conditions in which a bet has been made and gaming media are accumulated in the credit, the bet gaming media are paid out first, followed by the gaming media accumulated in the credit. However, this is not limited to this, and a process of paying out the gaming media accumulated in the credit only when the number of gaming media bet is 0 may be executed. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated under conditions in which a bet has been made, only the bet gaming media are paid out, and then when the settlement switch is operated again, the gaming media accumulated in the credit may be paid out.

<Lower panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. It is made of two sheets of transparent resin joined together, with a design sheet sandwiched between the two sheets of resin, and the design sheet is printed with a design that represents the characteristics of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout outlet 45>
The medal payout outlet 45 is provided below the lower panel 5. It is an outlet for discharging medals paid out from a hopper 44 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (to the tray 28). It also serves as a return port for discharging medals rejected by a medal selector 34 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Tray 28>
The tray 28 (also called the "lower tray") is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a generally concave structure so that it can receive and store medals released from the medal payout opening 45, and it protrudes toward the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

Other functions of the tray 28 include a cigarette ashtray 29 and a seal storage section 30 with an opening that can store a resin sheet with a license seal, patent seal, and model seal attached, and display them to the player.

<Speaker S>
The speakers S are provided at the top and bottom of the front panel PS2. They are connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and output sound effects that match the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds that notify users that an error has occurred.

<Display device 32>
The display device 32 is located above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices, such as a liquid crystal display, plasma display, organic electroluminescence display, or projector, can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000 and displays various visual effects, as well as game instruction images that indicate the order and key positions for pressing the stop switch 13 during play (when only the key positions are displayed, this may be referred to as a key position navigation image (also referred to as a key position image, or key position image)). When only the key positions are displayed, this may be referred to as a key position navigation image (also referred to as a key position image, or a key position navigation image (also referred to as an operation mode image)). When both the key positions and the key positions are displayed, this may be referred to as an operation mode navigation image (also referred to as an operation mode image) as a broader concept than the key positions and key positions), error images when an error occurs, etc. Some slot machines PS1 do not have a display device 32.

<Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable props>
Other effect devices, such as dot displays and movable gadgets, are located at any position on the front panel PS2, such as around the display window 4, on the middle panel, or on the lower panel 5. The other effect devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000 and display various effect images and actions, as well as game instruction images and actions that indicate the order and timing of pressing the stop switch 13 during play, and error images and actions when an error occurs. Other effect devices are optionally installed depending on the model of the slot machine PS1. Various devices, such as LCD displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors, can also be used as other effect devices. In particular, in gaming machines equipped with an auxiliary LCD as an additional effect device, the display device 32 is sometimes referred to as the main display device, and the LCD as the other effect device is sometimes referred to as the sub-display device. In this case, the main display device has a larger display area than the sub-display device.

<Medal Selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the back side of the front panel PS2 and is provided in the flow path below the medal insertion slot 17. The medal selector 34 has a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player using a sensor provided on the flow path, a medal removal function that guides inserted non-standard medals to a tray 28, an ejection function that removes medals that have become stuck in the medal selector 34 when an eject switch provided on the front of the front panel PS2 is operated, and a blocker function that removes medals inserted at times other than when medals are being accepted from the flow path using an electrically driven blocking member (also referred to as a blocker). Furthermore, if a medal inserted when accepting medals is a regular medal, the medal selector 34 discharges the medal into a hopper 44 located downstream.

The various sensors within the medal selector consist of a passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, and chute sensor. The passage sensor is the first sensor to detect medals inserted through the medal insertion slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. Insert sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and blocker, and are provided to determine the passage time of medals passing insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2, and to determine whether they pass normally or abnormally. Insert sensor 2 is located downstream of insertion sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of insertion sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. The passage sensor and chute sensor have overlapping functions, so only one of them may be provided.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it allows game medals to pass through, and when it is OFF, it does not allow game medals to pass through. Allowing game medals to pass means that game medals inserted through the medal insertion slot are guided to the hopper 44, and not allowing game medals to pass through means that game medals inserted through the medal insertion slot are not guided to the hopper 44.

The following describes the components of the cabinet PS3 side of the slot machine PS1.

<PS3 Cabinet>
The cabinet PS3 is configured in the shape of a rectangular box with an opening on one side, and inside are provided a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "reset switch" or "setting switch"), a power supply unit 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, etc.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are fitted together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are caulked together to prevent them from being easily opened or closed (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to a main control board case bracket inside the cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6>
The reel unit 6 is mainly composed of a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a center reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3 and fixed with locking members (screws or rivets).

The reels (left reel 8a, center reel 8b, right reel 8c) consist of a reel base, a reel tape with multiple designs attached to the outer periphery of the reel base, a stepping motor axially supported by the reel base, and a motor fixing base that fixes the stepping motor and is considered a reel unit. A different pattern arrangement is drawn on the reel tape for each reel.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rotations per minute), the stepping motor moves one step each time a timer interrupt process (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as interrupt process) is executed, maintaining a constant rotation speed (constant rotation). Then, in response to the player's operation of the stop switch 13, the corresponding reel is moved at a constant rotation speed to a stop position determined for each stop operation acceptance position. After the reel has reached the stop position, the brake is applied (a four-phase excitation signal is output), stopping the reel's rotation and terminating the excitation output.

In addition, an index is provided on the spokes at the reel base of each reel, and an index sensor attached to the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index to determine the position of the reference pattern (also referred to as the initial pattern) during each rotation. In this embodiment, the stepping motor that drives the reels has 336 steps, and one rotation takes 336 timer interrupt processes during constant speed rotation. During constant speed rotation, a rotation failure detection counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is executed twice, and a rotation failure is determined when the counter value of the rotation failure detection counter reaches 180. In other words, a rotation failure is determined when the reel does not complete one rotation even after 360 timer interrupt processes have been executed. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when an index is detected, and if the constant speed rotation process is normal, the rotation failure detection counter will reach 0 before reaching 180.

In this embodiment, a determination is made as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing, but a determination is not made as to whether an index has been detected during acceleration processing. However, this is not limited to this, and a determination may be made as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing and acceleration processing. This configuration makes it possible to more quickly bring a player into a state where a stop can be accepted.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixing base of each reel, which lights up to highlight the stopped symbol after the reel has stopped, and also lights up to improve the visibility of the symbol while the reel is spinning.

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals inserted by players. The hopper 44 is placed by engaging with rails attached to the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3 and can slide back and forth along the rails. The hopper 44 is composed of a storage tank section that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 into the gaming machine, a hopper motor that is driven by a drive signal input from the hopper drive means, a turntable that is journaled by the hopper motor and aligns the medals in the storage tank section, a medal payout section that has a discharge mechanism that rotates the turntable to discharge medals one by one into the tray 28, a medal discharge port from which medals are discharged by the medal payout section, and a payout sensor that detects medals discharged from the medal discharge port.

<Auxiliary tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to store medals, and medals stored in excess of the capacity of the storage tank of the hopper 44 are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 via a downwardly sloping rail provided in the storage tank. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-like structure. When installed in the cabinet PS3, two full tank detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are exposed to the interior of the auxiliary tank 46 through through holes provided in at least one side. When a certain amount of medals inserted through the medal insertion slot are stored, the two full tank detection electrodes become electrically conductive via the medals, and it is determined that the hopper 44 and auxiliary tank 46 are full. Note that the number of full tank detection electrodes is not limited to two; the number may be changed, such as three. Furthermore, the method of full tank detection is not limited to using full tank detection electrodes; full tank detection may also be possible by a sensor provided at a predetermined position detecting medals.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is provided on a setting key switch unit with a door on the front side inside the slot machine PS1. After opening the front panel PS2, access is gained by opening the door on the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it 90 degrees to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on while medals can be accepted, the current setting value can be confirmed, and if the setting key switch 37 is determined to be on during the power-on recovery process (also referred to as the power-on process) when the power is turned on, a setting change process (described below) is executed.

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply unit 39 is located at the lower left of the cabinet PS3 when viewed from the front. The power supply unit 39 has a rectangular box-like structure, an external power switch 40, and an internal power supply board for generating voltage. The power supply unit 39 is individually connected to the reel device board and the sub-control board 1000 via harnesses (not shown), and is further connected from the reel device board to the main control board 100 via a harness to supply power to the main control board 100.

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 takes in power from outside the slot machine PS1, then generates a predetermined voltage and causes the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000 to take in the predetermined voltage.When the power switch 40 is turned off, the power supply device 39 is configured not to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1.

<External output terminal board 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally installed inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and converts signals related to game results output from the main control board 100 into signals in a predetermined format and transmits them to the outside of the slot machine PS1. Game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (number of big bonuses, number of regular bonuses), a door opening signal, etc. Other conditions for transmitting signals to the outside can be set based on predetermined information controlled by the main control board 100, such as when the automatic timer is activated, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, or when the value of a game-related counter reaches a predetermined value.

<Function block diagram>
A functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Main control board 100>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) that controls the general flow of a game is electrically connected to a sub-control board 1000 (also referred to as sub-control means 1000, sub-control board 1000, or sub-control means 1000), a door relay board (also referred to as central display board), a reel device board, a reset/setting switch 38, a setting key switch, etc., thereby enabling data communication. However, two-way communication is not possible between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, and data communication is possible via one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 1000.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main control chip. The main control chip allows data communication between the main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc. via a bus. The main control chip also has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate data with each other via a bus. The main control chip also has general-purpose registers (e.g., A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that the main control CPU can use for calculations, etc., a PC register that stores the program (return address) after a return command (e.g., RET command) after executing a program in response to a call command (e.g., CALL command), and interrupt registers (e.g., IFF1 register, IFF2 register) that manage the enable/disable status of maskable interrupts.

The main control chip controls the role drawing (also referred to as internal drawing), reel drive control (also referred to as reel control), payout control, etc., and transmits data to various boards as appropriate. Furthermore, when a selected role (also referred to as AT role, AT target role, push order role, eye-pressing role, or operation procedure role including both push order role and eye-pressing role) is won as a result of the internal drawing, and information regarding the display of the selected role (push order, operation timing) is notified on the main control means 100 side, the sub-control means also notifies the sub-control means by transmitting selected role information (selected role group information, information regarding the display of the selected role). This enables the sub-control means to also notify the sub-control means of information regarding the display of the selected role. Note that all processing related to the AT, such as transitioning to the AT, extending the number of AT plays, and notifying the push order, is sometimes referred to as processing related to the instruction function. Note that a push order role is a conditional device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the order in which the reels are stopped (push order), and a press timing role is a conditional device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the timing at which the stop button is operated.

The main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less," and includes a usage area (also referred to as the first program area) of "7.5 KB or less," and an area outside the usage area (also referred to as the second program area). The usage area includes a control area (also referred to as the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which programs executed by the main control board 100 are stored, and a data area (also referred to as the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than programs (e.g., internal lottery table information) is stored, or will be stored. Similar to the usage area, the area outside the usage area also includes a control area (also referred to as the second control area) and a data area (also referred to as the second data area). The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, while the area outside the usage area stores programs related to anti-fraud measures and programs used for gaming machine testing.

The main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 has a memory capacity of "1024B or less," and has a usable area of "512B or less" (also referred to as the first working area) and an area outside the usable area (also referred to as the second working area). The first working area is a memory area that can be rewritten as the game progresses, and the second working area is a memory area that can be rewritten when programs for anti-fraud measures and gaming machine testing are executed.

The main control RAM built into the main control chip has storage areas for switch status flags indicating the on/off status of the play stop switch and the automatic settlement switch, a storage area for setting value information indicating which of several RT states is set (1-6), a storage area for RT state information indicating which of multiple RT states the current state is in, a storage area for specific condition devices indicating the winning status of specific condition devices such as bonuses, a storage area for game information storing other information necessary to progress the game, unused storage areas, a storage area for the stack area where data saved from registers is stored, and a storage area for the temporary stack area set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized when the setting change process is performed by the setting change means, when the power is turned off and then restored, and at the start of each game. The range of the main control RAM's memory area that is initialized differs depending on the case.

If power recovery cannot be performed normally or recovery is not possible during the setting change process, data 0 is set (initialized) to the RAM area excluding the storage area for the switch status flag. In other words, only the switch status flag retains the state before the setting change; for example, the RT status and condition device flags are cleared and not retained.

In addition, during the setting change process, if recovery from a power outage can be performed normally or if the state is not one in which recovery is impossible, that is, if the setting change process is performed normally, data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the areas storing the switch status flag, setting value information, RT status information, and specific condition device. In other words, the RT status, setting value data, and condition device flag are inherited so that the game state before the setting change is maintained and play becomes possible with the setting values after the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and new setting values are set in the subsequent setting change process, so it is used in the sub-control board 1000 to determine whether a setting change has been made.

In addition, during power-off recovery processing, and at the start of each game, data 0 is set to unused memory areas in the RAM area, and during power-off recovery processing, data 0 is set to memory areas in the stack area excluding the most used area when RAM is initialized after power-off recovery.

The main control internal registers built into the main control chip are used to set the operation of each peripheral circuit (e.g., timer circuits) built into the main control chip and control their functions.

For example, by writing (also called setting or storing) data to a specified memory area in the main control built-in register using a program stored in the main control ROM, it is possible to make settings (timer circuit settings) for maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing), which is one of the programs stored in the main control ROM.

<Sub-control board 1000>
The sub-control board 1000 is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip has a sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. that can communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data specifying the performance to be output to the speaker S, LED lamp, sub-switch 20, performance switch, etc. Information to the display device 32 is transmitted as data to the image control board. The sub-control board 1000 is also supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Reel device board>
The reel device board is a relay board that communicates data between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as external central terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. The reel motor controls the drive of the reels. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reels are operating normally and transmits data to the reel device board when a protruding piece (also referred to as an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether the front door PS2 is open or not. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether medals pass through properly when being paid out from the hopper 44. The external central terminal board is a relay board that transmits data to a hall computer outside the gaming machine. In addition, the reel device board is supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Door relay board>
The door relay board receives input information from various sensors in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, chute sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and outputs information from the selector, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board is electrically connected to the selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, and advantageous zone lamp.

<Performance control board>
The performance control board (also called the performance control means) is electrically connected to the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the performance switch, the movable parts, the speaker S, the back lamp, the LED lamp provided on the front panel PS2, and the image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32.

The performance control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the performance output to the performance device based on the performance commands received from the sub-control means 1000.

The effect control means selects the effect content based on the results of the lottery for the winning combination performed by the internal lottery means. In this embodiment, multiple types of effect content are prepared in advance, and the effect control means selects the effect content by lottery using software random numbers after the lottery for the winning combination performed by the internal lottery means has been performed, such as at the start of a game.

In addition, there are multiple types of presentation effects depending not only on the results of the winning combination lottery but also on the results of the freeze combination lottery and the game state (RT state, freeze state), etc. Specifically, there are multiple types of presentation effects corresponding to when a bonus combination is won, when a small combination is won, when a replay is won, when a non-win is won, etc.

The presentation content determines what kind of presentation will be output (how the lamp will light, flash, or go out, what kind of sound will be output from the speaker S, what kind of image will be displayed on the display device 32, etc.) and at what timing (when the start switch 12 or each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) as the game progresses.

It is also possible to generate effects output by the effect control means in response to player operation. For example, effects could be generated by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on sub-control commands sent from the main control board 100 in response to operation signals from the start switch 12, stop switch 13, medal slot 17, bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), settlement switch, etc., whose operation signals are input to the main control board 100. Effects could also be generated directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to sub-input switch operation means, such as the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, and effect switches, whose operation signals are input to the sub-control board 1000. Furthermore, although the sub-control board 1000 and the effect control board are separate boards, they may also be configured as a single board. In this case, the sub-control board 1000 may have the functions and processing of the performance control board, and the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, performance switch, movable props, speaker S, back lamp, LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as image control means) is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, etc. for specifically displaying the performance content on the display device 32.

<Additional information on board configuration>
The sub-control board and the performance control board may be configured on one (single) board, or the sub-control board, performance control board, and image control board may be configured on one board. When the sub-control board and the performance control board are configured on one board, two sub-control CPUs and two performance control CPUs may be provided, or one CPU may be used. The same applies when the sub-control board, the performance control board, and the image control board are configured on one board.

<Power supply board>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, power is supplied from the power supply board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40. The power supplied to the reel device board is then supplied to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, thereby electrically connecting them. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 is then supplied to the performance control board, and then to the image control board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, thereby electrically connecting them.

Next, we will explain the control of the main control board 100, which controls the gameplay of the gaming machine.

<Error type>
Errors are broadly divided into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable error>
Recoverable errors are errors that indicate selector-related errors (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper 44-related errors (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness disconnection error, etc. When a recoverable error is set, if the cause of the various recoverable errors is removed and the reset switch is operated, it is possible to return to play without having to turn the power back on. During a recoverable error, information about the error that has occurred is displayed on the display device 32, payout number indicator, and various lamps to inform the player of what error has occurred.

If a recoverable error is detected during play, the game may be stopped at the time of detection, or may be stopped after the game in which the recoverable error was detected has ended. By stopping game progress during a recoverable error, damage to the amusement facility manager can be minimized even if the recoverable error occurred due to fraud. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error state may be configured to automatically recover once the cause of the error has been removed; an error that can be recovered from without cycling the power is called a recoverable error.

<Unrecoverable error>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, when an irrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the output of the output port is cleared, and other measures are taken to restrict the progress of the game, and the fact that an irrecoverable state has occurred is notified by displaying a message on the credit number display 26 according to the type of error.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is cleared when a reset switch (not shown) is operated; however, once an unrecoverable error is set, the unrecoverable error cannot be cleared by simply operating the reset switch or by cycling the power. In this case, the unrecoverable error is cleared by performing a setting change process. When the power is cycled during an unrecoverable error, part of the power-off recovery process is executed, and then the unrecoverable error display is repeatedly displayed, preventing further game processing from being executed.

Irrecoverable errors include when the number of coins bet during the draw is outside the specified number, when a value is not within the normal range during a setting value error check, when it is determined that the power outage processing was not performed correctly when power is restored (sometimes called an "RWM (RAM) abnormality" or "RWM (RAM) error"), when a random number abnormality is detected, such as when an abnormality in the crystal oscillator frequency is detected, or when a symbol combination corresponding to a role that is not on a winning line is stopped during the winning determination process.

In addition, if an unrecoverable error occurs, game progress will be halted regardless of whether the game is in progress or in standby mode (from the end of one game until the start of the next).

<How to play, game flow>
To play the slot machine PS1, first, a predetermined number of medals to bet (also called a prescribed number) is set by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 17 or by operating the MAX BET switch 18 or 1 BET switch 19 to bet medals stored in advance. In this embodiment, the prescribed number is set to three medals. By setting the number of medals to bet, the pay line is set to be valid, and the game becomes available for play.

If a new medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot when the number of medals bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals stored in the credits will increase. The maximum number of medals that can be stored in the credits is 50. If medals that exceed the upper limit of the number of medals bet (3 medals) and the upper limit of the number of medals stored (50 medals) are inserted through the medal insertion slot (the 54th medal), the medal selector's blocker is turned off (a state that prevents medals from being inserted into the gaming machine) and the medals are returned to the tray. In other words, when the upper limit of the number of medals bet and the upper limit of the number of stored credits are reached, the blocker is turned off (no path to the hopper 44 in the selector is formed).

When medals are inserted, the bet amount is added when the bet amount is less than three (less than the maximum bet amount in the game state when the medals are inserted). Furthermore, when medals are inserted, they can be saved as credits when the bet amount is three (the maximum bet amount in the game state when the medals are inserted) and the credits are less than 50 (less than the maximum number of credits that can be saved). In other words, when the sum of the bet amount and the saved credits is less than 53, the medals will enter the gaming machine when inserted through the medal slot. Note that another condition for medals to enter the gaming machine when inserted is that they are in standby mode (the period from the end of a game to the start of the next game). For example, if a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed and the game is in standby mode after the automatic bet process has been executed, the medal insertion requirement is met. In this case, three medals have been bet in the automatic bet, so if the saved credits are less than 50, the medal insertion requirement is met.

Next, when operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also referred to as the role lottery result or condition device number), it is determined whether the minimum play time (also referred to as the wait time (period) or 4.1 second timer) has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the reels begin to spin, but if the wait time has not elapsed, the reels wait without spinning until the wait time has elapsed.

Next, when operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 will stop according to the result of the role lottery and the timing when the stop operation was accepted. When all reels stop (also called a full stop), a determination is made as to whether or not the stopped symbols determined when each reel was stopped are abnormal. If no abnormalities are found, a search is made to determine which symbol combination has stopped. Depending on the symbol combination that corresponds to the search results, processing such as medal payout (including addition to credits), replay setting (automatic betting), bonus state setting, bonus state termination, RT state setting, and RT state termination is carried out, and one game is completed.

<Freeze processing>
The freeze process (also called freeze effect) that temporarily stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time may, for example, temporarily stop functions related to the progress of the game, such as accepting game media, accepting the operation of a bet switch to determine the number of pre-credited game media to be bet, accepting the operation of the start switch 12 to start the game, or accepting the operation to stop the reels. The freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100.

The freeze effect may temporarily halt all of the aforementioned functions related to the progress of the game, or it may temporarily halt only some of the functions.

Examples of ways to temporarily suspend game progress include not performing control processes based on player operation (processing to form a path for guiding medals to the hopper 44 using blocker control, processing to set the number of coins to bet based on operation of the bet switch, processing to spin the reels or perform an internal lottery based on operation of the start switch 12, and processing to stop the reels based on operation of the stop switch 13).

When an input signal based on a player's operation is issued while game progress is paused by a freeze effect, the game will not perform control processing based on the input signal, will not accept the input signal, or will delay sending the input signal until a specified period has passed, thereby delaying the timing of the end of a single game compared to when the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding freeze effects that are performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, examples include cases where, when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels do not rotate for a predetermined period of time, but then rotate the reels after the predetermined period has passed; cases where, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period of time, but then an internal drawing and reel rotation are performed after the predetermined period has passed; cases where, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing is performed but the reels do not rotate for a predetermined period of time, but then the reels rotate after the predetermined period has passed; cases where, after the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed, a predetermined period is set during which the reels rotate and stop during the predetermined period; cases where, after the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed and the reels are rotated, a predetermined period is set during which the stop switch 13 is disabled for the predetermined period of time.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the control process for the freeze effect differs between the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the freeze effect that is performed based on the stop display of a specific symbol on the reel as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13.

One example of control processing for freeze effects based on acceptance of stop switch 13 operation is when the left stop switch 13a is operated to freeze while all reels are spinning. After the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a stops, the middle stop switch 13b and right stop switch 13c are disabled for stop operation. This prevents the player from stopping the spinning middle and right reels for a specified period of time, but after the specified period has elapsed, the middle stop switch 13b and right stop switch 13c are enabled for stop operation, delaying the timing until the end of a single game.

Control processing for freeze effects that is performed when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on a reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 may include disabling the acceptance of the stop of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel due to the acceptance of the operation of a stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13, or not performing control processing such as setting the number of coins to be bet based on the operation of a bet switch to start the next game, detecting the insertion of gaming media using a passage sensor, or automatic betting when a replay stops on an active line, based on the acceptance of the operation of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel due to the acceptance of the operation of the last stop switch 13.

During the specified period during which the freeze effect is performed, game progress control based on player operation is temporarily suspended, but gaming machine operations unrelated to game progress can still be performed. For example, even if stop control processing based on operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the reel rotation pattern can be set as desired, such as rotating in the normal rotation pattern, or rotating at a slower or faster speed than normal.

The reel rotation patterns during a specified period of time may include rotating the reels in the opposite direction to normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), rotating the reels a specified number of times and then stopping a specific symbol combination, stopping a specified reel among multiple reels while the other reels start spinning, changing the reel rotation speed, or changing the reel operation due to player operation.

The specified period for which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to specified conditions. Here, specified conditions include the detection of a signal based on the operation status of various switches by the player (operation status of the start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, or settlement switch, etc.), and the results of a freeze lottery. Examples of changing the period include shortening or lengthening the specified period for which the freeze effect is performed, during which game progress is temporarily stopped, or switching the reel rotation pattern.

Control processes for shortening the pause period include forcibly terminating the pause period or rewriting it to a period shorter than the pause period. Control processes for lengthening the pause period include adding another period after the pause period or rewriting the pause period to a longer period. Furthermore, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not need to have an upper limit, and may continue until a certain result is reached based on the result of accepting an operation.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or it may be set to include the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period is compared with the freeze effect period, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period. If the freeze effect does not end during the wait period, the freeze effect period may be set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period may be resumed after the freeze effect ends. Furthermore, if the freeze effect period is longer than the wait period, it is possible to omit the process of comparing the wait period with the freeze effect period and start the freeze effect after the start switch 12 is operated (after the internal lottery process).

A freeze effect (also called a pseudo game) can be performed during acceleration processing, making it appear as if normal play is in progress. In pseudo play, the start switch 12 is operated, and a pseudo game period is determined during the reel acceleration process after an internal lottery is performed. During the pseudo game period, reel rotation is controlled as in normal play (reel rotation is controlled based on operation of the start switch upon the start of pseudo play), and reel stop control is performed based on operation of the stop switch 13. The reels may also be configured to rotate again when the start switch 12 is operated during the pseudo game period. However, internal lottery processing based on operation of the start switch 12, and winning determination processing or payout control processing based on operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In addition, in simulated games, when the reels stop due to the operation of the stop switch 13, or when the reels stop automatically as part of a reel effect, the stopped reels are made to oscillate up and down (so-called oscillating fluctuations). This allows the player to determine whether they are playing a normal game or a simulated game when they operate the stop switch 13.

<Pattern combinations that do not require technical intervention>
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention means a symbol combination that can always stop and display the winning symbol combination on an active line, no matter when the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning. For example, when bell symbols are arranged every three symbols on all reels, bell-bell-bell always stops (a 100% draw rate), so this symbol combination can be said to not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, a 100% draw rate will be referred to as PB=1, and a winning symbol combination with a 100% draw rate on all reels will sometimes be referred to as a PB=1 role.

On the other hand, PB≠1 means that the winning symbol combination will not stop depending on the timing of when the stop switch 13 stops while the reels are spinning. For example, if there is a location within the pull-in range where there are no symbols related to a winning symbol (e.g., 5 symbols apart), then PB≠1, and this winning symbol may be referred to as a PB≠1 symbol.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control>
Small win priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are won at the same time, or when a small win is won within a bonus, if both a symbol related to a small win and a symbol related to a bonus can be drawn in, the symbol related to the small win is drawn in.

Bonus priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are both won, or when a small win within a bonus is won, if both a small win symbol and a bonus symbol can be drawn, the bonus symbol will be drawn.

Also, since replays have the highest priority and cannot be missed, when the condition device flags for replay and small win, or replay and bonus, are turned on at the same time, the replay symbol will always be drawn.

<Normal section>
The normal interval is an interval in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When a push order role is won in the normal interval, a process is executed to send masked information (effect group number) indicating which push order was won to the sub-control means 1000. Also, when a push order role is won in the normal interval, the notification of the push order (both correct and incorrect push orders) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal interval, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the push order even if a push order role is won, so even if a push order role is won in the normal interval, it is always unclear whether it is correct or incorrect. In other words, this is a game interval in which the AT state does not occur.

<Advantageous Zone>
The advantageous zone is a zone in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and is set up to prevent excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous zone transition lottery held in the normal zone, you can transition to the advantageous zone. In the advantageous zone, a transition lottery to the AT can be held, or the AT state can occur, but in order to prevent excessive medal acquisition as mentioned above, the advantageous zone is designed to end based on certain conditions and transition to the normal zone.
in particular,
Examples of such conditions include: 1) when 1,500 games have been played since the next game after the transition to one advantageous zone; 2) when more than 2,400 medals have been won since the next game after the transition to one advantageous zone; and 3) when any given condition is met. These conditions can prevent excessive medal acquisition. Note that the 1,500 games in 1) may be 3,000 games, or 65,535 games, which is the maximum number that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area. Alternatively, the advantageous zone may be configured not to end after a predetermined number of games. Examples of the given condition in 3) include when one automatic timer ends or when a specific symbol combination is displayed.

If it is a favorable zone, information indicating that it is a favorable zone (also called the favorable zone type) is stored in a specified RAM area. If the value stored in that RAM area is 0 (if the favorable zone type is 0), it indicates that it is a normal zone, and if the value stored in that RAM area is 1 (if the favorable zone type is 1), it indicates that it is a favorable zone.

<Advantageous Zone Lamp>
A favorable zone lamp is provided as information on the main side indicating that the player is in a favorable zone. This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the player is in a favorable zone by checking whether the favorable zone lamp is lit. Specifically, a lit DP on the credit number display 26 indicates that the player is in a favorable zone, while an unlit DP on the credit number display 26 indicates that the player is not in a favorable zone. The favorable zone lamp may be lit after all reels have stopped, after a bet switch operation is accepted, upon detection of the first medal inserted during servicing, upon detection of the second medal inserted during servicing, upon detection of the third medal inserted during servicing, after acceptance of a start switch, or after a winning combination is selected by an internal lottery. The lamp is always lit when the player is in a favorable zone, operation procedure information for a winning combination is announced, and the payout rate (maximum payout rate) for the game being announced exceeds 1 (increases).

In addition, the machine is designed so that the advantageous zone lamp will light up even when it is notified of the push order sequence to transition to RT, which has a high replay probability but does not have a payout rate of more than 1 due to the machine's specifications not being equipped with a push order minor feature. This is to inform the player that the advantageous zone lamp is in an advantageous state, and to prevent players from suffering losses due to not understanding the machine's specifications.

However, if the conditions for lighting the advantageous zone lamp as described above are not met, it is acceptable to choose the timing for lighting the advantageous zone lamp after moving into a new advantageous zone.

In addition, once the advantageous zone lamp is lit, it will remain lit until the advantageous zone ends, and will be turned off before the start switch operation for the next game after the advantageous zone ends (after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible for a player to be in a favorable zone even when the favorable zone lamp is not lit, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that processing related to the instruction function will be executed even when the favorable zone lamp is not lit. As a result, while in the past, if the player was in a normal zone, the game consisted of simply waiting to move to the favorable zone, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the favorable zone lamp is not lit, there is a possibility that an AT transition lottery or the like is being held, making it possible to maintain motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone type is 1, it does not necessarily mean that the zone is advantageous. This is because in a game where the zone is in the normal zone (advantageous zone type is 0) and the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, causing the advantageous zone type to become 1, the advantageous zone type is 1, but the zone has not yet transitioned to the advantageous zone, so the game state is still in the normal zone. When executing the process to send a test signal to determine whether the zone is advantageous or normal, referencing the advantageous zone type will result in sending a signal for the advantageous zone even though the zone is normal, and so a signal different from the intended state will be sent.

To prevent this situation, when a test signal indicating whether the zone is advantageous or normal is sent, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is referenced. When the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 0, processing is executed to output a test signal indicating a normal zone, and when the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is not 0 (the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 to 1500), processing is executed to output a test signal indicating a favorable zone. By configuring in this way, the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately identify the state simply by determining whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 0, thereby eliminating pressure on program capacity and improving program execution speed. Note that, as mentioned above, even when the advantageous zone is terminated under any termination condition, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is set to 1, so the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately output that the zone is advantageous even in games where the advantageous zone ends.
<AT>
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also called the notification period, which is a period for making it easier for a player to win a role that has been selected by lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). Generally, means for notifying during AT include the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, and the operation timing and operation order of the stop switch, and are also called operation procedures or operation modes.

<Sub-bonus>
A sub-bonus is a type of AT, and is different from the bonuses that can be won by internal lottery (Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, RB, CB, and SB, which will be described later). It is basically the same as an AT, but is characterized by the fact that when a sub-bonus starts, the sub-bonus starting symbol combination is stopped by reel effects, simulated play, or push order, etc. It should be noted that even when simply referred to as "AT," the concept includes sub-bonuses.

<Grouping of choice roles>
When a selected role is won during a non-AT game, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 an effect group number indicating that the selected role has been won, and when a selected role is won during an AT game, the main control means 100 transmits the effect group number and operation procedure information to the sub-control means 1000. In other words, because operation procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during a non-AT game, the sub-control means 1000 is unable to notify the operation procedure. As a result, it is unclear from the sub-control means 1000 side which operation procedure will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during a non-AT game, but because operation procedure information that will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player is transmitted during an AT game, the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device and operation indicator lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. This allows the player to easily recognize the operation procedure and also prevents the operation procedure information from being illegally obtained during a non-AT game.

<Processing related to instruction function>
The processing related to the instruction function is a concept that includes not only AT-related lotteries such as AT transition lotteries, AT additional lotteries, updating of AT termination conditions (addition/subtraction of the AT game count, addition/subtraction of the AT execution notification count), and AT execution (notifying the operation mode), but also processing related to AT state management. The processing related to this instruction function can be executed for a predetermined number of bets for each game state, and if multiple bet numbers are set as specified numbers in a certain game state, the processing is configured to be executed only for one of the bet numbers. For example, if two-coin bets and three-coin bets are possible in the bonus internal state, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed only when playing with a three-coin bet, and the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed when playing with a two-coin bet. In other words, when playing with a two-coin bet, even if a winning combination for the AT lottery is selected, the AT lottery is not executed, and the AT game count is not updated as the game progresses. Furthermore, if a single bonus (SB) or bonus bonus (CB) that ends after one game is exclusively for two-coin bet play, and the game after the SB or CB ends with a two-coin bet or a three-coin bet, if a replay is won on the SB or CB and the number of coins automatically bet is two, the processing related to the instruction function becomes impossible in the game after the SB or CB ends (processing related to the instruction function can be executed with a three-coin bet). Therefore, the number of coins automatically bet when a replay is won on the SB or CB is set to three. This allows the processing related to the instruction function to be executed even in the game after the replay is won on the SB or CB, eliminating a game that is disadvantageous to the player. Note that, as mentioned above, the processing related to the advantageous zone is configured to be executed regardless of the number of coins bet.

<Instruction monitor>
During AT, when reporting information about the operation procedure of the push order role, the operation procedure information may be reported using the number of coins acquired display. Specifically, in the case of push order role A (left, center, right correct), "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role B (left, right, center correct), "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role C (center, left, right correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role D (center, right, left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role E (right, left, center correct), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order role F (right, center, left correct), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With this configuration, players can know the correct button press order by checking the instruction monitor. Furthermore, because the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it can accurately notify players of the correct button press order even if the sub-control board is tampered with.

Also, if the indicator monitor also doubles as the number of coins won display, the lower digits may display the numbers (1-6) mentioned above, and the upper digits may display an identifier "=". In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the number of coins won display is displaying the number of coins won or the push order, so the player's recognition can be unobstructed.

Also, if the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a three-digit seven-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, for push order A (left, center, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order B (left, right, center correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order C (center, left, right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order D (center, right, left correct), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order E (right, left, center correct), "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor; and for push order F (right, center, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. This configuration makes it easier for players to intuitively grasp the push order on the instruction monitor, allowing them to easily grasp the correspondence between the push order and the display on the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is preferably within a favorable zone, and any time after the push order role is selected through an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch, and before the stop switch can be operated. With this configuration, the push order can be notified to the player before they operate the stop switch, preventing them from operating the stop switch with an incorrect push order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)>
The role ratio monitor is a display device that switches between displaying the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio (selectable depending on the specifications of the gaming machine; also called instruction-included role ratio), consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. status ratio every 4,800 ms, and is capable of displaying a four-digit number by using four 7-segment LEDs (with DP). Of the four-digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs, the top two digits are called the identification segment, and the bottom two digits are called the ratio segment.

In terms of the reel ratio, "reel" refers to Type 1 special reels (known as RB), Type 2 special reels (known as CB), and standard reels (known as SB). The "reel ratio" is calculated as the payout during reel operation divided by the total payout multiplied by 100. Payouts during operation of Type 1 special reel continuous operation devices (known as BB) and Type 2 special reel continuous operation devices (known as MB) are also included in "payouts during reel operation," but payouts during regular play during BB and regular play during MB are not included in "payouts during reel operation." Note that "payout" is a term that does not subtract the number of coins inserted, and when the number of coins inserted is calculated, it is referred to as the difference in the number of coins (difference). The combined concept of Type 1 special reel continuous operation devices and Type 2 special reel continuous operation devices is sometimes simply referred to as the reel continuous operation device.

In the continuous feature ratio, "continuous feature" refers to a Type 1 special feature (known as RB), and the "continuous feature ratio" is a ratio calculated by: payout during activation of a Type 1 special feature ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during activation of a Type 1 special feature continuous activation device (known as BB) are also included in "payouts during feature activation," but payouts during regular play during BB are not included in "payouts during feature activation."

In the command-inclusive device ratio, "command-inclusive devices" include payouts from games in which the command function is activated (so-called automatic transmission). The "command-inclusive device ratio" is a ratio calculated by (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated) ÷ total payouts × 100. Here, (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated) does not refer to payouts from games in which the command function is activated and the device is activated, but rather refers to the sum of payouts from games in which the command function is activated and the device is activated. If the game in which the command function is activated is also a game in which the device is activated, the payout for that game is (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated), rather than the sum of the two payouts. Note that if a player operates the stop switch incorrectly during a game in which the automatic transmission is activated, they may not receive the maximum payout; in this case, the calculation is based on the actual payout.

The information displayed in the identification segment on the winning combination monitor is information for identifying which of the following ratios is being displayed: cumulative advantageous zone ratio, cumulative instructed combination ratio, consecutive combination ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, combination ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, cumulative consecutive combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, or cumulative combination status ratio. These are displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", or "5H.", respectively. For example, when "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, and when "6Y." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the consecutive combination ratio for the most recent 6,000 games. The "." displayed on the winning combination monitor refers to decimal points.

Of the information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment allows the calculation results of various ratios to be visually confirmed, and is displayed as a two-digit number using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" will be displayed in the ratio segment. The calculated result will be rounded down to the nearest integer. If the calculation result is 100, "99" will be displayed. If the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment will display "00".

The identification segment flashes if the cumulative number of games played is less than the reference number of games. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and is 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative instructed role ratio, 6,000 games for the consecutive role ratio over the most recent 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the role ratio over the most recent 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive role ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative role ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative role and other status ratio.

The ratio segment blinks when the displayed value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to the various ratios, and is 70 for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 70 for the cumulative indicated feature ratio, 60 for the consecutive feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 70 for the feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, 70 for the cumulative feature ratio, and 50 for the cumulative feature state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment will light up.

To check whether the role ratio monitor is operating normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt process is started. The test pattern is displayed by flashing all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the role ratio monitor. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in flashing mode. In addition to being displayed immediately after power is turned on, the test pattern may also be displayed during setting changes, setting confirmation, or an RWM (RAM) abnormal error.

In the identification segment, when the cumulative number of games played is less than the reference number of games played, when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, and when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment, the segment is displayed in a flashing mode. Specifically, the flashing mode is displayed by alternating between lighting and off every 300 ms, such as lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → off 300 ms → .... In addition, when various ratio information is switched, it starts with lighting, so that the display period of various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and flashing.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role status ratio displayed on the role ratio monitor are configured to switch display contents every 4800 ms, but by setting this 4800 ms to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking, it is possible to configure the display so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit, even if the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor are displayed in blinking mode when they are switched.

By configuring it in this way, the display starts with lighting even when various ratio information switches, so it is possible to continuously display the display without any sense of incongruity due to a shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, the display period for the test pattern after power-on as mentioned above is also set to 4800 ms, so once the test pattern has finished displaying for 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED will turn off, and the next timer interrupt process will turn it on and display information regarding the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instructed role ratio.

Next, we will explain how to control the blinking display on the ratio monitor.

In order to flash the display mode of the role ratio monitor, a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) is provided for managing the time for switching the light on and off. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is a 2-byte memory area, and a process of adding 1 is executed for each timer interrupt process. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. In other words, the value following 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "0" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "1." In this case, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a borrow occurs as a result of calculating "0-299").)

Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "298" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "299." In this case, the carry flag becomes 1 (the result of calculating "298 - 299" is a borrow, so the carry flag becomes 1).

Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching the light on and off is "299" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching the light on and off becomes "0". In this case, the carry flag becomes 0 (the result of calculating "299 - 299" is that no borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0).

As mentioned above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is a value between 0 and 298, the carry flag will be 1; if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is 299, the carry flag will be 0. In other words, the carry flag will be 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag = 0, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is configured to be updated. The blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stores 0) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and when 1 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag = 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, it is possible to have the display mode of the role ratio monitor alternate between a lit state and an off state every 300 ms (blinking display).

The winning ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode when the cumulative number of games played in the identification segment is less than the reference number of games, when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, or when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment. In all other cases, the monitor is displayed in a lit mode without referencing the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, since the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between on and off is updated for each timer interrupt process regardless of whether the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated as needed, and even when switching from not referencing the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) to referencing it, the timing of the light turning on and off and the timing of the various ratio displays can be displayed without any discrepancy.

<Program start processing flow>
The program start process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings related to the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it sets the interrupt mode, sets the main CPU functions, and performs a RAM check process to create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAM are normal; if the conditions are met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal; if the conditions are not met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the status of the setting key switch signal and door open detection switch signal is checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and door open detection switch are on.

If the setting key switch 37 and door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state. If the power failure recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, a first initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process of the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. If the power failure recovery data is not normal or in a recoverable state, a second initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process of the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. After the setting change process, the process proceeds to the game progress main of Figure 9.

If the setting key switch 37 and door open detection switch are not on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power failure recovery data is abnormal or in an unrecoverable state, an unrecoverable error is notified and the process transitions to unrecoverable error processing, which stops game progress on the slot machine PS1. On the other hand, if the power failure recovery data is not abnormal or in an unrecoverable state, the process transitions to the power failure recovery processing of Figure 8. After the power failure recovery processing, the process transitions to the main game progress of Figure 9. Note that after the power failure recovery processing, the state saved when the power failure was detected is restored, so the process does not necessarily start from the beginning of the main game progress.

In addition, when handling an unrecoverable error, interrupts are prohibited and output from the output port (output of sub-control commands, output of excitation signals to the stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the acquired coin count display 27 repeatedly displays (announces) the error.

<Power off processing>
The power-off process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or a power outage occurs, causing a power outage or other interruption in the power supply (also referred to as a power outage), the operating voltage required to operate the slot machine PS1 drops. If the operating voltage falls below a threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power outage and generates a power outage detection signal, which is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, if it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input during the timer interrupt process, the power outage process is executed. Note that the determination of whether the power outage detection signal has been input during the timer interrupt process may be made in a single timer interrupt process, or in multiple timer interrupt processes (two or more times). In other words, when determining whether a power outage has occurred during multiple timer interrupt processes, if it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input during the first interrupt but not during the second interrupt, the power outage process is not executed. This is to prevent the power outage process from being executed in the event of noise or a momentary interruption (when the voltage momentarily drops below the threshold but immediately rises above the threshold).

During power-off processing, output ports are cleared, periodically executed interrupts are prohibited from occurring, and the interrupt prohibit/enable status at the time of power-off is saved. Next, used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. After saving, the power-off processing completed flag, which indicates that power-off processing has been performed, is turned on and checksum data for all RAM areas is calculated and saved. RAM writing is then prohibited and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the saved stack pointer, whether the power-off processing completed flag is set, and whether the checksums for all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, timer interrupt processing is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When the timer interrupt process begins, it compares the necessary data stored in the registers. If a power-off detection signal is received, it executes power-off processing, reads input from various sensors and operation switches, measures various timers (such as timers for measuring freeze periods and timers for measuring wait periods), and controls and updates the reel drive status according to whether each reel is accelerating, rotating at a constant speed, starting to decelerate, decelerating, or stopped. Next, it performs port output processing, which creates and outputs data to be output for each output port (such as excitation signals for the stepping motor and drive signals for the hopper 44), and checks for any abnormalities. Examples of abnormalities include whether the current setting values are normal and whether the operation patterns of the input and output sensors are normal. Next, it outputs external signals, such as bonus signals, ART signals, and security signals, which are output to external systems such as hall computers, and sets (on/off) medal input and medal payout signals.

Next, in the control command transmission process, if a sub-control command has been set, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000, control is performed regarding the lighting of various LEDs, notification data to be sent to the sub-control board, such as the sound of operating the stop switch or the sound of inserting a medal, signals related to performance tests are output, the registers are restored, and the timer interrupt process is terminated by saving the interrupt permission flag on.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command issued when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the results of the internal lottery, a start reel rotation command issued when the reels start accelerating, a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and an all reel stop command issued when the stop switches for stopping the reels are operated.

Furthermore, the timer measurement process may be performed within the timer interrupt process.
In timer measurement, a control process is performed to update information about the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, a process is performed to update (e.g., subtract 1) the value stored in the RWM memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) that monitors (manages) the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) for one game. In addition to the RWM memory area that monitors the minimum game time, the RWM may have memory areas related to multiple timers, such as a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) that monitors (manages) the insertion of game medals using the insertion button, and a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C) that monitors (manages) the output time of an external signal.
In this case, the timer measurement executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in a storage area of the RWM that stores information about the timer (hereinafter also referred to as a timer area), such as a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area B, or a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area C. Furthermore, if a timer measurement is performed when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0", the value stored in the certain timer area is set to "0".

Note that while the control process for updating the information about the timer stored in the RWM was described as subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area, it may also be a process of adding 1 to the value stored in the timer area.

Here, the monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button will be explained.
Monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button is a timer that starts counting from the time the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19, and is a timer that prevents the process of determining whether the next 1 bet switch 19 has been operated from being executed until the value of the timer reaches "0".

For example, under certain circumstances where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., when the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1-bet switch 19), a bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19, and then "20" is stored in timer area B. Thereafter, the timer measurement of the timer interrupt process subtracts "1." Then, when the timer interrupt process has been executed 20 times, the value stored in timer area B becomes "0." Note that if the value stored in timer area B is not "0" (when the value stored in timer area B is any value between "1" and "20"), the game progress main process does not determine whether the 1-bet switch 19 has been operated. In other words, even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in timer area B is not "0," the bet process is not executed. After that, once the value stored in timer area B becomes "0," the bet process can be executed when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

This configuration prevents multiple bet processes from being executed due to a malfunction despite a single operation of the 1 bet switch 19. It also prevents a malicious player from repeatedly pressing the 1 bet switch 19, which would result in multiple bet processes being executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 and commands based on the execution of bet processes being sent consecutively to the sub-control means 1000.

<Power off recovery process>
The power-off recovery process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned on to turn on the power, the main control board 100 executes a power-off recovery process to restore various data to the state it was in before the power was turned off.

The power failure recovery process restores the stack pointer and restores output data related to the sub-control command sent to the sub-control board 1000. It then determines whether the set setting value data is within the normal range. If the determination reveals an abnormality (the value is outside the specified range), it moves on to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the value is normal (the value is within the specified range), it initializes unused RAM areas, activates a periodically executed interrupt, and reads the input port. It then clears the power failure processing completion flag, restores used registers, and restores the interrupt disable/enable state that was in place at the time of the power failure, and terminates the power failure recovery process. Note that when the power failure recovery process is completed, the system returns to the state before the power failure occurred; if it does not return to the normal state (when settings are changed), the main game progress control process is restarted.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing within the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may also be activated after the power-off recovery process of the program start process.

<Main explanation of game progress>
The main control process for game progress executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 references the value of the freeze effect number saved before the previous game, and if the saved freeze effect number corresponds to the number for which a freeze effect should be executed, it executes the freeze effect, but if the saved freeze effect number does not correspond to the number for which a freeze effect should be executed, it proceeds to the next process without executing the freeze effect. It may also be configured not to save the freeze effect number when a freeze effect is not to be executed, in which case it may be configured to determine whether the freeze effect number has been saved, and if not, proceed to the next process.

Next, when a gaming medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (gaming value insertion process). Next, it is determined whether the number of bets that will enable a game to be played has been placed, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has been operated. If it is determined that no bet has been placed, it waits for the insertion of gaming medals, or, if credits have been accumulated, for the operation of the bet switch (if credits have been accumulated). If the number of bets that will enable a game to be played has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), it performs an internal lottery process, and if the start switch 12 has not been operated (the start switch signal is not determined to be on), it waits for the operation of the start switch 12.

In the internal lottery process, a random number for internal lottery is generated and a predetermined calculation process is performed using the obtained internal lottery random number value to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After the winning combination is determined, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and preparations are made so that stop control can be executed even if stop switch operation is accepted immediately after stop switch operation acceptance after reel rotation is permitted.

The types of winning combinations available on the PS1 slot machine can be broadly divided into bonuses, small combinations, and replays.

A bonus is a device that activates in predetermined circumstances. Generally, it activates when the symbol combinations "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" are displayed frozen on the active line in the display window 4. The activation of bonus-related devices changes the number of symbol combinations that result in a winning combination for each set number, and changes the probability of activating the condition device for each winning symbol combination for each set number. Bonuses are divided into RB, BB, CB, MB, and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also known as a first-class special bonus. RB is generally set to end when eight small wins or 12 game results are achieved, and during RB, the winning combination is drawn using an RB medium combination drawing table, which sets the winning probability of a small win higher than the normal combination drawing table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also referred to as a continuous operation device for Type 1 special roles. The end condition for BB is set to the payout of more than a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 269 medals) related to winning a small role, and during BB, a role is drawn using a BB role drawing table, which sets the probability of winning a small role (described below) higher than the normal role drawing table. Note that a BB role drawing table does not need to be set during BB. For example, a BB role drawing table that continuously operates the RB role drawing table described below until the BB end condition is met may be referred to as a BB role drawing table.

CB is an abbreviation for Challenge Bonus, and is also known as a Type 2 special feature. CB can be set to a state in which at least all minor features are won, regardless of the results of the feature lottery. Furthermore, during CB, stop control that differs from normal stop control is performed on predetermined reels. For example, it is possible to control the left reel 8a to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds.

As described above, the CB may be configured so that at least all minor winning combinations are achieved, preventing the display of symbol combinations that would be displayed according to the operating procedure (also known as missed combinations). For example, during the CB, the left reel 8a may be controlled to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds, so that if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific symbol can be displayed on the pay line with any operating timing, but if it stops within 75 milliseconds, a specific symbol cannot be displayed with a specific operating timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device for second-class special features. MB is set to end when, for example, more than 153 medals are paid out for a small prize, when RB is won, or when SB, which will be described later, is won.

SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called a regular bonus. The end condition for SB is set to be the result of one game. During SB, the bonus is drawn using the SB medium bonus lottery table, which sets the probability of winning a small bonus higher than the regular bonus lottery table.

In this embodiment, BB uses a BB mid-role lottery table to draw the winning combination, but this is not limited to this. During BB, the game may be played using a BB general role lottery table in which the winning probability of a small role is set to the same probability as the normal role lottery table and the winning probability of an RB is increased, or an RB mid-role lottery table in which the winning probability of a small role is set higher than the normal role lottery table. Even in this case, the end condition for BB is still set to a payout exceeding a predetermined number of medals for winning a small role. Furthermore, the means that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means.

A minor win is a win in which a symbol combination based on a winning minor win is displayed on a winning line, and when the winning determination process (described below) determines that a win has been achieved, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed on the winning line.

A replay (also known as a replay role) is a role that grants a replay (a game in which the next game can be played by automatic betting without inserting new medals) when a symbol combination based on a winning replay is displayed stopped on an active line and determined to be a winning prize by the winning determination process. A replay cannot be missed in a winning game, so the next game after a winning replay is always a replay.

If the result of the lottery is that the player does not win any of the bonus, small win, or replay roles, it is a loss and the winning process described below will not be carried out. When it is a loss, a symbol combination that does not relate to any role will be displayed on the active line.

Of the roles selected by the role lottery, for BB, RB, and MB, if the symbol combination does not stop and display on an active line in a winning play, the winning flag can be carried over to the next play or later (special role carry-over means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role lottery may be performed using the role lottery table before the winning flag was carried over, or the role lottery may be performed using a carry-over role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag (also referred to as an internal-internal lottery table or internal-internal role lottery table). When using the carry-over role lottery table, if a symbol combination based on the winning BB, RB, or MB stops and displays on an active line, it is determined that the transition conditions for the role lottery table are met, and a transition is made from the carry-over role lottery table to the role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

The winning probability for multiple types of roles is set in the role selection table, and multiple types of role selection tables are provided depending on the game state. For example, there is a BB role selection table used during BB, and an MB role selection table used during MB, etc.

The winning combination table sets single winning combinations, where one type of symbol combination can be displayed stop on an active line, and multiple winning combinations, where multiple symbol combinations can be displayed stop on one or more active lines, according to the results of the winning combination lottery.

For multiple symbol combinations set as overlapping winning roles, all symbol combinations may be set to be able to display one winning role depending on the operation mode, or some symbol combinations may be set to be unable to display a winning role. Among these overlapping winning roles, roles corresponding to some symbol combinations that cannot be displayed are sometimes referred to as control roles.

The role of the control utility is to control the effective line on which the symbols are displayed to differ depending on the type of control utility set as the overlapping winning role, even if the same symbol combination can be displayed on the effective line as a result of multiple role draws.

The winning flag control means turns on the flag corresponding to the winning role when any role is selected as a winning role in the role lottery results. Then, when the player operates all stop switches 13 and the prize-winning process for the winning role is completed, the means turns off the flag corresponding to the winning role.

Furthermore, for the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, a flag is turned on in a winning game, but if the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is not displayed stopped on the active line when all stop switches 13 are operated, the flag is carried over to the next game or later in the on state, the above-mentioned carryover role lottery table is set, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is displayed stopped, completing the winning processing for the winning role, and the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

The role selection table also includes an RT role selection table. RT is an abbreviation for replay time, and refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay in the role selection is different from that of the normal role selection table.

As a specific example of the use of RT, the losing area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a replay to increase the probability of winning a replay, or the replay area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a losing area to decrease the probability of winning a replay.
Furthermore, the normal role lottery table and the replay area may be the same, but the type of replay that is won within the replay area may be different.
The slot machine PS1 is provided with a plurality of RT role lottery tables, and is configured to transition to another RT state when a predetermined transition condition is met for each.

The transition conditions for the RT role lottery table are as follows: Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to a bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop symbol; transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won; transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, or MB of the bonus ends; transition condition 4 is when a specified number of plays have been played since a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop symbol; and transition condition 5 is when a specified number of plays have been played since BB, RB, or MB ends. These transition conditions for the RT role lottery table can be set appropriately depending on the gameplay.

The number of entries refers to the number of winning entries for each lottery result as determined in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means. For example, if the total number of entries is 65,536, the winning probability is calculated by dividing each entry by 65,536. For example, the winning probability for a given lottery result with a number of entries of 4 is 1/16,384.

In addition, the number of replays can be changed when any of transition conditions 1 to 5 in the RT role lottery table described above is met. For example, if the replay probability for RT1 is 1/7.3 and the replay probability for RT2 is changed to 1/1.5 when transitioning from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability for RT2 can be changed to 1/1.5. This reduces the loss of medals by transitioning to a state with a high replay probability, making the game more interesting.

Next, it checks whether the minimum play time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set during the previous game has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if the minimum play time timer value is determined to be 0), a new minimum play time is set. If it is not determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if the minimum play time timer value is not determined to be 0), the value of the minimum play time timer is decremented and then a check is made to see if the minimum play time has elapsed. This minimum play time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, and the main game progress process is configured so that no other processing is executed between the processing to determine the minimum play time and the processing to set the new minimum play time. This prevents the minimum play time from being extended by other processing, allowing gameplay to begin as soon as possible. In other words, it is possible to prevent gameplay from being prolonged without making the player wait.

However, this is not limiting, and the system may be configured to execute other processing as the main game progress processing between the processing for determining the minimum play time and the processing for setting a new minimum play time. In this case, the other processing may be processing for clearing the RWM address, processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other commands with short processing times. These processing times are extremely short, so the user will not notice an extension to the minimum play time. After the new minimum play time is set, processing to prepare for the start of reel spinning is executed.

The reel spin start preparation process initializes the data related to reel stops saved in the previous game, sets the stop table to be used in the current game, requests the output of the start of rotation of all reels, and sets a sub-control command (reel spin start command) that indicates the start of rotation of the reels.

The stop table is set up to correspond to the symbol control number determined by the results of the role lottery conducted by the internal lottery means, and predetermines the reel stop positions corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13.

After the reel spin preparation process is complete, processing related to the freeze effect (for example, the reel effect before the reels start spinning) is executed. The freeze effect involves slightly moving the reels or spinning them in reverse, primarily to indicate the likelihood of a winning combination.

If a freeze effect is not executed, or after a freeze effect has been executed and the execution of that freeze effect has finished, a process to spin the reels (also called reel rotation process, reel rotation start process, or reel rotation start process) is executed. There are four reel rotation states: acceleration state, constant speed rotation state, stop preparation state, and stop state, and the acceleration state is set when the reels are to be rotated. In the acceleration state, a process is executed to gradually rotate the stepping motor using timer interrupt processing.

The acceleration process performed in the acceleration state is the process performed from a state in which the reels are stopped until constant-speed rotation processing is performed. In constant-speed rotation processing, the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt processing. However, if constant-speed rotation processing is suddenly performed while the reels are stopped, the torque will be insufficient and there is a high possibility of step-out. For this reason, acceleration processing is necessary to gradually rotate the reels. Note that in this embodiment, the acceleration process first moves the stepping motor one step after 50 timer interrupt processing, then moves the stepping motor one step after 30 timer interrupt processing, then moves the stepping motor one step after 10 timer interrupt processing, then moves the stepping motor one step after five timer interrupt processing, then moves the stepping motor one step after two timer interrupt processing, and then moves the stepping motor one step after one timer interrupt processing. This then leads to constant-speed rotation processing, in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt processing.

When constant speed rotation processing is being performed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented for each timer interrupt processing to detect rotation failure. Note that the rotation failure detection counter's initial value is set to 0, so it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing. However, if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the rotation failure detection counter's value can be decremented for each timer interrupt processing, and it can be determined that a rotation failure has been detected when it reaches 0.

In addition, when in a constant speed rotation state, the stop switch is permitted to be operated and a wait is made for the stop switch to be operated. When the stop switch is permitted to be operated, the stop switch lamp lights up blue to notify the player that the stop switch is active (when the stop switch is not permitted to be operated, the lamp lights up red). Control of the stop switch lamp illumination may be performed by the main control means 100 or the sub-control means 1000. Furthermore, when executing push order navigation, the stop switch lamp illumination control may be configured to flash, for example, to make it easier for the player to recognize which stop switch to operate.

A command indicating that the reels have started to spin is sent to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives this command, it sets a reel spinning time timer that measures the reel spinning time and starts counting. When the value of the reel spinning time timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), it displays "Please stop the reels" (a reel stop warning image) on the LCD screen to prompt the player to continue spinning the reels. The reel spinning time timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and counts again if there are any reels that are still spinning. In this way, the reel spinning time timer continues to be updated until all reels have stopped.

If the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it will be displayed in front of the push order navigation. This ensures visibility of the reel stop warning image even when the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, clearly prompting the player to operate the stop switch. Also, since there is a risk that the push order navigation may become difficult to see at this time and players may not know which reel to stop, the reel stop warning image may be hidden (or made smaller or moved) by operating a sub-switch or special switch, etc., so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling acceptance of stop switch operation in the game progress main processing, the process of determining whether or not a stop switch operation has been accepted (reel stop acceptance check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. If it is determined that any stop switch has been operated, stop control (also known as slip control) is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch transitions from a constant speed rotation state to a stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel continues to rotate at a constant speed until it reaches the desired stop position. Then, when it reaches the desired stop position, it transitions to a stop state, and all four-phase excitation is turned ON to apply the brakes. Note that slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds of operating the stop switch 13. In this embodiment, when operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, it is possible to pull in symbols up to four symbols ahead.

The target stop position is determined by whether the currently passing symbol number matches the symbol number saved as the stop position, and if they match, all four-phase excitation is turned ON to indicate the target stop position. The currently passing symbol number is determined by the initial symbol number being set the moment the index sensor described above detects the index (when the index signal rises), and then the symbol number following the initial symbol number being set when the timer interrupt process moves one symbol from there.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it checks whether all reels are stopped. If all reels are stopped, it executes the prize determination process and then the prize winning process. If all reels are not stopped, it executes the process of waiting for acceptance of the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. After all reels have stopped, it updates the display contents of the status display monitor and moves on to the advantageous zone clear counter management process. It then executes the game end check process, which updates the RT status, etc., and ends the main series of game progression flows. Note that it is also possible to perform a software random number update process between the start of reel rotation and the acceptance of the stop operation.

The winning determination process is a process that determines whether a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped and displayed on a valid line. It determines whether the stopped symbols determined when the stop switch operation is accepted are abnormal, so it does not determine whether the symbol combination that actually stopped on the valid line has been used. After the winning determination process determines that a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped and displayed on a valid line, winning processing is performed. If the winning determination process does not determine that a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a valid line, processing based on a loss is performed.

Winning processing is the process of awarding a bonus to a player based on the symbol combination that stops on an active line. When a symbol combination based on a minor win is stopped, the winning processing involves paying out medals based on the stopped symbol combination and changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. When a symbol combination based on a replay is stopped, the winning processing involves granting the right to replay and changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. When a symbol combination based on a bonus is stopped, the winning processing involves changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Note that no winning processing is performed in the case of a loss.

However, this is not limited to this. When the result of the winning determination process is a loss, winning processing based on the loss may be performed, and processing may be performed in which no bonus is awarded to the player as a result of the winning processing. Furthermore, winning processing based on a loss may involve transitioning the game state depending on the operation mode at the time of the loss. For example, if all stop switches 13 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence when a loss occurs, the game state may transition to one with a different probability of winning a freeze. Even in the case of an apparent loss due to a missed minor combination, winning processing may be performed by controlling the transition of the game state, such as transitioning to an RT state, without making a payout. Furthermore, bonus-based winning processing may include the payout of medals based on the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed, or the granting of the right to a replay.

The process of transitioning game states involves setting a role selection table according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting reel control according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transitioned to, or a combination of these.

During the winning determination process, once a winning symbol combination is determined, winning symbol combination information (stopped number information) displayed on the active line and role lottery result information are sent to the sub-control board 1000. Meanwhile, upon receiving this information, the sub-control board 1000 can output effects corresponding to the winning symbol combination information and role lottery result information using the display device 32, lamp, or speaker S.

The winning determination process determines whether a win has occurred on all active lines, and if the result of the determination is that multiple symbol combinations based on overlapping winning combinations are displayed on multiple active lines, winning processing is performed for each of the multiple symbol combinations that are displayed.

For example, when a minor winning combination with a payout of 2 coins and a minor winning combination with a payout of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will pay out 12 coins by adding together the payout number based on the minor winning combination set to 2 coins and the payout number based on the minor winning combination set to 10 coins.

An upper limit is set for the number of coins that can be paid out at one time, and if a symbol combination based on multiple minor winning combinations is displayed stopped on an active line and the number of coins that can be paid out exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit will be paid out.

For example, if the upper limit for the number of coins to be paid out is set to 15, and a small win with a payout of 12 coins and a small win with a payout of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will be as follows: if the combined value of the small win with 12 coins and the small win with 10 coins exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit of 15 coins will be paid out.

In this embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for small winning combinations, but medals equal to the number of medals bet may be paid out as part of a winning process based on a replay, or a preset number of medals may be paid out as part of a winning process based on a bonus.

<Advantageous Zone Clear Counter Management Processing>
Among the processes executed by the game progress main in this embodiment, the advantageous zone clear counter management process for managing advantageous zones will be explained based on Figure 11.

Set the advantageous zone clear counter RWM address.

Next, perform a 2-byte subtraction operation.

Next, it determines whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before the subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before the subtraction is 0, it proceeds to a process to determine whether the advantageous zone type is 0 or not, and if the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before the subtraction is not 0, it determines whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. Note that advantageous zone type = 0 means that the zone is not an advantageous zone and is a normal zone, and advantageous zone type = 1 means that it is an advantageous zone.

Next, it determines whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is 0, it proceeds to the RWM initialization process, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is not 0, it proceeds to the process of obtaining the value of the MY counter.

Next, in the process to obtain the MY counter value, the current MY counter value is obtained.

Next, after executing the process to obtain the value of the MY counter, it determines whether the replay activation symbol has stopped and is displayed. If it is determined that the replay activation symbol has stopped and is displayed, it moves on to the process to determine whether the value of the MY counter has exceeded the upper limit (2400). If it is determined that the replay activation symbol has not stopped and is displayed, it moves on to the process to obtain data from the payout number buffer. The data in the payout number buffer is data that indicates the number of coins paid out in the event of a win, or no payout in the event of a loss or a missed minor win (the number of coins paid out is 0).

Next, the process of obtaining data from the payout number buffer obtains the payout number for that game.

Next, the process executes the process of adding the data (OUT number) from the dispensed number buffer obtained to the MY counter.

Next, a process is executed to obtain medal count data. This medal count data corresponds to the number of medals inserted.

Next, the process executes a process to subtract the IN number (number of inserted coins) from the MY counter.

Next, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is less than 0 after subtracting the IN number from the MY counter, the MY counter is set to its initial value and saved in the MY counter. Furthermore, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is not less than 0 after subtracting the IN number from the MY counter, the value obtained by subtracting the IN number from the MY counter is saved in the MY counter. Note that the initial value of the MY counter is 0, and if the value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, it is corrected to 0. Furthermore, whether the value of the MY counter is less than 0 is determined by whether the carry flag is 0. The carry flag is a flag that becomes 1 if the result of the subtraction is a negative value, and 0 if the result of the subtraction is not a negative value. Furthermore, in the case of an addition operation, if the upper limit (65535 for 2 bytes) is exceeded, the flag becomes 1, and if the upper limit is not exceeded, the flag becomes 0.

Next, after saving the MY counter value, a process is executed to determine whether the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400). If the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400), an RWM initialization process is executed and the process moves to the favorable zone type determination process. If the favorable zone type is 0 in the favorable zone type determination process, the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated. If the favorable zone type is not 0, the favorable zone clear counter is set to its initial value (1500) and the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated. Furthermore, if the MY counter value has not exceeded the upper limit (2400) in the process to determine whether the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400), the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated.

The value of the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction is determined to be 0 or not. If the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction is 0 and the advantageous zone type is not 0, this process is carried out when the advantageous zone begins; it is not carried out at any other time. The value 1500 stored in the advantageous zone clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in the advantageous zone, and once a maximum of 1500 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, the normal zone will be set from the next play. This is to prevent addiction, prevent medals from continuing to increase all day, and not excessively stimulate gambling instincts.

The timing for setting the advantageous zone type to 1 is during the advantageous zone transition lottery process, which occurs between the time the start switch is received and the start of reel rotation. The advantageous zone transition lottery process is a process that is performed when the condition device number that is the subject of the lottery is selected, and if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone type is set to 1, and if the advantageous zone transition lottery is not won, the advantageous zone type is set to 0 (normal zone).

The RWM initialization process, which is executed after the MY Counter value exceeds its upper limit, updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function to 0. Parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function include the number of AT games and the game status related to the AT. Updating the advantageous zone type to 0 changes it to a normal zone, which is not an advantageous zone, and if the MY Counter value is 2400 or less, this process ends while maintaining the advantageous zone. Note that if a replay is won in an advantageous zone, the MY Counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY Counter is above 2400 is passed. In the case of a replay, the same number of coins as inserted are automatically bet, so OUT-IN is always 0. However, because there is a possibility that the MY Counter value may be updated at a different time than the normal process due to noise or fraud, a determination is made as to whether the MY Counter has reached its upper limit even during a replay.

Furthermore, the advantageous zone can be terminated at any timing for each gaming machine, in addition to 1,500 plays or exceeding MY2,400. For example, this can occur when the termination lottery is won when a predetermined combination is won, or when a desired number of plays (fewer than 1,500 plays) are performed. When terminating an advantageous zone at any timing, the advantageous zone clear counter is set to 1 before executing the advantageous zone clear counter management process (preferably an AT-related process executed after all reels have stopped). When executing the advantageous zone clear counter management process, the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 before decrementing, and the decrement result of the advantageous zone clear counter is 0, thereby terminating the advantageous zone through the advantageous zone clear counter management process. In other words, by setting the advantageous zone clear counter to 1 and then subtracting 1 from the counter value, the advantageous zone clear counter becomes 0, thereby terminating the advantageous zone. This allows processing within the same module when any desired termination condition is met, without the need for a separate advantageous zone termination module.

In addition, the advantageous zone clear counter subtraction process in the advantageous zone clear counter management process is configured to be executed for any bet number (if multiple specified numbers are set for the gaming machine) and any game state.

<Settings change process>
The setting change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When setting change mode is activated (setting change processing is executed), it determines whether the current setting value is within the normal range, and if it is within the normal range, it acquires the current setting value. If it is outside the normal range, it saves "1" as the setting value and acquires the setting value "1".

After obtaining the setting value, the setting value display data is saved. After saving the setting value display data, the lighting is controlled by dynamic lighting control, which is a timer interrupt process, referencing the setting value display data every five interrupts.

Then, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the start switch 12 has not changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting switch has changed from off to on.

If it is determined that the setting switch has not changed from off to on, it again determines whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the setting switch has changed from off to on, it determines whether the setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is incremented; if the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is set to the initial value (0) and then incremented again. After the set value has been incremented, the updated set value is displayed and processing returns to the step of determining whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, the setting value is confirmed and the system waits until it determines that the setting key switch has changed from on to off. When it determines that the setting key switch has changed from on to off, the system saves the determined setting value in the main control RAM, turns off the setting display LED, and turns on the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 (forming a path for medals to flow down to the hopper 44), thereby ending the setting change mode.

Here, the setting change mode is a means for determining one of the setting values from 1 to 6 (displayed as 1 to 6 setting values). After a setting value is determined, the internal lottery table (also called the role selection table) corresponding to the determined setting value continues to be set until the next time the setting value is changed by the setting change means. Note that a role selection table is provided for each setting value, with different probabilities of determining the result of the internal lottery (probability of winning the role).

When the setting key used to change the settings is rotated by the gaming parlor manager while the slot machine PS1 is powered off, and the slot machine PS1 is powered on with the setting key held in the rotational position where the setting key switch signal is turned on, the setting change means turns on the setting key switch signal in response to the power-on of the slot machine PS1. In this embodiment, the setting key switch signal being turned on refers to a rising edge on (OFF → ON). If the setting key was on before a power outage occurred, the rising edge on is not detected after power-on, so the system is configured not to transition to setting change mode. However, the setting key switch signal being turned on may also be a level on, and the system may be configured to transition to setting change mode if the setting key is on when the power is turned back on, even if it was on before a power outage occurred.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting change enable flag is on, it activates a setting change mode in which the setting values of the slot machine PS1 can be changed.

The setting change possible flag is switched on and off depending on the game status. For example, one possible configuration is to keep the setting change possible flag off from the time the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and to keep the setting change possible flag on at other times. However, this is not the only configuration, and the setting change possible flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game begins or when a specific bonus is in progress, or the setting may be changed in any state by not providing a setting change possible flag.

When the setting change mode is activated, the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off, preventing the start of play by inserting a medal. The setting value data that can be changed in the setting change mode has six levels: "1," "2," "3," "4," "5," and "6." The higher the setting value, the higher the winning combination table with a higher payout rate.

After the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED on the back of the front panel PS2 is lit to indicate that the setting change mode is active. Then, setting value display data for displaying the set setting value data is set, and the credit number display 26 located on the front of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the setting display LED (not shown) located on the back of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are lit to display the setting value. When the setting value data is "1," the setting value display shows "1." When the setting value data is "2," the setting value display shows "2." When the setting value data is "3," the setting value display shows "3." When the setting value data is "4," the setting value display shows "4." When the setting value data is "5," the setting value display shows "5." When the setting value data is "6," the setting value display shows "6."

When the setting value data stored in the setting value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5," if the setting value data is "0," the setting value display will show "1," if the setting value data is "1," if the setting value data is "2," if the setting value data is "2," if the setting value data is "3," if the setting value data is "3," if the setting value data is "4," if the setting value data is "4," and if the setting value data is "5," the setting value display will show "6."

After starting the setting change mode, the system continues to determine whether the sensor signal from the start switch 12 is on. If it determines that the start switch 12 has been operated and the sensor signal from the start switch 12 has turned on, the setting value is determined and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. In other words, if it determines that the sensor signal from the start switch 12 has turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value will not change even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when the sensor signal from the start switch 12 is not determined to be on but the setting switch signal is determined to be on, the setting switch rising edge data is cleared, and a determination is made as to whether the current setting is equal to or greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "6"). If it is determined that the current setting is equal to or greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "6"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data to "1"); if it is determined that the current setting is less than the maximum setting (setting value "1" to "5"), the setting value is incremented to the current setting. Note that when the setting value data has six levels (0 to 5), the setting change mode processing is as follows: a determination is made as to whether the current setting is equal to or greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "5"); if it is determined that the current setting is greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data to "0"); if it is determined that the current setting is less than the maximum setting (setting value "0" to "4"), the setting value is incremented to the current setting.

In addition, when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is determined to be on after the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED may display the setting value in a manner different from that in which the setting can be changed, such as displaying "0" on the setting display LED to indicate that the setting value cannot be changed, or displaying "_X" on the setting display LED (where "X" is the set value after confirmation).

<Gameability using advantageous zones applicable to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the specified number of coins required to start a game is only 3. In other words, a game cannot be started with anything other than 3 coins, and even when a bonus is activated, a game can only be started with 3 coins.

In this embodiment, the active line consists of one line spanning the bottom left reel, the middle of the middle reel, and the bottom right reel. Hereinafter, when a symbol combination stops on an active line, it will be simply referred to as a symbol combination stopping.

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay. Please note that the names and types of symbols are merely examples and may be changed without any problems.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using Figure 12. As shown in Figure 12, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in Figures 13 to 18. The "Winning Symbol/Activation Symbol/Pattern Symbol Name" items in the figures indicate the names of the condition devices corresponding to the symbol combinations. Additionally, the "Specified Number and Game Status" items indicate the bonus awarded when a symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "Type 1 BB" is written in the "Specified Number and Game Status" item, this indicates that a Type 1 BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if "Replay" is written, this indicates that a replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if a number is written, this indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops; and if "-" is written, this indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game status.

In this embodiment, the bonus is equipped with a Type 1 BB, and the end condition is the payout of more than 11 game medals. This Type 1 BB is also of the type in which RB operates continuously, and RB ends when either two wins or two games are met. Once the end condition of RB is met, RB will automatically operate until the end condition of Type 1 BB (payout of more than 11 game medals) is met.

As shown in Figure 13, there are eight possible combinations of Type 1 BB symbols, and the draw rate (probability of symbols related to the symbol combination stopping) for Type 1 BB symbol combinations on each reel is not 100%, so eye-pressing is required on each reel to display Type 1 BB symbol combinations.

In this embodiment, the RT transition begins in non-RT (also referred to as "not inside Type 1 BB"). If a Type 1 BB is won during non-RT and the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of that game) transitions to RT1 (also referred to as "inside Type 1 BB"). If a Type 1 BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and Type 1 BB is activated (also referred to as "in Type 1 BB") from the next game. When Type 1 BB activation ends, the next game transitions to non-RT. Furthermore, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or Type 1 BB activation, non-RT is set when the setting change device's operation ends. Note that in the event of a power outage in which the setting change device is not activated (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB activation state are not cleared, and therefore, when power is restored, the state before the power outage is resumed. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during Type 1 BB and then power is restored, the Type 1 BB operating state will be Type 1 BB and RT1, and if a power outage occurs while the power is restored, the RT state will be RT1.

The conditional devices in this embodiment are explained in Figure 19. In Figure 19, the "Winning Replay" item lists numbers corresponding to the winning numbers. The "Conditional Device" item lists the conditional devices that will be activated. The "Nickname" item lists the simple names of the conditional devices that will be activated. For example, the nickname corresponding to the Replay-H conditional device is "Right Push: Strong-Battle Eye," indicating that the Strong Battle Eye will stop when the right reel is stopped for the first time. The nickname corresponding to the Winning-A1 conditional device is "Push Order Bell Group A 123," indicating that the operation mode of the left reel stopping for the first time, the center reel stopping for the second time, and the right reel stopping for the third time is the correct operation mode (in this case, the operation mode that stops the symbol combination of Winning 52 (a prize with a higher payout number than Winnings 01-02, 09, and 29-31)). The "Components" item lists the symbol combinations corresponding to the conditional devices. For example, if the Replay-A condition device is activated (a win), it is possible to display Replay 01 or Replay 02. Note that a "0" in the "Winning Replay" section corresponds to a loss.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-Type 1 BB period in this embodiment will be explained using Figures 20 to 22. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-Type 1 BB period are: Type 1 BB, Replay -A, Replay -B, Replay -C (+Type 1 BB), Replay -D (+Type 1 BB), Replay -E (+Type 1 BB), Replay -F (+Type 1 BB), Replay -G (+Type 1 BB), Replay -H (+Type 1 BB), Replay -I (+Type 1 BB), Replay -J (+Type 1 BB), Winning -A1, Winning -A2, Winning -A3, Winning -A4, Winning -A5, Winning The prizes are either -A6, Winner -B1, Winner -B2, Winner -B3, Winner -B4, Winner -B5, Winner -B6, Winner -C1, Winner -C2, Winner -C3, Winner -C4, Winner -C5, Winner -C6, Winner -D (+1 type BB), Winner -E (+1 type BB), Winner -F (+1 type BB), Winner -G (+1 type BB), Winner -H (+1 type BB), Winner -I (+1 type BB), Winner -J (+1 type BB), Winner -K (+1 type BB), and there are no losing prizes.

The above-mentioned notation "Replay -C (+Type 1 BB)" indicates that Replay -C and Type 1 BB are won simultaneously, which corresponds to the fact that the names "Bonus Condition Device" and "Winning Replay" are both listed in Figures 20, 21, and 22. The "Internal Lottery" item in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicates whether or not an internal lottery is applicable for each game state, with "○" indicating that an internal lottery is applicable and "×" indicating that an internal lottery is not applicable. The "Advantageous Zone Transition" item in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicates whether or not an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that an advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. In this embodiment, if an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, there is a 100% chance of winning and transitioning to the advantageous zone. Additionally, the items "R1" to "R6" in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicate the number of winning positions for the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, with 65,536 positions allocated for each gaming state. Note that "R1" corresponds to a set value of "1," "R2" corresponds to a set value of "2," "R3" corresponds to a set value of "3," "R4" corresponds to a set value of "4," "R5" corresponds to a set value of "5," and "R6" corresponds to a set value of "6."

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means within Type 1 BB are either Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; there are no losing results.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during Type 1 BB are either Win -K, Win -L, or Loss.

In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone are winning any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; winning Replay-A or Replay-B will not result in transition to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following in the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K, you will be in the advantageous zone from the next play.

In this embodiment, if any of the following is won during the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K, the player will always move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following in the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K, you will be in the advantageous zone from the next play.

In this embodiment, since there are no misses in RT1 (within Type 1 BB), (either a replay role or a winning role is guaranteed to be a winning combination), once you transition to RT1, it is possible to stop the BB symbol combination with some of the operation modes when the push order bell group C (winning role - C1 to C6) is won. The part when the push order bell group C is won is, for example, the middle reel when winning role - C1 is won, or some of the eye-pressing positions of the first stop on the right reel. Furthermore, when WINNING-C1 is won in the advantageous zone, the correct button press sequence (in this case, "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the LCD) is notified, and WINNING 38 stops, and the BB symbol combination does not stop. With this configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by being notified of an operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop. Also, the number of losing buttons during RT1 can be set to 4 (as the minimum winning probability by design is 1/17500 or more), and the BB symbol combination can be configured not to stop for other replay roles or winning roles, so that the BB symbol combination stops only in the event of a loss.

In this embodiment, the game states managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone include the general advantageous zone state, chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and AT, with transitions occurring from the general advantageous zone state to CZ, from CZ to AT, and from AT to the general advantageous zone state or CZ. Furthermore, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal zone is the general normal zone state only, and the game state does not transition until the advantageous zone is entered. Furthermore, the game state flags managed by the main control means in the general advantageous zone state and the general normal zone state may be the same or different.

The normal state is when the internal lottery results in one of the winning numbers - A1 to - C6, and the advantageous winning button sequence is not announced.

CZ is a state that is entered when the internal lottery result under normal circumstances is either WIN-D through WIN-H, and during the CZ, the transition to AT is determined by the results of the internal lottery during the CZ or the lottery at the start of the CZ.

AT is the state you enter when you win the AT lottery during the CZ, and is the state that notifies you of the advantageous operation mode (winning button sequence) when you win any of WIN-A1 to WIN-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone are when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 plays), when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, when initialization processing is performed based on a setting change, or when the RAM clear switch is enabled, and the AT termination conditions and the advantageous zone termination conditions do not match. However, some of the AT termination conditions (such as when the ending is reached or when the number of winning coins exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2300 coins)) may also be used as the advantageous zone termination conditions. Also, a transition to the normal zone may occur when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone. In this case, the decision on whether to end the advantageous zone is made depending on the situation in the advantageous zone when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone.

The CZ is determined by lottery when one of the winning combinations, Win-D through Win-H (hereinafter also referred to as a rare combination), is won, and generally, the less likely the internal lottery result is to win, the more likely it is that a CZ will be won. In this embodiment, the order of likelihood of winning a CZ is Win-G > Win-E > Win-H > Win-F > Win-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after a win. Rather, it starts when the player wins the CZ, transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, and then transitions back to the advantageous zone (the CZ always starts when transitioning to the advantageous zone in RT1). This eliminates the problem of not being able to dispense balls when winning from the CZ to the AT due to a small number of remaining plays in the advantageous zone. This is particularly effective when the net increase in coins (expected number of coins to be won per play, also known as the gradient value) is small. For example, with a net increase of two coins, the maximum number of coins to be won in the advantageous zone is approximately 2,400, so 1,200 plays are required to win 2,400 coins. However, the AT is not always performed in the advantageous zone. Because various play states, such as the normal state and the CZ, transition between these states, the remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone at the start of the AT is often small (e.g., 500 plays). In this case, even after 500 plays, the net increase is only two coins, resulting in the player winning only around 1,000 coins, which makes it difficult to meet the user's expectations. Therefore, by ending the advantageous zone once when a CZ win is made, and then starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous zone, even if the CZ has 100 plays, there are still 1,400 plays remaining in the advantageous zone, creating a sense of anticipation for the user to win 2,400 coins.

The probability of winning the CZ from the second time onwards within the same advantageous zone may also be varied depending on the number of coins won since the advantageous zone began (cumulative number of coins paid out - cumulative number of coins inserted). For example, if a CZ is started when the advantageous zone is entered and the AT is won, one possible mode is to vary the probability of winning the CZ within the remaining advantageous zone after the AT ends depending on whether 50 coins are won in the AT or 1000 coins are won. In this case, the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins may be higher or lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins.

If the probability of winning a CZ after winning 50 coins is made higher than the probability of winning a CZ after winning 1,000 coins, it will be easier to award the next CZ to users who did not win much in the AT, allowing them to play while maintaining a sense of anticipation.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins, since there is little remaining advantageous period after winning 1000 coins (because it is close to the condition for the advantageous period to end, which is 1500 plays or winning 2400 coins), even if the CZ probability is made high, the payout design will not significantly increase gambling spirit, and it can also create a new sense of expectation for the user.

If a player wins the CZ, a congratulatory display such as "Success" or "Victory" is displayed during the game in which the CZ was won, or after a predetermined number of games (which can be set arbitrarily depending on the gaming machine's specifications). This allows the user to understand that some kind of special benefit has been awarded, allowing them to intuitively understand the progress of the game. From the next game onward, a "CZ Preparation" message is displayed on the LCD or a lamp, creating a sense of anticipation for the CZ. When a CZ winning game is in a favorable zone, the "CZ Preparation" state corresponds to the period from the end of the favorable zone until the transition back to the favorable zone in the subsequent normal zone. Because "CZ Preparation" is internally a normal zone, it is a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform AT draws or AT top-ups. However, by lowering the payout rate during CZ Preparation compared to the AT state, balls can be allocated to the AT, creating a wave of payouts. Furthermore, because the CZ Preparation state creates a sense of anticipation for the CZ, lowering the payout rate makes it less likely for users to feel like they have lost out.

In addition, while the advantageous zone ends with the next play after the CZ is won, a predetermined number of plays may be played from the play in which the CZ is won until the advantageous zone ends. In this case, the CZ win is not announced in the play in which the CZ is won, and whether or not the CZ has been won may be determined by effects played a predetermined number of times (so-called premonition effects or consecutive effects). A congratulatory effect is then played when the predetermined number of plays have been played, and the CZ is in preparation from the next play. This is because the advantageous zone lamp is lit during the advantageous zone and turns off when the advantageous zone ends, so whether or not the CZ has been won is not apparent from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp between the play in which the CZ is won and the announcement that the CZ has been won. Note that the advantageous zone may transition from the normal zone during CZ preparation; in this case, since the fact that the CZ is being prepared has already been announced, the result is not revealed in advance by the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal interval, and may be set to a favorable interval. Even in this case, the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a normal interval is relatively higher than the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a favorable interval, and the condition for executing CZ preparation in a favorable interval is that the number of remaining plays in the favorable interval is a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 plays). By configuring it in this way, CZ preparation is executed when there is sufficient remaining play in the favorable interval, so even if the CZ is executed after CZ preparation and the AT is executed as a result, a sufficient feeling of winning can be created. Furthermore, since the normal interval is not used during CZ preparation, it is possible to create a surprise by starting the AT immediately after CZ preparation (information related to the AT is initialized at the end of the favorable interval, so if the normal interval is used during CZ preparation, the CZ will be executed at the start of the favorable interval and the AT cannot start).

Also, when executing the CZ preparation during the advantageous zone described above, whether or not to award an AT may be determined by lottery when one of WIN-D through WIN-H is won during CZ preparation. In this case, the order of rare combinations that are likely to win the AT through the AT lottery may be the same as the order that is likely to win the CZ, or may be slightly different, such as WIN-E > WIN-G > WIN-F > WIN-H > WIN-D. By configuring it in this way, users can expect to win a rare combination even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, to prevent users who win a rare role but do not win the AT from losing their motivation to play, a bonus different from the AT may be awarded. Such a bonus may, for example, be displayed as a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user's terminal, or as a setting suggestion effect that allows the setting value to be determined. The bonus may be more likely to be awarded the closer the number of plays in the advantageous zone is to the aforementioned predetermined number (e.g., 1,500 plays), or when the number of CZ plays is a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 5).

This section explains the process for changing settings in this embodiment.

When the setting change device is started, the RAM initialization process described above is performed at the timing when the setting change device is started or when the setting values are confirmed. If the game state immediately before this RAM initialization process is performed is RT1, the RT1 information is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in Type 1 BB, the information in Type 1 BB is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT.

Furthermore, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in a favorable zone, the information for the favorable zone will be initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will become the normal zone. In other words, the game state during the favorable zone can be the normal state, CZ, or AT, but regardless of the state, when the RAM initialization process is performed, it will transition to the normal zone.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, play will begin in a non-RT, normal zone, but in this embodiment, the CZ will start when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, so after the setting change, the game will be in an advantageous state (a state in which the CZ can be started by transitioning to the advantageous zone without playing to win the CZ).

By configuring it in this way, the setting becomes advantageous after the change, motivating customers to visit the store in the morning and increasing the customer attraction effect.

Furthermore, if an overly advantageous state (a state in which the machine transitions to the CZ after just a few plays) can be established after changing the settings, there is a risk that this could significantly stimulate gambling instincts (the so-called morning mode). For this reason, it is possible to change the contents of the CZ depending on the situation when the machine transitions to the advantageous zone.

In this case, if the RT state of the next game after it has been determined that the game will move to the advantageous zone is RT1, the CZ will be started as this is the basic game flow, and if the RT state of the next game after it has been determined that the game will move to the advantageous zone is non-RT, the CZ will not be started as this is after a setting change. Games that have been determined to move into the advantageous zone include those that win any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K.

In addition, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K overlap with Type 1 BB, so the RT state for the next play after the win will be RT1 and CZ will start, but Winning-A1, Winner - A2, Winner - A3, Winner - A4, Winner - A5, Winner - A6, Winner - B1, Winner - B2, Winner - B3, Winner - B4, Winner - B5, Winner - B6, Winner - C1, Winner - C2, Winner - C3, Winner - C4, Winner - C5, Winner - C6 do not overlap with Type 1 BB, so the next play after winning is non-RT and CZ will not start.

This configuration allows for the possibility of transitioning to a favorable zone even during non-RT, which can curb morning-related specifications such as transitioning to a CZ after just a few plays after changing the settings, thereby reducing the tendency for gambling.

It is also possible to reduce gambling by using a specification that changes the game state managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone by referring to the RT state of the next game when a transition to the advantageous zone has been decided. In this case, an AT may not be performed in an advantageous zone that has transitioned to a non-RT (not inside a Type 1 BB), and an advantageous zone that has transitioned to an RT1 (inside a Type 1 BB) may have the possibility of an AT being performed. With this configuration, if a transition to an advantageous zone occurs in a non-RT after a setting change, no balls can be earned because an AT is not performed, thereby reducing gambling. The condition for ending the advantageous zone in this case may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or may be when a predetermined number of games have been played (for example, 1,500 games).

In addition, the transition of the CZ is controlled by referencing the RT state of the next game after the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won, but this is not limited to this; the transition of the CZ may also be controlled by referencing the condition device in operation for the game after the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won. In this case, when the prize-winning A1 is won while inside a Type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition devices for the Type 1 BB and the prize-winning A1 are in operation. In addition, when the prize-winning A1 is won while not inside a Type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled not to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition device for the prize-winning A1 is in operation.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may also be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may also be the subject of the lottery.

<Gameplay that increases the expected value of game value gained at the start of the advantageous zone>
We will explain the gameplay that can be applied to this embodiment, which increases the expected value of game value gained at the start of the advantageous zone.
In this case, in order to increase the expected value of the game value at the start of the advantageous period, the advantageous period is configured not to end when a predetermined number of games are played. In other words, the advantageous period is configured not to end depending on the number of games played in the advantageous period.

After one advantageous zone has started, if a predetermined number of premonition games have been played in the general advantageous zone state, the next game will transition to a predetermined AT (also referred to as AT1), a predetermined lottery will be held in the AT1, and if the predetermined lottery is won, the AT1 will continue until the number of wins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 (until the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit), and once the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met, the advantageous zone will end and the normal zone will start from the next game.Then, after passing through the normal zone and starting a new advantageous zone, if a predetermined number of premonition games have been played in the general advantageous zone state, the game will transition to AT1, and if the predetermined lottery is won in the AT1, the AT1 will continue until the number of wins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, and once the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met, the advantageous zone will end and the normal zone will start from the next game.
That is, the acquisition of approximately 2,400 gaming value is looped until a predetermined lottery is not won in AT1. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to configure it so that the probability of winning is as high as 50% or more but less than 80%. Furthermore, a minimum guarantee (e.g., 50 AT games or 100 wins) is provided during the execution period of AT1, and even if a predetermined lottery is not won in AT1, AT1 is not immediately terminated but continues until the minimum guaranteed AT is executed. The predetermined lottery may be configured to be executed at the start of AT1, or may be configured to be executed after the minimum guaranteed AT is executed in AT1.

In addition, if a predetermined lottery result is not won in AT1, the game will transition to the general advantageous zone state after the end of AT1 without ending the advantageous zone. If a predetermined role (such as Replay-A, Replay-J, Win-J, etc.) that has a low probability of being won in the role lottery while in the general advantageous zone state (for example, 1/8192, the lowest probability in the role lottery) is won, the advantageous zone will end and the normal zone will begin from the next play. After passing through the normal zone and starting a new advantageous zone, the game will transition to AT1 once a predetermined number of premonition plays have been performed in the general advantageous zone state.

In addition, the general advantageous zone state to which you enter after not winning in a specified lottery in AT1 is configured to have a lower expectation level for the AT than the general advantageous zone state at the start of one advantageous zone.

In addition, the advantageous zone is configured to end when a predetermined role is won in the general advantageous zone state, which is entered after a predetermined lottery is not won in AT1, but it is not limited to this; it may also be configured to execute a predetermined CZ to end the advantageous zone, and end the advantageous zone when a lottery is won during that predetermined CZ.

In addition, the advantageous zone is configured not to end even if a predetermined role is won during AT1 or during the predetermined number of premonition plays immediately after the start of the advantageous zone. This configuration improves the tempo of play when the winning number of 2,400 is looping. Even if a predetermined role is won when a predetermined lottery is won in AT1 and it is confirmed that approximately 2,400 game value will be won, AT1 will not end midway, preventing the player from being disadvantaged. Even if a predetermined role is won when a predetermined effect is being executed in the AT, indicating that a predetermined lottery is won and approximately 2,400 game value will be won, the predetermined effect will not end midway, preventing the player from feeling distrustful. If a predetermined role is won during AT2, which will be described later, the advantageous zone may be configured to end with the play that won the predetermined role, or the advantageous zone may be configured to end after AT2 ends.

In this way, by increasing the expected gain in game value at the start of an advantageous zone, a new type of gameplay can be created, in which the player aims to end the advantageous zone. Furthermore, by requiring a predetermined number of premonition plays from the start of an advantageous zone until the transition to AT1, even if a predetermined lottery is won in AT1, the AT will not continue beyond 2,400 wins, preventing excessive gambling.

In addition, even in the general advantageous zone state to which a player transitions after failing to win a predetermined lottery in AT1, an AT lottery may be held, or a ceiling may be set so that a transition to the AT occurs every time the ceiling number of games (e.g., 1,000 games) has been played (these ATs other than AT1 are collectively referred to as AT2), but it is preferable to configure AT2 so that the predetermined lottery is not held. In this way, by not holding the predetermined lottery in ATs other than AT1, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling and increase anticipation for the predetermined lottery in AT1.

Furthermore, even when the expected gain in gaming value at the start of an advantageous zone is configured to be high in this way, if a transition to an advantageous zone is determined during RT1 (within Type 1 BB) using the method described above, the game will transition to AT1 after a predetermined number of premonition plays have been played since the advantageous zone began, but if a transition to an advantageous zone is determined during a non-RT, the AT will not be executed even after a predetermined number of plays have been played since the advantageous zone began. In other words, it is preferable to configure the game so that the AT will not be executed after a predetermined number of plays have been played since the advantageous zone began in the first advantageous zone after a setting change. In this way, by configuring the game so that a transition to an advantageous zone during RT1 is relatively more advantageous than a transition to an advantageous zone during a non-RT, it is possible to suppress morning-related specifications.

Furthermore, if a specific number of games (e.g., 5,000 games) have been played without one advantageous period ending, the system may be configured to transition to a specific state in which the design value of the payout rate is a specific value (a value greater than 100% but not greater than 115%) from the next game until the end of that advantageous period. Note that the specific number of games can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to set it to the number of games that can be played within the gaming facility's business hours in one day.

Furthermore, in order to set the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state to a predetermined value, 1) it may be configured to transition to AT2 every time a predetermined number of games (e.g., 100 games) are played in the general advantageous zone state, and to always end AT2 after a specific number of games (e.g., 50 games); or 2) it may be configured to provide multiple scenarios in which the number of games to transition to AT2 and the number of balls won in AT2 after the transition are predetermined so that the payout rate becomes a predetermined value, and to have the game proceed according to one of the scenarios.

By configuring it in this way, players can be motivated to continue playing even in unfavorable situations, such as when one advantageous period continues for a long period of time.

In addition, in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone may be configured not to end even if a predetermined role is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value from being excessively advantageous to the player.

In addition, even in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone may be configured to end if a predetermined combination is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation when a predetermined combination is won.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a given state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be designed to be the same regardless of the set value. By doing this, in a given state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, stable gameplay can be provided where there is no advantage or disadvantage depending on the set value.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured so that the higher the set value, the higher the value becomes, such as set value 1 < set value 2 < ... < set value 6. By doing this, the higher the set value, the sooner the advantageous zone can end when transitioning to a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value in one advantageous zone, thereby hastening the transition to a state where the expected value of game value obtained is high.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured to be higher than the lowest setting value (setting value 1 in this embodiment) and lower than the highest setting value (setting value 6 in this embodiment). By configuring it in this way, even if a predetermined lottery is not won during AT1 in one advantageous zone, it is possible to continue playing, thereby increasing the significance of aiming for a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, while also not losing the significance of playing at the highest setting value.

<Control for dealing with power interruption while various switches are pressed according to this embodiment>
When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has finished, no three bets have been made (including situations where no automatic bet has been made), and the number of credits stored is equal to or greater than the number that allows for a three-bet (for example, the number of credits is three or more when no bets have been made, or the number of credits is two or more when one bet has been made) (hereinafter referred to as the MAX bet possible state), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, the number of bets is stored as three, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off).

In addition, not only when the front panel PS2 is closed, but also when the front panel PS2 is open, if a game has ended, no three bets have been made (including when no automatic bets have been made), and the number of credits stored is equal to or greater than the number that allows for a three-bet (for example, the number of credits is three or more when no bets have been made, or the number of credits is two or more when one bet has been made), when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX BET process is executed, three is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are illuminated (before the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are off). Unless otherwise specified below, the front panel PS2 is closed when the power is turned on, but the device may be configured to behave similarly even when the front panel PS2 is open.

The MAX bet available state includes a state where no bets have been made, a state where 1 bet has been made, and a state where 2 bets have been made. When the MAX bet switch 18 is operated and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps are newly lit, this is the MAX bet available state where no bets have been made. In the MAX bet available state where 1 bet has been made, the 2 bet lamp and 3 bet lamps are newly lit when the 1 bet lamp is already lit, and in the MAX bet available state where 2 bets have been made, the 1 bet lamp and 2 bet lamps are already lit and the 3 bet lamp is newly lit.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible, the MAX bet lamp is lit, notifying the player that operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. When the MAX bet lamp is lit in the MAX bet possible state, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor that detects the MAX bet switch 18 changes from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp goes out. In other words, the MAX bet lamp goes out even while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor for the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the MAX BET switch 18 is in a MAX BET enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the MAX BET process will not be executed. Also, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a MAX BET process by pressing the MAX BET switch 18 again. In other words, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX BET switch is on), the MAX BET switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX BET process cannot be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid by lighting it in a certain manner. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid can place a MAX BET (perform MAX BET processing) by temporarily releasing the MAX BET switch 18 that they had pressed (after the sensor for the MAX BET switch 18 changes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX BET switch 18 again (the sensor for the MAX BET switch 18 changes from OFF to ON).

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain depressed, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, when a power outage occurs while the MAX bet is enabled, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again (the sensor that detects the 1 bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1 bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will indicate that betting is possible and suggest that the 1 BET switch 19 can be operated. Even in such a case, the operation of the 1 BET switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs in the MAX BET enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, the MAX BET switch 18 may be pressed, and if the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET process may be executed. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may be on or off after power is turned on. If the MAX BET lamp is on after power is turned on, this indicates that the 1 BET switch 19 is operable, and operating the 1 BET switch 19 changes the state from 3 BET to 1 BET and returns the difference of "2" to the credits. (If the difference cannot be returned to credits in a 3 BET state and the number of credits is 50, operating the 1 BET switch 19 does not change the state to 1 BET, and the 3 BET state remains, so the MAX BET lamp does not light up (it is off) after power is turned on.) If the MAX BET lamp is off after power is turned on, this can indicate that the MAX BET process has been executed. Additionally, whether the MAX BET lamp is on or off after power-on, three bet sounds (three one-bet sounds) are output when power is turned on, making it possible to notify the user that the MAX BET process has been executed.

Next, when the MAX BET switch 19 is operated (pressed) while the MAX BET is enabled (no bets have been placed), 1 is stored as the bet number and the 1 BET lamp lights up. Also, since operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is still valid, the MAX BET lamp also lights up.

In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX BET is possible (no bets have been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor for the 1 BET switch 19 remains ON), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the 1 BET process will not be executed. Also, because the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a 1 BET process by pressing the 1 BET switch 19 again.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp indicates that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that operation of the MAX BET switch 18 or 1 bet switch 19 is valid can perform a 1 bet or MAX bet processing by releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that they had pressed (after the sensor for the 1 bet switch 19 changes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX BET switch 18 again (when the sensor for the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON) without releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that they had pressed, thereby performing a 1 bet or MAX bet processing.

In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX bet is possible (no bets have been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will indicate that betting is possible, suggesting that the MAX BET switch 18 is operable. Even in such a case, the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid, so the game can continue.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs in the MAX BET enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the 1 BET process may be executed. In this case, the MAX BET lamp lights up after power is turned on, indicating that the MAX BET switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated, the 1 BET state changes from the 1 BET state to the 3 BET state. Also, by outputting a 1 BET sound when power is turned on, it is possible to notify that the 1 BET process has been executed.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (no bet has been placed), if a power outage occurs, the operating voltage drops below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case whether the front panel PS2 is not open or is already open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, the 1 bet process can be executed. Furthermore, when the gaming machine is in a state where a MAX bet is possible (no bet has been placed), if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage drops below the threshold, making it unable to operate, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case when the front panel PS2 is not open or when it is already open), if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 and operating (pressing) the MAX bet switch 18 again. In this case, even if the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, the 1 bet sound or the 3 bet sound may not be output. Alternatively, when the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, 3 bets are made and the front panel PS2 is open, when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed) the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins, but the start sound may not be output.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 was valid.

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain depressed, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, by enabling 1 bet processing using the 1 bet switch 19 even when the front panel PS2 is open, it becomes possible to check whether 1 bet processing is possible normally in conjunction with the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, checking settings or setting the administrator menu). Furthermore, since playing at an arcade is not normal when the front panel PS2 is open, deliberately not outputting the 1 bet sound makes it possible to let the player know that something is not normal.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs when the maximum bet is possible (no bets have been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, the maximum bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be when the front panel PS2 is not open or when it is already open), and if the power is turned on while the front panel PS2 is open and the maximum bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be when the power outage recovery process is executed), the maximum bet lamp will not light up, the maximum bet process will not be executed, and even if the one bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the one bet process will not be executed; and thereafter, if the front panel PS2 is closed (the closure is detected) while the maximum bet switch 18 is still being operated (pressed), the maximum bet lamp will light up, and when the one bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the one bet process will become possible.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and by not lighting the MAX BET lamp, it is possible to make the player aware that they cannot continue playing. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the MAX BET switch 18 continues to be operated (pressed), bet operation with the 1 BET switch 19 is enabled, making it possible to minimize disruption to game progress.

In addition, when a power outage occurs while the MAX bet is enabled, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are still pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is still being pressed and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed. Similarly, when a power outage occurs in the MAX bet enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the 1 bet process will be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 and 1 BET switch 19 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18 and 1 BET switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid. Even in such cases, the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 and 1 BET switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has finished, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and a normal effect is being displayed (an effect other than continuous effects or AT effects) or a demo screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as the menu screen displayable state), if the sub switch 20 is operated (pressed) (the sensor that detects the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), the menu screen display process is executed and the menu screen is displayed on the display device 32.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the menu screen is displayable, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the sub switch 20 remains ON), the sub switch lamp will light up and the menu screen will not be displayed.

As a result, even if the sub switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional menu screen will not be displayed, and the lighting of the sub switch lamp will indicate that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the sub switch 20 is valid can release the sub switch 20 that they had pressed (after the sensor for the sub switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then press the sub switch 20 again (the sensor for the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), thereby displaying the menu screen.

Also, in a state where the menu screen can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the sub switch lamp may light up and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it can be indicated that the confirmation operations for each item on the menu screen were valid.

Furthermore, when a power outage occurs while the gaming machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and the menu screen can be displayed, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up, the MAX BET process will not be executed, the sub switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed. Furthermore, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new MAX BET process by pressing the MAX BET switch 18. In other words, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX BET switch is on), the MAX BET switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX BET process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent unintentional bets from being made and the menu screen from being displayed, even if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage. Even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp's illumination mode accurately indicates that the MAX BET switch 18 has been operated, and the sub switch lamp's illumination mode indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated.

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain depressed, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

Also, when a power outage occurs while the gaming machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and the menu screen can be displayed, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may light up, the MAX BET process may not be executed, the sub switch lamp may light up, and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen may be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and the sub switch lamp may light up, indicating that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen was valid. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may remain lit even after the menu screen is displayed, indicating that the MAX BET process may be executed.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, a game has finished, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and the number of credits is one or more (hereinafter referred to as the settlement-enabled state), operating (pressing) the settlement switch executes the settlement process and the medals stored in the credits are paid out to the tray 28.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the settlement is possible, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and the gaming machine to become inoperable, and the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON), and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (the settlement switch sensor is ON and the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the settlement process will not be executed. Furthermore, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is being pressed, the MAX BET process will not be executed.

This means that even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and the lighting of the MAX BET lamp will notify the player that medals remain in the credits, preventing the player from leaving the seat with credits remaining.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the settlement is possible, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the settlement process will not be executed, but if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX BET process will be executed.

This means that even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and since operation of the MAX BET switch is valid, the progress of the game will not be hindered as much as possible, so the enjoyment of the game will not be diminished.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the settlement is possible, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may light up and the settlement process may be executed.

This means that, for example, if the power is turned on before an amusement center opens, if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being operated (such as with a hand on the settlement switch), the settlement process can be carried out immediately after the power is turned on, simplifying the power-on process before opening and the settlement process for any remaining medals on the credit.

In addition, when a power outage occurs in a settlement-enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the lamp on the sub-switch 20 will light up and operation of the sub-switch 20 will be valid, regardless of whether the settlement process is being executed or not (the menu screen can be displayed by accepting operation of the sub-switch 20).

This means that even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage, for example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating sub-switch 20. On the menu screen, information useful for playing, such as checking game history and adjusting volume, can be viewed or changed. Furthermore, by enabling all operations related to game progress at this time, all gameplay operations other than settlement can be performed. The settlement process is only used at the end of play, and since the player will not be at a disadvantage even if the settlement process is not performed, the number of inserted medals can be adjusted, making it possible to carry out the process without interfering with game progress as much as possible.

In addition, when a power outage occurs while the machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and settlement is enabled, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the MAX BET process and settlement process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX BET switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is still being pressed and the MAX BET switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX BET process can be executed; and if the settlement switch is released while the MAX BET switch 18 is still being pressed and the settlement switch is still being operated (pressed) again, the settlement process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed and settlement processing even if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch) when power is turned on after a power outage. Furthermore, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp accurately indicates that medals remain in the credits and that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, play has ended, and three bets have been made (including when replay is activated) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotation enabled state), operating (pressing) the start switch 12 executes the reel rotation process, causing each reel to spin. Note that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum play time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the start switch 12 is pressed and then power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp will light up, but none of the reels will spin.

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet. Furthermore, even in such cases, the start lamp's lighting pattern can accurately indicate that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

Furthermore, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light up and none of the reels may spin. In such a case, it is preferable that the start lamp light up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 turns off).

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet.Furthermore, by not lighting the start lamp in such a case, the player can be made aware that the reels will not spin until they have finished operating the start switch 12, and once the operation of the start switch 12 is finished, the start lamp will light up, accurately notifying the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are rotatable, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all of the reels may rotate.

As a result, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and the start switch 12 is operated before the operating voltage rises above the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is operated (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all reels will spin after the power is turned on. This means that the game can proceed (all reels will spin) regardless of when the player operates the start switch 12, reducing the player's effort and improving the tempo of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, all reels are spinning, and the stop switch 13 is enabled to accept operation (hereinafter referred to as the reel stoppable state), when a stop switch 13 is operated (pressed) (when any of the sensors detecting the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, or right stop switch 13c changes from OFF to ON), a stop control process is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to a state in which all reels are spinning; it can also be referred to as the reel stoppable state even when only one reel is spinning.

When the reels can be stopped, the LED that makes up the stop switch 13 lights up to indicate that it is enabled. When the reels cannot be stopped even when the stop switch 13 is operated, the LED that makes up the stop switch 13 lights up to indicate that it is disabled.

Here, the state in which the reels cannot be stopped may be a state in which the stop switch 13 is not accepted even though the reels are rotating (such as when a rotation failure is being detected or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated), or a state in which the reels are not rotating (such as when all reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated when the left reel is stopped).

Furthermore, the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is enabled is when it lights up in white or red, etc., and the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is disabled is when it is unlit (off) or when it lights up in a color (e.g., blue) different from the lighting color indicating that it is enabled.

Furthermore, when the reels are in a stoppable state and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the left stop switch 13a is pressed and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor for the left stop switch 13a remains ON), the stop control process will not be executed for the left reel. Furthermore, if the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that makes up the stop switch 13 will light up, indicating that it is disabled.

This means that, for example, if the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch that corresponds to the final stop operation, and a power outage occurs while the left reel is in a stoppable state, and the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on, the left reel will not be stopped by the operation of the left stop switch 13a, preventing players from suffering disadvantages such as missing out on minor winning combinations that require careful timing. It also makes it possible to prevent the stop switch 13 from accepting operations in a different order from the correct order when an internal lottery result (the so-called "push order role") is won, in which the order in which the buttons are pressed stops to produce a symbol combination advantageous to the player.

Also, in a situation where the reels are in a stoppable state and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the left stop switch 13a is pressed and power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), a stop control process may be executed for the left reel. Even in this case, if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 will light up, indicating that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, if a power outage occurs during gameplay, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and the left stop switch 13a is pressed between then exceeding the threshold and the power being automatically turned on, and the power is then automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the left reel will stop after the power is turned on. This means that the game can continue (the corresponding reel will stop) regardless of when the player presses the stop switch 13, reducing the player's effort and improving the game tempo. Furthermore, by configuring the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that was pressed after power was turned on to stop even if the reel was accelerating, it is possible to stop it closer to the timing that the player originally intended. However, if multiple stop switches 13 are pressed after power was turned on, none of the reels will stop.

<Control for Responding to Power Outage During Slip Control According to This Embodiment>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, if the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, the reel rotates from the acceptance position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control), and the reel stops when it reaches the stop position. If the power is cut off during this slip control, the slip control cannot be executed, and the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is performed based on the determined stop position. Therefore, regardless of whether the reels are actually stopped or not, if it is determined that a small win has been won based on the stop position, medals will be paid out based on the small win.

For this reason, in a game in which a small win is won through the internal lottery process, power-off processing is executed during slip control when operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small win can be stopped, and even if the symbol corresponding to the small win does not stop on an active line after power is restored, the winning determination processing after all reels have stopped determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the small win has stopped, and medals are paid out according to the symbol combination that stopped.

This is for the following reason. While this has the effect of preventing situations where a player is unable to receive a medal payout even when they perform a stop operation at the timing when they should receive a medal payout, it also creates the problem of not being able to recognize which symbol combination the medal payout is based on. To solve this problem, in a game in which a small winning combination is won through internal lottery processing, power-off processing is executed during slip control (from the time the stop switch 13 is operated until the end of slip control) when operation is received at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination can be stopped. After power is restored, the reels are rotated to detect the index, and based on the detected index information, the reels are rotated to the stop position and then controlled to stop at the stop position, after which the medals are paid out.

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs during slip control, the reels will rotate to the intended stop position again after power is restored, allowing the player to visually see which symbol combination has stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, if a power cutoff process is performed during slippage control, and an index is detected during the re-spin process after power is restored, the reel will move to the planned stopping position even if the same symbol is present during the movement to the planned stopping position. If the reel stops on the same symbol just before the planned stopping position, it may display a stop prohibition signal that will prevent the reel from stopping during play. Therefore, a process is required to determine whether or not a stop is prohibited, but the reel is designed to move to the planned position to reduce the processing load during the re-spin process.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and when the power is restored and the re-spin processing is performed, acceleration processing and constant speed processing are executed in the same way as the normal reel spin start processing. However, this is not limited to this, and acceleration processing and constant speed processing that differ from the normal processing may also be executed. For example, possible modes include a shorter acceleration time, a longer acceleration time, a slower constant speed spinning speed, or a faster constant speed spinning speed. By changing the acceleration mode or constant speed mode from the normal mode in this way, the player can be made aware that the spinning is different from the normal mode.

Also, if the reel rotates to the same position as the stop acceptance position while rotating at a constant speed during re-spinning, the stop operation is accepted as in normal rotation processing, and slip control is initiated. Once the reel rotates to the planned stop position, a full-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (a four-phase excitation signal is output in the case of a four-phase stepping motor), stopping the re-spinning reel.

In addition, if power is cut off during slip control and the re-spin process is underway after power is restored, one possible method would be to let the player know that the re-spin is in progress by displaying "Re-spinning" on the LCD screen, outputting a voice message saying "Re-spinning," or displaying an error message on the error indicator. This would allow the player to recognize that the re-spin is not normal.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, a flag indicating that slip control has not been completed is stored in a specified memory area, and when power is turned on, the specified memory area is checked, and if the flag is set, re-spin processing is executed. This flag is initialized when the re-spin processing is executed and the machine stops, so that re-spin processing is not executed when power is turned on normally. The flag indicating that slip control has not been completed may be an error flag or a game status flag.

Furthermore, if a power cutoff process is performed during slip control, the re-rotation process may be performed automatically after power is restored, or an error may occur after power is restored and the error is released using a reset switch before the re-rotation process is performed. Either mode is applicable to the re-rotation process in the following embodiments.

In addition, if power-off processing is performed during slip control, and during re-rotation processing after power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and constant speed, or during constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the above-mentioned 180), acceleration processing is performed again. Possible causes of rotation failure in this case include holding the reel by hand, loss of synchronism due to a motor malfunction, or deterioration of components over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized during the initialization process when the power is turned on, and begins updating (counting) as the re-spin process is executed. Then, after the first index is detected after power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter begins again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after the first index is detected in this way, the reel can be stopped to the stop position without detecting a rotation failure, even if the position where it stops due to the power-off process is the position immediately after the index has passed, and the stop position is the position immediately before the index has passed. In other words, the reel rotates approximately two revolutions from when power is turned on until it stops, but this is not determined to be a rotation failure.

Note that while the rotation failure detection counter is initialized when the power is turned on, it is not limited to this timing. The rotation failure detection counter may also be initialized when the stop switch 13 is received, or when the reel enters a constant speed state.

In this way, power-off processing is performed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during the re-rotation processing after power is restored. This prevents the stop position from shifting due to step-out or the like even during re-rotation, making it possible to stop the motor at the planned stop position. Furthermore, because rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not performed if step-out or the like occurs during normal slip control.

Next, if a power-off process is executed during slip control and an error (recoverable error) is detected during the re-spin process after power is restored, an error notification will be issued after the re-spin process is completed. The errors detected at this time include medal retention errors, medal backflow errors, medal passage time errors, hopper retention errors, hopper empty errors, abnormality detection errors, door open errors, and harness disconnection errors. In addition to error codes displayed on the number of acquired coins display 27, error notifications can also be issued via an LCD screen, a speaker, or by lighting up the top or side performance lamps or performance switch lamps in a predetermined color (for example, a highly visible, eye-catching color such as red or blue). Error notifications can be issued using only one error notification, or a combination of multiple error notifications.

In this way, by issuing an error notification after the re-spin process has finished, it becomes easier for players and amusement facility personnel to recognize whether the notification is about a re-spin or an error. If a re-spin notification is issued during a re-spin, the notification is terminated after the re-spin has finished and switched to an error notification. Note that no error notifications are issued during a re-spin, and no notifications related to a re-spin that are not error notifications are issued.

The error modes during the re-spin process described above are not limited to these, and only some errors may be detected (for example, hopper accumulation errors may be detected but medal accumulation errors may not be detected). The error notification mode may be such that after an error is detected, the error is notified on the number of coins acquired display 27, and when the re-spin process is completed and the reels have stopped, the error is notified on the LCD or speaker, or the error is notified on the number of coins acquired display 27, LCD or speaker after an error is detected.

Next, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and during the re-spin processing after power is restored, the lamp on the stop switch 13 is disabled, so that the corresponding reel will not stop even if the stop switch 13 is operated.

When the power is turned on, the reels will rotate not only when power is restored after a power outage during slip control, but also when power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation. When power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation, the reels can be stopped, and the illumination status of the lamp on the stop switch 13 is valid. Therefore, when the reels rotate when power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel restart process is in progress or normal reel rotation by checking the illumination status of the lamp on the stop switch 13.

Another possible situation in which the reels may spin when the power is turned on is when the power is restored after being turned off while the reels are frozen. There are two types of freezes in which the reels spin: a pseudo-game in which temporary stopping is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and a reel effect in which the reels do not stop spinning even when the stop switch 13 is operated.

During simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 is in the active state, and when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 is in the active state. Therefore, when the reels start to spin after the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reels are in the process of re-spinning or are spinning normally by checking the light on the stop switch 13.

During reel performance, the illumination mode of the stop switch 13 lamp is disabled, and when power is restored after a power outage during reel performance, the illumination mode of the stop switch 13 lamp is disabled. Therefore, when the reels are rotating after power is turned on, it is not possible to determine whether reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress based on the illumination mode of the stop switch 13 lamp. In this case, however, it is possible to determine this by checking a display device such as an LCD or error display. Note that even if the illumination mode of the stop switch lamp is disabled during reel performance, if the operation of other main system switches (switches managed by the main control means 100) is enabled, the illumination mode of the lamps of the other main system switches is enabled. Therefore, by checking the illumination mode of the lamps of the other main system switches, it is possible to determine whether reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress.

Furthermore, when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play or reel presentation, the reels may not be rotated. In this case, the reels will not spin when power is restored, so it is easy to determine whether or not a re-spin process is in progress by the way the reels are spinning.

Next, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during the restart processing after power is restored, the motor will rotate until the index is detected after power is restored, and then move to the scheduled stop position again and stop. Note that if power-off processing is executed just before the index is detected, and the index is not detected during acceleration after power is restored, the motor will rotate again until the index is detected, which can also be said to be rotation until the index is detected.

In this way, the re-spin process can be executed even if power is restored after a power outage during the re-spin process, making it possible to display the stopped symbols to the player even in unstable situations where multiple power outages may occur.

Here, the timing at which power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during re-rotation processing after power is restored can be either before the index is detected during the re-rotation processing or after the index is detected during the re-rotation processing.

<Pattern 1>
If power-off processing is executed during slip control and the timing for executing power-off processing again during re-rotation processing after power is restored is before the index is detected during the re-rotation processing, one possible mode is to rotate the motor until the index is detected during the second re-rotation processing after power is restored, and then rotate it to the planned stop position and stop it.

In this case, the index is not detected during the first re-spin process and the reference pattern position is not stored, so the second re-spin process determines that the reference pattern position has not been stored and performs another rotation to detect the index, allowing the reel to stop at the planned stopping position.

<Pattern 2-1>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the timing is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process (as long as the sensor detects the index, and this also includes the timing of the moment the sensor detects the index; the same applies hereinafter), it is possible to consider a mode in which the rotation is rotated to the planned stopping position based on the reference pattern position of the index detected before the power was cut off after the power is restored and then stopped.

In this case, since the index is detected during the first re-spin process, the reel can stop at the planned stopping position based on the stored reference symbol position, thereby shortening the time until gameplay can be resumed by the time it takes to detect the index.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-1, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-spin process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (until the output of four-phase excitation), even if the rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position when the power-off process is executed, or even if the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, the index will not be detected again after power is restored and the re-spin process or stop control will be executed based on the stored reference symbol position.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same restart process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, which allows for faster programming without complicating the process.

<Pattern 2-2>
Furthermore, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and the timing for power-off processing to be executed again during the re-rotation processing after power is restored is after an index is detected during the re-rotation processing, it is possible to detect the index again after power is restored, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, taking into account the possibility that the reel may have moved between the second power outage and power restoration, the reel will be rotated again until the index is detected again, allowing it to be rotated more accurately to the intended stopping position.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-2, if a power-off process is executed between the time the index is detected during the first re-rotation process and the time the symbol rotates to the planned stop position and the brake is applied (until four-phase excitation is output), then even if the symbol has not yet rotated to the stop acceptance position when the power-off process is executed, or has rotated to the stop acceptance position, the re-rotation process will be executed to detect the index again after power is restored, and the symbol will move to the planned stop position and stop there.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same restart process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, which allows for faster programming without complicating the process.

<Pattern 2-3>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slippage control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has not rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process or stop control is executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored, and if the power-off process is executed during slippage control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process to detect the index again after the power is restored is executed, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the initial power-off process can be precisely controlled after the reference power supply is restored, making it possible to execute appropriate processing according to the circumstances under which the power-off process was executed.

<Control of the performance mode using the performance switch according to this embodiment>
An example of an effect using a performance switch (sometimes referred to as a push button effect) will be explained using Figure 23. Figure 23 shows the process of an effect in which the performance switch is operated through the operation of the start switch 12, the left stop switch 13a, the middle stop switch 13b, and the right stop switch 13c, and then the performance switch is operated. Also, the "PUSH" mark in Figure 23 represents the performance switch (however, the "PUSH" mark at the top of the middle and bottom diagrams in Figure 23 is displayed on the LCD).

In the upper left diagram of Figure 23, the LCD screen displays the effect "Win at rock-paper-scissors!!" which is executed when the start switch 12 to start the game is operated (more specifically, when a start switch acceptance command or a reel rotation start command is received from the main control means 100). At this point, operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the top-middle diagram of Figure 23, the LCD screen displays the "Ta-da!" effect, which is executed based on the operation of the left stop switch 13a to stop the left reel (more specifically, the receipt of a left stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the upper right diagram of Figure 23, the LCD screen displays the "Keeeee!" effect, which is executed based on the operation of the center stop switch 13b to stop the center reel (more specifically, the receipt of a center stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is unlit.

Next, in the bottom left diagram of Figure 23, the LCD screen displays the "Pop!" effect, which is executed based on the operation of the right stop switch 13c to stop the right reel (more specifically, the receipt of a right stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23, an image of a switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the effect switch image, operation prompt image, or operation prompt effect) that imitates the effect switch that is executed when all reels have stopped (more specifically, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control means 100) is displayed on the LCD. Also, the "Pop!" effect that appears when the right stop switch 13c, which is the third stop, is operated is displayed dimly (with reduced brightness). At this time, operation of the effect switch is valid, so the effect switch is lit. When displaying an image dimly, in addition to reducing the brightness, it is also possible to reduce the brightness or to overlay a gray translucent display on the image. In any case, displaying an image dimly can be said to reduce visibility.

Next, in the image on the bottom right of Figure 23, an image that reads "Victory!" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation response image or operation response effect) is displayed on the LCD screen when the effect switch is operated (more specifically, when an input signal related to the effect switch is input to the input port). At this time, the operation of the effect switch is invalid, so the effect switch is unlit.

As shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23, when a special effect switch image is displayed on the LCD screen to encourage the player to operate the special effect switch, the special effect switch image is made larger than the actual size of the switch. By displaying it in this manner, the special effect switch can be effectively displayed on the LCD screen where the player is paying close attention, making it possible to intuitively encourage the player to operate the special effect switch.

The effect switch image also displays an image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an illumination mode image) that shows the illumination mode of the effect switch. When the effect switch is active, the effect switch lamp is illuminated (does not blink), and the illumination mode image is displayed as a blinking mode in which the lamp turns on and off repeatedly at a predetermined interval. With this configuration, the effect switch image repeatedly becomes brighter and darker, making the effect switch image stand out and effectively encouraging the user to operate the effect switch.

In addition, when the effect switch is enabled, the effect switch lamp is lit in a flashing pattern that repeatedly turns on and off at a specific cycle, and the lighting mode image may be expressed in a flashing pattern that repeatedly turns on and off at a predetermined cycle. In this case, the lighting mode image can be made to stand out by making the predetermined cycle of the lighting mode image shorter than the specific cycle of the effect switch lamp. Note that in this case, operation (pressing) of the effect switch is enabled even when the effect switch lamp is off, and based on the operation of the effect switch at this timing, the effect is switched, such as switching from a dim "Pop!" display (the state in the lower center diagram of Figure 23) to a "Victory!" display (the state in the lower right diagram of Figure 23).

In addition, even when equipped with an eco mode (when eco mode is set, the brightness of the upper and side effect lamps is lowered or turned off, the brightness of the lower panel is lowered or turned off, and the brightness of the LCD display is lowered or turned off compared to when eco mode is not set), the brightness of the effect switch when it is turned on to execute a push button effect in eco mode is the same as the brightness of the effect switch when it is turned on to execute a push button effect when not in eco mode. This makes it possible to effectively encourage players to operate (press) the effect switch.

Even if the error notification is made by lighting or flashing the upper or side performance lamps or performance switch lamps in a predetermined color (highly visible, conspicuous color such as red or blue), it is advisable to make the brightness of the upper or side performance lamps and performance switch lamps the same when in eco mode as when not in eco mode.

In addition, when an image showing the lighting state is displayed as an off state, the brightness of the effect switch image is lowered, but the brightness is not lowered until it turns black, giving the appearance of a slightly lit state. On the other hand, when the effect switch lamp is off, it is not lit. By differentiating the expression of the off state of the effect switch lamp and the lighting state image in this way, it is possible to make the lighting state image stand out. Also, because the area around the effect switch image is brighter than the area around the effect switch itself, the difference in brightness with the surrounding area is reduced by not lowering the brightness of the lighting state image of the effect switch image until it turns black. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the effect switch image stand out while reducing fatigue during play.

Furthermore, when a special effect switch image is displayed before the previous image, as shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23, the brightness of the previous image is lowered, but the brightness of the previous image is set lower than the lowest brightness of the lighting state image of the special effect switch image. By configuring it in this way, even when the brightness of the special effect switch image is at its lowest, it is brighter than the surrounding images, making it possible to make the special effect switch image stand out.

The middle and bottom diagrams in Figure 23 will be further explained using Figure 24. The effect switch image changes over time until the effect switch is operated. The change is expressed using the effect switch image to show the effect of the effect switch moving back and forth between its initial position and the pressed position.

The leftmost image in Figure 24 shows the effect switch image in its initial position, the second image from the left shows the effect switch image in its pressed position, the third image from the left shows the effect switch image in its initial position, and the fourth image from the left shows the effect switch image in its pressed position. In this way, by repeatedly showing the effect switch image in its initial position and in its pressed position, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to press the effect switch.

The initial position and pressed position of the effect switch image change at a constant cycle, and the cycle representing the initial position and pressed position of the effect switch image is configured to be longer than the predetermined cycle representing the lighting and extinguishing of the lighting mode image. This configuration makes it possible to make the effect switch image stand out and to avoid evoking the idea of repeatedly pressing the effect switch. Many gaming machines currently on the market change effects continuously by repeatedly pressing the effect switch, and if the change in the effect switch image changes too quickly, it may be mistaken for a rapid-fire effect, reducing the enjoyment of the game. For this reason, by making the cycle of changing between the initial position and pressed position longer than the lighting mode cycle, it is possible to intuitively convey that the effect switch is being pressed while not being pressed repeatedly.

In addition, when an effect is displayed in which the effect switch is to be pressed repeatedly, by making the cycle in which the effect switch changes between the initial position and the pressed position shorter than the cycle in which the effect switch is lit, it is possible to intuitively convey to the player that the effect switch is to be pressed repeatedly. However, this is not limited to this, and an effect that indicates repeated pressing may also be created by not changing the position of the effect switch image, but by making the cycle in which the light-up state image changes shorter than the cycle when the effect switch is operated once and the effect switch ends.

Alternatively, the effect switch image may not change periodically between the initial position and the pressed position. In this case, the display area of the LCD can be made smaller, and instead text instructing the player to press the effect switch, such as "Press the PUSH button," can be displayed.

When a special effect switch image for operating the special effect switch is displayed on the LCD and the special effect switch is operated, the special effect switch image is erased without any accompanying effects. In other words, when a special effect switch image is displayed and the special effect switch is operated, the special effect switch image is immediately erased and the effect based on the pressing of the special effect switch is immediately executed. In this case, the special effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after the operation of the special effect switch is accepted, or the special effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process executed a predetermined period of time after the operation of the special effect switch is accepted.

This configuration makes it possible to pique the player's interest in the outcome of pressing the effect switch, while making it possible to make the information about whether or not the effect switch was pressed less noticeable.

In addition, even if the front panel PS2 is opened while a special effect switch image for operating a special effect switch is displayed on the LCD screen, the special effect switch image continues to be displayed, and when the special effect switch is operated, the special effect switch image is erased without any effects and the effect based on the pressing of the special effect switch is immediately executed. In this case, as described above, the special effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after the special effect switch operation is accepted, or the special effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process executed a predetermined period after the special effect switch operation is accepted.

In this way, by executing effects based on pressing the effect switch regardless of whether the front panel PS2 is open or closed, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted even if the front panel PS2 is unintentionally opened.

When the front panel PS2 is open, the lighting pattern of the effect switch when a switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the LCD screen is configured to be different from the lighting pattern of the effect switch when the front panel PS2 is closed. For example, the effect switch may be lit when the front panel PS2 is closed and flashing or off when the front panel PS2 is open, or the flashing period may be faster in the closed state than in the open state, or the light may be different in color for the open and closed states. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is open, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in a position overlapping at least a portion of the effect switch image, as shown in FIG. 28 (note that, to improve the visibility of the effect switch image and the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in a position where these images do not overlap each other). Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is open, a sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open (for example, "The door is open") may be output, and in this case, the sound effects associated with the display of the effect switch image or the sound effects associated with the effects based on the pressing of the effect switch may not be output. This allows accurate notification that the front panel PS2 is open. On the other hand, even when a sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open is output, the sound effects associated with the display of the effect switch image or the sound effects associated with the effects based on the pressing of the effect switch may be output. This allows accurate notification that the front panel PS2 is open without impeding the progress of the game.

Furthermore, if the front panel PS2 is opened while a special effect switch image for operating the special effect switch is displayed on the LCD, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in place of the special effect switch image, disabling pressing of the special effect switch, and when the front panel PS2 is then closed, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be erased and the special effect switch image may be displayed again. Furthermore, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed superimposed on the special effect switch image, making the special effect switch image invisible, and when the front panel PS2 is then closed, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be erased, making the special effect switch image visible again. In this case, too, by changing the lighting state of the special effect switch before and after the front panel PS2 is opened, as described above, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open.

In addition, when an effect is executed that means that a bonus will be awarded to the player when the effect switch is operated (success effect), the effect switch image is erased without any effects, but when an effect is executed that means that a bonus will not be awarded to the player when the effect switch is operated (failure effect), the effect switch image may be erased with effects. Possible effects for a failure effect include an explosion of the effect switch image or maintaining the brightness of the effect switch image at its darkest state (a brightness that does not change periodically).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that a failure effect was displayed as a result of operating the effect switch, fostering a sense of satisfaction in the player and preventing a decline in interest in subsequent games.

In addition, if a special effect switch image is displayed when all reels have stopped, when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated, an image based on the operation of the start switch 12 will be displayed instead of the image that would be displayed when the special effect switch was operated. Furthermore, when an image based on the operation of the start switch 12 is displayed, the special effect switch image is erased. In this case, the special effect switch image is erased without any effects.

This configuration makes it possible to execute appropriate effects in response to the player's operation without interfering with the effects executed based on the operation of the start switch 12. Players who skip effect switch images by operating the start switch 12 are likely aware in advance of a low level of expectation, or are not interested in the effects that use effect switches, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by erasing the images without any effects.

In addition, when a switch image for effects is displayed and a switch image for effects is operated to display a success effect, the time from when the switch image for effects is operated to when the switch image for effects is erased is longer than the time from when the stop switch 13 is operated to when the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct button press sequence is operated to display a success effect when a button press sequence navigation image is displayed and the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct button press sequence is operated to when the switch image for effects is erased.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to change the time until a reaction effect is executed when various switches are operated, and different levels of excitement can be provided by varying the time difference between the various switches and the execution of the reaction effect. For example, a push order navigation image in which a player loses their profit directly if they press the buttons in the wrong order can be more interesting for the player if the next information is displayed immediately, and by allowing a short delay between the operation of the effect switch and the effect, players can anticipate whether a success effect or a failure effect will be displayed.

If the effect switch also serves as a switch for displaying the menu screen, the effect switch lamp is configured to light up after a certain period of time (e.g., T1) has passed after all reels have stopped. The lighting state of the effect switch lamp at this time differs from the lighting state of the effect switch lamp when an effect is executed by operating the effect switch after all reels have stopped.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate whether a menu screen will be displayed or whether a success or failure effect will be displayed when the effect switch is operated, depending on the lighting state of the effect switch lamp.

Furthermore, when a performance switch image is displayed as shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23 after all the reels have stopped, even after T1 has passed, which is the time when the menu screen can be displayed after all the reels have stopped, the lighting mode of the performance switch lamp does not change to the lighting mode when the menu screen is displayed, but rather to the lighting mode corresponding to the performance switch image. Then, when operation of the performance switch is accepted after T1 has passed since all the reels have stopped, the performance switch image is erased, a success or failure performance is executed, and the performance switch lamp remains off. Then, even when T1 has passed since operation of the performance switch was accepted, the performance switch lamp remains off, and the menu screen is not displayed even when the performance switch is operated. Furthermore, even after T2 has passed since all the reels have stopped, which is the time when the demo screen is displayed, the demo screen is not displayed, the volume is reduced, and the performance switch lamp remains off. In this case, depending on whether the settlement process is executed by accepting the operation of the settlement switch, or whether the game continues until the end of the next game (the end of a game in which the effect switch image is not displayed), the menu screen can be displayed after T1 has elapsed since all the reels have stopped, and the demo screen can be displayed after T2 has elapsed since all the reels have stopped.

By configuring it in this way, when a game in which a special effect switch image is displayed, the player does not need to worry about whether the menu screen or a success or failure effect will be displayed by operating the special effect switch, preventing a decline in interest in the game. It is also possible to configure the system so that the menu screen cannot be displayed even when the settlement process is executed. In this case, it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation until a so-called revival effect is executed, in which a failure effect is displayed in the game but a success effect is displayed in the next game.

Furthermore, when the effect switch lamp is lit in a manner that allows the menu screen to be displayed, the effect switch image is not displayed on the LCD. In other words, whether or not the menu screen is displayed can only be confirmed by the lighting state of the effect switch lamp.

By configuring it in this way, the notification of the menu screen display status, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, can be executed only by the lighting state of the effect switch lamp. Therefore, compared to if the effect switch image were displayed on the LCD, it is possible to reduce the possibility of creating anticipation for operating the effect switch. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the menu screen being displayed even though the player operated the effect switch with anticipation.

In addition, on demo screens that allow players to easily recognize that no game is in progress, the effect switch images may be displayed in a different position and in a smaller size than the effect switch images displayed in push button effects. In this case, the player is less likely to confuse them with push button effects, and it is possible to effectively display the menu screen to the player. This is based on the fact that the menu screen is most often displayed when starting play, and at this time, there is a high possibility that the demo screen is being displayed since no game is being played.

The display position of the effect switch image is such that during a push button effect, the effect switch image is displayed in the center of the LCD screen, and during a demo screen, it is displayed at the edge of the LCD screen (for example, as shown in Figure 29, in a less noticeable position such as the bottom or bottom left of the LCD screen). Also, as mentioned above, the effect switch image during the demo screen is displayed at a smaller size than the effect switch image during a push button effect. In other words, the effect switch image during the demo screen and the effect switch image during a push button effect differ in at least one of their display area and size. Furthermore, it is preferable to have the display mode of the effect switch image during a push button effect and the effect switch image during the demo screen be different (for example, the effect switch image during a push effect is displayed in a flashing mode, repeatedly turning on and off at a predetermined interval, while the effect switch image during the demo screen is displayed in a lit mode). This allows the player to intuitively distinguish between situations where the effect switch is desired to be pressed as part of an effect and situations where it is OK to press the effect switch.

In addition, the effect switch image in the demo screen may be configured to display a caption such as "Press PUSH to display menu" as shown in Figure 30.

The push button effect is executed after all the reels have stopped, but it can also be executed after the start switch 12 is accepted. If the effect switch image is displayed after the start switch 12 is accepted, the effect switch image may be erased by the first stop operation (operation of any of the stop switches 13), or the effect switch image may remain displayed even after all the reels have stopped. If the effect switch image remains displayed after all the reels have stopped, the validity period for the effect switch operation is also maintained, and when the effect switch is operated, a success or failure effect is executed. Note that the effect switch image will be erased even if the effect switch has not been operated because the time required to transition to the demo screen has passed, the settlement process has been executed, the bet process has been executed, or the next game has started.

In addition, whether or not an operation-responsive effect is executed when the effect switch is operated is determined by setting a predetermined timer value in a counter based on the receipt of a predetermined command from the main control means 100, decrementing the counter value at predetermined intervals using timer interrupt processing, etc., and enabling operation of the effect switch when the counter value reaches 0 (an operation-responsive effect is executed when the effect switch is operated). At this time, the effect switch image is also drawn after a period equivalent to the predetermined timer value has elapsed since the receipt of the predetermined command, but due to delays in communication between the image control board that executes the drawing process and the effect control board, the effect switch may be enabled before the effect switch image is displayed. In this way, the system is configured so that a response effect can be executed even if the effect switch is operated before the effect switch image is displayed.

<Explanation of winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between the winning effect, the settlement effect and the insertion effect that can be applied to this embodiment will be described.

The effects applicable to this embodiment, described below, are capable of simultaneously outputting both winning effects associated with the payout process of gaming medals based on minor winning combinations such as push order combinations, settlement effects associated with the settlement process, and deposit effects associated with bet operations. This aims to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the settlement or deposit was not performed properly, and to let the player know that the gaming machine is functioning normally.

The following describes the configuration related to the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the present embodiment, but details of the processing omitted in the description of the present embodiment will be explained below.

<Processing when gaming medals are inserted>
If game medals are ready to be inserted, when game medals are inserted, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit, a bet is set (also called a bet) for the number of inserted medals, or if the upper limit is set, the number of inserted medals is added to the credits. Also, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit and the number of medals available for betting is stored in the credits, a bet is set in response to the operation of the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Here, "inserting game medals" is equivalent to game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 passing through the medal selector 34 normally.
In addition, if game medals have been set for betting or have been saved in the credits and before the game begins (after the required number of medals to be bet has been set and before the start lever has been operated), settlement processing can be performed by operating the settlement switch.
Furthermore, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000, also referred to as the presentation control means) when a gaming medal is inserted, and transmits a reserve insertion command corresponding to the number of medals set for betting to the sub-control means when the bet switch is operated. When credits are accumulated (added) to the credits, the main control means transmits a reserve number command indicating the current number of accumulated medals to the sub-control means. Based on these commands, the sub-control means can execute insertion presentations such as outputting the sound of a gaming medal being inserted.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process (hereinafter also referred to as the payout process) is a process for paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor combination (the symbol combination that has stopped and been displayed) when the winning determination process determines that a minor combination has been won. Paying out game medals here means adding credits if the accumulated credits have not reached their upper limit, or paying out game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached their upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a winning (whether by adding credits or by paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on a winning. Based on the payout start command and payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting a game medal payout sound and executing a backlight effect (also referred to as a BL effect). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or when a replay wins).When there is a loss or when a replay wins, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Settlement processing>
When the settlement switch is operated while no game is being played, a process of paying out (settlement) game medals to the player from the hopper 44 in a number corresponding to the set bet number and the accumulated credits is executed. When the settlement process is started, the main control means sends a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process is completed, the main control means sends a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Based on the settlement start command and the settlement end command, the sub-control means can execute settlement effects such as outputting a settlement sound.

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects are executed based on the lottery results of the winning combination (internal lottery results), push order navigation effects are executed during the AT, and throw-in effects, winning effects, settlement effects, etc. are executed.

<Introduction>
This effect is executed when a gaming medal is inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command transmitted from the main control means. The main control means sets the reserve insertion command as either a reserve insertion command (1 medal), a reserve insertion command (2 medals), or a reserve insertion command (3 medals) depending on the number of medals set to be bet, and transmits the set reserve insertion command to the sub-control means. When the reserve insertion command (1 medal) is received, insertion sound A indicating that one medal has been bet is output once (e.g., a "da" sound is output), notifying the player that one medal has been bet. When the reserve insertion command (3 medals) is received, insertion sound A is output three times, notifying the player that three medals have been bet. When a medal insertion command is received, if the inserted gaming medal is set to be bet, insertion sound A is output once, and if it is stored, insertion sound B indicating that one medal has been stored is output once (e.g., a "ji" sound is output), notifying the player that a bet or storage has been made.
When a reserve deposit command (3 coins) is received, the deposit sound C indicating that 3 coins have been bet may be output instead of the deposit sound A being output three times, or the same sound may be output when a bet is set and when the coins are stored (for example, the deposit sound A may be output in all states). Also, a different sound (deposit sound D) may be output during normal times (non-AT) and during AT.

<Winning performance>
This is an effect that is executed when game medals are paid out, and is executed based on a payout start command and a payout end command, and a payout sound indicating that game medals are being paid out and a back lamp effect are executed.

<Dispensing sound output>
There are two distinct payout sounds for game medals that are output during the execution of the game medal payout process: payout sound A and payout sound B. Payout sound A is a payout sound that is output during normal play (non-AT) when a push-order combination is won, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operating the buttons in the correct order, resulting in a favorable payout. Payout sound B is a payout sound that is output during AT when a push-order combination is won, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operating the buttons in the correct order, resulting in a favorable payout. If the correct order is not followed, an incorrect symbol combination may be stopped and an unfavorable payout may occur; in such cases, no payout sound is output. Payout sound A is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, repeatedly outputs a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeatedly outputs the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) after the payout end command is received, and then ends. By outputting the payout sound A for a first payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which a payout is actually being made) that is longer than the period during which a payout is actually being made (the period during which a payout process is being made), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Also, by outputting the payout sound for a first payout sound period that is longer than the period during which a payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed, and as a result, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it will be easier for the effect to be executed without being canceled midway.

Payout sound B starts when a payout start command is received, repeats a second sound (e.g., a "de" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeats the second sound for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the payout end command is received, and then ends. That is, payout sound B is output for a second payout sound period (the period obtained by adding the second specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed, and this second payout sound period is longer than the first payout sound period of payout sound A. Thus, by outputting payout sound B for a longer period than payout sound A, it is possible to make the player perceive that more game medals have been awarded. Furthermore, by outputting payout sound B, which is different from payout sound A, during the AT, it is possible to more easily recognize that a player is in a favorable state that is different from normal.
Although the payout sound is output for the first or second specific time after the payout end command is received, when the payout start command is received, the payout sound may be output for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits or paying out game medals) plus the first or second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. Also, although the payout sound A during normal play and the payout sound B during AT are different in the above embodiment, the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp effect>
The back lamp effects include back lamp effect A and back lamp effect B, which are different from each other. Back lamp effect A is a back lamp effect that is output when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the correct symbol combination is stopped and a favorable payout is made as a result of operating the buttons in the correct button order. Back lamp effect B is a back lamp effect that is executed when a push order role is won during AT, and the correct symbol combination is stopped and a favorable payout is made as a result of operating the buttons in the correct button order. If the correct button order is not used, an incorrect symbol combination may stop, in which case the back lamp effect is not executed. Back lamp effect A starts when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the back lamp in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp repeatedly turns on and off in the first pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) and then ends. By executing the back lamp effect A for a first back lamp effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being made) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being made, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Also, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect A for a first back lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the back lamp effect A is being made, and it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed. Furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being made over a certain period of time, it is more likely to be executed without being canceled midway.

Back lamp effect B begins when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the back lamp in a second pattern until a payout end command is received. Once the payout end command is received, the back lamp repeatedly turns on and off in the second pattern for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) before ending. In other words, back lamp effect B repeatedly turns on and off for a second back lamp effect period (the period during which actual payouts are made plus the second specific time) that is longer than the period during which actual payouts are made, and this second back lamp effect period is longer than the first back lamp effect period. In this way, by executing back lamp effect B for a longer period than back lamp effect A, it is possible to make the player perceive that more game medals have been awarded. Furthermore, by executing back lamp effect B, which is different from back lamp effect A, during AT, it is easier to recognize that a player is in an advantageous state that is different from normal.

While the backlight effect was executed from the time the payout end command was received until the first or second specific time had elapsed, when the payout start command was received, the backlight effect could be executed for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer: credit addition or medal payout) plus the first or second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. While the backlight effect is different during normal play and during AT, the same backlight effect could also be executed. While the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off in a fixed pattern, a series of on/off patterns could be determined and output from the start to the end of the backlight effect. The "first backlight effect period" of backlight effect A and the "first payout sound period" of payout sound A are both the time during which actual payouts are being performed plus the first specific time, and are therefore the same period. However, these "first backlight effect period" and "first payout sound period" may be different periods. The same applies to the relationship between the "second back lamp effect period" of back lamp effect B and the "second dispensing sound period" of dispensing sound B. In short, the "first dispensing sound period" and "second dispensing sound period" of dispensing sounds A and B, and the "first dispensing sound period" and "second back lamp effect period" of back lamp effect A and B are each longer than the period during which actual dispensing is occurring, and as long as the relationship is "first dispensing sound period" < "second dispensing sound period" and "first back lamp effect period" < "second back lamp effect period," these periods can be set appropriately.

<Settlement performance>
This effect is executed when the game medals are settled, and is executed based on a settlement start command and a settlement end command. It outputs a settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out, and a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed is output. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and repeatedly outputs a sound different from the payout sound (e.g., a "do" sound) until the payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the sound ends with the output of a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed, such as "Settlement has been completed," over a third specified period (e.g., 5 seconds). In other words, the settlement effect outputs a sound over a predetermined settlement effect period (the period during which the actual payout is being performed plus the third specified time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the settlement process is being performed).

The following describes various effects that are executed depending on the progress of the game, with reference to Figures 31 to 35. Figure 31 is a time chart for when no insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed. Figure 32 is a time chart for when an insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed. Figure 33 is a time chart for when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process is completed. Figure 34 is a time chart for when no gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. Figure 35 is a time chart for when gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. Note that for convenience of explanation, Figures 31 to 35 use ON and OFF to indicate the status of the corresponding process or effect, but the status of the corresponding process or effect is indicated in parentheses. Specifically, for payout process/settling process/BL effect/settling effect, ON indicates an executing state, OFF indicates an not executing state, and when it changes from OFF to ON, the process etc. starts, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it ends. For the payout sound/insertion sound, ON indicates that an output is being made, and OFF indicates that an output is not being made. For the MAX BET lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that the lamp is lit, and OFF indicates that the lamp is not lit. For the MAX BET switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the switch has been operated, and OFF indicates that the switch has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that the game medal has not been inserted.

<If you do not insert the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 31 , the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts outputting a payout sound A (referred to as a payout sound in the figure, the same applies below) and a backlight effect A (referred to as a BL effect in the figure, the same applies below) based on the received payout start command. At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues outputting the payout sound A and the backlight effect A as a winning effect for the T1 period (first specific time). After the payout process ends at time t1, the main control means performs processing such as updating the RT status (game end check processing) and turns on the blocker to enable the insertion of gaming medals. At time t2, the main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the status that allows the insertion of gaming medals. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, since the period T1 has elapsed since time t1, the sub-control means terminates the output of payout sound A and the back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period and the first back lamp effect period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of payout sound A and the back lamp effect A while turning on the MAX BET lamp from time t1 onwards. By continuing to output payout sound A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by the MAX BET operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When inserting a bet using the MAX BET switch after the payout process has been completed>
As shown in Figure 32, up until time t2, the situation is the same as when the MAX BET switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, and at time t3, the MAX BET switch is operated. When the MAX BET switch is operated, the main control means turns off the MAX BET lamp, the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A, and outputs a payout sound A (referred to as a payout sound in the figure; the same applies below) three times as a payout effect from time t3 to time t4 (during the T2 period). Even when various situations are combined, such as when payout sound A is output while payout sound A is output, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, as well as that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at time t3, the output of payout sound A continues, but by ending back lamp effect A, the player is made to recognize by sound that a payout has been made, and is also made to recognize by sight that a bet has been set. Note that although Fig. 32 has been explained using the MAX BET switch for insertion operation, the insertion sound is also output when inserting a coin using the 1 BET switch or inserting a medal.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement button after the dispensing process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 33 , up until time t2, the process is the same as when the MAX BET switch is inserted after the payout process is completed, and at time t3, the settlement button is operated instead of the MAX BET switch. At time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and turns off (turns off) the MAX BET lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A and back lamp effect A at time t3 without waiting for the T1 period to elapse. Thereafter, based on the settlement start command, it starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect. At time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and sends a settlement completion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the settlement completion command, the sub-control means replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed, and continues for the T3 period (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output simultaneously, it will confuse the player, so by ending the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, when the settlement process is started, the player can be made to accurately recognize that a settlement process different from the payout process is being carried out.

<If you do not insert a medal after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in FIG. 34 , at time t8, the main control means starts the settlement process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the received settlement start command. Here, the backlight effect is not executed (output) during settlement, allowing the payout process and the settlement process to be visually distinct processes. At time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and sends a settlement completion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the settlement completion command, the sub-control means replaces the output of the settlement sound with an output of a sound indicating that settlement has been completed for a period T3. After the settlement process is completed at time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker to enable the insertion of gaming medals. At time t10, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that gaming medals can be inserted. Since no medals were inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T13, the T3 period has elapsed since time t9, so the sub-control means stops outputting the sound indicating that the settlement has been completed. As described above, the settlement effect is being executed from time t10 onwards, but it is still possible to insert medals.

<If you insert a medal after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in Figure 35, up until time t10, the situation is the same as when no gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process has been completed, and at time t11, the main control means inserts a gaming medal, sets a bet on one medal, and transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the medal insertion command, the sub-control means outputs insertion sound A once as an insertion effect, and this output continues from time t11 to time t12. From time t11 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting a sound indicating that settlement has been completed while also outputting insertion sound A. This makes it possible to let the player know that the settlement process has been completed, while also letting them know that a medal has been inserted and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. 31 to 35 have been described using an example in which the payout sound is payout sound A and the BL effect is back lamp effect A, but in these Figures 31 to 35, the payout sound may be payout sound B and the BL effect may be back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the T1 period in Figures 31 and 38 should be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effects as those described above are achieved.

<Change of form>
We have explained a configuration in which the same sound is repeatedly output while the dispensing process or settlement process is being carried out until it is completed, but in addition to the commands mentioned above, the main control means may send a command to the sub-control means each time a coin is dispensed, indicating that one coin has been dispensed, or a command that can identify the number of coins remaining to be dispensed, and the sub-control means may output a dispensing sound or settlement sound each time one coin is dispensed based on receiving these commands sent from the main control means.
Furthermore, although the settlement sound is different from the payout sound, it may be the same as the payout sound. By using the same sound, the amount of sound data can be reduced, leading to a reduction in data capacity. If the sounds are the same, the payout process and the settlement process can be distinguished by the presence or absence of a backlight effect, allowing the player to recognize that the settlement process is being carried out properly, even if the settlement process is carried out immediately after the payout process.
The settlement sound may be the same as the error sound, which also reduces the amount of sound data, thereby reducing the data capacity.
Also, during the AT, payout sound B is output, but in addition to outputting payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound such as "Get" or "Yesssss" indicating the correct button press sequence may be output from the start of the payout process to the time when the payout process ends and the second specific time (2 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the sound indicating the correct button press sequence, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated correctly, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct button press sequence, the player can recognize that the game medals have also been properly paid out.
In addition, although the MAX bed lamp is turned on and off by the main control means, the main control means may also transmit information to the sub-control means as to whether the MAX bed switch is in an operable state, thereby turning the lamp on and off at the sub-control means.

Furthermore, although it has been explained that a throw-in sound is output as part of the throw-in effect, in addition to outputting the throw-in sound, an image indicating the throw-in may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the throw-in has been made.
In addition, although the winning effect is described as being a payout sound output and a back lamp effect, an image indicating that a prize has been won (for example, displaying "GET") may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the player that a prize has been won. In this case, when the throw-in effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 as the winning effect or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 and the notification by the LED lamp as the throw-in effect may not be executed.
In addition, although the settlement effect includes the output of a settlement sound and a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed, an image indicating that the settlement process is in progress (for example, a message indicating that settlement is in progress) may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify that the settlement is in progress. In this case, when the coin insertion effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated as the settlement effect, or the display on the display device 32 or the notification by the LED lamp as the coin insertion effect may not be executed.
In addition, although the winning effect is executed for the push order combination, it may also be executed for other minor combinations (such as the watermelon combination, the bell combination that does not matter in the push order, or the cherry combination). For other minor combinations, a payout sound different from the push order combination is output, or a back lamp effect different from the push order combination is executed, so that it is easy to recognize that a combination different from the push order combination has won.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods in this embodiment are merely examples and can be changed in various ways.

<Description of Errors and Winning Effects Related to the Hopper 44 Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

The effects applicable to this embodiment, described below, are intended to allow the player to recognize the results of the game or the effects before a hopper empty error occurs when a winning effect occurs upon the start of the payout process or an effect occurs after the reels have stopped.

The following describes the configuration related to hopper 44 errors and winning effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in this embodiment and in the explanations of the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing omitted in the description of this embodiment will be explained below.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The payout process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor winning combination (the symbol combination that has stopped and been displayed) when the winning determination process determines that a minor winning combination has been achieved. Paying out game medals here means adding credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and paying out game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. To pay out game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal (ON state) to the hopper motor, and then rotates the turntable to eject game medals one by one. When the payout sensor detects a game medal for a predetermined period of time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it determines that one game medal has been paid out. Furthermore, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on a win (whether by adding credits or by paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as displaying the number of payouts and the cumulative difference in the number of medals. The payout start command includes information on the number of medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are also transmitted when there is no payout (when there is a loss or when there is a win in a replay). When there is a loss or when there is a win in a replay, information on the number of medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Errors related to hopper 44>
A hopper accumulation error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected as errors related to the hopper 44. A hopper accumulation error is an error that occurs when it is determined that a payout outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals when game medals are paid out, a hopper empty error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the hopper is empty of game medals, and an abnormality detection error is an error that occurs when it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor of the hopper 44.
When the main control means detects an error and issues an error notification, it sends an error notification start command including information on the type of error to the sub-control means, and when the error is resolved, it sends an error recovery command. Based on the error notification start command, the sub-control means displays error information corresponding to the type of error detected (an error screen) on the display device 32, and based on the error recovery command, it ends the error screen display and returns to the display before the error occurred.
In addition, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing when the abnormality detection error is detected, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality has been detected based on the error detection command.

<Hopper accumulation error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor, which rotates the turntable to dispense the game medals, and if the dispense sensor continues to detect a game medal for a certain period of time (201 ms) or more, it is determined that the game medals have become clogged, and a hopper retention error is set.
<Hopper empty error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, even if a drive signal is input to the hopper motor and the game medal dispensing operation is performed to rotate the turntable, if no game medals are detected by the dispensing sensor for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds), it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Abnormality detection error>
When the payout sensor detects an abnormal input for a certain period of time (3 ms) or more when the machine is not in a state where a game medal should be paid out, it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error display is displayed when no game is being played (when waiting for the insertion of a game medal or when waiting for the start lever to be operated).

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the results of the role lottery (internal lottery results), error notifications can be executed, push order navigation effects can be executed during AT, winning effects can be executed, result screens can be displayed, result announcement effects can be executed, etc.

<Winning performance>
This effect is executed when game medals are paid out, and includes an acquisition display effect that indicates that a predetermined number of game medals will be paid out, and an accumulation display effect that indicates that the game medals acquired by the player have accumulated to a predetermined number. The acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect are executed based on the sub-control means receiving a payout start command.

<Acquisition display performance>
The win display effect is an effect that is executed when a push order role is won during the AT, and as a result of operating the buttons in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is made. The win display effect may be displayed as "GET" without specifying the number of game medals to be paid out, or as "GET 12" so that it is specifically specified that 12 game medals will be paid out. If a push order role is won during the AT and the buttons are not operated in the correct push order, an incorrect symbol combination may stop and an unfavorable payout may be made (such as the payout of one medal, which is a payout of fewer game medals than the correct symbol combination), but in that case the win display effect is not executed.
The winning display effect begins when a payout start command is received and runs for a predetermined winning display effect period (1 second), which is shorter than the period during which actual payouts are being performed (the period during which payout processing is being performed). Therefore, it runs even if all of the game medals that are actually to be paid out to the player have not been paid out. This is to prevent the winning display effect from being canceled when the next game begins or being confused with the result of the next game if it were to run after all of the game medals have been paid out. Furthermore, by running the winning display effect even if all of the game medals have not been paid out, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (that they will receive a payout) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display effect is an effect that is executed when the cumulative number of game medals won by a player during an AT (also referred to as the total number of game medals) exceeds a specified number for the first time (500, 1000, 1500, 2000). Specifically, the cumulative number of medals won is counted from the start of an AT during one AT, and when it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed 500 due to the payout of game medals, the cumulative display effect is executed (started). Thereafter, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. The cumulative display effect is displayed in the form of "GET 500 medals" or the like depending on the specified number.
The cumulative display effect is initiated when a payout start command is received and it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed the specified number due to the payout. It is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which actual payouts are being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). Like the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the number of game medals actually paid out to the player does not exceed the specified number. This is to prevent variations in the timing of the cumulative display effect if it is executed when the specified number is actually exceeded, which could result in the effect being canceled by the start of the next game or being confused with the result of the next game. Furthermore, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number has not been exceeded, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (exceeding the specified number) in advance.
It should be noted that although the conditions for executing both the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may be satisfied in one game, in this embodiment, in a game in which the cumulative display effect can be executed, in principle, only the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. However, cases in which the acquisition display effect is executed in a manner different from the principle will be described later.

<Results screen display>
In this embodiment, the result screen is displayed when the AT ends, displaying the total number of game medals acquired during the AT, the number of games during the AT execution period, and the like. When the result screen is displayed, a warning display (a display to prevent addiction) is also displayed. When the final game of the AT ends (when the command to stop all reels is received), the result screen begins to be displayed and continues to be displayed until the next game begins. Note that while the result screen is displayed in the final game, only the acquisition display effect can be executed; even if any specified number is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, if a push order combination is won and the correct push order is performed, the correct symbol combination stops, a favorable payout is made, and the specified number of 500 coins is exceeded, the cumulative display effect is executed if it is not the final game. However, if it is the final game, the result screen is displayed, and the acquisition display effect is executed without the cumulative display effect. This is because the result screen displays the total number of game medals won during the AT, and if the cumulative display effect is also executed, similar information will be displayed on top of each other, confusing the player.

<Result announcement performance>
The result notification effect is an effect for notifying the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and is an effect executed in the final game of a series of consecutive effects. Specifically, it is an effect for notifying the player whether an advantageous result has been obtained, such as winning a bonus, winning an additional bonus such as the number of games remaining in the AT, or winning a specialized zone that increases the chances of additional bonuses. As an example, whether an advantageous result has been obtained is notified based on the outcome of a battle effect or the like. If an advantageous result is obtained, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if an advantageous result is not obtained, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In the battle effect, a lever operation is triggered to display a screen in which an ally character and an enemy character face off against each other, and after all reels have stopped (due to receipt of a command to stop all reels), the ally character and the enemy character compete, and after a certain amount of time has passed and the effect branches, an image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat, is displayed. The timing for branching the effects occurs 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result notification effect ends when an image indicating success or victory or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed, which occurs 3 seconds after the start of the payout process. This allows the result notification effect to end before a hopper empty error occurs (is detected) and an error screen is displayed, allowing the player to confirm whether or not they have achieved a favorable result regardless of the occurrence of an error. Note that the all-reel stop command and the payout start command are sent at approximately the same time, so the start of the payout process may be replaced with after all reels have stopped.

Various effects that are executed according to the progress of the game will be explained below with reference to Figures 36 to 41. Figure 36 is a time chart when payout is performed normally, Figure 37 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), Figure 38 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs), Figure 39 is an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally, Figure 40 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and Figure 41 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs).
36 to 38, ON and OFF are used for ease of explanation, but the status of the corresponding process or effect is written in parentheses. Specifically, ON for the payout process indicates a running state, OFF indicates a not running state, and changing from OFF to ON means that the process has started, and changing from ON to OFF means that it has ended. Payout ON indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. The ON for the acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect indicates that the effect is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (not displayed). The ON for the result notification effect indicates that it is being executed (the effect is progressing), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (the effect has ended and the display has stopped on the screen announcing the result). The ON for error (empty hopper) and error (hopper stuck) indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. The error display ON indicates that an error has occurred and an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control means, while OFF indicates that neither an error code nor an error screen is displayed.

Figures 39 to 41 show cases where the acquisition display effect is executed. When the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "GET 12 coins" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figures changes to the notation "GET 500 coins" displayed in the cumulative display effect.

The previously explained winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects can be combined, and times t0 and t1 in Figures 31 to 33 are the same as times t0 and t1 in Figure 36. Time t5 in Figures 31 and 32 is later than time t1 in Figure 36 and earlier than time t15.

<If the payment is successful>
As shown in FIG. 36 , the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. One second later, at time t14, the sub-control means ends the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect. Thereafter, at time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. The time required for the payout process is 1.5 seconds if the payout process is executed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are paid out normally). The acquisition display effect starts when the payout process starts and ends before the payout process ends. This allows the player to recognize that they will acquire game medals and that the cumulative number of acquired game medals will exceed a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. The result announcement effect is executed from the start of the game, and is therefore already in progress when the payout process begins. At time t15, the result notification effect branches off, and the display from this point onwards differs between displaying an image indicating success or victory and displaying an image indicating failure or defeat. At time t16, the result notification effect that was being executed ends. Time t15 is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When normal dispensing is not performed (hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 37 , the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the win display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but because there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out and the spinning wheel continues to rotate. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the hopper 44 is empty of game medals, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means displays an error screen. At other times t14, t15, and t16, as in FIG. 36 , the win display effect or the cumulative display effect ends at time t14, the effect branching occurs at time t15, and the result announcement effect ends at time t16. The period for executing the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect and the period for ending the result notification effect are set shorter than the period from the start of payout processing until a hopper empty error occurs, so that it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect, the cumulative display effect and the result notification effect before the hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed.
Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs after not a single medal has been paid out since the start of the payout process; if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper empty error occurs will be later than time t17 by the time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out.

<When delivery is not performed normally (when a hopper congestion error occurs)>
As shown in Figure 38, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of game medals is not executed because the discharge outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals. Then, at time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect game medals for more than 201 ms from the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that game medals are clogged, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. Also at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect that was being executed, as well as the result notification effect that was also being executed, and displays an error screen. The acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the timing when the payout process starts, and is executed before the payout process starts and a hopper congestion error occurs, so it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect before the error screen is displayed.
Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs after not a single medal has been paid out since the start of the payout process; if a hopper retention error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out, and the period during which the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect are executed will be longer.

Although it was stated above that the execution of the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect will not be displayed if the effect itself is canceled, the effect itself can be executed while an error screen is displayed superimposed on the effect, making the effect invisible. In this case, if the error is cleared while an effect is being executed, the effect being executed will become visible from the moment the error is cleared. However, clearing the error requires operating the reset switch, and since the reset switch is located inside the cabinet, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Since it usually takes more than three seconds from the start of the payout process to the end of the result announcement effect before the error can be cleared, even if a hopper congestion error occurs and the hopper congestion error is cleared in the shortest time possible, the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect will not return to normal while they are being executed, but will return to the screen after all effects have finished.

<Display screen when payment is successful>
Figure 39 shows an example of a display screen when a payout has been made normally. Figure 39 shows a scene in which a game has been played with 11 games remaining in the AT and a total of 230 game medals won, and a battle effect (result announcement effect) is being executed. The number of games remaining is displayed in the upper left of the screen (since the game was played with 11 games remaining, one is subtracted and it is displayed as 10G (games)). The total number of game medals won in the AT is displayed as 230 in the upper right of the screen. Ally characters (characters indicated by round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters indicated by star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

Figure 36 (a) shows the screen when all reels have stopped during the battle effect (when the command to stop all reels is received), and the effect progresses from this point onwards to announce the results. Figure 36 (b) shows the screen at time t0 in Figure 36, when the payout process has begun. One medal is paid out, increasing the total number of medals from 230 to 231, and the "GET 12" display moves from the right side of the screen towards the center as an acquisition display effect, indicating that 12 medals will be paid out. In the center of the screen, a competition between ally characters and enemy characters has begun. Figure 36 (c) shows the screen when three medals have been paid out, and the "GET 12" display appears in large letters in the center of the screen as an acquisition display effect, indicating that 12 medals will be paid out. The competition between ally characters and enemy characters continues.

Figure 36 (d) shows the timing when eight medals have been paid out, and the large "GET 12" display in the center of the screen moves toward the left side of the screen as the acquisition display effect ends. Figure 36 (e) shows the timing at time t15 in Figure 36, when the payout of medals has ended and the effect branching occurs. Because the payout of medals has ended, the total number of medals displayed is 242. In the center of the screen, the competition between the ally character and enemy character continues. Figure 36 (f) shows the timing after the effect branching occurs, and the process of displaying an image indicating success is displayed. The ally character is enlarged from the competition between the ally character and enemy character, making it clear that the result is a success. Figure 36 (g) shows the timing at time t16 in Figure 36, when the battle effect ends. The word "Success" is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen, clearly indicating that the effect was a success. The image displayed in Figure 36 (g) ends as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the next game begins. Figure 36 (h) shows the timing after the branching effect, showing the process of displaying an image indicating failure. The enemy character is enlarged as he competes with his ally character, making it clear that he has failed. Figure 36 (i) shows the timing at time t16 in Figure 36, when the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, clearly indicating that the effect indicated failure. The image displayed in Figure 36 (i) has ended as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the next play begins.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (hopper empty error occurs)>
Figure 40 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). Figures (a) through (i) show the same flow of the acquisition display, cumulative display, and result notification display as Figure 39. However, because no game medals have been paid out since the payout process began, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and has not been updated. Figure 40 (j) shows the timing at time t17 in Figure 37, when no game medals were detected for 3.5 seconds after the payout process began, causing the main control means to set a hopper empty error and the sub-control means to display an error screen indicating the hopper empty error. The same image is displayed whether an image indicating success or failure was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (hopper retention error)>
Figure 41 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper jam error occurs). Figures 41 (a) through 41 (c) show the same flow of the acquisition display, cumulative display, and result notification display as Figure 39. However, because no game medals have been paid out since the payout process began, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. Figure 41 (k) shows the timing at time t18 in Figure 38, when a hopper jam error is set in the main control means and a screen indicating the hopper jam error is displayed in the sub-control means. If the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect jamming for 201 ms or more after the start of the payout process, the main control means determines that game medals have jammed and sets a hopper jam error. After setting the hopper jam error, the main control means sends a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper jam error to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the command indicating the occurrence of a hopper jam error, the sub-control means displays a screen indicating the hopper jam error on the display device 32.

<Change of form>
The period for which the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect are displayed is set to 1 second, which is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) required for a normal payout process, but it may be set to a longer period. Specifically, it may be set to a period longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period (3.5 seconds) required for detecting a hopper empty error. By setting the period longer than the period required for a payout process, the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect can be more easily viewed by the player.
In addition, the time required for a payout process to be executed normally is set to 1.5 seconds, but the required time may vary depending on the number of medals to be paid out and whether the payout process involves only adding credits or includes paying out game medals from a hopper.
In addition, although only one of the acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect is executed in the above description, if the conditions for executing both effects are met, the accumulation display effect may be executed after the acquisition display effect is executed. The acquisition display effect ends one second after the start of the payout process, and the accumulation display effect is executed for one second thereafter, so the player can recognize the content of the accumulation display effect even if a hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, the winning display effect is an effect that is executed when a push order role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order irrelevant role (so-called shared bell) that executes an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order irrelevant role stops.

The winning display effect may have multiple variations when a favorable payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed. Specifically, the color and font of the message "GET 12 coins" may be varied depending on the state. More specifically, the color and font may be varied depending on whether the state is favorable for winning an AT bonus, or during a precursory event for a consecutive bonus or a transition to a bonus-specialized zone. By varying the mode of the winning display effect, the player is notified that gaming medals will be acquired and can be made to anticipate that a favorable situation may occur in the next game or later. Furthermore, the color and font of the message "GET 12 coins" may be varied depending on the setting value set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided each time the winning display effect is executed.
Furthermore, the cumulative display effect may have a display mode that can be displayed only when a specific setting value is set, in addition to for each specified number. Specifically, when the setting value is set to "2,""4," or "6," if the cumulative number of gaming medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "GET 246" is displayed. This may be displayed always when the number exceeds 246, or may be displayed only when a lottery is held and the player wins. By suggesting the setting through the content displayed in the cumulative display effect, not only can the player be notified of the cumulative number, but information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can also be provided. Only when the setting value is set to "6,""GET666" may be displayed when the cumulative number of gaming medals exceeds 666 for the first time. Furthermore, multiple display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. for each specified number may be provided, and the setting value set in the gaming machine or its status may be suggested depending on the displayed display mode.

The acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect can be executed during the AT, and are executed without executing the cumulative display effect only when the result screen is displayed, even if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds the specified number. However, there may be other situations in which the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect are not executed. Specifically, in a so-called pseudo-bonus situation, the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect do not need to be executed. Also, in a pseudo-bonus situation executed during the AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the cumulative display effect may be executed. Furthermore, the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect do not need to be executed during the preparation period before the AT starts, on the AT start screen, during consecutive effects executed during the AT, or during signs of consecutive effects. The acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect do not need to be executed in an ending state that can be executed before the end of the advantageous zone. By providing for cases in which they are executed or not executed depending on the game state managed by the main control means and the effect state managed by the sub-control means, the necessary information can be appropriately notified to the player.

While the execution of the cumulative display effect was previously determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT and the number of game medals paid out by the payout process, it may also be determined using the value of the MY counter. Specifically, the MY counter value is determined by sending a command indicating the MY counter value from the main control means to the sub-control means after checking the end of the game and when the lever is operated. The MY counter value after checking the end of the game indicates the value after the payout process, and the MY counter value when the lever is operated indicates the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets. When a payout start command is received as a result of the game, the number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the MY counter value when the lever is operated, and it is determined whether the total value exceeds a specified number. By displaying a value based on the MY counter value as the cumulative number during the AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be acquired before the advantageous period ends.
Although the result announcement effect is a battle effect executed in the final game of a series of effects, it may be an effect executed in one game instead of a series of effects. Also, it is not limited to a battle effect in which a friendly character competes against an enemy character, but may be another effect that associates the result of the effect with an advantageous result for the player, such as whether or not the player wins first prize in a lottery or whether or not the player wins in a maze lottery.

Although the result announcement effect is explained as displaying the result at the effect branching timing as time passes after all reels have stopped, the result may also be displayed by operating an effect switch. Specifically, at the effect branching timing (time t15), an image of a switch simulating an effect switch (also referred to as an operation prompt image or operation prompt effect) is displayed, and when the player operates the effect switch, an image indicating success or failure is displayed. By displaying the operation prompt image at the effect branching timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the operation prompt image will be displayed before the error screen is displayed.
Furthermore, after all reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped), a push button effect may be executed to change the stage of the effect or to announce the number of additional games remaining in the AT. Specifically, after all reels have stopped but before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs, an image of a switch simulating the effect switch is displayed, and the player can operate it to change the stage of the effect or announce the number of additional games. It is possible to recognize that the image of the switch simulating the effect switch is displayed (the push button effect is executed) before the hopper empty error occurs (the error screen is displayed). Furthermore, before the image of the switch simulating the effect switch is displayed, an image of the switch simulating the effect switch may be displayed or teased, and it is possible to recognize that the image of the switch simulating the effect switch is displayed as a result of the teasing before the error screen is displayed.

In addition to the result announcement effect and the PUSH button effect, effects such as comment effects may be executed when the stop switch of the final reel is operated or when all reels are stopped. By executing these effects before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, at time t15 or time t1), the content of the effect can be recognized before the hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, this effect is executed when the push order role is won, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order irrelevant role (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order irrelevant role stops.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

Next, various settings for executing timer interrupt processing will be described.
An interrupt mode is set in the initial setting for the operation of the gaming machine shown in Fig. 5. This setting of the interrupt mode involves making various settings (settings of the main control internal register) to enable timer interrupt processing.
First, the main internal main control registers for enabling timer interrupt processing will be described.

<PTC prescaler setting register>
The PTC prescaler setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is possible to set the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC (described later). Specifically, it is possible to set the "number" by which the system clock (SCK) is divided and supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC. For example, if the system clock is 16 MHz and "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, 16 MHz/143 = approximately 111.8881 KHz becomes the clock source for the 8-bit counter PTC.
The initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "250".

<PTC counter setting register>
The PTC counter setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC counter setting register, the count value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set the number of clocks input from the PTC prescaler setting register before timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, if the system clock is 16 MHz and the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143" and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125," an interrupt flag is set when a clock of approximately 111.8881 kHz (a clock with a cycle of approximately 8.9375 μs) is input 125 times (when the 8-bit counter PTC times out), and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (described later). When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal, the interrupt wait monitor register can output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, and when the interrupt is enabled (when the IFF1 register (described later) is set to "1"), a timer interrupt can be executed.
In other words, if the system clock is 16 MHz, the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143", and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", timer interrupt processing can be executed at a period of 1/16 MHz x 143 x 125 = approximately 1.117 ms (milliseconds).
Furthermore, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC starts to be updated (for example, decremented by one) based on the clock from the PTC prescaler setting register after the value is set in the PTC counter setting register.
The initial value of the 8-bit counter PTC (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0".

<Interrupt wait monitor register>
The interrupt wait monitor register is one of the main control internal registers.
The interrupt wait monitor register is a 1-byte (8-bit) storage area, and when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and an interrupt request signal output from the timer circuit of the main control chip is received, a predetermined bit (for example, the first bit) of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1." In this way, when the predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1," it is referred to as storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred in the interrupt wait monitor register, and when the predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "0," it is referred to as clearing the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register that indicates that an interrupt request signal has occurred.

When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes capable of outputting an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. In other words, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes capable of outputting an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, and when interrupts are enabled (when the IFF1 register, described below, is set to "1"), a timer interrupt can be executed. When timer interrupt processing is executed in response to the interrupt request notification signal (this can be before, simultaneously with, or after the timer interrupt processing is executed), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared.

On the other hand, even if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, if the interrupt is disabled (when the IFF1 register, described later, is "0"), an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, but timer interrupt processing is not executed. Thus, if the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed because the interrupt is disabled (when the IFF1 register, described later, is "0"), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is retained (not cleared). Also, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt request notification signal continues to be output to the CPU. If the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupt was disabled (the IFF1 register described later is "0"), the interrupt is enabled (the IFF1 register described later is "1"), and when the timer interrupt processing is executed in response to the interrupt request notification signal (this may be immediately before the timer interrupt processing is executed, at the same time as the timer interrupt processing is executed, or immediately after the timer interrupt processing is executed), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared.
The initial value of the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0" (the interrupt wait monitor register does not store any information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated).

Next, we will explain the interrupt registers that manage the interrupt disabled and enabled states.

<Interrupt register>
The interrupt register is a register that is included in the main control chip (for example, the main control CPU).
The interrupt register manages the interrupt-related states (also referred to as interrupt states), that is, the "interrupt disabled state (also referred to as the interrupt disabled section or interrupt disabled period)" and the "interrupt enabled state (also referred to as the interrupt enabled section or interrupt enabled period)." Specifically, the interrupt registers include the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register, and the value of the IFF1 register is used to manage the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state. Therefore, a description of the IFF2 register will be omitted. Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, the interrupt register refers to the IFF1 register.

When the IFF1 register is "0", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and when an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, timer interrupt processing can be executed.
When the IFF1 register is "1", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and even if an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, timer interrupt processing is not executed.
In other words, the interrupt disabled state means that the IFF1 register is "0", and the interrupt enabled state means that the IFF1 register is "1".

The IFF1 register becomes "0" when an instruction that disables interrupts (for example, the "DI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "1" when an instruction that permits an interrupt (for example, an "EI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "0" when the timer interrupt process is executed (either immediately before the timer interrupt process is executed, simultaneously with the timer interrupt process is executed, or immediately after the timer interrupt process is executed).
In other words, the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing refers to the state from the execution of an instruction to prohibit interrupts to the execution of an instruction to allow interrupts, and the interrupt prohibition state accompanying the execution of timer interrupt processing refers to the state from the execution of timer interrupt processing to the execution of an instruction to allow interrupts.
The initial value of the IFF1 register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0." Therefore, the state from when the power is turned on until the instruction that allows interrupts is executed can also be said to be an interrupt disabled state.
On the other hand, the interrupt enabled state refers to a state in which the interrupt is not disabled.

Let's return to the explanation of setting the interrupt mode in the initial settings for the gaming machine's operation in Figure 5. When setting the interrupt mode, a value is stored (set) in the PTC prescaler setting register. For example, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. Next, a value is stored (set) in the PTC counter setting register. For example, "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

In this way, after "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register when the interrupt mode is set, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated cyclically from "125" to "1" as follows: "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → ... Note that after the interrupt mode is set in the initial settings for the gaming machine's operation in Figure 5, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is configured to continue to be updated even when other programs (processes/instructions) are being executed. The timing when the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "125" is referred to as the 8-bit counter PTC value timing out.

After the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to allow interrupts has been issued. Here, the command to allow interrupts is preferably issued after the RAM check process has determined whether the checksums of all RAM are normal (after the power-off recovery data in Figure 5 is normal or recoverable). For example, the command to allow interrupts could be executed by "Start interrupt processing" in Figure 8, or by "Turn on the setting value display LED that displays the saved setting value data" in Figure 10.

In this way, if the 8-bit counter is configured to start updating before the RAM check process (determining whether the RAM before power loss is the same as the RAM after power is restored), the 8-bit counter can be timed out earlier (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register) than if the 8-bit counter update is started after the RAM check process, so timer interrupt processing can be executed without delay when a command is issued to allow an interrupt to be executed after a RAM abnormality is determined.

In this embodiment, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register when setting the interrupt mode, but the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register does not have to be performed. Specifically, it is also possible to set the interrupt period by taking advantage of the fact that the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250" (the initial value is not "0").

For example, if the system clock is configured to be 16 MHz, the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250," so the period of the timer interrupt processing can be appropriately determined by storing any value in the PTC counter setting register. Below are examples of the period of the timer interrupt processing according to the value stored in the PTC counter setting register.
a) When "0" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the timer interrupt processing period can be set to 4 ms (milliseconds).
a) When "128" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the timer interrupt processing period can be set to 2 ms (milliseconds).
c) When "64" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the timer interrupt processing period can be set to 1 ms (millisecond).

In this way, even if the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register is not performed, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be started by executing the process of storing a value in the PTC counter setting register. In other words, if you want to store a value different from the initial value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is preferable to store the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. For example, if a value different from the initial value is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register after storing a value in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is initially updated based on the frequency corresponding to the initial value (250) of the PTC prescaler setting register. If a value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register is then stored, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC will be updated based on the frequency corresponding to the value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. In such a case, the update period of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC will become inconsistent, leading to failure of the main control chip. Therefore, when executing the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, failure of the main control chip can be prevented by storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register will be explained using a simple program example.
42A shows a program for the game progress main processing. The "DI" command is a command for prohibiting maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt prohibiting command). The "EI" command is a command for permitting maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt permitting command).
Additionally, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary commands (programs).

In FIG. 42A, when the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" and interrupts are disabled.
When the subsequent instructions "AAAA", "BBBB", "..." are executed, the IFF1 register remains at "0".
Thereafter, when the "EI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "1" and the interrupt is enabled.
In other words, the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction is an interrupt disabled state.

However, the timer interrupt process is not executable immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "CCCC" instruction, which is the instruction one step ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed.
For example, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the timer interrupt process can be executed after the "CCCC" instruction is executed. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated (even if the interrupt process does not start immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter continues to be updated.
With this configuration, even if the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts is executed, the interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example) is executed, so that the instruction following the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts can be executed reliably. Specifically, a return instruction (an instruction for executing a program at a return address) such as a "RET" instruction may be used as the instruction following the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts, and even if there is an instruction that permits interrupts, the timer interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction is executed, so that the instruction following the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts can be executed reliably.

In addition, examples of commands to prohibit interrupts and commands to allow interrupts in the game progress main process include:
a) When sending a command from the main control means to the sub-control means, a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing the command to a memory area in RAM, and then a command to allow interrupts is executed. b) When turning the blocker ON (medal acceptance permitted state), a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing information to turn the blocker ON to a memory area in RAM and a process of writing information to turn the medal insertion permitted lamp on to a memory area in RAM, and then a command to allow interrupts is executed. c) When turning the blocker OFF (medal acceptance refused state), a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing information to turn the blocker OFF to a memory area in RAM and a process of writing information to turn the medal insertion permitted lamp off to a memory area in RAM, and then a command to allow interrupts is executed.
In addition, when providing an instruction to prohibit an interrupt and an instruction to permit an interrupt, the instructions are not limited to the above-mentioned a) to c), and an instruction to prohibit an interrupt and an instruction to permit an interrupt may be provided as appropriate.

Such an interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is provided to prevent, for example, RAM data from being changed or a process involving a malfunction based on RAM data from being executed due to the execution of a timer interrupt process while a process consisting of multiple commands (command A, command B, ..., command Z) is being executed.
In addition, the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is set to the interrupt prohibition state by an instruction that prohibits interrupts (for example, a DI instruction), and set to the interrupt permitting state by an instruction that permits interrupts (for example, an EI instruction), but interrupts may be prohibited by an instruction other than the above-mentioned DI instruction, and interrupts may be permitted by an instruction other than the above-mentioned EI instruction.

Figure 42 (B) shows an interrupt processing program. As with Figure 42 (A), the "EI" instruction is an instruction (referred to as an instruction to enable interrupts) to enable maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing), and "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", and "..." are optional instructions (programs). The "RETI" instruction is an instruction (return instruction) to end timer interrupt processing, and corresponds to, for example, "RETURN" in Figure 7.

When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing can be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the IFF1 register becomes "0". This makes it possible to prevent the next timer interrupt processing from being executed during timer interrupt processing. Note that the "DI" instruction is not required when starting timer interrupt processing.
Furthermore, when the timer interrupt processing ends, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the interrupt processing, i.e., immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to change from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction sets the IFF1 register to "1." Note that this "EI" instruction corresponds to "save the interrupt enable flag ON" in FIG. 7.
The IFF1 register also becomes "1" in the "RETI" instruction that follows the "EI" instruction.
In other words, the period from the start of the timer interrupt process to the "EI" command is an interrupt disabled state.

However, the timer interrupt process is not executable immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "RETI" instruction, which is the instruction immediately preceding the "EI" instruction, is executed.
For example, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing during the period from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the timer interrupt processing is configured to become executable after the "RETI" instruction is executed. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing during the period from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated (even if the interrupt processing does not start immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter continues to be updated.
In this way, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" command, the timer interrupt process can be executed, and if the interrupt wait monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" command, the game progress main process can be executed. Therefore, even if the "EI" command that permits an interrupt is executed, the interrupt process is not executed until the next command, "RETI," is executed, thereby preventing the next timer interrupt process from being executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, using (1) in Figure 43, we will explain the relationship between the timer interrupt processing and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is no interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing.
When "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored as a value in the PTC counter setting register, "m" is stored in the 8-bit counter PTC, and then when an update cycle arrives, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated by 1, such as "m-1", ..., "2", "1", "m", "m-1", "m-2", ... In this way, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC cycles between "m" and "1".

At timing t1, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "m." In other words, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). This is because the IFF1 register is "1." When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing may be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t2. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

The value of the 8-bit counter PTC can also be updated when the 8-bit counter PTC update period arrives, even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. This configuration allows the 8-bit counter PTC to be updated regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, making it possible to execute timer interrupt processing at a fixed interval.

Next, using Figure 43 (2), we will explain the relationship between the timer interrupt processing and the 8-bit counter PTC when interrupts are disabled during the game progress main processing.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out in an interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, a command to allow interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts allowed).
Since information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at timing t3, the timer interrupt process can be executed after one instruction in the game progress main process is executed based on the instruction that allows the game progress main process to interrupt. When the timer interrupt process is executed (when executed, this can be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t4. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

As in Figure 43 (1), the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the 8-bit counter PTC update period arrives, even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, making it possible to execute timer interrupt processing at a fixed period.

In addition, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the 8-bit counter PTC update period arrives, even if the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-prohibited state. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated even if the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-prohibited state, allowing timer interrupt processing to be executed at regular intervals.

Next, using <Example (1) Showing the Execution Timing of Timer Interrupt Processing> in Figure 44, we will explain the interrupt period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out while interrupts are disabled in the game progress main processing. The normal period of timer interrupt processing (the period from when the 8-bit counter PTC times out to the next time the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is defined as "T". Measurement of "T" (updating the 8-bit counter PTC) begins after a value is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-disabled state, timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out in an interrupt-disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, a command to permit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts prohibited) to "1" (interrupts permitted).
Since information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at timing t3, the timer interrupt process can be executed after one instruction in the game progress main process is executed based on the instruction that allows the game progress main process to interrupt. When the timer interrupt process is executed (when executed, this can be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t4. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

At timing t5, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). This is because the IFF1 register is "1." When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing may be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t6. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

At timing t7, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). This is because the IFF1 register is "1." When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing may be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t8. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the period from timing t2 to timing t5 is T. Similarly, the period from timing t5 to timing t7 is T. For example, if timing t2 is "n×T (n is a natural number)," timing t5 can be expressed as "(n+1)×T." Furthermore, timing t7 can be expressed as "(n+2)×T."
Furthermore, the timing of t3 can be expressed as "a specific timing after 'n×T' and before '(n+1)×T'."

First, let's look at the timer interrupt processing executed at timing t3. The timer interrupt processing executed at timing t3 was originally supposed to be executed at timing t2, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing. In other words, if timing t2 had not been a time when interrupts were prohibited in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing would have been executed at timing t2. In other words, because timing t2 was a time when interrupts were prohibited in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing was executed at timing t3, when interrupts were subsequently permitted.

Next, let us focus on the timer interrupt process executed at time t5. The timer interrupt process executed at time t5 is executed before "T" has elapsed since time t3. In other words, measurement of the interrupt period "T" has not started from time t3. The timer interrupt process executed at time t5 is configured to be executed when T has elapsed since time t2. In other words, it is configured to be executed based on the timeout of the 8-bit counter PTC, which continues to update the count even when the timer interrupt process is not executed (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register).
In this way, when the timing of t2 is "n×T", the timing of t3 is "a specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T", and the timing of t4 is "(n+1)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t5. In other words, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable at the timing of t5.

Similarly, the timer interrupt process executed at timing t7 is configured to be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register).
In this way, when the timing of t2 is "n×T", the timing of t3 is "a specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T", the timing of t4 is "(n+1)×T", and the timing of t7 is "(n+2)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t7. In other words, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable at the timing of t7.

As described above, even if a timer interrupt process cannot be executed at the original timer interrupt process period (n x T) due to an interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process, the timer interrupt process after that timer interrupt process can be restored to a state where the timer interrupt process can be executed when the original timer interrupt process period arrives (x x T (where "x" is a natural number)). This can reduce the impact on timer measurements executed within the timer interrupt process (longer timer measurement timing), for example.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing when the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times when the IFF1 register is set to 0, using <Example (2) showing the execution timing of the timer interrupt processing> in Figure 44.

<Example (2) Showing the Execution Timing of Timer Interrupt Processing> shows what happens when the main game progress processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time while interrupts are disabled in the main game progress processing. Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated at normal intervals.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-disabled state, timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out in an interrupt-disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, the 8-bit counter PTC times out again. However, because the interrupt wait monitor register still stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt wait monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated again. The 8-bit counter continues to update after that.

At timing t4, a command to permit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts prohibited) to "1" (interrupts permitted).
Since information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at timing t4, the timer interrupt process can be executed after executing one instruction in the game progress main process based on the instruction that allows the game progress main process to interrupt. When the timer interrupt process is executed (when executed, this can be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t5, the timer interrupt processing ends and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. Specifically, by executing an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), terminates the timer interrupt processing.

At timing t6, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). This is because the IFF1 register is "1." When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing may be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t7. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

As such, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice (multiple times) between timing t1 and timing t4, the interrupt wait monitor register will only store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated once. Note that Figure 44 shows an example in which the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice while the interrupts are disabled. However, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out three or four times while the interrupts are disabled, the interrupt wait monitor register will only store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated once. After the interrupt disable state ends, the timer interrupt process is executed once based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times while the interrupts are disabled, the number of timeouts is not counted.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n" times ("n" is 2 or more) while in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is configured not to be executed "n" times consecutively (repeatedly) after the state changes from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being repeated multiple times in succession after the interrupt permission state is changed to the interrupt permission state, and the game progress main processing from being unable to be executed during that time.

Note that in <Example (2) Showing the Execution Timing of Timer Interrupt Processing> in Figure 44, this shows a case where the game progress main processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time while the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-disabled state. Similarly, even if the timer interrupt processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time while the timer interrupt processing is in an interrupt-disabled state, and the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n" (where "n" is 2 or greater) while the timer interrupt processing is in an interrupt-disabled state, the timer interrupt processing is configured so that it is not executed "n" consecutive times (repeatedly) (it is executed only once) after the state changes from the interrupt-disabled state to the interrupt-enabled state.

<Program design processing time>
A program is a program consisting of multiple instructions. In this case, the designed processing time from the start of a program to its end can be calculated from the types of instructions from the instruction related to the start of the program (e.g., instruction A) to the instruction related to the end of the program (e.g., instruction Z).

First, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated from the number of states required to execute one instruction and the system clock frequency. Specifically, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated by multiplying the system clock frequency by the number of states. Note that the number of states can be read as the number of clocks.
Below, the time required to execute one instruction will be explained using a specific instruction when a 16 MHZ system clock is used.
(A) DI
Instruction: Instruction to disable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(a) EI
Instruction content: Instruction to allow interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(C) DEC (HL)
Contents of the instruction: Subtract 1 from the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register.
Number of states: 11 states Time required to execute an instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 11 = 0.6875 μS (microseconds)

In this way, even when the same system clock frequency is used, the time required to execute one instruction may differ depending on the type of instruction. Also, even when different instructions are executed, the time required to execute one instruction may be the same. Note that the above instructions are only a part of the multiple instructions, and there are many other instructions besides the above.
The system clock frequency when the game progress main process is executed is the same as the system clock frequency when the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, for example, the time required to execute the "EI" command in the game progress main process is the same as the time required to execute the "EI" command in the timer interrupt process.

In other words, the designed processing time of a program can be calculated from the total number of states of multiple instructions from the start of the program to the end of the program. Specifically, it can be calculated by multiplying 1/system clock frequency by total number of states. In other words, since the system clock frequency is uniform within a single gaming machine, a program with a larger total number of states will have a longer designed processing time than a program with a smaller total number of states.

<Designed processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The design processing time of the timer interrupt processing is the time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing (for example, until the RETI command is executed). However, because the commands to be executed differ depending on the information stored in the RWM and the progress of the game, even when the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, there will be some variation in the processing time of the timer interrupt processing. In other words, because the commands executed in the timer interrupt processing are not necessarily the same for all timer interrupt processing, the total number of states when one timer interrupt processing is executed will differ. Therefore, when the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, the average time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing is defined as the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing. The design processing time of the timer interrupt processing is sometimes referred to as the time related to the timer interrupt processing.

<Maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The maximum design time for timer interrupt processing is the same as the design processing time for timer interrupt processing in that it is the time from when the timer interrupt processing starts to when it ends. Also, as mentioned above, even when the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, there will be some variation in the processing time for timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing is defined as the time required to execute the instruction with the largest total number of states from when a single timer interrupt processing starts to when it ends. Note that the maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing is sometimes also referred to as the maximum time related to timer interrupt processing.

<Designed processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the design processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is the time from the instruction prohibiting interrupts (e.g., a DI instruction) to the instruction permitting interrupts (e.g., an EI instruction) (also referred to as the processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing) (excluding the state from when the power is turned on to the execution of the instruction permitting interrupts). However, because the instructions executed differ depending on the information stored in RAM and the progress of the game, the total number of states may differ even when the game progress main processing is executed normally. Therefore, the processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing varies to some extent. In other words, because the instructions executed in the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing are not necessarily the same, the total number of states when the interrupt prohibition state is executed in the game progress main processing differs. Therefore, the design processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is defined as the average time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing when the game progress main processing is executed normally.

Furthermore, if there are at least two interrupt prohibited states in the game progress main processing, the design processing time for each interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the longest design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is defined as the design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing. Note that the design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is sometimes referred to as the time associated with the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Maximum design processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing, the time required to execute the command with the largest total number of states from the start of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing to the end of the interrupt prohibited state is set as the maximum design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

Furthermore, if there are at least two interrupt prohibited states in the game progress main processing, the design maximum processing time for each interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the longest design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is designated as the design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited section in the game progress main processing. Note that the design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is sometimes also referred to as the maximum time related to the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the designed processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time for the interrupt-prohibited state in the main game progress processing is "S'", it is preferable to configure it so that T >S' is satisfied.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of multiple timer interrupt periods while the interrupt prohibition state is being executed in the game progress main processing. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed becomes less) due to the influence of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the maximum processing time in the design of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time for the interrupt-prohibited state in the game progress main processing is "S", it is preferable that T > S.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of multiple timer interrupt periods while the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is being executed, compared to when T>S'(S' is the design processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing). In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed becomes fewer) due to the influence of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between timer interrupt period and timer interrupt processing time>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process is "t'", it is preferable that T/2 >t'. In other words, it is preferable to configure the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, when the timer interrupt processing period arrives, the timer interrupt processing is executed, and then the game progress main processing can be executed for a period longer than T/2 until the next timer interrupt processing period arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main processing can be executed from being too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the maximum processing time in the timer interrupt process design>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the maximum processing time in the design of the timer interrupt process is "t", it is preferable that T/2 > t. In other words, it is preferable to configure the maximum processing time in the design of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, compared to when T/2>t'(t' is the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing), it is possible to execute the timer interrupt processing when the timer interrupt processing period arrives, and then execute the game progress main processing for a period longer than T/2 until the next timer interrupt processing period arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main processing can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt processing.

<Types of interrupt processing>
Next, the types of interrupt processing will be explained. Interrupt processing can be broadly divided into maskable interrupt processing (referred to as INT), which is not executed when an interrupt cause occurs in an interrupt disabled state, and non-maskable interrupt processing (referred to as NMI), which is executed even when an interrupt cause occurs in an interrupt disabled state.

<Non-maskable interrupt processing>
When a non-maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU is notified that a non-maskable interrupt has occurred. Upon receiving the notification, the CPU suspends all processing and executes non-maskable interrupt processing with the highest priority. However, even if a non-maskable interrupt has occurred, the non-maskable interrupt processing will not be executed until a CALLEX instruction, which is used when executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, is executed, and then a RETEX instruction, which is used when returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area, is executed. In other words, even if a non-maskable interrupt has occurred while a program in the second program area is being executed by a CALLEX instruction, the non-maskable interrupt processing will not be executed, and the non-maskable interrupt processing will be executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. The CALLEX instruction is different from a normal CALL instruction (call instruction) and is used only when a program in a second program area is executed from a program in a first program area, and is not used when a program in the first program area calls a program in the first program area from a program in the first program area, or when a program in the second program area calls a program in the second program area from a program in the second program area. Therefore, it is also called a special call instruction. The RETEX instruction is different from a normal RET instruction (return instruction) and is used only when a program in the second program area is executed from a program in the first program area with the CALLEX instruction, and then the program in the second program area returns to the program in the first program area. Furthermore, unlike the RET and RETI instructions described above, the RETEX instruction changes the interrupt disabled state to an interrupt enabled state. Even if a non-maskable interrupt occurs between the CALLEX and RETEX instructions, the non-maskable interrupt processing is executed immediately after the RETEX instruction (the next instruction relative to the RETEX instruction). For this reason, the RETEX instruction is also called a special return instruction. As an example of non-maskable interrupt processing, a power outage can be set as the cause of a non-maskable interrupt, and the power outage processing shown in FIG. 6 can be used as non-maskable interrupt processing.

<Maskable interrupt processing>
The main control chip used in this embodiment can execute up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing described above is one type of maskable interrupt processing. For example, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register. Then, based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal, the timer interrupt processing can be executed. As described above, when the interrupts are disabled, the timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed. Furthermore, even if information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register, the timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed until the CALLEX instruction used when executing a program from the first program area to the second program area is executed and then the RETEX instruction used when returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area is executed. In other words, even if a maskable interrupt occurs during the execution of a program in the second program area by the CALLEX instruction, the maskable interrupt processing is not executed, but is executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. Note that in this embodiment, an example will be described in which one type of maskable interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, is used as the maskable interrupt processing.

<Interrupt vector address>
The interrupt vector address refers to the address (also called the start address) where the first program (instruction) of the maskable interrupt process is stored. Specifically, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and timer interrupt processing is executed, the address indicated by the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is first obtained, and then a jump to the obtained address is made to execute the timer interrupt process. For example, if the interrupt vector addresses of the timer interrupt process are addresses 0004h and 0005h (addresses defined by two bytes) and the address where the first instruction of the timer interrupt process is stored (also called the start address of the program of the timer interrupt process) is address 0050h, then addresses 0004h and 0005h store 0050h, the address where the first instruction of the timer interrupt process is stored (actually, 50h is stored at address 0004h and 0005h is stored at address 0005h). When executing timer interrupt processing, a jump is first made to address 0050h, which is determined by addresses 0004h and 0005h, and the instruction at address 0050h (the first instruction of the timer interrupt processing) can be executed.

The interrupt vector address is determined based on the value of the I register and the value set in the program management area (also called the program management region) mounted on the main control board 100. Specifically, the value of the upper byte of the interrupt vector address is determined by the value of the I register, and the value of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address is determined based on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area. For example, if the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 0004h, the upper byte 00h is determined by the value of the I register, and the lower byte 04h is determined by the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area.

<I register>
The I register, also known as the "Interrupt Page Address Register," is one of the registers in the CPU. It can store one byte of data and can set the upper byte of the interrupt vector address. The value of the I register can be freely set by executing an instruction to set it to a specific value. For example, executing an instruction to set the value of the I register to 10h (LD I, 10h) can set the value of the I register to 10h. When the value of the I register is 10h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 10h. Therefore, if the lower address of the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt processing is 04h as set in the interrupt initialization area of the program management area, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt processing will be 1004h. The initial value of the I register is 00h. In other words, if the power is turned off while the value of the I register is 10h and then turned on again, the value of the I register will be 00h. Note that if the power is turned off while the value of the I register is 00h and then turned on again, the value of the I register remains 00h. In this embodiment, no instruction is executed to set the value of the I register to a value other than 00h (the program in the first control area and the program in the second control area do not change the value of the I register from 00h). In other words, in this embodiment, the initial value of 00h is used as the value of the I register. Therefore, compared to executing an instruction to set the value of the I register to a value other than 00h, the program size can be reduced. Furthermore, because the value of the I register is 00h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 00h. In other words, as shown in FIG. 71, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process can be defined in the control area of the use area (the first control area described above).

<Each area of the main control ROM>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the areas stored in the main control ROM in this embodiment. First, addresses 0000h to 11FEh are the control area. This control area is the control area of the usage area (the first control area described above), and various instructions are stored in the control area. The control area also defines the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing. However, as described above, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is an address, not a program. Therefore, when the main control chip is running normally, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is not executed as an instruction. Address 11FF is an unused area. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused area. Addresses 1200h to 1DF6h are the data area. This data area is the data area of the usage area (the first data area described above), and the data area stores lottery tables and the like used (referenced) by the programs (instructions) in the first control area. Addresses 1DF7h to 1FFFh are an unused area. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused area. Addresses 2000h to 245Dh are a control area outside the used area (the second control area described above). Various instructions are stored in the control area outside the used area. Unlike the control area, the control area outside the used area does not have an interrupt vector address defined for timer interrupt processing. Addresses 245Eh to 2526h are a data area. This data area is a data area outside the used area (the second data area described above), and stores tables and the like used (referenced) by programs (instructions) in the second control area. Addresses 3FC0h to 3FFFh are a program management area.

<Program Management Area>
The program management area includes a designated area travel prohibition setting area, which is an area that specifies an area that is not determined to be a program runaway, an interrupt initial setting area, which is an area that specifies the lower address of the vector address, etc. The program management area is sometimes called the program management region.

After the power is turned on and before the first program (the program at address 0000h) starts (before user mode starts, specifically, during security mode), various settings for the main control chip can be made based on the values (information) stored in each area of the program management area. In other words, after setting the area specifying the no-go zone and the initial interrupt setting area, the first program (the program at address 0000h) is executed. Note that security mode involves security checks of the control and data areas of the main control ROM, inspection of the program management area, and settings based on the program management area. If security mode subsequently determines there is no abnormality, the system transitions to user mode. In other words, programs are executed sequentially, starting with the program (instruction) at address 0000h in the control area. On the other hand, if security mode determines there is an abnormality (for example, if the value set in the program management area is abnormal), the system does not transition to user mode. In other words, the system stops without executing the program (instruction) at address 0000h in the control area (the main control chip stops control).

<No driving outside designated area>
The areas for prohibiting driving outside the designated area include a program code end address 1 setting area, a program code start address 2 setting area, and a program code end address 2 setting area. For example, the program code end address 1 setting area is made up of a two-byte area at addresses 3F03h and 3F04h, the program code start address 2 setting area is made up of a two-byte area at addresses 3F05h and 3F06h, and the program code end address 2 setting area is made up of a two-byte area at addresses 3F07h and 3F08h.

In this embodiment, the control area extends from addresses 0000h to 11FEh, and the control area outside the used area extends from addresses 2000h to 245Dh. Therefore, the program code end address 1 setting area is set to 11FEh, the last address of the control area. The program code start address 2 setting area is set to 2000h, the first address of the control area outside the used area. The program code end address 2 setting area is also set to 245Dh, the last address of the control area outside the used area. Note that the first address of the control area, 0000h, is not set. Even if the first address of the control area, 0000h, is not set, the program code start address 1 for program code end address 1 will be 0000h. The above settings prevent a reset from occurring when executing (fetching instructions from) addresses 0000h to 11FEh. Furthermore, a reset can be prevented when executing (fetching instructions from) a program from addresses 2000h to 245Dh. On the other hand, a reset can be prevented when the CPU attempts to execute (fetch instructions from) a program outside the area set in the designated area travel prohibition setting area. For example, a reset occurs when attempting to execute (fetch instructions from) a program at address 11FFh (unused area) in this embodiment. If a reset occurs, the power remains on, the registers are initialized, and the process starts from before user mode begins (specifically, security mode), and various settings for the main control chip are made based on the values (information) stored in each area of the program management area. After executing security mode, if no abnormality is detected in security mode, programs can be executed sequentially starting from the first program (the program (instruction) at address 0000h). In this way, simply setting the last address of the control area can make the control area a designated area that is not subject to reset. Setting the first and last addresses of the control area outside the use area can make the control area a designated area that is not subject to reset. In other words, instead of setting four addresses, you can set two areas (designated areas) that will not be reset by setting only three addresses. By configuring it in this way, you can reduce the storage area required for the program management area.

<Interrupt initial setting area>
The interrupt initial setting area is an area where the lower address of the interrupt vector address is set. In other words, it is an area where part of the interrupt vector address is set. Specifically, the interrupt initial setting area is composed of a 1-byte area at address 3FDAh. The details of the interrupt initial setting address will be explained using FIG. 72.

72A is a diagram for explaining the interrupt initial setting area, which is made up of a 1-byte storage area from bit D0 to bit D7.
The interrupt priority is set using two bits, D0 bit and D1 bit. Details of the interrupt priority will be described later, but in this embodiment, the D1 bit is set to 0 and the D0 bit is set to 1 (01b is set). By setting 01b as the interrupt priority, the lower four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are automatically assigned a value corresponding to 01b (details will be described later). In other words, simply by setting the value of two bits, the lower four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address can be set. Note that in this embodiment, the interrupt priority is set to 01b, but any value, such as 00b, 10b, or 11b, can be set, and the lower four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address can be set based on the value of the two bits.
Fixed values are set for the D2 and D3 bits. In this embodiment, the D2 bit is set to 0 and the D3 bit is set to 0 as fixed values (00b is set). Note that if the fixed values are not set to 00b or if they are set to a value other than 00b due to noise or the like, the power is turned on and an abnormality is detected in the security mode before the user mode, and the user mode is not started. If a predetermined fixed value is not set, there is a high possibility that the ROM is abnormal, so by not starting the user mode (not executing the program start process in an abnormal state), it is possible to prevent disadvantages to the gaming parlor and players.
The four bits D4 to D7 are used to set the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address. In this embodiment, the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b. Note that in this embodiment, the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b (0h), but this is not limiting and they can be set to any value, such as 1000h (8h) or 1111b (Fh).

FIG. 72B is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt priority and automatic allocation.
As described above, the main control chip used in this embodiment is capable of executing up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. Specifically, six types of maskable interrupt processing are possible: "PTC0" to "PTC2,""RX0" to "RX1," and "XINT." In a gaming machine capable of executing multiple (at least two) of these maskable interrupt processing, the interrupt priority determines which maskable interrupt processing takes priority when multiple interrupt factors occur simultaneously. "Priority A" is the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt priorities decrease from "Priority A" to "Priority F" in descending order. In other words, "Priority F" is the lowest interrupt priority. "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used in timer interrupt processing, and "PTC2" in particular corresponds to the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. In addition, the interrupt priorities "00b", "01b", "10b", and "11b" correspond to the values (interrupt priorities) set in the D0 and D1 bits shown in FIG. 72(A).

For example, if 01b is set in the area for setting the interrupt priority level in the interrupt initial setting area, as shown in Figure 72 (B), a) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC0 will be automatically assigned to 0000b, b) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC1 will be automatically assigned to 0010b, c) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC2 will be automatically assigned to 0100b, d) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of XINT will be automatically assigned to 0110b, e) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of RX0 will be automatically assigned to 1000b, and f) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of RX1 will be automatically assigned to 1010b. In other words, when PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the main control chip automatically assigns the four lowest bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing to 0100b (4h). Also, for example, when 10b is set in the area for setting the interrupt priority in the interrupt initial setting area and PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the main control chip automatically assigns the four lowest bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing to 1000b (8h).
As described above, the lower four bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing can be set to 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), or 1010b (Ah).

As mentioned above, the value of the upper four bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address can be set to any value between 0000b (0h) and 1111b (Fh), and the value of the lower four bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address can be set to 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), or 1010b (Ah). In other words, the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing can be set to any value between 00h and FAh depending on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area. For example, if the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to 04h based on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing will be 0004h (and 0005h). Also, if the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process is set to 84h based on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process will be 0084h (and 0085h). While details will be omitted, it should be noted that the interrupt vector addresses for the multiple maskable interrupt processes mentioned above can be determined depending on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area.

<Relationship between power-on processing and timer interrupt processing interrupt vector addresses>
FIG. 73 shows the relationship between the interrupt vector addresses of the power-on process and the timer interrupt process. Addresses 0000h to 0003h store a portion of the power-on process, which is the first program executed when the power is turned on. Addresses 0004h and 0005h store the interrupt vector addresses of the timer interrupt process. Addresses xxxxh (xxxx is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to XXXXh (XXXX is a predetermined hexadecimal value) store the timer interrupt process. Addresses yyyyh (yyyy is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to YYYYh (YYYY is a predetermined hexadecimal value) store the continuation of the power-on process. Note that the areas enclosed by dashed lines are assumed to store other programs (instructions).

As is clear from Figure 73, the power-on process begins at address 0000h and continues up to address 0003h. The continuation of the power-on process is configured to begin at address yyyyh. Specifically, addresses 0001h to 0003h store a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh (since this jump instruction is a 3-byte instruction, it uses the program area from addresses 0001h to 0003h). The power-on process corresponds to the program start process in Figure 5. In addition, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process is stored between addresses 0003h and yyyyh. In other words, the instructions that make up the power-on process are configured so that they are not stored in consecutive addresses. This configuration allows game parlor staff to know that the power-on process is occurring in an unstable voltage state. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable, and it is possible that the program (instructions) will not be executed correctly (the main control chip will not start up normally). In such a case, if the instructions that make up the power-on process are configured as a series, for example, one instruction that makes up the power-on process may not be executed, but the instruction stored in the address next to that instruction may be executed, resulting in abnormal program behavior. In other words, there is a risk that an error unexpected by players or game parlor staff may occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between part of the power-on process and the continuation of part of the power-off process, for example, if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) that changes the program following address 0003h to address yyyyh is not executed normally (if the instruction at address 0004h is executed), it will take longer to execute the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards (or the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards will not be executed) than if the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) that changes the program following address 0003h to address yyyyh is executed normally. In other words, for example, if there is a program (command) after address yyyyh for determining whether to transition to setting change mode ("Setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" in Figure 5), the time to transition to setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or no transition to setting change mode will occur) if the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is not executed correctly, compared to when the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is executed correctly. Therefore, after turning the power on, the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage was unstable when the machine started up, based on whether the time it took to transition to setting change mode was abnormal.

Note that the addresses shown in Figure 73 are merely examples, and addresses 0000h to 0003h are used to store part of the power-on process, which is the program executed first when the power is turned on. However, addresses 0000h to 0007h may also be used to store part of the power-on process, which is the program executed first when the power is turned on. Similarly, the interrupt vector addresses for the timer interrupt process are stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h, but any value smaller than address yyyyh, which is the address following the power-on process program, may be used. For example, if addresses 0000h to 0007h are used to store part of the power-on process, which is the program executed first when the power is turned on, and address yyyyh is set to 1000h, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process may be set to address 0064h, etc. In other words, if a jump command is stored at address A as the power-on processing program and the power-on processing program continues from address B, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt processing may be stored (defined) between addresses A and B. Also, although address xxxxh is set to a smaller value than address yyyyh, address xxxxh may be set to a larger value than address yyyyh. Also, although the vector address for the timer interrupt processing is set to a smaller value than address xxxxh, the vector address for the timer interrupt processing may be set to a larger value than address xxxxh. Also, although the dashed line portion has been described as other programs (instructions), data other than programs (instructions) (other interrupt vector addresses or unused data (data in which 00000000b is stored)) may be stored instead.

Furthermore, the determination of whether to transition to setting change mode was given as an example of processing after address yyyyh, but even with processing (not shown) to output an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power has been turned on as processing after address yyyyh, the designed time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instructions) is being executed normally (or the external signal is not output), so the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state by determining whether the time until the security signal was output was abnormal. Similarly, the processing after address yyyyh could be the first of multiple "interrupt permission instructions (also called interrupt permission instructions)" since the power-on process began. With this configuration, the designed time until the timer interrupt process can be executed is longer than when the program (instructions) are running normally (or the timer interrupt process is not executed at all). Therefore, the gaming parlor staff can determine whether the voltage was started up in an unstable state by checking whether the timing of the timer interrupt process to display the number of credits (illumination of the credit number display), the timing of the MAX BET lamp, or the timing of the medal insertion possible lamp is abnormal. It should be noted that, once the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to allow the interrupt is issued. Here, the interrupt mode can be set for processing after address yyyyh, or for processing the address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Relationship between the interrupt vector addresses of the power-on process and timer interrupt process and other programs>
<Pattern 1> in Figure 74 shows the relationship between the interrupt vector addresses of the power-on process and the timer interrupt process and other programs. Various explanations will be made using this <Pattern 1>. Addresses 0000h to 0003h store part of the power-on process, which is the first program executed when the power is turned on. Addresses 0004h and 0005h store the interrupt vector addresses of the timer interrupt process. Address 0008h stores the first process. Address 0010h stores the second process. Address 0018h stores the third process. Address 0020h stores the fourth process. Address 0028h stores the fifth process. Address 0030h stores the sixth process. Address 0038h stores the seventh process. Address 0040h stores the eighth process. The timer interrupt process is stored in addresses xxxxh (xxxx is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to XXXXh (XXXX is a predetermined hexadecimal value). The continuation of the power-on process is stored in addresses yyyyh (yyyy is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to YYYYh (YYYY is a predetermined hexadecimal value). Note that the areas enclosed by dashed lines are where other programs (commands) are stored.

Here, the first process, second process, third process, fourth process, fifth process, sixth process, seventh process, and eighth process refer to processes (programs) called by a special call instruction (RST instruction). Unlike a normal call instruction (CALL instruction), the special call instruction (RST instruction) is an instruction used to call a program (instruction) at a specific address (0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, 0040h), and is an instruction that can call a program (instruction) with a smaller program capacity and shorter processing time (fewer number of states) than a normal call instruction (CALL instruction). For example, the following comparison is made between using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) and using a special call instruction (RST instruction) when calling the first process starting from 0008h.
A) When calling a program at address 0008h using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction): CALL 0008h (Program size: 3 bytes, number of states: 5)
a) When calling a program at address 0008h using a special call instruction (RST instruction): RST 08h (Program size: 1 byte, number of states: 4)
As described above, calling the program (instruction) at the specific address using the special instruction (RST instruction) can reduce the program size to half or less compared to calling the program (instruction) at the specific address using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction). Furthermore, the processing time required to call the program (instruction) at the specific address can also be shortened. Therefore, it is preferable that at least one of the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth processes called (executed) by the special call instruction (RST instruction) be a process that is called multiple times between an operation to start a game (e.g., turning on the start switch) and an operation to start the next game (e.g., turning on the start switch). In other words, it is preferable that at least one of the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth processes be a process that is called frequently. In this way, by configuring processes that are called frequently to be called using a special call instruction (RST instruction), the program size can be reduced by using the special call instruction (RST instruction) rather than using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction).

Furthermore, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh processes called (executed) by the special call instruction (RST instruction) are preferably configured as programs of 8 bytes or less. For example, if the first process is an 8-byte program, the program (instructions) of the first process are stored at addresses 0008h to 000Fh. On the other hand, if the first process is a 4-byte program, the program (instructions) of the first process are stored at addresses 0008h to 000Bh. If the first process is a 4-byte program, the addresses 000Ch to 000Fh may be defined as follows:
Example 1) Addresses 000Ch to 000Fh are set as unused areas (00000000b is stored).
Example 2) Another process (another program) of 4 bytes or less is stored in addresses 000Ch to 000Fh. Here, the other process is called by a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) rather than a special call instruction (RST instruction).

In the above example, the first process is a 4-byte program, but the same applies if the first process is not a 4-byte program but an X-byte program (X is a number less than 8). Also, while the first process at address 0008h is used as an example, the above example is not limited to address 0008h and can also be applied to the second process at address 0010h, the third process at address 0018h, the fourth process at address 0020h, the fifth process at address 0028h, the sixth process at address 0030h, and the seventh process at address 0038h.

Also, for example, if the first process at address 0008h is a 15-byte program from addresses 0008h to 0016h, it is possible not to provide a second process called by a special call instruction (RST instruction). However, if the process called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it at address 0040h, which is the last address (the address with the highest value) that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) (defined as the eighth process in this embodiment). In other words, for the process stored at address 0040h (the eighth process in this embodiment), there are no addresses after 0040h that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction), so there is no problem even if it exceeds 8 bytes. By configuring it in this way, eight processes (the same number as the maximum number of processes that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction)) can be stored as processes that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction).

Note that addresses 0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, and 0040h are used as addresses storing processes (programs) called by special call instructions (RST instructions), but these eight addresses are merely examples and are not limited to these. However, it is preferable that the upper byte of the addresses storing processes called by special call instructions (RST instructions) be 00h. This configuration allows frequently called processes to be located near the top address (0000h), allowing frequently called processes to be designed first during the development phase and other processes to be designed later. Furthermore, while a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) is an instruction that is used (stored) both within the control area and in a control area outside the use area, it is preferable that a special call instruction (RST instruction) is an instruction that is used (stored) within the control area but not used (stored) in a control area outside the use area. By configuring it in this way, when a developer or a third party checks the program, they can tell at a glance that an area with a special call instruction (RST instruction) is a control area, and an area without a special call instruction is a control area outside the use area.

Furthermore, two examples of processes (programs) called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) are shown, but the processes are not limited to the following and can be configured as various processes.
Example 1) Command set processing Contents: 1) Disable interrupts. 2) Call and execute the process of writing information to be sent to the sub-control means in the RWM area of the main control means using a normal call command (CALL command). 3) Enable interrupts.
Examples of call locations: When sending information indicating that the reels have started spinning. When sending information to the sub-control means indicating that all reels have stopped. When sending the type of error. When sending a setting value. When the start lever is operated and the performance group number is sent, etc.
Example 2) Interrupt wait processing Contents: 1) Determine whether or not timer interrupt processing has been executed. 2-1) If it is determined that timer interrupt processing has not been executed, return to 1). 2-2) If it is determined that timer interrupt processing has been executed, terminate the processing.
Example of a call location: To clear the rising data indicating that a specific switch (setting switch, 1 bet switch, etc.) has been operated.

As described above, the power-on process begins at address 0000h and continues up to address 0003h. The continuation of the power-on process is configured to begin at address yyyyh. Specifically, a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) is executed, causing the program following address 0003h to become address yyyyh (since this jump instruction is a three-byte instruction, it uses the program area from addresses 0001h to 0003h). The power-on process corresponds to the program start process in Figure 5. Also, between addresses 0003h and yyyyh, processes called by special call instructions (RST instructions) and interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing are stored. In other words, the instructions that make up the power-on process are configured not to be stored in consecutive addresses. This configuration allows game parlor staff to know that the system is starting up in an unstable voltage environment. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable, and it is possible that the program (instructions) will not be executed correctly (the main control chip will not start up normally). In such a case, if the instructions that make up the power-on process are configured as a series, for example, the next instruction following a certain instruction may be executed without executing another instruction that makes up the power-on process, resulting in the program being executed in an abnormal manner. In other words, there is a risk that an error unexpected by the player or the gaming facility staff may occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between part of the power-on process and the continuation of part of the power-off process, for example, if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) that changes the program following address 0003h to address yyyyh is not executed normally (if the instruction at address 0004h is executed), it will take longer to execute the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards (or the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards will not be executed) than if the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) that changes the program following address 0003h to address yyyyh is executed normally. In other words, for example, if there is a program (command) after address yyyyh for determining whether to transition to setting change mode ("Setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" in Figure 5), the time to transition to setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or no transition to setting change mode will occur) if the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is not executed correctly, compared to when the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is executed correctly. Therefore, after turning the power on, the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage was unstable when the machine started up, based on whether the time it took to transition to setting change mode was abnormal.

Note that the addresses listed in <Pattern 1> in Figure 74 are merely examples, and addresses 0000h to 0003h are used to store part of the power-on process, which is the program executed first when the power is turned on. However, addresses 0000h to 0007h may also be used to store part of the power-on process, which is the program executed first when the power is turned on, as in <Pattern 2> in Figure 74. Similarly, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process is stored at address 0004h, but any value smaller than address yyyyh, which is the address following the power-on process program, may be used. For example, if addresses 0000h to 0007h are used to store part of the power-on process, which is the program executed first when the power is turned on, and address yyyyh is set to 1000h, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process may be set to address 0064h, etc. In other words, if a jump instruction is stored at address A as the power-on processing program and the power-on processing program continues from address B, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing or the processing called by a special call instruction (RST instruction) may be stored (defined) between addresses A and B. Also, while address xxxxh is set to a value smaller than address yyyyh, address xxxxh may be set to a value larger than address yyyyh. Also, while the dashed line area is described as another program (instruction), data other than a program (instruction) (another interrupt vector address or unused data (data where 00000000b is stored)) may be stored therein. Also, while the vector address of the timer interrupt processing is set to a value smaller than address xxxxh, the vector address of the timer interrupt processing may be set to a value larger than address xxxxh.

Furthermore, the determination of whether to transition to setting change mode was given as an example of processing after address yyyyh, but even with processing (not shown) to output an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power has been turned on as processing after address yyyyh, the designed time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instructions) is being executed normally (or the external signal is not output), so the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state by determining whether the time until the security signal was output was abnormal. Similarly, the processing after address yyyyh could be the first of multiple "interrupt permission instructions (also called interrupt permission instructions)" since the power-on process began. With this configuration, the designed time until the timer interrupt process can be executed is longer than when the program (instructions) are running normally (or the timer interrupt process is not executed at all). Therefore, the gaming parlor staff can determine whether the voltage was started up in an unstable state by checking whether the timing of the timer interrupt process to display the number of credits (illumination of the credit number display), the timing of the MAX BET lamp, or the timing of the medal insertion possible lamp is abnormal. It should be noted that, once the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to allow the interrupt is issued. Here, the interrupt mode can be set for processing after address yyyyh, or for processing the address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Stage change effects>
In this embodiment, the device is configured to be able to execute a stage change effect (sometimes referred to as a switching effect) that switches between effect stages that can be displayed on the LCD. The effect stages include multiple types of effect stages, such as a normal stage and a high-probability stage that suggests a high-probability state in which the probability of winning the AT is higher than that of the normal stage. The device is configured to execute a stage change effect when transitioning from one effect stage to another. This stage change effect allows for smooth switching between effect stages. The device is configured to have multiple types of stage change effects, and the selection rate of the effect stage to be transitioned to varies depending on the type of stage change effect (for example, a specific stage change effect may increase the likelihood of transitioning to a high-probability stage compared to a specific stage change effect, or a specific stage change effect may always transition to a high-probability stage). The type of stage change effect may also be configured to suggest a stay mode (details are omitted, but the probability of winning the AT and the ceiling number of games until the AT is won vary depending on the stay mode) or a setting value. It is also configured to be able to execute performances corresponding to the performance stage (displaying a background image (still image or moving image) on the LCD screen, outputting background music from the speaker, lighting patterns of specified lamps, lighting colors of specified lamps, etc.).

Figure 45 shows an example of a stage change presentation in this embodiment, configured to display UI image A (also referred to as the first UI image), UI image B (also referred to as the second UI image), and UI image C (also referred to as the third UI image) as UI images (sometimes referred to as UI displays, UIs, or game information images). A UI image is an image that can be displayed on the LCD screen in the same (or similar) display format and in the same display area across multiple presentation stages, and information that allows the player to understand the status of the game is displayed as a UI image.

Here we will explain UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C in detail.

UI image A is an image showing the name of the stage. In Figure 45 (1), the words "Beach Stage" are framed, but they may also consist of just the text without a frame.

UI image B is an image that shows the current number of credits. For example, when the MAX BET switch is pressed and the MAX BET process is executed when the number of credits displayed is "50," UI image B is configured to display "50 → 49 → 48 → 47," updating one by one at a speed that the player can see. It is also possible to display only the number of credits after the MAX BET process, such as "50 → 47."

UI image C is an image that shows the payout number for one game. For example, when a payout of "10" is made in one game, UI image C is displayed in the following manner: (1) "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 9 → 10," updated one by one at a speed that is visible to the player. It may also be configured to display only the payout number, such as "0 → 10." It may also be configured to display the payout number for a predetermined period of time (e.g., three seconds) and then display "0," or it may be configured to continue displaying the payout number and then display "0" when a bet operation for the next game is made (or when operation of the start switch 12 for the next game is accepted).

In addition to these, various other types of UI images may be displayed, such as the number of games played in one AT, the number of games remaining, predetermined points used for games (for example, points can be accumulated according to the number of games played or winning combinations, and an AT lottery is held when 1000 points are reached), the number of games played in normal games, character displays, and an outline for displaying a push order navigation image during the AT.

The LCD is also configured to display a background image corresponding to the current presentation stage, and in Figure 45 (1) a background image corresponding to the beach stage is displayed. Furthermore, the UI image is configured to have a higher display priority (displayed in the foreground) than the background image, so the visibility of the UI image is not reduced by the background image, allowing the player to grasp the status of the game at any time.

The type of UI image that can be displayed on the LCD screen may be changed depending on the game status (normal zone, advantageous zone, RT state, AT, non-AT, chance zone, high probability state, bonus, etc.), or the display mode of the UI image may be changed. In other words, the UI image that can be displayed on the LCD screen may be changed as appropriate depending on the game status. In this way, the current game status can be easily understood from the UI image.

The flow of the stage change effect in this embodiment will be described.
First, in (1) of FIG. 45 , the current presentation stage is the beach stage, and the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), starting a new game. Next, the background image and UI image are blacked out (dimmed) from outside the display area of the LCD, from (2) → (3) → (4), and a black image is displayed across the entire display area of the LCD, making the background image and UI image invisible. (This can be achieved by displaying a black image in front of the background image and UI image, or by hiding the background image and UI image and displaying a black image instead.) Then, background images are displayed from inside the display area of the LCD, from (5) → (6) → (7), and a background image corresponding to the presentation stage after the transition (after the stage change) is displayed. Note that UI image A displays "town stage" in correspondence with the presentation stage after the transition. In this way, by making the background image and UI image invisible for at least a portion of the stage change presentation, the player can be directed to which presentation stage the game has transitioned to. Furthermore, even if the display mode of the UI image differs before and after the stage change effect, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity. When the effect stage is switched by executing the stage change effect, the name of the effect stage after the transition may be output from the speaker. For example, in FIG. 45, the sound "town stage," which is the effect stage after the transition, is output.

In this embodiment, it is sufficient that the background image and UI image are configured to be invisible at least at some point during the execution period of the stage change effect (the background image and UI image may be configured to be invisible at all times during the stage change effect), and various methods for making the background image and UI image invisible can be applied as appropriate. Furthermore, during the period when the background image and UI image are invisible (for example, the period (4) in Figure 45), a predetermined image (for example, an image of a predetermined character or an image of a title logo) may be displayed to create a chance-up pattern stage change effect that is relatively more advantageous to the player than a normal stage change effect (such as a high probability of winning the transition lottery to the AT, or a high probability of transitioning to a high-probability state where the probability of winning the transition lottery to the AT is high). The chance-up pattern stage change effect and the normal stage change effect may be different types of stage change effect, or they may be similar stage change effects with some differences in the presentation style.

In this embodiment, the execution period of a stage change effect (the time required from start to finish) is configured so that the execution period of a normal stage change effect and the execution period of a chance-up pattern stage change effect are the same. This configuration makes it possible to make the execution end timing of the effects the same for normal stage change effects and chance-up pattern stage change effects, allowing subsequent gameplay to proceed smoothly. The execution period of a chance-up pattern stage change effect may be configured to be longer than the execution period of a normal stage change effect. This configuration makes it possible to prevent chance-up pattern stage change effects from being missed. The execution period of a chance-up pattern stage change effect may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of a normal stage change effect. This configuration gives the player the feeling that the effect ends relatively quickly when a chance-up pattern stage change effect is executed, and this sense of incongruity allows the player to recognize that it is a chance-up pattern stage change effect.

Furthermore, a predetermined stage change effect may be configured to be relatively more advantageous to the player when executed in the second presentation mode than when executed in the first presentation mode (e.g., it is easier to transition to a favorable presentation stage, there is a higher possibility of winning the AT lottery, AT game number increase lottery, or bonus). Furthermore, a predetermined stage change effect may be configured to be relatively more advantageous to the player when it is initiated based on a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, second stop, or third stop) than when it is initiated based on the operation of the start switch 12. Furthermore, the presentation stage and the presentation mode of the stage change effect may be matched (e.g., a stage change effect is executed in the first presentation mode on the first presentation stage, and a stage change effect is executed in the second presentation mode on the second presentation stage), so that a different correspondence is relatively more advantageous to the player than when the correspondence is not different.

The display mode of the UI image (color, shape, size, etc. of the UI image), the display position (display area) of the UI image, whether or not the UI image is displayed, and the type of UI image may be configured to vary depending on the game situation (game state, presentation stage, etc.). For example, in game state A, UI image A and UI image B may be displayed, but in game state B only UI image A may be displayed (or no UI image may be displayed). Alternatively, in game state A, UI image A and UI image B may be displayed, but in game state B UI image C and UI image D (not shown) may be displayed. Furthermore, regarding game state A and game state B, for example, the AT state may be game state A and the non-AT state (or a state in which the frequency of executing push order navigation is relatively low) may be game state B, or a game state with an advantageous zone may be game state A and a game state with a normal zone may be game state B, or a state in which the standby demo screen is being displayed may be game state A and a state in which the standby demo screen is not being displayed may be game state B.

In Figure 45, UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C are displayed, but the number and type of UI images displayed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the aforementioned UI image D may be added, or UI image A may not be displayed and the UI images displayed before and after the stage change effect may be the same. Alternatively, UI image A may not be displayed, and an image indicating the name of the current effect stage may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) after the stage change effect is executed.

In addition, in Figure 45, all UI images are configured to be invisible for at least a portion of the time when a stage change effect is being performed, but it may also be configured so that all or part of any UI image is invisible for at least a portion of the time when a stage change effect is being performed.

Next, the execution start and end timings of the stage change effect in this embodiment will be described.
Here, we will explain the case where operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted before the minimum game time has elapsed since the start of the Nth game, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game.
(1) All reels start to rotate in response to the operation of the start switch 12 for the Nth game. Note that measurement of the minimum game time starts from the timing when all reels start to rotate.
(2) After that, after all the reels have reached a constant speed, operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and all the reels stop when the player operates the left stop switch 13a, the center stop switch 13b, or the right stop switch 13c. The UI image remains displayed during the Nth game (the period from when all the reels start spinning until they stop).
(3) Next, the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is operated, but the reels do not start spinning because the minimum play time has not elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game. Furthermore, a stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game. In other words, even if the minimum play time has not elapsed, a stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game. The stage change effect here is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 45.
(4) After that, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image becomes invisible (for example, as shown in FIG. 45(3)). Note that the UI image continues to be displayed from the Nth game until the UI image becomes invisible due to the stage change effect.
(5) Next, the minimum game time elapses from the start of the reel rotation for the Nth game, and the reel rotation for the N+1th game starts.
(6) Thereafter, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image is displayed in a visible manner, and the UI image continues to be displayed in a visible manner thereafter. Note that depending on the time for executing the stage change effect, the UI image may become visible before the minimum time has elapsed.
(7) After that, the execution of the stage change effect ends.
(8) After that, the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes valid.
Thus, in this embodiment, the stage change effect is executed based on the acceptance of operation of the start switch 12, and is configured to end after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed.

In this way, in this embodiment, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted before the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game, the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is visibly displayed before operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. With this configuration, the stage change effect has ended and the UI image is visibly displayed by the time operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, allowing the player to properly understand the status of the game and proceed with the game without any discomfort.

In addition, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted before a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) less than the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game, and a stage change effect is executed during the N+1th game, the stage change effect may be configured to end and the UI image may be visibly displayed before operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective.On the other hand, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) less than the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game but before the minimum play time has elapsed, and a stage change effect is executed during the N+1th game, the stage change effect may not have ended by the time operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. If the stage change effect were configured to finish executing and the UI image be visibly displayed before the stop switch 13 becomes effective even when the start switch operation for the Nth play is accepted just before the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of the Nth reel spin, the execution period of the stage change effect would be extremely short, and there is a risk that the player will miss the stage change effect. However, by configuring it in this way, the execution period of the stage change effect can be guaranteed, and the stage change effect can be executed appropriately so that the player will not miss it.

Also, even if the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game, the stage change effect may be completed and the UI image may be visibly displayed before the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. By configuring it in this way, the stage change effect will have ended and the UI image will be visible by the time the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, allowing the player to properly understand the game situation and proceed with the game without any discomfort.

Furthermore, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game, the stage change effect may not have finished executing when operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. In this way, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum play time has elapsed, in other words, if the player is not in a hurry to progress with the game, the stage change effect may not have finished executing when operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective, allowing the player to pay more attention to the stage change effect.

The execution timing of one stage change effect may be configured to include the following: execution based on operation of the start switch 12 and ending with the passage of time; execution based on operation of the start switch 12 and ending with a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, second stop, or third stop); execution based on a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, second stop, or third stop) and ending with the passage of time. Furthermore, the execution timing may be configured to differ depending on the type of stage change effect, such as the first stage change effect being executed based on operation of the start switch 12 and ending with the passage of time, while the second stage change effect being executed based on operation of the start switch 12 and ending with a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, second stop, or third stop).

Furthermore, with regard to UI images, while the demo screen is being displayed, all UI images may be configured to be visibly displayed, or UI image A may be configured to be invisible (not displayed or given a lower display priority than the demo screen), while UI image B (an image showing the number of credits) and UI image C (an image showing the number of payouts) are displayed to be visibly displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can properly grasp the status of the game regardless of whether the demo screen is being displayed or not.
Furthermore, the display may be configured so that all UI images are invisible while the demo screen is being displayed, or so that all UI images are visible for a predetermined period of time while the demo screen is being displayed, but are invisible for a specific period of time different from the predetermined period of time while the demo screen is being displayed. By configuring the display in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display of the demo screen.

Also, the system may be configured to execute effect A (which may be an effect that ends with one game or a continuous effect that runs over multiple games) in which the background image corresponding to the effect stage becomes invisible. When effect A is executed in a situation where the beach stage is set as the effect stage, at a predetermined timing after the end of the Nth game when effect A execution ends (such as when the final stop operation is completed, when the final stop operation is performed and processing related to the end of games is completed, when a bet is made for the N+1th game, or when operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted), the background image corresponding to the beach stage is displayed again without executing a stage change effect. When the background image is displayed again (if the background image is a moving image, possible modes include displaying the background image from the beginning or displaying a continuation of the background image displayed before effect A was executed), an image indicating the name of the effect stage may be displayed. Note that the image indicating the name of the effect stage may be displayed as a UI image, or may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) without being a UI image and then disappearing. When the same background image is displayed again, the name of the production stage may be configured not to be output as audio from the speaker, or the name of the production stage may be output as audio from the speaker.

It is also possible to configure the system so that a stage change effect can be executed after effect A has finished executing. In this case, the stage change effect executed at a predetermined timing after effect A has been executed (such as when the final stop operation has finished, when the final stop operation has been performed and processing related to the end of the game has finished, when a bet for the next game has been placed, when operation of the start switch 12 for the next game has been accepted, etc.) and the stage change effect executed under other circumstances may be configured to have different display modes. By configuring the system in this way, for example, if a player starts a new game and a stage change effect that can be executed after effect A has been executed in the first game is executed, the player can know that effect A had been executed up until the previous game, thereby accurately understanding the status of the game.

In addition, even if the image showing the name of the current presentation stage is not configured as a UI image, but is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after a stage change presentation is executed and then hidden, if it is decided that a stage change presentation and the aforementioned presentation A will be executed in one game (in this case, presentation A will be executed after the stage change presentation has finished), the image showing the name of the current presentation stage may be configured not to be displayed. This configuration allows the presentation to be switched appropriately.

In addition, a stage change effect may be implemented at a predetermined timing (such as when the final stop operation is completed, when a bet is placed for the next game, or when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated (pressed)) after the final game in the advantageous zone (a game in which the conditions for terminating the advantageous zone are met and the next game transitions to a game in the normal zone) has ended. This configuration makes it clear that the advantageous zone is transitioning to the normal zone, preventing the player from mistaking that the advantageous zone is continuing.

In addition, a stage change effect may be implemented at a predetermined timing (such as when the final stop operation is completed, when a bet is placed for the next game, or when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated (pressed)) after the final game in the normal zone (a game in which the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met and the game enters the advantageous zone from the next game) has ended. This configuration makes it clear that the game is transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, and prevents players from ending the game even though they are in the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, the presentation stages may be a predetermined presentation stage that is set only in normal zones, and a specific presentation stage that is set only in advantageous zones. When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met in a normal zone where a predetermined presentation stage is set, and a transition to the advantageous zone occurs (such as when the final stop operation is completed, when the final stop operation is performed and processing related to the end of the game is completed, when a bet for the next game is placed, or when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated), a stage change presentation is executed, and a transition from the predetermined presentation stage to a specific presentation stage occurs. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily tell whether or not they have transitioned to the advantageous zone by paying attention to the presentation stage.

The specified presentation stage may also be configured to be set when the power is turned off in a specified situation in which the machine is in a favorable zone and not in an AT state, and is then restored without changing the settings. The stage change presentation is executed within a specified number of plays (e.g., two plays) after the power is turned on, and the machine transitions from the specified presentation stage to a specific presentation stage. In this embodiment, the machine is configured so that play always starts in the normal zone when the setting is changed. This makes it possible to make the presentation stage at the start of play and the subsequent flow of play up to the execution of the stage change presentation similar between when the setting is changed and when it is not, thereby preventing players from easily detecting whether the setting has been changed. In this embodiment, the condition for transitioning to the favorable zone is satisfied when an average of just under two plays are played in the normal zone, so the timing of the first stage change presentation after power is turned on is approximately the same whether the setting is changed or not.

In addition, the stage change effects performed during play in the normal zone and the stage change effects performed during play in the advantageous zone may be configured to have different types of stage change effects (or different presentation styles). By configuring it in this way, it is easy to tell whether the zone is normal or advantageous by visually checking the stage change effects.

Furthermore, in games in which stage change effects are executed, the game may be configured so that effects other than stage change effects are not executed.Furthermore, in games in which stage change effects are executed, the game may be configured so that effects based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not executed except for stage change effects (effects not based on the stop operation may be executed).By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change effects.

The stage change effects may also be configured to have stage change effect A, which can be executed after the end of a predetermined series of effects, and stage change effect B, which can be executed at a time other than the end of the predetermined series of effects. In this case, whether or not stage change effect A can be executed is determined not based on the results of an internal lottery, but whether or not stage change effect B can be executed may be determined based on the results of an internal lottery (the selection rate for whether or not to execute the effect differs depending on the results of the internal lottery). Note that stage change effect A and stage change effect B may be configured to have different or identical performance aspects.

Next, the volume of the stage performance background music, stage change performance background music, error notification sounds, etc. will be explained.
In this embodiment, the volume level is adjustable, and when the volume level is high, the volume output from the speaker becomes relatively louder, and when the volume level is low, the volume output from the speaker becomes relatively quieter. In the following description, the volume level is set to the maximum value, but the same configuration may be used even when the volume level is set to a value other than the maximum value.
The speaker may be configured to output sounds whose volumes depend on the volume level and sounds whose volumes do not depend on the volume level. For example, the volume of the error notification sound that notifies a first error (a recoverable error) may depend on the volume level, while the volume of the error notification sound that notifies a second error (an unrecoverable error) may be configured to not depend on the volume level. The distinction between the first error and the second error is not limited to whether they are recoverable or unrecoverable errors, and can be set as appropriate.

First, during "non-AT" mode, at least a beach stage and a city stage can be set as production stages, and production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is output from the speakers. For example, beach stage BGM is output from the speakers during the beach stage, and city stage BGM is output from the speakers during the city stage. Production stage BGM is sound that is output continuously (repeatedly) during periods when sounds such as specified production sounds and specified error notification sounds are not being output. Note that production stage BGM output may be configured to cease when a specified time (e.g., one minute) has elapsed since the end of the game, or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, the system is configured so that stage change effect A or stage change effect B can be executed on both the beach stage and the city stage, and when a stage change effect is executed, a sound corresponding to the stage change effect is output from the speaker. The volume of the sound for the stage change effect is configured so as not to depend on the effect stage before the stage change effect is executed. The sound for the stage change effect may be configured to end output when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the end of the game, or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, during "non-AT" times, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change effect (stage change effect A or stage change effect B) is configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the effect stage BGM (beach stage BGM or town stage BGM). This configuration makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change effect. Furthermore, if stage change effect B is configured to be relatively more advantageous to the player than stage change effect A, the maximum volume of the sound when stage change effect B is executed can be configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the sound when stage change effect A is executed. This configuration prevents the player from missing the fact that stage change effect B has been executed.

In addition, during "non-AT" times, the average volume of the sound for the stage change effect (stage change effect A or stage change effect B) is configured to be louder than the average volume of the effect stage BGM (beach stage BGM or town stage BGM). This configuration makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change effect. Furthermore, if stage change effect B is configured to be relatively more advantageous to the player than stage change effect A, the maximum volume of the sound when stage change effect B is executed can be configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the sound when stage change effect A is executed. This configuration prevents the player from missing the execution of stage change effect B.

Next, during "AT", the system is configured so that at least the volcano stage can be set as the presentation stage, and presentation stage BGM corresponding to the current presentation stage is output from the speakers. For example, during the volcano stage, the volcano stage BGM is output from the speakers as the BGM for the volcano stage. Furthermore, during "AT", the system may be configured so that a stage change presentation is executed, and in this case, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change presentation may be configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the presentation stage BGM. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change presentation, just as during "non-AT".

The sound that will be output at the highest volume during "AT" may be configured to be the navigation voice that is output when button press navigation is performed (for example, a voice that guides the button press order, such as "Left!") or the conversational voice of a character.

Next, the "error notification sound" is output when a specific error (for example, an error related to the hopper) occurs (the gaming machine detects the error) and notifies the user of the specific error, regardless of the presentation stage or game status. When an error is notified, an image showing the error content is displayed on the LCD at the same (or approximately the same) timing as the output of the error notification sound.

In this embodiment, the sound played when a specific error is reported is error background music and an error voice. The error voice is something like "Please call a store clerk."

In addition, for certain errors, the maximum volume of the error voice is louder than the maximum volume of the background music during an error. If the maximum volume of the background music during an error were louder, there is a risk that the player may not be able to accurately hear whether it is an error notification or a special effect, but by configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately communicate to the player that an error is occurring.

In addition, for certain errors, the average volume of the error voice is louder than the average volume of the background music during an error. If the average volume of the background music during an error were louder, there is a risk that the player may not be able to accurately hear whether it is an error notification or a special effect, but by configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately communicate to the player that an error is occurring.

Note that while a hopper-related error has been given as an example of a specified error, this is merely an example and may also be applied to other errors, such as a selector-related error, or to all errors including the first and second errors, and is configured to satisfy the above-mentioned configuration with at least one error.

In addition, the maximum volume of the stage BGM during the AT is louder than the maximum volume of the stage BGM during non-AT, and the average volume of the stage BGM during the AT is louder than the average volume of the stage BGM during non-AT. In addition, the maximum volume of the stage BGM during the AT is louder than the maximum volume of the stage change effect sound during non-AT, and the average volume of the stage BGM during the AT is louder than the average volume of the stage change effect sound during non-AT. By configuring it in this way, you can progress through the game without losing the exhilarating feeling during the AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the presentation stage BGM during the AT is louder than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the presentation stage BGM during the AT is louder than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the presentation stage BGM during the AT is louder than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the presentation stage BGM during the AT is louder than the average volume of the voice during an error. By configuring it in this way, if a specified error occurs during the AT, the BGM during the AT will be output at a louder volume than the sound during the specified error notification after the specified error is cleared, which prevents the BGM during the AT from being difficult to hear and allows the game to proceed without losing the exhilarating feeling during the AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the stage BGM during non-AT is lower than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the stage BGM during non-AT is lower than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the stage BGM during non-AT is lower than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the stage BGM during non-AT is lower than the average volume of the voice during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change effect during non-AT is lower than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the sound for the stage change effect during non-AT is lower than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change effect during non-AT is lower than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the sound for the stage change effect during non-AT is lower than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change effect during non-AT is lower than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the sound for the stage change effect during non-AT is lower than the average volume of the voice during an error. With this configuration, if a specified error occurs during non-AT operation, the specified error notification sound will be output at a louder volume than before the specified error was notified, making it easier to notice that a specified error has occurred.

In this embodiment, the display priority of the image related to the stage change performance is set higher than the display priority of the UI image, so that the UI image cannot be seen for at least a portion of the period during the stage change performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display priority of the image related to the stage change performance may be set lower than the display priority of the UI image, so that the UI image can be seen even during the stage change performance.
Furthermore, a full-screen effect, which is different from the stage change effect and in which a predetermined display is displayed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display, may be executed. The full-screen effect may be, for example, an effect in which an image of a predetermined character and a famous line of the predetermined character are displayed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display, and may be executed when suggesting that a so-called rare role, such as a cherry role or a watermelon role, has been won, or when suggesting that a player may be awarded a favorable benefit, such as a lottery for transition to an automatic transmission (AT) or an additional AT. The full-screen effect may be configured to have multiple types of full-screen effects. The display priority of the image related to the full-screen effect may be set higher than the display priority of the UI image, thereby making the UI image invisible for at least a portion of the full-screen effect. Alternatively, the display priority of the image related to the full-screen effect may be set lower than the display priority of the UI image, thereby making the UI image visible even during the full-screen effect.
In addition, the execution period of the stage change effect (the time required from start to finish) may be configured to be longer than the execution period of the full screen effect, or the execution period of the stage change effect may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of the full screen effect.

Furthermore, the relationship of display priority between an image relating to a stage change effect and a UI image, and the relationship of display priority between an image relating to a full-screen effect and a UI image may be configured as follows.
(1) The display priority of the image related to the stage change effect > the display priority of the UI image, and the display priority of the image related to the full-screen effect > the display priority of the UI image (i.e., the UI image is not visible during at least a portion of the stage change effect and at least a portion of the full-screen effect).
(2) The display priority of the image related to the stage change effect is greater than the display priority of the UI image, and the display priority of the image related to the full-screen effect is less than the display priority of the UI image (i.e., the UI image is not visible during at least a portion of the stage change effect, but is visible during the full-screen effect).
(3) Display priority of the image related to the stage change effect < Display priority of the UI image and display priority of the image related to the full-screen effect > Display priority of the UI image (i.e., the UI image is visible during the stage change effect, but is not visible for at least a portion of the full-screen effect).
(4) The display priority of the image related to the stage change effect is less than the display priority of the UI image, and the display priority of the image related to the full-screen effect is less than the display priority of the UI image (i.e., the UI image is visible during both the stage change effect and the full-screen effect).
In addition, the relationship may be configured to always be one of (1) to (4) regardless of the game situation, the type of stage change effect being executed, or the type of full-screen effect, or the relationship between (1) to (4) may be changed appropriately depending on the game situation, the type of stage change effect being executed, or the type of full-screen effect.
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to each of the effects.

Note that if two-coin bet and three-coin bet modes are available (the payout rate is lower when playing with two coins than when playing with three coins), the stage change effect may be implemented when playing with three coins, but not when playing with two coins. This configuration prevents players from feeling hopeful when playing with two coins, and allows players to recognize that playing with three coins is more advantageous.

Furthermore, if two-coin bet and three-coin bet modes are available (two-coin bets have a lower payout rate than three-coin bets), the UI image may be displayed for three-coin bets, but not for two-coin bets. This configuration can make players realize that two-coin bets are more advantageous than three-coin bets, since two-coin bets feel unnatural to the player.

Furthermore, if two-coin and three-coin bet modes are available (the payout rate is lower when playing with two coins than when playing with three coins), the UI images may be configured to be displayed for both three-coin and two-coin bet modes. This configuration allows the same UI images to be displayed when playing with two coins as when playing with three coins, preventing the player from being aware of a malfunction of the gaming machine and preventing the player from getting excited due to the frequency of the effects (for example, stage change effects not being executed when playing with two coins). This allows the player to recognize that playing with three coins is more advantageous and that playing with two coins is not a malfunction.

<Display mode of NEXT image>
In this embodiment, when a continuous effect is executed across multiple games as an effect to notify the results of a predetermined lottery (a lottery as to whether to shift to the AT or not, a lottery as to whether to shift to a chance zone or not, an AT add-on lottery, a lottery as to whether to shift to an AT add-on specialized zone (a period with a high probability of winning the AT add-on lottery), etc.), an image (sometimes referred to as a NEXT image or a continuation image) indicating that the continuous effect will continue in the next game during one game of the continuous effect can be displayed. The display mode of the NEXT image will be explained below.

Figure 46 shows an example of the flow of a continuous presentation in which the NEXT image is displayed. Figure 46 shows that the game progresses from "1" in the upper left to "7" in the lower right. If an outcome favorable to the player is announced after "7", "8" is displayed, and if an outcome unfavorable to the player is announced after "7", "9" is displayed. In addition, "S" in the figure indicates the start switch 12, and a "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13.

At "1" in Figure 46, the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the title of the continuous performance, "Repel the Shark!", is displayed on the LCD screen, and the first game of the continuous performance has begun. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle," indicating that operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Below, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle," this indicates that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and therefore operation of the stop switch is invalid.

At "2" in Figure 46, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect of a shark swimming from right to left is displayed as a response to the first stop operation.

At "3" in Figure 46, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a shark swimming from left to right is displayed as an effect in response to the second stop operation.

At "4" in Figure 46, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a rippling effect is displayed as an effect corresponding to the third stop operation. Here, the first play of the continuous effect ends, and the continuation of the continuous effect is executed by operating the start switch 12 for the next play, so the word "NEXT" is displayed in the bottom right of the LCD as the NEXT image.

In "4" of Figure 46, the "NEXT" display is configured to appear in the lower right corner of the LCD after the third stop operation is received. However, the "NEXT" display may also be configured so that the "NEXT" characters appear in the lower left corner of the LCD after the third stop operation is received, slide from the lower left corner of the LCD to the lower right corner of the LCD, and stop when they reach the lower right corner of the LCD. Furthermore, in this configuration, when the "NEXT" characters are displayed sliding from the lower left corner of the LCD to the lower right corner of the LCD (while the "NEXT" characters are moving), they may be displayed in a manner that makes them less visible than when they are displayed stationary in the lower right corner of the LCD (e.g., the characters are displayed faintly, an image other than the "NEXT" characters is displayed, or an effect image with a higher display priority than the "NEXT" characters is displayed). Generally, players play in the order of start switch 12 → left reel 8a → center reel 8b → right reel 8c, so the flow up to the display of the NEXT image can be made to be the same as the progress of the game, making the progress of the game feel smooth. Additionally, the NEXT image is configured to be displayed a predetermined time (for example, three seconds, but a different time can be set depending on the consecutive effects) after the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the third stop operation is executed.

At "5" in Figure 46, the start switch 12 is operated, starting the second game of the consecutive effects. Here, an effect is displayed in which a character on a boat confronts a shark.

At "6" in Figure 46, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect of a shark attacking is displayed as an effect in response to the first stop operation.

At "7" in Figure 46, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the display area of the LCD screen is divided into two to display an effect in response to the second stop operation: one in which a character attacks with a spear, and one in which a shark attacks.

At "8" and "9" in Figure 46, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image relating to the result of the continuous performance (whether the predetermined lottery was successful or not) is displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation. At "8" in Figure 46, it is notified that the predetermined lottery has been won, and the words "Repel!" and an image of a character are displayed, while at "9" in Figure 46, it is notified that the predetermined lottery has not been won, and the words "Defeat...?" and an image of a shark are displayed.

In Figure 46, the "NEXT" image, such as "4" in Figure 46, is displayed in the bottom right of the LCD, the "Defeat!" image, such as "8" in Figure 46, is displayed in the bottom left of the LCD, and the "Defeat...?" image, such as "9" in Figure 46, is displayed in the top left of the LCD, so that each image is displayed in a different display area on the LCD. This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize that each image has a different meaning.

Furthermore, in multiple different consecutive performances, the images used to notify that a predetermined lottery has been won in the first consecutive performance and the second consecutive performance may be configured to have different display formats (such as different text or different display positions), and the NEXT images used in the first consecutive performance and the second consecutive performance may be configured to have the same display format. For example, when notifying that a predetermined lottery has been won as a result of the first consecutive performance, the word "Repel" may be displayed in the lower left corner of the LCD screen, and when notifying that a predetermined lottery has been won as a result of the second consecutive performance, the word "Victory" may be displayed in the upper right corner of the LCD screen, and the NEXT images used in the first consecutive performance and the second consecutive performance may be configured to have the same display format. This type of display format makes it easier for players to recognize that the NEXT image indicates the continuation of consecutive performances between different consecutive performances.

In addition, while Figure 46 shows an example in which the presentation changes each time the player performs a stop operation, this is not limiting and the presentation may be configured to progress over time after the start switch 12 is operated to start play. For example, even if no stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13 after "1" in Figure 46, the presentation may progress over time, and the presentation may progress to "4" in Figure 46.

<BGM during continuous performance>
Next, the BGM output during the continuous performance will be described based on the continuous performance described in Fig. 46. The flow of the continuous performance in Fig. 46 has been described above, so a detailed description will be omitted.

When indicated by "1" in Figure 46 (when the start switch 12 is operated and the first play of the continuous performance begins), a predetermined continuous performance BGM corresponding to the continuous performance is output. Note that when indicated by "1" in Figure 46, BGM corresponding to the performance at the start of the continuous performance is output, and when indicated by "2" in Figure 46 (when the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 1), BGM corresponding to the continuous performance is output.

Then, the game progresses with the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation ("2" to "4" in Figure 46), but the BGM during the continuous performance continues to be output. If the next game start operation (inserting the first medal, operating the 1-bet switch, operating the MAX-bet switch, or operating the start switch 12, etc.) is not performed after the third stop operation, the performance displayed in response to the third stop operation (the performance displayed by the third stop operation is looping because it cannot proceed any further) and the NEXT image remain displayed, and the BGM during the continuous performance continues to be output (if the BGM during the continuous performance has been played to the end, it will return to the beginning and play in a loop). This configuration prevents players from leaving their seats in the middle of a continuous performance that could potentially result in an advantageous outcome for the player. It also prevents another player from easily taking their seat when a player leaves their seat for a bathroom break, etc.

In addition, if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation was performed and all reels had stopped without any betting or settlement operations being performed and the demo screen is displayed, the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped when the demo screen is displayed and the background music in the demo screen may be output instead, or the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped and silenced when the demo screen is displayed. Also, if the sub-switch 20 is operated at a predetermined timing before the predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation was performed and all reels had stopped, and the menu screen is displayed, the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped when the menu screen is displayed and the background music in the menu screen may be output instead, or the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped and silenced when the menu screen is displayed.

Also, even if the demo screen is displayed immediately after the third stop operation is performed and the settlement operation is performed after all reels have stopped, the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped when the demo screen is displayed and the background music during the continuous performance may be output instead, or the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped and silenced when the demo screen is displayed.

Also, the system may be configured so that the demo screen is not displayed during the continuous performance. In this case, if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation was performed and all reels had stopped without any bet operation or settlement operation being performed, the volume of the background music during the continuous performance may be lowered or muted.

Also, the system may be configured so that the menu screen is not displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during a continuous performance. In this case, even if the sub-switch 20 is operated after the third stop operation is performed and all reels have stopped, the menu screen will not be displayed and the background music played during the continuous performance will continue to be output. After that, the system may be configured to display a demo screen when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since all reels had stopped, or it may be configured not to display a demo screen.

Next, at timing "5" in Figure 46, the start switch 12 is operated, and the second game of the consecutive performance begins, but the background music continues to be output during the consecutive performance.

Then, the game progresses with the first stop operation, the second stop operation (from "6" to "7" in Figure 46) (the output of BGM during the continuous performance continues), and then the third stop operation ("8" or "9" in Figure 46) is performed. When an image relating to the result of the continuous performance (sometimes referred to as a result image) is displayed as the performance in response to the third stop operation, the output of BGM during the continuous performance stops, and BGM or SE (sound effect) relating to the result of the continuous performance is output. Note that once the BGM or SE relating to the result of the continuous performance is output, it does not loop, and output ends when the playback time has elapsed. Furthermore, as background music or sound effects related to the results of the continuous performance, when a predetermined lottery is won, background music or sound effects indicating a win (for example, a lively, bright, flashy sound effect) are output, and when a predetermined lottery is not won, background music or sound effects indicating a non-win (for example, a disappointing, dark, dull sound effect) are output; and when the volume levels are set to the same, the volume of the sound effects indicating a win may be louder than the volume of the sound effects indicating a non-win.

In this way, during a continuous performance, the continuous performance background music continues to be output while the NEXT image is displayed, but the background music is stopped while the image related to the result of the continuous performance is displayed. By making the sound silent when the result of the continuous performance is displayed in this way, unlike in the middle of the continuous performance, it is possible to clearly indicate that this is the final play of the continuous performance.

<Display mode of the next image and the image related to the result of the consecutive effects>
Next, the display mode of the NEXT image of each consecutive performance and the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance will be explained using FIG.

Figure 47 is a diagram showing the flow of a consecutive presentation (sometimes called the second consecutive presentation) that is different from the consecutive presentation shown in Figure 46 (sometimes called the first consecutive presentation). Figure 47 shows that the game progresses from "1" in the upper left to "7" in the lower right. If an outcome favorable to the player is announced after "7", "8" is displayed, and if an outcome unfavorable to the player is announced after "7", "9" is displayed. Additionally, "S" in the diagram indicates the start switch 12, and a "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13.

At "1" in Figure 47, the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the title of the continuous performance, "Make the Flowers Bloom!", is displayed on the LCD screen, and the first game of the continuous performance has begun. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle," indicating that operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Below, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle," this indicates that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and therefore operation of the stop switch is invalid.

At "2" in Figure 47, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image of the ground with no flowers blooming is displayed as a visual effect in response to the first stop operation.

At "3" in Figure 47, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a flower bud appears as an effect in response to the second stop operation.

At "4" in Figure 47, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect displayed in response to the third stop operation is a cloud-flowing effect without flowers blooming. Here, the first play of the continuous effect ends, and the continuation of the continuous effect is executed by operating the start switch 12 for the next play, so the word "NEXT" is displayed in the bottom right of the LCD as the NEXT image.

In "4" of Figure 47, the "NEXT" display is configured to appear in the lower right corner of the LCD after the third stop operation is received. However, the "NEXT" display may also be configured so that the "NEXT" characters appear in the lower left corner of the LCD after the third stop operation is received, slide from the lower left corner of the LCD to the lower right corner of the LCD, and stop when they reach the lower right corner of the LCD. Furthermore, in this configuration, when the "NEXT" characters are displayed sliding from the lower left corner of the LCD to the lower right corner of the LCD (while the "NEXT" characters are moving), they may be displayed in a manner that makes them less visible than when they are displayed stationary in the lower right corner of the LCD (e.g., the characters are displayed faintly, an image other than the "NEXT" characters is displayed, or an effect image with a higher display priority than the "NEXT" characters is displayed). Generally, players play in the order of start switch 12 → left reel 8a → center reel 8b → right reel 8c, so the flow up to the display of the NEXT image can be made to be the same as the progress of the game, making the progress of the game feel smooth. Additionally, the NEXT image is configured to be displayed a predetermined time (for example, three seconds, but a different time can be set depending on the consecutive effects) after the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the third stop operation is executed.

At "5" in Figure 47, the start switch 12 is operated, starting the second game of the consecutive effects. Here, no flowers bloom, and an effect of passing rain clouds is displayed.

At "6" in Figure 47, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect displayed in response to the first stop operation is one in which no flowers bloom and it is raining.

At "7" in Figure 47, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect displayed in response to the second stop operation is one in which no flowers bloom, but it is raining with thunder.

At "8" and "9" in Figure 47, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image relating to the result of the continuous performance (whether the predetermined lottery was won or not) is displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation. At "8" in Figure 47, it is notified that the predetermined lottery has been won, and the words "Blooming!" and an image of a blooming flower are displayed, while at "9" in Figure 47, it is notified that the predetermined lottery has not been won, and the words "Sorry!?" and an image of a flower bud are displayed.

When comparing the first and second consecutive performances, the display format of the NEXT image is configured to be the same, but the display format of the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance (the first consecutive performance displays an image of "Repel!" or "Defeat...?", while the second consecutive performance displays an image of "Bloom!" or "Sorry!?") is configured to be different.

Games that notify the results of consecutive effects often execute effects that are important to the gaming machine (the so-called selling point of the gaming machine), so interest can be increased by changing the display mode of the image related to the results of consecutive effects to match the type of consecutive effect in games that notify the results of consecutive effects.

In addition, although not shown, in the game following the one in which the result of the consecutive effects has been announced, if it has been announced that a predetermined lottery has been won, a first specific effect will be displayed that clearly indicates that the player has won (for example, a "Bonus Confirmed" or "Congratulations!" message will be displayed, or a predetermined lamp on the gaming machine will light up in rainbow colors, etc.), and if it has been announced that the player has not won the predetermined lottery, a second specific effect will be displayed that indicates that the consecutive effects have ended in failure (for example, the LCD display will be darkened, a stage change effect will be displayed, etc.), and the background image of the normal game state will be displayed. Here, the first specific effect is configured to have a brighter impression than the second specific effect.

In addition, in Figures 46 and 47, the first and second consecutive effects are each executed over two games, with the NEXT image displayed once each, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first consecutive effect may be executed over a maximum of three games, with the NEXT image displayed a total of two times, after the third stop operation in the first game and after the third stop operation in the second game. In other words, the first consecutive effect may be configured to display the NEXT image a maximum of two times, and the second consecutive effect may be configured to display the NEXT image once.

When configured in this way, the first consecutive performance is configured to display the NEXT image more frequently than the second consecutive performance, and to have a higher chance of winning the specified lottery.

Furthermore, in the first consecutive performance, the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is higher when the NEXT image is displayed twice than when the NEXT image is displayed once.

In this way, the more times the NEXT image is displayed, the higher the chance of winning a specific lottery. By configuring it in this way, when the NEXT image is displayed, it not only continues the presentation, but also builds anticipation for a continuous presentation. Note that when a NEXT image is displayed multiple times, the first and second NEXT images may be the same NEXT image, the second NEXT image may be larger than the first NEXT image, or the first and second NEXT images may have different colors for the NEXT text and surrounding area.

<Display priority of NEXT image and UI image>
Furthermore, when the above-mentioned UI image is configured to be displayed, the UI image and the NEXT image displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD screen may overlap. In this case, the display priority of the NEXT image is set higher than the display priority of the UI image. In this way, by emphasizing the display related to the continuous effects that affect the player's profit, the player can focus on the results of the continuous effects.

Furthermore, the display priority of the NEXT image may be set lower than the display priority of the UI image. By configuring in this way, the player can properly grasp the status of the game even during continuous effects.
In addition, the display areas for the NEXT image and the UI image may be different so that the images do not overlap with each other. By configuring in this way, the player can properly grasp both the progress of the continuous effects and the state of the game.

<Display area for captions and next images during continuous performances>
Next, the display area of the telop and the next image during the continuous performance will be described.

In this embodiment, captions (hereinafter sometimes referred to as caption display, caption effect, subtitles, subtitle effect, or text information) refer to the effect of displaying character lines or narration in text in accordance with the effect displayed on the LCD screen.

In the continuous performances shown in Figure 46 or Figure 47, captions related to the continuous performance may be displayed during the continuous performance. The captions are displayed in accordance with the progress of the continuous performance, which changes over time. Note that if the progress of the continuous performance changes in response to the operation of the start switch 12 or the stop operation, the captions may also be displayed in response to the operation of the start switch 12 or the stop operation.

The captions are displayed in the lower display area of the LCD, and the size of the caption display area varies depending on the number of characters displayed. Also, the caption display area is configured so that there is a display area for the NEXT image in a straight line to the left and right of the caption display area.

Here, the display areas of the caption and the NEXT image are configured so that they do not overlap. Specifically, in games during continuous performances in which the NEXT image is displayed, the caption is displayed with a relatively shorter number of characters than in games during continuous performances in which the NEXT image is not displayed, and is configured so as not to overlap with the NEXT image. On the other hand, although not shown, in games that notify the results of continuous performances, the NEXT image is not displayed, so the caption may be configured to display a relatively longer number of characters than in games during continuous performances in which the NEXT image is displayed. Furthermore, if the caption has a large number of characters, the caption may be displayed across multiple lines so that the display areas of the NEXT image and the caption do not overlap. This configuration prevents players from confusing the NEXT image and the caption.

In Figure 48, the caption consists of four letters, "What?", and does not overlap with the NEXT image, preventing players from confusing the NEXT image with the caption.

In addition, when a NEXT image and a caption are displayed simultaneously, the NEXT image may be configured to be displayed with an effect at a predetermined interval, while the caption may be configured to be a fixed image without an effect. This configuration further prevents players from confusing the NEXT image with the caption.

Furthermore, when displaying a caption in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, the NEXT image may be configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing after the caption is displayed.

The display of the NEXT image and telop may also be configured not to end over time. In this configuration, the display may be configured not to transition to a demo screen during a continuous performance even if a predetermined time (e.g., one minute) has passed since a predetermined timing after the end of a game (such as when the third stop operation is received, when all reels have stopped, or when the payout process is completed), and the display of the NEXT image and telop may continue until the next game start operation (such as a bet operation or operation of the start switch 12) is performed. The display may also be configured to transition to a demo screen when a predetermined time has passed since a predetermined timing after the end of a game during a continuous performance, and the display of the NEXT image and telop may continue until the transition to the demo screen occurs, and the display of the NEXT image and telop may end at the timing of the transition to the demo screen. This configuration prevents the player from confusing the NEXT image with the telop and makes it easier for the player to grasp the status of the game.

Also, in games where a NEXT image is displayed, if the number of characters in the caption displayed is large, the caption may be displayed first, and the NEXT image may be displayed after the caption display has finished. By configuring it in this way, the period during which the NEXT image is displayed can be made different from the period during which the caption is displayed, allowing both the NEXT image and the caption to be displayed clearly without reducing visibility.

The display area for the NEXT image and the display area for the caption may be configured to overlap, but in this case, it is preferable to configure the display priority of the NEXT image to be higher than the display priority of the caption. By configuring it in this way, the player can properly understand that the continuous effects will continue in the next game.

<Display Mode Until Next Image is Displayed>
Next, the flow up to the display of the NEXT image will be described with reference to FIG.
Fig. 49 shows a case where, when a NEXT image is displayed, something that cannot be recognized as a letter (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a slide image) is displayed as a trajectory moving from the bottom left to the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and when the slide image moves to the bottom right of the liquid crystal, the NEXT image is displayed. Note that the slide image may be an image that cannot be recognized as either a letter or an object, such as "1" to "4" in Fig. 49 ("1" to "4" in Fig. 49 are images showing afterimages), or an image of a specific object that is not a letter, such as "5" to "8" in Fig. 49 ("5" to "8" in Fig. 49 are images of a baseball).

In "1" or "5" in Figure 49, in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, after the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 is accepted, after time t1 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t1 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated, a slide image is displayed in the lower left corner of the LCD.

In "2" or "6" in Figure 49, in a game where the NEXT image is displayed, the slide image moves to near the center of the bottom of the LCD screen after time t2 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t2 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated. Note that t2 > t1.

In "3" or "7" in Figure 49, in a game where the NEXT image is displayed, the slide image moves to the bottom right of the LCD screen after time t3 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t3 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated. Note that t3 > t2.

In "4" or "8" in Figure 49, in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, after time t4 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t4 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated, the display of the slide image ends and the NEXT image is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD. Note that t4 > t3.

By moving the slide image from the bottom left to the bottom right of the LCD screen in this way, it is possible to attract the player's attention and make the player aware of the NEXT image that appears after the slide image is displayed.

The display area for the slide image and the display area for the push order navigation image may also be configured to overlap at least partially. The display area for the NEXT image and the display area for the push order navigation image may also be configured to overlap at least partially. In this case, however, the slide image and NEXT image are configured to be displayed after the third stop operation.

By configuring it in this way, the push order navigation image ceases to be displayed when the third stop operation is performed, so the push order navigation image and slide image, or the push order navigation image and NEXT image, are not displayed overlapping each other, and the push order navigation image, slide image, and NEXT image can all be displayed without reducing visibility.

The display areas of the slide images and the captions are configured to overlap at least partially and may be displayed simultaneously. However, depending on the importance of the displayed content, the display priority of the slide images may be set higher than the display priority of the captions, or conversely, the display priority of the captions may be set higher than the display priority of the slide images.

Furthermore, with regard to the timing for ending the display of the NEXT image and the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance (for example, the "Repel!" and "Defeat...?" images in Figure 46, and the "Bloom!" and "Sorry!?" images in Figure 47), the display is configured so that neither the NEXT image nor the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance ends with the passage of time after it is displayed. This configuration prevents the player from missing important information for understanding the progress of the consecutive performance.

The NEXT image may be configured to not end its display even if a bet operation for the next game is made (including a bet operation by operating the MAX BET switch 18, a bet operation by operating the 1 BET switch 19, or a bet operation by manually inserting medals), but to end its display when the START switch 12 is operated to start the next game, and the image relating to the results of the consecutive effects may be configured to end its display when a bet operation for the next game is made. In this way, by not ending the display of the NEXT image with a bet operation, it is possible to emphasize that the consecutive effects will continue in the next game.

The display areas for the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the consecutive effects are configured to be different. For example, as shown in Figure 46, the NEXT image is displayed in a designated display area at the bottom right of the LCD, and the image related to the result of the consecutive effects is displayed in a designated display area at the bottom left or top left of the LCD. In this way, by varying the display position depending on the image being displayed, the player's viewpoint can be appropriately guided, allowing them to focus on the entire LCD.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the NEXT image and the image relating to the result of the consecutive presentation may be configured to be displayed as time passes after the start switch 12 is operated to start the game, or may be configured to be displayed as time passes after the third stop operation (sometimes referred to as the final stop operation) on the stop switch 13 is operated.

Here, the time (t2) from when the start switch 12 is operated or the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13 until the image related to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is designed to be longer than the time (t1) from when the start switch 12 is operated or the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13 until the NEXT image is displayed.

Specifically, (1) it is designed so that the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the next image is displayed; (2) it is designed so that the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the next image is displayed; (3) it is designed so that the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the next image is displayed; (4) it is designed so that the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the next image is displayed.

By configuring it in this way, a sense of anticipation can be created until an image showing the result of the consecutive performance is displayed.

As mentioned above, the NEXT image is first displayed in the bottom left of the LCD screen, then moves to the bottom right, and stops there when it reaches the bottom right. In other words, the NEXT image is configured so that the position at which it starts to be displayed (the display area where it starts to be displayed) and the position at which it ends to be displayed (the display area where it ends to be displayed) are different. On the other hand, the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed without moving from the time it starts to the time it ends. In other words, the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is configured so that the position at which it starts to be displayed and the position at which it ends to be displayed are the same. In this way, by displaying the NEXT image while it moves, it is possible to effectively communicate to the player that the continuous performance will continue in the next game. Furthermore, by displaying the image relating to the result of the continuous performance without moving its display position, it is possible to draw attention to the result of the continuous performance.

<Navigation image>
Next, the navigation image in this embodiment will be described. Here, the push order navigation image (sometimes referred to as stop operation information) will be described, but it is not limited to the push order navigation image, and it may also be applied to the above-mentioned timing navigation image and operation mode navigation image.

In this embodiment, for example, during an AT, in a game where the push order bell is selected as a result of an internal lottery, information suggesting advantageous operation of the stop switch (such as awarding the maximum amount of gaming media that can be won in that game) can be displayed on the LCD as a push order navigation image. Specifically, the numbers "1," "2," and "3" can be used to indicate six different push orders, with "1" indicating the stop switch to be operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicating the stop button to be operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicating the stop button to be operated as the third stop.

The first stop operation or the third stop operation may be configured as two-choice push-buttons (whether to operate the stop switch at reel positions 1-10 or 11-20, for example, is indicated along with a push-button navigation image showing either a blue 7 or a red 7), and combined with the six push-button options, 12 different operation modes may be indicated. The push-button navigation image displayed on the left side of the LCD screen corresponds to the left reel 8a, the push-button navigation image displayed near the center of the LCD screen corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the push-button navigation image displayed on the right side of the LCD screen corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, if the push-button navigation image reads "123," it indicates the push-button sequence for operating the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c, in that order. In this embodiment, the "push-button navigation image" may refer to a portion of the push-button navigation image, such as "1," or the entire push-button navigation image, such as "123."

<Press order navigation image>
50 is a diagram showing an example of the push order navigation image in this embodiment. In FIG. 50, the push order navigation image for the first stop operation is explained as an example, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are configured in the same way.

The push order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image," and is configured to have at least four display modes for the push order navigation image: "normal mode," "highlighted mode," "failed mode," and "success mode."

The navigation number image is an image of numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed. The navigation background image is a decorative image around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed, or an image that shows an effect around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed.

First, <1> in Figure 50 is the normal mode push order navigation image, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should not currently be operated is displayed in the normal mode. Note that audio corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode is not output. Furthermore, even among the normal mode push order navigation images, push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next and push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last may be displayed separately. In this case, it is possible to conceive of a mode in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next is displayed larger than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last, and smaller than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated.

Next, <2> in Figure 50 is a push order navigation image in an highlighted state, in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated is displayed in an highlighted state. The push order navigation image displayed in an highlighted state is configured to output a sound corresponding to the push order navigation image from speaker S. For example, when it is time to operate the stop switch corresponding to left reel 8a, the sound "left" will be output. The push order navigation image in an highlighted state has at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" larger than the push order navigation image in the normal state, and is configured to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated. Furthermore, in addition to size, the push order navigation image in an highlighted state may be displayed brighter than the push order navigation image in the normal state, or in a different color or font from the normal state, to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated in an easily understandable manner.

Next, <3> in Figure 50 is a push order navigation image in a successful mode. When the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated (when the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image currently displayed in an highlighted mode is operated), the push order navigation image that was displayed in an highlighted mode is displayed in a successful mode. In other words, when the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated in the correct operating mode, the push order navigation image that is displayed in an highlighted mode changes to a successful mode. When the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, a sound corresponding to the next push order is output (for example, if the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b should be operated next, a sound saying "It's middle" is output from speaker S), and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should next be operated is displayed in an highlighted mode. The push order navigation image in a successful mode is configured to cease display after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, when the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, a sound effect or voice (sometimes called a success sound) indicating that the pressing order is correct may be output from the speaker S. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated in the correct manner not only visually but also audibly.

In addition, the push order navigation image for the successful mode is configured so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" is larger than the push order navigation image for the normal mode. The push order navigation image for the emphasized mode and the push order navigation image for the successful mode are configured so that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are approximately the same size.

Next, <4> in Figure 50 is a push order navigation image in a failed state. When a stop switch that should not be currently operated is operated (when the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal state is operated), all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. In other words, when the stop switch is operated in an incorrect operation state, all currently displayed push order navigation images change to a failed state. Note that when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated and the push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state, a sound indicating that the push order has been made incorrectly (for example, a sound such as "What are you doing?", sometimes referred to as a "failure sound") may be output from speaker S, or no sound indicating that the push order has been made incorrectly may be output. Note that the push order navigation image in a failed state is configured to cease display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Also, when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated, the push order navigation image in a failed state may not be displayed, and the display of all push order navigation images may immediately cease (within a time shorter than the predetermined time).

In addition, when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated and all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state, the size of the push order navigation images is configured to remain the same as it was before the stop operation. In other words, push order navigation images that were displayed in an highlighted state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the highlighted state size, and push order navigation images that were displayed in a normal state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the normal state size.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time from when the stop switch 13 is operated to when the display of the push order navigation image for a successful mode ends is configured to be longer than the time from when the stop switch 13 is operated to when the display of the push order navigation image for a failed mode ends.

This configuration gives players a sense of superiority when they succeed, and when they fail, it makes it harder for other players to realize that they pressed the buttons in the wrong order, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the push order navigation image for all modes, including the normal mode, highlight mode, success mode, and failure mode, may be configured to be displayed with effects, or the push order navigation image for at least one mode may be configured to be displayed with effects.

Furthermore, the push order navigation images for all modes, including the normal mode, highlight mode, success mode, and failure mode, may be configured to be displayed as moving images, or the push order navigation images for all modes may be configured to be displayed as still images, or the push order navigation images for at least one mode may be configured to be displayed as moving images and the push order navigation images for the other modes may be configured to be displayed as still images.

Also, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game, all push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, and then, when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation) may be displayed in an emphasized manner.Also, when the start switch is operated to start a game, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first may be displayed in an emphasized manner, and the other push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, but from the time the display starts until the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as still images, and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as moving images with some kind of movement.

This configuration makes it easier for players to visually recognize that the stop switch operation has been validated, preventing them from pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. When the stop switch operation is validated in this way, the button press order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, or the button press order navigation image changes from a still image to a moving image; this is sometimes referred to as a stop acceptance effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game and the push order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes referred to as a navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S.

The timing for outputting the sound corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (e.g., "Left") from speaker S may be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, when the reels begin to spin, or when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. In other words, the speaker S may be configured to output the sound at any time between when the start switch 12 is operated and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective.

By configuring it this way, even if the display of the push order navigation image is delayed due to a malfunction in the LCD display, the player can still audibly identify the stop switch that should be operated first, which will not hinder the progress of the game and will prevent mistakes in the push order.

Figure 51 is an example of a case in which the push order navigation image is displayed on the LCD in this embodiment, and by displaying "123" on the LCD, it indicates that the correct push order is to operate the stop switches in the following order: stop switch corresponding to left reel 8a → stop switch corresponding to middle reel 8b → stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c. In Figure 51, because the stop switch corresponding to left reel 8a should be operated first, "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode in the push order navigation image, and "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal mode in the push order navigation image.

<Configuration for displaying the push order navigation image and power off>
Next, the display of the push order navigation image when a power outage occurs while the push order navigation image is being displayed and then the power is restored without changing the settings will be described using an example in which the winning-A1 condition device is selected during the AT and the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order of "left, center, right" is displayed on the LCD. Note that the configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and the power outage described below can be appropriately combined and applied even when the timing of the power outage and the appearance of the push order navigation image are different (such as the push order navigation image "213" corresponding to the correct push order of "center, left, right"). It can also be appropriately combined and applied with the <Configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and specified errors> described below.

(1) When the power is turned off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the voice "Go left" is output from the speaker S. Note that the voice such as "Go left" that corresponds to the stop switch that should currently be operated is sometimes simply referred to as the navigation voice.

After that, before the first stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (power is not applied). After that, at a timing (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "predetermined navigation timing") such as when drive voltage is supplied to the sub-control board after power is restored and the drawing process can be executed, or when drive voltage is supplied to the main control board and a command regarding the press order is sent to the sub-control board, the "123" press order navigation image is displayed again on the LCD. Note that the "1" press order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode, while the "2" and "3" press order navigation images are displayed in a normal mode. Furthermore, the navigation audio is not output again at this time. The navigation display sound may be configured not to be output again at this time, or it may be configured to be output.

In this way, if the power is turned off after the push sequence navigation image is displayed but before the first stop operation, and then the power is restored, the push sequence navigation image will return but the navigation audio will not. By not outputting the navigation audio when the power is restored, the processing on the sub-control board when the power is restored is reduced, and the push sequence navigation image can be displayed more quickly.

The navigation voice may also be configured to be output again when the power is restored. This configuration allows players to play without feeling any discomfort between before and after the power is restored.

Furthermore, if the game is configured to execute the aforementioned operation acceptance effect when the operation of the stop switch becomes valid, the game may also be configured to display the push order navigation image along with the stop acceptance effect when the power is restored after a power outage. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to play without any sense of incongruity between before the power outage and after the power is restored.

In addition, when power is restored after a power outage, the push order navigation image can be configured to be displayed without the stop acceptance effect. This configuration reduces the processing time on the sub-control board when power is restored after a power outage, and allows the push order navigation image to be displayed more quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured to display both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image," while the other push order navigation images may be configured to display only the "navigation number image." This configuration reduces the processing load on the sub-control board when power is restored, allowing the push order navigation image to be displayed more quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation images are displayed again after power recovery, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" can be displayed for all push order navigation images displayed when power is recovered. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to play without any sense of incongruity between before the power loss and after power recovery.

(2) When the first stop operation is performed correctly and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). Then, at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. In other words, the same images are displayed after the stop is accepted if the push order for the first stop on the stop switch was the correct push order.

In addition, at this time, the system may be configured to output at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation again, or none of them may be output.

Also, at this time, just as before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored after the power is cut off, even if it had been turned off because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had passed since its display began before the power was cut off. Note that when the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is displayed again after the power is cut off, it may be configured to be turned off after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has passed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has passed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if power is restored during an AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made to recognize that the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage was the correct mode.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" will be displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in the normal mode.

This configuration allows players to concentrate on the stopping operations they currently need to perform.

(3) When the first stop operation is performed incorrectly and the power is subsequently turned off before the second stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

If the first stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images will be displayed in a failed manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images will cease. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" will be output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, even when the drawing process can be executed after the power is restored, the button press sequence navigation image is not displayed. Furthermore, no failure sound is output at this time to indicate that the button presses were made incorrectly.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again after the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Furthermore, as described above, if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal manner. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the push order navigation image is not displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored (referred to as navigation timing even if navigation is not actually performed).

This configuration allows the display after power is restored to be appropriate based on the game status before the power was lost, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game status. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was lost, the player can return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

If the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed again in a failed mode at a specified navigation timing after power is restored. Even in this case, no failure sound or navigation voice indicating that the push order was incorrect is output after power is restored. Furthermore, if the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

When configured in this manner, if the stop switch is operated in the correct mode as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation will be displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation will be displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation will be displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect mode as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, all push order navigation images will be displayed in the failed mode at the specified navigation timing after power is restored.

This configuration allows players to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut off, even if it takes several minutes for the power to be restored after the power is cut off, the push order navigation image for the incorrect mode will be displayed after the power is restored. This prevents players from mistakenly believing that the gaming machine is malfunctioning because no payout or only one coin has been paid out despite the AT being in progress.

(4) When the first two stop operations are performed correctly and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, because the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, a power outage occurs while the third stop operation has not yet been performed, and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the "1" push order navigation image is not displayed, the "2" push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none may be output. Also, at this time, just as before the power was lost, the "2" push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image for the "2" successful mode is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if its display ceased due to a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) having elapsed since its display began before the power was lost. Furthermore, when the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is displayed again after power is restored from a power outage, it may be configured to disappear after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to disappear immediately even before the predetermined time has passed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" will be displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in an highlighted manner.

By configuring it this way, even if the power is interrupted and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was interrupted can be accurately displayed, preventing players from making mistakes in the order in which they press buttons. In particular, since the press order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, players can focus on the third stop.

Furthermore, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an emphasized mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. Note that, even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Furthermore, since the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. Furthermore, even if the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" in the successful mode had ceased display because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since their display began before the power was lost, they are configured to be displayed again when the power is restored. Furthermore, when the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" are displayed again after power is restored from a power outage, they may be configured to cease display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed again, or they may be configured to cease display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since they were displayed again. In other words, before a power outage, the display mode of the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" would cease displaying at different times because each stop operation would switch the display mode, but after a power outage, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" would cease displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if power is interrupted and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was interrupted can be accurately displayed, preventing players from making mistakes in the press order. In particular, by displaying the press order navigation images corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner, it becomes clear that only the third stop remains and that the correct press order was followed.

Furthermore, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" will not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that even in this case, the navigation display sound, success sound, and/or navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output.

This configuration allows players to concentrate on the stopping operations they currently need to perform.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed correctly, the second stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, because the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

If the second stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" ceases. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). Even when the specified navigation timing arrives after the power is restored, the button press sequence navigation image will not be displayed. Furthermore, no sound indicating that the button presses were incorrect will be output.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again when the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Furthermore, if the first stop operation is performed correctly, then the second stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed mode. Also, in this case, no failure sound is output after power is restored to indicate that the push order was incorrect. Note that if the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, by re-displaying the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop operation in the correct mode, players can understand which stop operation they performed incorrectly.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, then the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed in the failed mode at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored. Also, in this case, no failure sound indicating that the push order was incorrect is output after power is restored. Note that if the failed mode push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was redisplayed, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was redisplayed. By configuring it in this way, even if it takes several minutes from the power outage to power restoration, the failed mode push order navigation image will be displayed after power is restored, preventing a player from mistaking a gaming machine malfunction for no payout or a small payout (e.g., one coin) despite the AT being in progress.

(6) When the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, the power is turned off before the third stop operation, the third stop operation is performed after the power is restored, and then the power is turned off again: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, because the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. When the push order navigation image for the successful state of "2" (or the push order navigation images for the successful states of "1" and "2" if the push order navigation for the successful state of "1" is also configured to be displayed) is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately, even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

Then, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is terminated (if the push order navigation for the successful mode of "1" is also configured to be displayed, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is also terminated), and while the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, if the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the successful mode. Also, at this time, a specified image (sometimes referred to as a GET image) is configured to be displayed indicating that all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode.

After that, if the stop operation is performed up to the third stop, the power will be cut off again and all LCD displays will cease. Even after the power is restored, the push order navigation image and GET image will not be displayed. Furthermore, at this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation will not be output.

This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, since no new stop operations are required after the third stop, by not reproducing the push order navigation image, the player can effectively understand that no new stop operations are required.

Furthermore, if the operation is performed correctly up to the third stop operation and then a power outage occurs again, the push order navigation images for "1" through "3" may be configured to be displayed again in the correct mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

This configuration makes it clear that all stop operations were performed correctly.

If the second power outage occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed or will be displayed in a successful manner at the specified navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image for "2" will be displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in an highlighted manner. If the second power outage occurs after the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image will not be displayed at the specified navigation timing after power is restored. In other words, the display content after power is restored may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the power outage was before or after the payout process was executed.

<Explanation about rare role navigation images>
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a game in which a so-called rare role, such as a cherry role or a watermelon role, is won, a navigation image (sometimes referred to as a rare role navigation image) indicating the possibility of winning the rare role is configured to display "!!!". The navigation background image of the rare role navigation image and the navigation background image of the push order navigation image are displayed in the same or substantially the same manner. That is, the push order navigation image and the rare role navigation image are configured to be similar images, although the "numbers" and "!" are different. Furthermore, the rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when any rare role is won, or may be configured to be displayed even in a game in which the result of the internal lottery is a loss or a replay, as an effect suggesting the possibility of the predetermined benefit being awarded when it has been determined that a predetermined benefit (e.g., first win of the AT, addition of the AT, transition to a chance zone, etc.) will be awarded.

In addition, since there is no advantage or disadvantage to the rare role navigation image depending on the button press order, it is designed to always be displayed at the same size during a single game (the size does not differ between the normal and highlighted modes, as is the case with button press order navigation images).

In addition, during play when the rare role navigation image is displayed, a power outage occurs at any time before the third stop operation is performed (when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), and all LCD displays cease (a state in which power is not turned on). The rare role navigation image is then configured to be displayed again at a specified navigation timing after power is restored. Note that regardless of when the power outage occurs, the rare role navigation image that is displayed again when power is restored will be displayed in the same display format as after the start switch 12 is operated, such as "!!!".

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, it helps maintain a sense of anticipation that they may have won a rare combination. It also prevents players from missing out on a rare combination.

Furthermore, in a game in which a rare role navigation image is displayed, if a power outage occurs at any time before the third stop operation is performed (when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), the rare role navigation image may be configured not to be displayed again after power is restored.

By configuring it in this way, players can avoid confusing the push order navigation image with the rare role navigation image.

The rare role navigation images may be configured to cease displaying one by one in response to a stop operation, or may be configured to display all rare role navigation images at the timing when the first stop operation is performed. Furthermore, when the display of rare role navigation images is configured to cease displaying one by one for each stop operation, the display may be configured to cease displaying the rare role navigation image on the left, the rare role navigation image in the middle, and the rare role navigation image on the right in response to the initial stop operation in that order, regardless of which stop switch 13 was operated, or the display of the rare role navigation image at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 that was operated in response to the initial stop operation may be configured to cease displaying the rare role navigation image in response to the initial stop operation.

<Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and errors>
Next, regarding the display of the push order navigation image after a predetermined error (such as a medal retention error, medal backflow error, or hopper empty error) occurs during the display of the push order navigation image and the predetermined error is subsequently cleared, an example will be described in which the winning-A1 condition device is selected during the AT, the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order of "left, center, right" is displayed on the LCD, and a hopper empty error occurs as a predetermined error. Note that the configurations regarding the display of the push order navigation image and the predetermined error described below can be applied in appropriate combinations even when the timing of the occurrence of the predetermined error or the appearance of the push order navigation image are different. Furthermore, they can be applied in appropriate combinations with the above-mentioned <Configurations regarding the display of the push order navigation image and power cut>.

(1) When the first stop operation is performed correctly and a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation: First, as shown in FIG. 52, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, if the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image becomes invisible (this can be made invisible by ending the display, or by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed.

After that, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, just as before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" in a successful mode is configured to be displayed again when power is restored after a power outage, even if it had ceased display because a specified time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the hopper empty error occurred.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful "1" mode may be configured to disappear after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was last displayed, or it may be configured to disappear immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was last displayed.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made to recognize that the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred was the correct mode.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed correctly and then a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal manner.

This configuration allows players to concentrate on the stopping operation they currently need to perform.

The display mode of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 52 and the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are configured to have different designs (picture, number font, color, etc.). In this way, the design of the push order navigation image may be configured to be changed appropriately depending on the game situation. For example, when the expectation level for adding to the AT is in a normal state, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, and when it is in a high probability state, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 52. In addition, it may be possible to select a presentation mode related to the presentation tendency during the AT, and when a predetermined presentation mode is set, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, and when a specific presentation mode is set, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 52.

By configuring it in this way, players can visually grasp the current game situation through the design of the push order navigation image.

(2) When the first two stop operations are performed correctly, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the push order navigation image becomes invisible (this can be made invisible by terminating the display, or by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none may be output. At this time, just as before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size. Furthermore, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if it had ceased display because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the power was cut off.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful "2" mode may be configured to disappear after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was last displayed, or it may be configured to disappear immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was last displayed.

In this way, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" will be displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in an emphasized mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a push order mistake. In particular, because the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, and the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an highlighted mode.

In this case, the system may be configured to output at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation again, or none of them may be output.

In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" are all displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, even if the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" have ceased display because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their display began before the hopper empty error occurred, they are configured to be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared. Note that the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" may be configured to cease display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their re-display, or they may be configured to cease display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since their re-display. In other words, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease to display at different times, but after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease to display at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful mode, it becomes clear that only the third stop remains and that the correct button press order has been followed.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed correctly and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, then at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" may not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in the normal mode. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
By configuring it in this way, the player can concentrate on the stopping operation that he or she should currently perform.

(3) When the first three stop operations are performed correctly and a predetermined error occurs afterwards: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, when the third stop operation is performed (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c, which was the final stop operation, is operated), the push order navigation image "3" is displayed in a successful mode. Also, since all stop operations have now been performed in the correct mode, the GET image is displayed.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and the push order navigation image for "1," "2," and "3" is displayed again in a successful mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, the push order navigation images for the successful mode of "1," "2," and "3" are configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cleared, even if their display had ended because a specified time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since their respective display began before the hopper empty error occurred. At this time, the GET image may be displayed again, or it may not be displayed.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful modes of "1," "2," and "3" may be configured to disappear after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was last displayed, or it may be configured to disappear immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was last displayed.

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, after a specified error is resolved, all push order navigation images are reproduced in a successful manner, making it clear that all stop operations were performed in the correct manner.

Furthermore, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed correctly and a hopper empty error occurs afterwards, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" may not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in a successful mode. Note that, even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Furthermore, even if the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "3" had been terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the hopper empty error occurred, it may be configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cleared, and the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its re-display, or it may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time had elapsed since its re-display.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to clearly show that the third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately before the occurrence of the specified error, and that the third stop operation was performed in the correct manner.

Furthermore, if the operation is performed correctly up to the third stop operation (final stop operation) and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, and none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be displayed. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that he has already completed the final stop operation.

In addition, if the specified error occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be configured to be displayed in a successful manner at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, and if the specified error occurs after the payout process is executed, none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be displayed at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared. In other words, the display content after the specified error is cleared may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the specified error occurred was before or after the payout process was executed.

(4) When the first stop operation is performed incorrectly and a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

If the first stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images will be displayed in a failed manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images will cease. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" will be output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the failed push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image will be displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode will be displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the gaming machine is malfunctioning because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image for a failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to play without losing their sense of anticipation.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed correctly, the second stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

If the second stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" will be displayed in a failed manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images will cease. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" will be output from speaker S, indicating that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the failed push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image will be displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode will be displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the gaming machine is malfunctioning because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful manner, while the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed manner. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it makes it clear which stop operation resulted in a push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it makes it clear which stop operation resulted in a push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image for a failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to play without losing their sense of anticipation.

(6) When the first or second stop operation is performed incorrectly and a predetermined error occurs after the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

If the first or second stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner, the push order navigation image that is displayed at the time the push order is incorrectly entered will be displayed in a failed manner, and once a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the image was displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation image will cease. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" will be output from speaker S to indicate that the push order has been incorrect.

Then, after the third stop operation is performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the failed push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image will be displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode will be displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the gaming machine is malfunctioning because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image for a failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to play without losing their sense of anticipation.

<Configuration of push order navigation image display and reel stop warning image>
Furthermore, in a game in which the push order bell is selected as a result of an internal lottery and a push order navigation image is displayed, if a predetermined time (3 minutes) passes without a stop operation being performed after the reels start spinning (or the first or second stop operation), the aforementioned reel stop warning image (also referred to as a stop prompt image) is displayed. Then, in a situation in which the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image are displayed simultaneously, if a power outage occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, but the reel stop warning image is not displayed again. This configuration allows the player to concentrate on the push order navigation image even in the unlikely event of a power outage during play, preventing mistakes in the push order. The aforementioned configuration for displaying the push order navigation image and power outage can be applied as appropriate to the display mode of the push order navigation image at this time.

<Description of Errors Related to the Hopper 44 and Winning Lamp Effects Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

The effects applicable to this embodiment described below aim to allow the player to properly recognize that they have won by executing winning lamp effects based on winning small roles such as push order roles, or winning lamp effects based on winning replay roles such as replay roles.
Another object of the present invention is to allow the player to recognize the result of the game before a hopper empty error occurs after winning a prize.

The following describes the configuration related to hopper 44 errors and winning lamp effects that are applicable to this embodiment.

<Award winning LED lamp>
This is a part (not shown) of the effect lamps (LED lamps) provided on the front panel PS2, and is a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when a prize is won. It is also a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when an error such as a door open error or a hopper empty error occurs.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in this embodiment, the explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment, and the errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing omitted in the description of this embodiment will be explained below.

<Push order role>
This is a role that can be won in the role lottery (internal lottery), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning push order role is displayed frozen on the active line. When the winning determination process determines that a prize has been won, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is frozen. The symbol combinations that can be frozen for the push order role include correct symbol combinations that are displayed frozen when the correct push order is followed, and incorrect symbol combinations that are displayed frozen when the correct push order is not followed. A correct symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a mainly yellow bell symbol, such as bell-bell-bell, frozen on the active line, and 12 coins are paid out. An incorrect symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a blank-replay-watermelon or other symbol combination frozen on the active line, and 1 coin is paid out.

<Role of Cherry>
This is a winning combination that can be won in the winning combination lottery (internal lottery), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning cherry combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and it is determined that a prize has been won by the winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is a symbol combination that displays cherry symbols that are mainly composed of red, such as cherry-cherry-cherry, on the active line, and one medal is paid out.

<Replay role>
This is a winning combination that can be won in the winning combination lottery (internal lottery), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when it is determined to be a winning combination by the winning determination process, a replay is awarded based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay symbol is a symbol combination that displays replay symbols, mainly composed of blue, such as replay-replay-replay, on the active line.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor combination (the symbol combination that has stopped and been displayed) when the winning determination process determines that a minor combination has been won. Here, paying out game medals means adding credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, or paying out game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a win (whether by adding credits or by paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on a win. Based on the payout start command and payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting a game medal payout sound, a backlight effect (also referred to as a BL effect), and a winning lamp effect. The payout start command is configured to include information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or when a replay wins). When there is a loss or when a replay wins, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by a payout end command. When a replay wins, the sub-control means can also execute winning effects such as outputting the winning sound of the replay and a back lamp effect based on the payout start command and payout end command.

<Automatic input processing>
The automatic insertion process (automatic bet process) is a process that is executed when the winning determination process determines that a replay role has been won. In the automatic insertion process, a bet is automatically set for the same number of medals as the number of medals bet on the game in which the replay role has been won, without inserting any game medals. When the automatic insertion process is executed, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits an automatic insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of medals bet (inserted). Note that in this embodiment, the sub-control means does not execute an insertion effect (output of an insertion sound) based on the automatic insertion command, but may execute an insertion effect such as outputting an insertion sound in the same way as when a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received.

In addition, even after the automatic insertion process, if the settlement switch is operated and game medals have been bet or stored in the credits, settlement processing can be performed in the same way as before starting play (after the required bet number has been set and before the start lever has been operated). However, in the settlement processing after the automatic insertion process, the bet number set for the bet is not paid out, but instead a number of game medals corresponding to the stored credits is paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement processing).

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects such as those described in the explanation of the winning effect, settlement effect, and deposit effect applicable to this embodiment, and the error and winning effect related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment are executed. In this embodiment, a winning lamp effect is also executed.

<Winning performance>
This is an effect that is executed when a game medal is paid out, or when a symbol corresponding to a replay role is won (displayed), and is executed based on a payout start command, a payout end command, etc. When a game medal is paid out, a payout sound indicating that a game medal is being paid out, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. When a symbol corresponding to a replay role is won, a winning sound indicating that a replay has won, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. Note that if a push order role is won in the role lottery (internal lottery) and an incorrect symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the winning effect can be prevented from being executed.

<Dispensing sound output>
There are two different payout sounds for game medals that are output during the execution of the payout process for game medals: payout sound A and payout sound C. Payout sound A is the payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops, and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 game medals) is made. Payout sound C is the payout sound that is output when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and a payout (payout of 1 game medal) is made.

Payout sound A begins when a payout start command is received, repeats a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after the payout end command is received by repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). Payout sound A is output for a first payout sound period (the period during which the actual payout is being performed plus the first specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is performed, e.g., approximately 1.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Furthermore, outputting the payout sound for a predetermined payout sound period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed makes the player recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the payout sound is being output, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. As a result, it is easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, etc., that are being performed over a certain period of time, to be executed without being canceled midway.

Payout sound C starts when a payout start command is received, repeatedly outputs a third sound (e.g., a buzzing sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeatedly outputs a predetermined sound for a fourth specific time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) after the payout end command is received, and then ends. That is, payout sound C outputs a sound for a third payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the fourth specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which actual payouts are being performed (e.g., approximately 0.2 seconds). This third payout sound period is shorter than the first payout sound period of payout sound A because the number of game medals paid out is smaller. Thus, payout sound C has a shorter period than payout sound A, but by outputting the payout sound for a longer period than the payout period, the player can be sure to hear the payouts, even though the number of game medals is small, and can recognize that game medals have been awarded.
The output of the payout sound is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Note that the payout sound starts to be output after the payout start command is received, and continues to be output until a predetermined time has elapsed after the payout end command is received. However, once the payout start command is received, the payout sound may be output for a predetermined time that is the sum of the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals) plus a first specific time or a fourth specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command.
Furthermore, although the dispensing sounds A and C are different dispensing sounds, they may be the same dispensing sound.

<Winning sound output>
A winning sound A is output when a replay combination is won. The winning sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and is a winning sound that outputs a fourth sound (e.g., a "ji" sound) until a fifth specific time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the winning sound for a certain period of time, the player can be sure not to miss it and can recognize that a replay combination has been won.
The output of the winning sound is not canceled (ended) by a payout end command or bet setting (receiving an automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command). Note that the output time of the winning sound A may be configured to end before automatic insertion is performed, or may be configured to end by the time the game start operation becomes possible.

<Back lamp effect>
There are three different back lamp effects: Back Lamp Effect A, Back Lamp Effect C, and Back Lamp Effect D. Back Lamp Effect A is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and 12 coins are paid out. Back Lamp Effect C is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops and 1 coin is paid out. Back Lamp Effect D is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

Backlight effect A begins when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the backlight in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the backlight repeatedly turns on and off in a first pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) before ending. Backlight effect A is executed for a first backlight effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (e.g., approximately 1.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) backlight effect A for a first backlight effect period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which backlight effect A is being performed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, it is easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, etc., to be executed without being canceled midway through, for example, when they are being performed over a certain period of time. Note that backlight effect A is canceled (ended) upon bet setting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command).

Backlight effect C begins when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the backlight in a third pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the backlight repeatedly turns on and off in a third pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) before ending. Backlight effect C is executed for a third backlight effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which a payout is actually being made (e.g., approximately 0.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) backlight effect C for a third backlight effect period that is longer than the period during which a payout is being made, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which backlight effect C is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, it is easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, etc., to be executed without being canceled midway through, for example, when they are being executed over a certain period of time. Note that, like Back Lamp Effect A, Back Lamp Effect C is canceled (ended) when a bet is set (a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received).

Back lamp effect D begins when a payout start command is received and ends after repeatedly turning on and off the back lamp in a fourth pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). By executing back lamp effect D for the fourth back lamp effect period (the same period as the first specific time), it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a replay role has been won. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) back lamp effect D for the fourth back lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that processing based on a replay role is being performed during the period in which back lamp effect D is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, this makes it easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, etc., to be executed without being canceled midway through, for example, when they are being executed over a certain period of time. Note that back lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting (automatic deposit command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

<Prize winning lamp effect>
There are three different winning lamp effects: winning lamp effect A, winning lamp effect C, and winning lamp effect D. Winning lamp effect A is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and 12 coins are paid out. Winning lamp effect C is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. Winning lamp effect D is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

Winning Lamp Effect A begins when a payout start command is received. The winning LED lamp repeatedly lights up and off in yellow (fifth pattern) until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the winning LED lamp repeatedly lights up and off in the fifth pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) before ending. Winning Lamp Effect A is executed for a first winning lamp effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being made (e.g., approximately 1.5 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) Winning Lamp Effect A for a first winning lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being made, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which Winning Lamp Effect A is being made, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, it is easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, such as those that are being performed over a certain period of time, to be executed without being canceled midway. Note that winning lamp effect A is not canceled (ended) by betting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by operating to start play (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Winning lamp effect C begins when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp repeatedly lights up and off in red (sixth pattern) until a payout end command is received. Once the payout end command is received, the winning LED lamp repeatedly lights up and off in the sixth pattern for a sixth specific time (e.g., 2.3 seconds) before ending. Winning lamp effect C is executed for a third winning lamp effect period (the period during which the actual payout is made plus the sixth specific time, and is the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), which is longer than the period during which the actual payout is made (e.g., approximately 0.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect C for a third winning lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which payouts are being made, the player will be made to perceive the period during which the winning lamp effect C is being made as if a payout is being made, which is expected to delay the start of the next game.Furthermore, this makes it easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery to be executed over a certain period of time without being canceled midway.Note that the winning lamp effect C is not canceled (ended) by betting settings (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Winning lamp effect D begins when a payout start command is received and ends with the winning LED lamp repeatedly turning on and off in blue for a seventh specific time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) (seventh pattern). Winning lamp effect D is executed for the fourth winning lamp effect period (the same period as the seventh specific time and the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), making it easier for the player to recognize that a replay has been won. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) winning lamp effect D for the fourth winning lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that processing based on a replay is being performed during the period in which winning lamp effect D is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, this makes it easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, such as those taking a certain amount of time, to be executed without being canceled midway. Note that winning lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting (automatic deposit command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Winning lamp effects A, C, and D are configured so that the color of the winning LED lamp when it lights up is different, but the lighting and flashing pattern and the length of the execution period are the same. By making the color different only, it becomes easier to recognize that the winning lamp effect is an effect caused by a winning combination. Also, by making the execution period the same as the length of winning lamp effect A, when a cherry or replay combination is won, the next game can start earlier than when the correct pattern combination for the push order combination is displayed. However, because the winning lamp effect is being executed, it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed until the winning lamp effect ends.

Note that the winning lamp effects A and C are executed from the time the payout end command is received until the first specific time or the sixth specific time has elapsed, but once the payout start command is received, the winning lamp effect may be executed for a predetermined time that is the sum of the first specific time or the sixth specific time and the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals), without being triggered by the payout end command.
Furthermore, the "first winning lamp presentation period,""third winning lamp presentation period," and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" of winning lamp presentations A, C, and D are set to the same period as the "first payout sound period" of payout sound A, but the "first winning lamp presentation period,""third winning lamp presentation period," and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" may be set to different periods from the "first payout sound period." It is preferable that the "first winning lamp presentation period,""third winning lamp presentation period," and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" be set to the same period, and they may also be set to be longer than the time required to pay out the maximum number of game medals that can be paid out in one game.

<Error notification>
When an error such as an error related to the hopper 44 or a door open error occurs, the main control means displays an error code on the winning number display 27, and the sub-control means notifies the user of the error using the LCD (display device), speaker S, and winning LED lamp. The winning LED lamp lights up in red while an error is being notified. The winning LED lamp also lights up in red when a cherry wins, but by continuing to light up in red during an error notification, the pattern differs from when a cherry wins, making it possible to distinguish whether the notification is of an error or a win.

<Settlement performance>
This is an effect that is executed when the game medals are settled, and a settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out is output, and a sound is output to indicate that the settlement has been completed. In the settlement effect, effects using the winning LED lamp and back lamp are not executed, so even if a payout is made, it is easy to recognize that it is different from effects based on the winning of a small role or a replay role.

Hereinafter, various effects that are executed depending on the progress of the game will be explained with reference to Figures 53 to 62. Figure 53 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, Figure 54 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, Figure 55 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of a cherry role is completed, Figure 56 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of a cherry role is completed, and Figure 57 is a time chart when no game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. FIG. 58 is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 59 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, FIG. 60 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 61 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 62 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper retention error occurs).

Note that for ease of explanation, Figures 53 to 62 use ON and OFF to describe the various processes and effects, but the status of the corresponding processes and effects is shown in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/winning lamp effect (winning LED lamp)/BL effect/settlement effect/error notification (winning LED lamp), ON indicates that the process is being executed, and OFF indicates that the process is not being executed. When it changes from OFF to ON, the process etc. starts, and when it changes from ON to OFF, the process ends. For payout, ON indicates that one medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no medal has been paid out. For payout sound/insertion sound/winning sound, ON indicates that the sound is being output, and OFF indicates that the sound is not being output. For the MAX BET lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that the light is on, and OFF indicates that the light is off. For the MAX BET switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the switch has been operated, and OFF indicates that the switch has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 normally (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that no game medal has been inserted. For error (hopper empty) and error (hopper stuck), ON indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. For error display, ON indicates that an error code has been displayed by the main control means or an error screen has been displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates that no error code or error screen is being displayed.

It can also be combined with the previously explained acquisition display effects, cumulative display effects, result announcement effects, push effects, and comment effects, and times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 31 to 41 are the same as times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 53 to 62.

<If you do not insert the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed>
Figure 53 shows a case where the correct button presses are performed in the correct order, resulting in the correct symbol combination being displayed and winning. At time t0, the main control means begins the payout process, and the sub-control means, based on the received payout start command, starts outputting a payout sound A (referred to as "payout sound" in the figure, the same applies below), a winning LED lamp effect A (referred to as "winning lamp effect" in the figure, the same applies below), and a back lamp effect A (referred to as "BL effect" in the figure, the same applies below). The payout process takes 1.5 seconds if the payout process is performed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are paid out normally). At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues outputting the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A as winning effects for the T1 period (first specific time).

After the payout process is completed at time t1, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game completion check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. At time t2, the main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert game medals. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, since the T1 period has passed since time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A, win lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period, the first back lamp effect period, and the first win lamp effect period. As described above, from time t1 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing to output payout sound A, continuing to display the winning lamp A and back lamp A, and turning on the MAX BET lamp. By continuing to output payout sound A, continuing to display the winning lamp A and back lamp A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX BET switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order is completed>
Figure 54 shows a case where the correct button presses are pressed in the correct order, the correct symbol combination is displayed, and a win is achieved. Up until time t2, the situation is the same as if the MAX BET switch was not inserted after the payout process based on the press order win was completed. At time t3, the MAX BET switch is inserted. When the MAX BET switch is operated, the main control means turns off the MAX BET lamp, and the sub-control means ends the backlight effect A. From time t3 to time t4 (during the T2 period), the insertion sound A (referred to as the insertion sound in the figure; the same applies below) is output three times as an insertion effect. From time t3 onward, smooth control is possible even when various situations, such as the output of the payout sound A and the winning lamp effect A, are combined, and the insertion sound A is output. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, while also recognizing that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. At time t3, the payout sound A is output and the winning lamp effect A continues, but the back lamp effect A is ended, allowing the player to visually recognize that a bet has been set. Note that although the explanation in Figure 43 was given for the insertion operation using the MAX BET switch, the back lamp effect A is also ended and the insertion sound A is output when an insertion operation using the 1 BET switch or a medal is inserted.

<If you do not insert the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the Cherry winning combination is completed>
Figure 55 shows a case where a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is displayed stopped on an active line, resulting in a win. At time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means, based on the received payout start command, outputs a payout sound C (referred to as "payout sound" in the figure, the same applies below), and starts a winning lamp effect C (referred to as "winning lamp effect" in the figure, the same applies below) on the winning LED lamp, and a back lamp effect C (referred to as "BL effect" in the figure, the same applies below) on the back lamp. The time required for the payout process is 0.2 seconds if the process is executed normally (in this example, one game medal is paid out normally). At time t19, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues to output the payout sound C as a winning effect for a T4 period (fourth specific time) until time t24, to execute the winning lamp effect C for a T6 period (sixth specific time) until time t5, and to execute the back lamp effect C for a T1 period (first specific time) until time t23.

After the payout process is completed at time t19, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game completion check process) and turns on the blocker, making it possible to insert gaming medals. At time t20, the main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp, indicating that gaming medals can be inserted. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. (Note that this diagram assumes that enough credits have been accumulated to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX BET switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX BET switch, the machine will be able to insert gaming medals at time t20, but the MAX BET lamp will not be lit.)

At time t23, the T1 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t23 can be considered the third back lamp effect period. At time t24, the T4 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t24 can be considered the third payout sound period. At time t5, the T6 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends winning lamp effect C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the third winning lamp effect period. As described above, from time t19 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing to output payout sound C, and continuing to display the winning lamp C and back lamp C, while also turning on the MAX BET lamp. By continuing to output payout sound C, and continuing to display the winning lamp C and back lamp C, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX BET switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the Cherry winning combination has been completed>
Figure 56 shows a case where a symbol combination corresponding to the Cherry combination is displayed stopped on a pay line and a win is won. Up until time t20, the situation is the same as when no insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the Cherry combination is completed, and at time t21, an insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch. When the MAX BET switch is operated, the main control means turns off (turns off) the MAX BET lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect C. From time t21 to time t22 (during the T2 period), three coins are bet by inserting the MAX BET switch as an insertion effect, and therefore insertion sound A (referred to as insertion sound in the figure; the same applies below) is output three times. From time t21 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the output of insertion sound A, and this allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, while also recognizing that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Also, at time t21, the output of payout sound C and the winning lamp effect C continue, but by ending the back lamp effect C, the player can visually recognize that a bet has been set.

Note that Figure 56 assumes that enough credits have been accumulated to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX BET switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX BET switch, then at time t20 it will be possible to insert a gaming medal, but the MAX BET lamp will not light up. Also, while the explanation was given for inserting a medal using the MAX BET switch, inserting a medal using the 1 BET switch will also end the back lamp effect C and output insertion sound A.

<If no medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed>
As shown in FIG. 57, at time t0, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means indicating that the number of game medals to be paid out is 0. Based on the received payout start command, the sub-control means initiates the output of a winning sound A (referred to as the "winning sound" in the figure, the same applies below), a winning LED lamp effect D (referred to as the "winning lamp effect" in the figure, the same applies below), and a back lamp effect D (referred to as the "BL effect" in the figure, the same applies below). Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means continues the output of the winning sound A as the winning effect for a T5 period (fifth specific time), the winning lamp effect D for a T7 period (seventh specific time), and the back lamp effect D for a T1 period (first specific time). At time t25, the main control means initiates the automatic insertion process and transmits an automatic insertion command to the sub-control means. After the automatic insertion process is completed at time t26, the main control means turns on the blocker, thereby enabling the insertion of game medals.

At time t26, the main control means turns on the medal insertion lamp based on the fact that it is now possible to insert a gaming medal. Since no medals are inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T29, the T1 period has passed since time t09, so the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect D. In other words, the period from time t0 to t29 can be considered the fourth back lamp effect period. At time t5, the T7 period has passed since time t0, so the sub-control means ends the winning lamp effect D. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the fourth winning lamp effect period. As described above, from time t26 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D while turning on the medal insertion possible lamp. By continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, the player is made to recognize that a payout has been made and is also made to recognize that medal insertion is possible, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Note that this diagram assumes that the credit accumulation has not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process, and if it is not possible to insert gaming medals, the medal insertion possible lamp will not be turned on at time t26 (the blocker will not be turned ON).

<When a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role has finished>
As shown in Figure 58, up until time t26, the situation is the same as when no gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. At time t27, a gaming medal is inserted, causing the main control means to store one gaming medal in the credits and send a storage number command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the storage number command, the sub-control means terminates the backlight effect D and outputs a insertion sound B (referred to as an insertion sound in the figure; the same applies below) once as the insertion effect, and continues to output this sound from time t27 to time t28. Even when various situations are combined, such as the output of the insertion sound B while the winning lamp effect D is being performed from time t27 onward, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that a replay role has been won, as well as that a valuable insertion has been made and one medal has been stored, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at time t27, the winning lamp effect D continues, but by ending the back lamp effect D, it is possible to visually recognize that the points have been saved in the credits.
In this diagram, it is assumed that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process (the accumulated number is 48 or less), and even if one game medal is inserted, the state in which game medals can be inserted continues.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed>
As shown in Figure 59, up until time t2, the operation is the same as when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed, and at time t3, the settlement switch is operated instead of the MAX bet switch.
At time t3, the main control means initiates the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button and terminates (turns off) the illumination of the MAX BET lamp. The sub-control means then terminates the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A at time t3, without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. Thereafter, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is initiated as a settlement effect. Note that the settlement sound is output as a settlement effect, but effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed. To avoid player confusion due to the simultaneous output of the payout sound A and the settlement sound when the settlement process is initiated, the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, are terminated upon the start of the settlement process, and effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed. This allows the player to clearly recognize that a settlement process other than the payout process is being performed.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role has finished>
As shown in Figure 60, up until time t26, the process is the same as when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, and at time t30 the settlement switch is operated.
At time t30, the main control means initiates the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button and terminates (turns off) the illumination of the medal insertion possible lamp. The sub-control means then terminates the winning lamp effect D at time t30 without waiting for the T7 period to elapse and the back lamp effect D at time t1 to elapse. Thereafter, based on the settlement start command, it begins outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect. Note that while the settlement sound is output, effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed. The start of the settlement process terminates the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, which were scheduled to continue for the T7 and T1 periods, and effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the settlement process is in progress. Note that this diagram assumes that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process and that 19 or more credits have been accumulated.

<If payout is not performed normally after a cherry win (hopper empty error)>
As shown in FIG. 61 , the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts outputting the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed. However, because there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out, and the spinning wheel continues to rotate. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the hopper 44 is empty of game medals, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Upon the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, displays an error screen, and issues an error notification using the winning LED lamp. Note that the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C continue to be executed until time t17. Until time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as a winning lamp effect and flashes repeatedly, but at time t17 the winning LED lamp lights up in red as an error notification, and although the red color is the same, the lighting pattern is different, so it is possible to recognize that the winning lamp effect has switched to an error notification. Note that this figure shows a case in which a hopper empty error occurs without a single medal being paid out after the start of the payout process; if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper empty error occurs will be later than time t17 by the time multiple medals have been paid out.

<If payout is not performed normally after winning the Cherry role (when a hopper congestion error occurs)>
As shown in Figure 62, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a payout sound C, a winning lamp effect C, and a back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of game medals is not executed because the discharge outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals. Then, at time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect game medals for more than 201 ms after the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that game medals are clogged, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. Also at time t18, based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, and displays an error screen.

The output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are executed from the start of the payout process, and are executed before the payout process starts and a hopper retention error occurs. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the winning effects, such as the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C, before the error screen is displayed. Note that the same diagram shows a case where no medals have been paid out since the start of the payout process and a hopper retention error occurs. In a situation where multiple medals are being paid out, if a hopper retention error occurs after some of the medals have been paid out, the timing of the hopper retention error will be later than time t18 by the time some of the medals have been paid out, and the period during which the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are executed will be longer.

<Change of form>
Although the time required to normally pay out 12 game medals is set to 1.5 seconds and the time required to normally pay out one game medal is set to 0.2 seconds, the payout time may be varied depending on the number of medals to be paid out and whether the payout process only adds credits or includes paying out game medals from the hopper 44. In this case, the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44 may be set to be longer than the time required to add one game medal to credits. Conversely, the time required to add one game medal to credits may be set to be longer than the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44.

In the winning lamp effect, the color corresponding to the type of winning combination is illuminated (yellow when the push order combination is won and the correct symbol combination is won, red when the cherry combination is won, and blue when the replay combination is won), but the color of illumination may be a common color (for example, white) regardless of the type of winning combination. By using a common color, it is possible to simply notify that a certain combination has been won regardless of the symbol combination (outcome) that stops on the reels. Furthermore, the winning lamp effect can be executed regardless of the color of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination that stops on the active line, preventing misidentification.
Furthermore, the common color regardless of the type of role may be the same white for all roles, or may be divided into several groups depending on the type of role (white for bell roles and replay roles, purple for cherry roles and watermelon roles).

The winning lamp effect is executed for a time determined by the winning combination after receiving the payout end command, but it may be executed for a time determined by the winning combination after receiving the payout start command. For example, it may be executed for 2.5 seconds when the correct symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry symbol, or the symbol combination corresponding to the replay symbol stops.
The execution period of the winning lamp effect is set to the same as the output period of the payout sound, but it may be a different period. Also, the execution period of the winning lamp effect is set to the same as the output period of the back lamp effect, but it may be a different period. The execution period of the winning lamp effect can be set to a time longer than the time required for the payout process (1.5 seconds) and shorter than the time required for the hopper empty error to be set (3.5 seconds).

Although the winning lamp effect A is executed during normal times (non-AT), it may also be executed during AT. Also, the color may be the same, but the pattern of lighting and extinguishing or the execution time may be different. Also, it may not be executed during AT. By not executing it during AT, the winning lamp effect is executed each time for the correct symbol combination of the push order role, which has increased the frequency of winning, and it is possible to avoid causing inconvenience to the player.
Similarly, other roles (cherry role, replay role) may be configured to be executed during the AT, or may not be executed during the AT.

Although it has been stated that the winning lamp effect does not end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a gaming medal (receiving the reserve number command), it may also end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a gaming medal (receiving the reserve number command). After a replay combination is won, the automatic bet process may not end the winning lamp effect, but may end when a gaming medal is inserted thereafter.
Although the back lamp effect is said to end when the MAX bet switch is inserted (received the reserve insertion command) or when a game medal is inserted (received the reserve number command), it may be configured not to end.

Although it was stated that the winning LED lamp will not be used as the settlement effect, it may be used instead. This may be the same as the error notification that is performed when an error occurs, or it may be a different effect from the winning lamp effect that is performed when an error is notified or when a winning combination is achieved. In a different effect, it is desirable that one of the light color, flashing pattern, or time of the winning LED lamp be different, so that it can be recognized as being different from the error notification or winning lamp effect.

When an error occurs, an error notification is issued using the winning LED lamp. However, when the power is turned on or a door open error occurs, the winning LED lamp may also be used to notify an error in the same manner as when a hopper empty error occurs. When the power is turned on, the notification continues for a certain period of time after power is turned on, and in the case of a door open error, the notification continues until the door is closed or until a certain period of time has passed since the door was closed. In these situations, gameplay can continue, and the execution of the error notification and the execution of the winning lamp effect may overlap. If they overlap, the error notification may be given priority over the winning lamp effect. By prioritizing the error notification, it is possible to configure the system so that the winning lamp effect is not executed while the error notification is being executed, even if the trigger for executing it is met. Furthermore, if an error notification is executed while a winning lamp effect is being executed, the system may be configured to end the winning lamp effect and execute the error notification.

Also, prioritizing error notifications means that the winning LED lamp will light up in a way that corresponds to the error notification while an error notification is being executed. Specifically, when the trigger for executing the winning lamp effect is met, the winning lamp effect will be executed, but when it is the period in which the error notification is being executed, the winning LED lamp will only emit light that corresponds to the error notification; and when the period in which the error notification is executed has ended, if the period in which the winning lamp effect is being executed is still ongoing, the winning LED lamp will emit light that corresponds to the winning lamp effect.

The winning lamp effect is executed when the correct symbol combination stops in a game in which the push order role is won, when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, but it may be configured to be executed when a push order irrelevant role (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the push order irrelevant role (correct symbol combination) stops. It may also be configured to be executed when other roles such as the watermelon role or chance role are won.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

<Correct operation challenge effect installed in the gaming machine according to this embodiment>
The gaming machine in this embodiment is equipped with an effect that, when a push order role is won, does not notify the correct push order, but only notifies that the push order role has been won; this effect is referred to as a push order challenge effect. Furthermore, when a button-press role is won, an effect that does not notify the correct button-press position, but only notifies that the button-press role has been won; this effect is referred to as a button-press challenge effect. Furthermore, when a button-press + button-press role is won, an effect that does not notify the correct button-press + button-press position, but only notifies that the button-press + button-press role has been won; this effect is referred to as a push order + button-press challenge effect. These push order challenge effects, button-press challenge effects, and push order + button-press challenge effects are collectively referred to as a correct operation challenge effect. A correct operation (correct button-press order or button-press position) refers to an operation in which a high bell among the push order bells stops.

In addition, when the push order + button press role is selected, the correct push order may be announced but not the correct button press location, or the correct button press location may be announced but not the correct push order. In such cases, this may be referred to as a push order + button press challenge effect, or simply as a push order challenge effect or button press challenge effect. In any case, these effects are all referred to as a correct operation challenge effect.

The correct operation challenge presentation also includes a mode in which only the first stop is not announced when a six-choice push order role is won (in other words, the correct push order of the first stop out of three options is guessed), and a mode in which the first stop is announced but the second stop is not announced (in other words, the correct push order of the second stop out of two options is guessed).

The correct operation challenge effect includes a feature that notifies the player that one of the three button press positions is different when the button press role is selected (in other words, a feature that allows the player to guess the button press positions of the remaining two options).

If the player's operation stops a high-level bell symbol combination after the correct operation challenge effect is executed (if the correct operation challenge effect is successful), a bonus will be awarded according to the game status. For example, during normal play, this is an AT lottery or CZ lottery, and during AT, this is a lottery to extend the number of AT games (a so-called additional lottery).

The correct operation challenge effect may be executed in a predetermined game state managed by the main control means, or may be executed by lottery when a winning combination for the correct operation challenge effect is achieved.

An example of a reel arrangement for realizing the correct operation challenge effect is explained using Figure 63.

As shown in Figure 63, each reel has 20 symbols, including "Yellow Seven," "Red Seven," "Bar," and "White Seven," which are large symbols that are easy to hit with your eyes. The "Yellow Seven," "Red Seven," "Bar," and "White Seven" are each different colors, with yellow, red, black, and white being eye-catching, respectively. Because they are larger in size and different in color than the other symbols, they are easy for players to recognize even when the reels are spinning. For advanced players, it is also acceptable to target "Cherry," "Watermelon," "Replay," "Bell A," "Bell B," and "Blank" with your eyes.

An example of a condition device for realizing the correct operation challenge presentation is explained using Figure 64.

As shown in Figure 64, the bonus condition devices include a Type 1 BB condition device, an RB-B condition device, and an RB-A condition device. Additionally, the winning or replay condition devices include a replay-A condition device, a winning-A1 to A6 condition device, a winning-B1 to B4 condition device, a winning-C1 to C12 condition device, and a winning-D1 to D8 condition device. Note that the condition devices shown in Figure 64 are only a partial list, and it goes without saying that other condition devices may also be included.

Furthermore, in the multiple specifications described below, there are some conditional devices that are not required, and it is not necessary to have all of the conditional devices shown in Figure 64. For example, there are cases where the prize-winning conditional devices A1 to A6 and prize-winning conditional devices B1 to B4 are required, but the prize-winning conditional devices C1 to C12 and prize-winning conditional devices D1 to D8 are not required. The specifications described below are limited to explaining the conditional devices that are absolutely required, and conditional devices not described may or may not be present.

Figures 65 and 66 are diagrams showing symbol combinations for each winning symbol or replay symbol. The left reel column in the diagram shows the symbol corresponding to the left reel in the winning symbol, the center reel column shows the symbol corresponding to the center reel in the winning symbol, and the right reel column shows the symbol corresponding to the right reel in the winning symbol.

Figures 67 to 69 are diagrams showing the combinations of winning symbols or replay symbols for each condition device, and the control for each stop operation. For example, in the winning-C1 condition device of Figure 67, winning symbols 01 to 04 and 09 to 104 are combined, and when the left reel stops first and the red seven symbol on the left reel is pressed by eye, the middle reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 01 to 04 can be stopped. When the left reel stops first and the white seven symbol on the left reel is pressed by eye, the middle reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 25 to 40 can be stopped. When the left reel stops first, the right reel stops second, and the middle reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 09 to 40 can be stopped. It indicates that if the center reel stops at first, the left reel stops at second, and the right reel stops at third, any of the winning symbols 41 to 72 can be stopped; if the center reel stops at first, the right reel stops at second, and the left reel stops at third, any of the winning symbols 41 to 72 can be stopped; if the right reel stops at first, the left reel stops at second, and the center reel stops at third, any of the winning symbols 73 to 104 can be stopped; and if the right reel stops at first, the center reel stops at second, and the left reel stops at third, any of the winning symbols 73 to 104 can be stopped.

As mentioned above, if the left reel stops first and you press the red seven symbol on the left reel, the middle reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 01-04 can be landed. However, strictly speaking, as long as the stop is within the range that allows the bell A symbol to be drawn, any of the winning symbols 01-04 can be landed even if a bar symbol is landed instead of a red seven.

As mentioned above, if the left reel stops first and you press the white seven symbol on the left reel, the middle reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 25-40 can be landed. However, strictly speaking, as long as the stop is within the range that allows the bell B symbol to be drawn, any of the winning symbols 25-40 can be landed even if the yellow seven symbol is landed instead of the white seven symbol.

Furthermore, Figures 67 to 69 do not list all winning symbols, but only list the necessary winning symbols, so some winning symbol combinations may be the same even for devices with different conditions. For example, Winning-A1 and Winning-A2 in Figure 67 list the same winning symbol combination, but the stop control is different. Ideally, to differentiate the stop control for Winning-A1 and Winning-A2, a different winning symbol combination would be created, such as by adding a winning symbol with a PB=1 payout of one coin to Winning-A2, but this explanation will be omitted to avoid complicating the explanation. In other words, where there is a description indicating different stop control for the same winning symbol combination, the addition of an unlisted winning symbol results in a different winning symbol combination.

Furthermore, for the winning symbols C1 to C12 and winning symbols D1 to D8 shown in Figures 67 to 69, the first stop symbol can be either a red seven or a white seven, but this is not a limitation and the first stop symbol can also be a yellow seven or a bar.

Also, the first stop may not have a pressing symbol, and the symbol on the third stop may be pressed by sight. In this case, for example, if the condition device has 12 options such as Win-C1 to Win-C12, the first stop will have three options for the order to press, the second stop will have two options for the order to press, and the third stop will have two options for the symbol to press by sight, resulting in 12 correct options. Also, the second and third stops may not have options for the pressing symbol, and the symbol on the second stop may be pressed by sight. In this case, for example, if the condition device has 12 options such as Win-C1 to Win-C12, the first stop will have three options for the order to press, the second stop will have four options for the order to press and the symbol to press by sight, and the third stop will have one option, resulting in 12 correct options.

In addition, "123" in the "Note 1" column of Figures 67 to 69 indicates that the left reel stops at the first position, the center reel stops at the second position, and the right reel stops at the third position; "132" indicates that the left reel stops at the first position, the right reel stops at the second position, and the center reel stops at the third position; "213" indicates that the center reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the right reel stops at the third position; "231" indicates that the center reel stops at the first position, the right reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position; "312" indicates that the right reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the center reel stops at the third position; and "321" indicates that the right reel stops at the first position, the center reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position.

Note 1 for Replay-A in Figure 69 shows the stop control for pressing with the right eye when Replay-A is won. "Successful perfect pressing of the red seven on the upper row of the middle reel" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time, and the red seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel, and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is less than 1. "Failed perfect pressing of the red seven on the upper row of the middle reel" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time, and the red seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel, and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is 1 or more, or when the middle reel is not the first stop. "Successful perfect pressing of the white seven within the middle reel frame" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time, and the white seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel, and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is less than 2. "Middle reel "Failed to press the white seven within the frame" means that the center reel is stopped as the first stop and the white seven symbol is drawn to the top row of the center reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols becomes two or more, or when the center reel is not the first stop. "Successful five-frame press on the left reel for red seven" means that the left reel is stopped as the first stop and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the red seven symbol is drawn to the top row of the left reel and the number of symbols becomes less than five. "Failed five-frame press on the left reel for red seven" means that the left reel is stopped as the first stop and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the red seven symbol cannot be drawn to the top row of the left reel, or when the left reel is not the first stop.

The above explanation of the reel arrangement and condition device combinations for the correct operation challenge performance is based on the assumption that there is one active line in the middle row, but this is not limited to this. The active line can also be any one of the following: the downward-sloping line on the top left reel, the middle middle reel, or the bottom right reel, or the small hill line on the bottom left reel, the middle middle reel, or the bottom right reel. Furthermore, the design can be such that there are multiple active lines instead of just one.

The winning-B1 to B4 condition devices in Figure 67 are condition devices where the first left reel does not stop correctly. Similarly, the winning-D1 to D8 condition devices in Figure 69 are also condition devices where the first left reel does not stop correctly. Such condition devices are sometimes called biased bells.

A biased bell is one in which there is no correct first stop for all reels; instead, certain reels do not have a correct first stop, and only the remaining reels have a correct first stop. In other words, if there are three reels, the correct first stop operation only has two reels with four correct press sequences. For example, if there is no correct first stop for the left reel, there are only four correct press sequences: center left/right, center right/left, right left/center, and right center/left. Similarly, if there is no correct first stop for the middle reel, there are only four correct press sequences: left center right, left left/center, right left/center, and right center/left. Similarly, if there is no correct first stop for the right reel, there are only four correct press sequences: left center right, left left/center, center left/right, and center right/left. Note that a biased bell is also referred to as one in which there is no correct first stop for the middle reel or no correct first stop for the right reel. Below, biased bells will be explained using an example in which the correct first stop is not assigned to the left reel.

Note that a correct press order for a biased bell means a press order that will result in a high-value bell, and an incorrect press order for a biased bell means a press order that will result in a low-value bell or a small-value spill. In particular, with regard to an incorrect press order, even if the reels that perform the AT lottery during normal play stop first and a low-value bell is obtained, or a small-value spill is displayed, it is still considered an incorrect press order because a high-value bell has not been obtained.

When equipped with a biased bell, the expected value for the payout of game medals is higher when operating in a stop operation order other than the first stop on the left, but when operating in a stop operation order other than the first stop on the left, the AT lottery is favored less than the first stop on the left, or the AT lottery is not executed at all, so the overall expected value for ball payout is more advantageous when operating with the first stop on the left. Note that while the AT lottery has been explained, it is not limited to this and any or all of the lotteries related to ball payout, such as the AT addition lottery and CZ transition lottery, may be favored with the first stop on the left.

When a biased bell is won, it is unknown in what order the player will press the buttons to stop the reels, so the AT lottery is held after all the reels have stopped. For example, if the AT lottery is held based on the symbol combination after all the reels have stopped, by configuring the symbol combination of a 1-coin role that appears when the left reel is first stopped to be different from the symbol combination of a 1-coin role that can stop when the center or right reel is first stopped, the AT lottery can be held based on the symbol combination of a 1-coin role that is only displayed when the left reel is first stopped.

Explaining this based on Winning-A3 in Figure 67, when winning symbols 09-40 stop, which are winning symbols that can stop when the left reel stops on the first position, an AT lottery is executed; however, when winning symbols 105-120 stop, which are winning symbols that can stop when the right reel stops on the first position, or winning symbols 41-72, which are winning symbols that can stop when the center reel stops on the first position, the right reel stops on the second position, and the left reel stops on the third position, an AT lottery is not executed. In other words, by changing the winning symbols that stop when the left reel stops on the first position even if the press order is incorrect, and when the press order is incorrect in any other case, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute an AT lottery simply by determining the winning symbols after all the reels have stopped, thereby reducing program capacity.

Also, for example, when the AT lottery is executed after all reels have stopped, the AT lottery can be executed based on push order information that the left reel was stopped first. In this case, the symbol combination of a 1-coin role that occurs when the left reel is first stopped may be configured to be different from the symbol combination of a 1-coin role that can stop when the middle or right reel is first stopped, or they may be configured to be the same. Also, the AT lottery may be executed based on push order information that the reels stopped in the left-center-right push order, or the left-center push order, or the AT lottery may be executed based on push order information that the left reel was stopped first.

When a biased bell is won during a favorable zone, no instruction information will be displayed on the instruction monitor.

By configuring it in this way, the payout rate is normally highest when the left reel stops first, but since the probability of winning a biased bell is relatively higher than the probability of winning a replay, displaying an instruction monitor instructing the left reel to stop first on the instruction monitor every time a biased bell is won can frequently create anticipation in the player as to whether a special bonus will be awarded, or can make the player realize that they have not won a rare role with a higher AT win probability than a biased bell (rare roles have a lower win probability than biased bells), and by displaying an instruction on the instruction monitor, it can prevent the payout number when a biased bell is won from being stored in the payout number memory area used to calculate the instruction-included role ratio.

In addition, if you press the buttons incorrectly when you win a biased bell, you may be able to get the 1-coin role that occurs when you press the buttons incorrectly, or the push order bell may show a spill (payout of 0). The payout for such an incorrect answer is "1" when you stop the machine first on the left when you win a biased bell, but if this 1 coin were included in the instructed role ratio, the fluctuations in the payout would be limited (the difference between when the payout rate is low and when it is high would be smaller). Therefore, by not adding the payout of 1, which occurs when you stop the machine first on the left when you win a biased bell, to the instructed role ratio, the freedom in designing the payout is improved.

In addition, when a biased bell is won without executing the correct operation challenge effect, a possible mode is to send the effect group number to the sub-control means, but not display instruction information on the instruction monitor. The effect group number can be sent during advantageous zones but not during normal zones, or it can be sent during both advantageous and normal zones, but either mode is acceptable.

In this case, for example, when a biased bell is won, the main control means sends "50" as the effect group number to the sub-control means. After that, when the sub-control means receives "50" as the effect group number from the main control means, it will not execute the correct operation challenge effect, but will execute the same effect as when a loss is determined, or a mode in which no effect is executed. Also, at this time, no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor, making it difficult for the player to tell whether or not the biased bell has been won (strictly speaking, it is possible to recognize that a biased bell has been won by the combination of stopped symbols).

Furthermore, if an effect group number is transmitted when a biased bell is won, the sub-control means knows that a minor win can be obtained by first stopping the center or right reel. Therefore, there is a concern that the sub-control means may be tampered with, such as announcing that the center or right reel will be the first stop when a biased bell is won and the effect group number "50" is received. To reduce the effects of such tampering, the expected value for the difference in the number of coins when the center or right reel is first stopped when a biased bell is won is set to less than three coins (when three coins are bet). For example, if a biased bell is won in a three-coin game and there is a 1/4 probability of a payout of 11 coins among the following press orders (center left/right, center right/left, right left center, and right center left) (when the difference in the number of coins is eight coins), the expected value for the difference in the number of coins will be two coins, which is less than three coins. With this configuration, even if the biased bell is won and the effect group number is received, and the correct operation challenge effect is not executed, and an indication that the first left stop is not correct is made due to unauthorized modification of the sub-control means, the expected value for the difference in the number of coins will be less than three, so the difference in the number of coins will not increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an increase in the payout rate due to unauthorized modification of the sub-control means.

In addition, if a biased bell is won in a game with three coins bet, and 11 coins are paid out with a 1/2 probability of middle left/right, middle right/left, right left middle, or right middle left (when the difference in coins is 8 coins), the expected value for the difference in coins for any of the push orders of middle left/right, middle right/left, right left middle, and right middle left is 4 coins, which is a multiplier of 3 coins or more.In such cases, by displaying an instruction monitor in advance that the correct answer is either the first stop of the middle reel or the first stop of the right reel, it is possible to eliminate any room for tampering with the sub-control means.In other words, the main control means notifies the push order without the need for tampering with the sub-control means, making it a legitimate game specification (this information is included in the instruction-included role ratio).

In addition, when a biased bell is won in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect is not executed, the effect group number may not be sent to the sub-control means, and instruction information may not be displayed on the instruction monitor.

In this case, for example, when a biased bell is won, the effect group number is not sent from the main control means to the sub-control means. After that, when the sub-control means receives a command to stop all reels from the main control means, it will not execute the correct operation challenge effect, but will execute the same effect as when a loss is determined, or a mode in which no effect is executed. Also, at this time, no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor, making it difficult for the player to tell whether or not a biased bell has been won (strictly speaking, it is possible to recognize that a biased bell has been won by the combination of stopped symbols).

<In the case of a specification that combines 6-choice push order bells and 4-choice push order bells (biased bells)>
As a specification of a gaming machine equipped with a correct operation challenge presentation, we will explain a specification that combines a six-choice push order bell and a four-choice push order bell (biased bell).

As shown in Figure 67, for Winners-A1 to A6 and Winners-B1 to B4, Winners-A1 to A6 are 6-choice push order bells with no bias, while Winners-B1 to B4 are 4-choice push order bells with a bias.

<<When the correct operation challenge is performed with a 6-choice button order bell, and when the correct operation challenge is not performed with a 4-choice button order bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct operation challenge performance could be a prize-winning bell with a balanced six-choice push order from A1 to A6.

If the target of the correct operation challenge effect is a 6-choice push order bell with no bias towards winning - A1 to A6, the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of winning - A1 to A6 is selected, and the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect is not executed when any of winning - A1 to A6 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a correct operation challenge effect is executed when WIN-A1 is won, and any of WIN-01 to WIN-08 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area used to calculate the instruction-included combination ratio, thereby improving the flexibility of ball payout design. Furthermore, by not displaying an instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge effect is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they can perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor may not be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected during the AT, the instruction monitor may not be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected during a non-AT, the instruction monitor may not be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is not executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected during a non-AT, and the instruction monitor may be displayed when the push order notification effect (push order navigation) is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected during the AT.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning combination -A1 is won, a correct operation challenge effect is executed, and even if any of winning combinations 01 to 08 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area used to calculate the instruction-included combination ratio, thereby improving the flexibility of ball design. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge effect is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they can perform the stop operation at their own discretion. Furthermore, because the instruction monitor is only displayed when the push order is announced during the AT, the absence of the instruction monitor display allows the player to more intuitively recognize that they can perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning the six-choice push order bell with the probability of winning the four-choice push order bell, the probability of winning the four-choice push order bell is configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel when not in AT mode.

Furthermore, when comparing the probability of winning the six-choice push order bell with the probability of winning the four-choice push order bell, the probability of winning the six-choice push order bell may be configured to be higher.

This configuration increases the probability of winning the role eligible for the correct operation challenge effect, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge effect at any time.

In addition, the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a six-choice push order bell is configured to be the same as the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a four-choice push order bell.

By configuring it this way, even if the high-level bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount is the same, making it difficult to tell whether the 6-choice push order bell or the 4-choice push order bell has been won.

Furthermore, when comparing the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a six-choice push order bell and the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a four-choice push order bell, the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a four-choice push order bell may be configured to be greater.

This configuration prevents an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT play. It also reduces the stress of users who fail the correct operation challenge, preventing a decline in their interest in the game.

In addition, the correct operation challenge presentation when the six-choice push order bell is won includes a six-choice challenge, which requires the player to guess one of six different push orders; a four-choice challenge, which requires the player to guess one of four different push orders by announcing one incorrect push order on the first stop (leaving two choices for the correct push order on the first stop) and not announcing the second stop if the answer is correct; and a two-choice challenge, which requires the player to guess one of two different push orders by announcing the correct push order on the first stop but not the second stop, or by announcing one incorrect push order on the first stop (leaving two choices for the correct push order on the first stop) and notifying the second stop if the answer is correct. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, no instruction monitor display is performed.

<<When the correct operation challenge is performed with a 4-choice button order bell, but not with a 6-choice button order bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct operation challenge performance could be a four-choice bell with a bias towards winning - B1 to B4.

If the target of the correct operation challenge effect is a four-choice push order bell with a bias towards winning -B1 to B4, the instruction monitor will be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when one of winning -B1 to B4 is selected, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is not executed when one of winning -B1 to B4 is selected.

When the correct operation challenge effect is executed with a biased bell, even though the correct operation challenge effect always fails when the left reel makes its first stop, when the left reel makes its first stop, the same AT lottery as the AT lottery that is executed during normal times (when the correct operation challenge effect is not being executed) is not executed. In other words, when the correct operation challenge effect is executed with a biased bell and the left reel makes its first stop, the AT lottery is executed with a lower probability than the AT lottery that is executed during normal times, or no AT lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when Winning-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed, informing the player that the high bell will not stop when the left reel first stops, thereby increasing the player's chances of performing the correct operation.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor may be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations B1 to B4 is selected during the AT, when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations B1 to B4 is selected during the non-AT, or when the instruction monitor is displayed when the push order notification effect is executed when any of the winning combinations B1 to B4 is selected during the AT.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a win-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed, informing the player that the high bell will not stop when the left reel stops first, thereby increasing the player's chances of performing the correct operation. Furthermore, because the instruction monitor display is executed when the correct operation challenge effect or the push order notification effect is executed, it is possible to clearly indicate when it is okay to stop the left reel first and when it is not okay to stop the left reel first.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning the six-choice push order bell with the probability of winning the four-choice push order bell, the probability of winning the four-choice push order bell is configured to be higher.

This configuration prevents an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT mode. It also increases the probability of winning a winning combination eligible for the Correct Operation Challenge effect, making it easier to execute the Correct Operation Challenge effect at any time.

In addition, the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a six-choice push order bell is configured to be the same as the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a four-choice push order bell.

By configuring it this way, even if the high-level bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount is the same, making it difficult to tell whether the 6-choice push order bell or the 4-choice push order bell has been won.

Furthermore, when comparing the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a six-choice push order bell and the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a four-choice push order bell, the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a four-choice push order bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel when not in AT mode.

In addition, the correct operation challenge presentation when the four-choice push order bell is won includes a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of four different push orders, a two-choice challenge in which two incorrect push orders are announced for the first stop (the correct push order for the first stop is left as one option) and the second stop is not announced, or a two-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of two different push orders by announcing the correct push order for the first stop and not announcing the second stop. In either case of the correct operation challenge presentation, the instruction monitor display is displayed.

<<When executing the correct operation challenge effect with a 4-choice button order bell and the correct operation challenge effect with a 6-choice button order bell>>
It is conceivable that the targets of the correct operation challenge performance could be a 6-choice push order bell with no bias from A1 to A6, and a 4-choice push order bell with a bias from B1 to B4.

If the target of the correct operation challenge effect is a 6-choice push-order bell with no bias toward winning -A1 to A6, the instruction monitor will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect will be executed when any of winning -A1 to A6 is selected, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect will not be executed when any of winning -A1 to A6 is selected. Also, if the target of the correct operation challenge effect is a 4-choice push-order bell with a bias toward winning -B1 to B4, the instruction monitor will be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect will be executed when any of winning -B1 to B4 is selected, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect will not be executed when any of winning -B1 to B4 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to recognize whether the correct operation challenge presentation is a six-choice or a four-choice correct operation challenge presentation, preventing the erroneous operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning the six-choice push order bell with the probability of winning the four-choice push order bell, the probability of winning the four-choice push order bell is configured to be higher.

This configuration prevents an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT mode. It also increases the probability of winning the four-choice correct operation challenge effect, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge effect at any time.

Furthermore, when comparing the probability of winning the six-choice push order bell with the probability of winning the four-choice push order bell, the probability of winning the six-choice push order bell may be configured to be higher.

This configuration increases the probability of winning the six-choice correct operation challenge role, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge at any time.

In addition, the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a six-choice push order bell is configured to be the same as the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a four-choice push order bell.

By configuring it this way, even if the high-level bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount is the same, making it difficult to tell whether the 6-choice push order bell or the 4-choice push order bell has been won.

Furthermore, when comparing the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a six-choice push order bell and the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a four-choice push order bell, the number of payouts for high-ranking bells in a four-choice push order bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel when not in AT mode.

In addition, the correct operation challenge presentation when the six-choice push order bell is won includes a six-choice challenge, which requires the player to guess one of six different push orders; a four-choice challenge, which requires the player to guess one of four different push orders by announcing one incorrect push order on the first stop (leaving two choices for the correct push order on the first stop) and not announcing the second stop if the answer is correct; and a two-choice challenge, which requires the player to guess one of two different push orders by announcing the correct push order on the first stop but not the second stop, or by announcing one incorrect push order on the first stop (leaving two choices for the correct push order on the first stop) and notifying the second stop if the answer is correct. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, no instruction monitor display is performed.

In addition, the correct operation challenge presentation when the four-choice push order bell is won includes a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of four different push orders, a two-choice challenge in which two incorrect push orders are announced for the first stop (the correct push order for the first stop is left as one option) and the second stop is not announced, or a two-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of two different push orders by announcing the correct push order for the first stop and not announcing the second stop. In either case of the correct operation challenge presentation, the instruction monitor display is displayed.

<Processing related to instruction function according to the number of times correct operation challenge performance is failed>
When the correct operation challenge performance is executed, processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery or AT additional lottery, etc.) is executed depending on the number of times an incorrect button press is performed (low bell stops) in the incorrect button press sequence.

For example, when a six-choice correct operation challenge is executed upon winning any of the prizes A1 to A6 during the AT, if the first correct operation challenge is unsuccessful (the buttons are pressed in the incorrect order), a 50-game extra lottery is executed with a 2.5% probability; if the second correct operation challenge is unsuccessful (the buttons are pressed in the incorrect order), a 50-game extra lottery is executed with a 5.0% probability; if the third correct operation challenge is unsuccessful (the buttons are pressed in the incorrect order), a 50-game extra lottery is executed with a 7.5% probability; if the fourth correct operation challenge is unsuccessful (the buttons are pressed in the incorrect order), a 50-game extra lottery is executed with a 10% probability; if the fifth correct operation challenge is unsuccessful (the buttons are pressed in the incorrect order), a 50-game extra lottery is executed with a 50% probability; and if the sixth correct operation challenge is unsuccessful (the buttons are pressed in the incorrect order), a 50-game extra lottery is executed with a 100% probability.

With this configuration, even if a player presses the buttons in an incorrect order when the correct operation challenge is executed, the probability of winning the bonus lottery increases depending on the number of incorrect operations (failures), making it less likely that the player's motivation to play will be dampened even if they press the buttons in an incorrect order.

Also, as shown in Figure 67, when any of the winning symbols A1 to A6 is won, the winning symbols for when the button press sequence is incorrect are winning symbols 09 to 40 and winning symbols 105 to 120. Winning symbols 09 to 40 are winning symbols that can be used to draw an AT lottery when not playing the AT, while winning symbols 105 to 120 are winning symbols that do not draw an AT lottery when not playing the AT (or that draw an AT lottery with a lower probability than winning symbols 09 to 40).

If the correct button press sequence is incorrect during the correct operation challenge, there is a possibility that prizes 09-40 and 105-120 will be stopped, but if the correct operation challenge fails, the same lottery will be held for prizes 09-40 and 105-120 depending on the number of failures.

In addition, the specified memory area that stores the number of times the correct operation challenge effect has failed is initialized during the initialization process when the advantageous zone ends. Therefore, for example, if the advantageous zone ends when the number of times the correct operation challenge effect has failed is five, and the player fails the correct operation challenge effect again in a new advantageous zone, the number of times the correct operation challenge effect has failed in the new advantageous zone will be counted as the first time, and an additional lottery will be held.

This configuration can prevent players from becoming addicted to the game, such as by playing across advantageous zones.

In addition, if the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is stored in a specified memory area, the specified memory area will be initialized when the player wins the bonus lottery based on the number of failures.

This configuration prevents excessive benefits from being awarded based on the number of failures, and prevents players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, if the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is stored in a specified memory area, the specified memory area will be initialized when the correct operation challenge performance is successful.

This configuration prevents excessive benefits from being awarded based on the number of failures, and prevents players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, if the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is stored in a specified memory area, the specified memory area may not be initialized even if the correct operation challenge performance is successful. In this case, the specified memory area is configured to be initialized when the player wins the bonus lottery based on the number of failures.

This configuration prevents excessive benefits from being awarded based on the number of failures, and prevents players from becoming addicted to the game.

Furthermore, while the correct operation challenge performance has been described as being executed by guessing the button press order, it may also be executed by guessing the button press pattern, or by guessing both the button press order and the button press pattern.

<Processing related to instruction function according to the number of times correct operation challenge performance is successful>
When the correct operation challenge performance is executed, processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery or AT additional lottery, etc.) is executed depending on the number of times the operation is performed in the correct button press order (the high bell stops).

For example, when five games are played as the trigger for ending a specified game state, and a six-choice correct operation challenge effect is executed upon winning one of the prizes A1 to A6, an additional 10 games will be awarded if the correct operation challenge effect is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) once in the specified game state where the player remains for five games, an additional 20 games will be awarded if the correct operation challenge effect is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) twice in the specified game state where the player remains for five games, and an additional 20 games will be awarded if the correct operation challenge effect is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) twice in the specified game state where the player remains for five games. If the correct operation challenge presentation is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) three times, an additional 30 games will be awarded; if the correct operation challenge presentation is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) four times in a specified game state that lasts for five games, an additional 50 games will be awarded; if the correct operation challenge presentation is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) five times in a specified game state that lasts for five games, an additional 100 games will be awarded; and if the correct operation challenge presentation is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) zero times in a specified game state that lasts for five games, an additional 20 games will be awarded.

This configuration allows the player's sense of anticipation to be gradually increased depending on the number of correct button presses when the correct operation challenge is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the number of times that the correct operation challenge effect is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) in a specified game state that lasts for five games is zero, no additional bonus may be added; if the number of times that the correct operation challenge effect is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) in a specified game state that lasts for five games is zero, the specified game state may be extended until the correct operation challenge effect is successfully performed; or the specified game state may be ended when the correct operation challenge effect is performed five times.

In addition, the specified memory area that stores the number of successful correct operation challenge performances is initialized during the initialization process when the advantageous zone ends. For example, when the number of successful correct operation challenge performances has reached four, the advantageous zone ends and the specified memory area that stores the number of successful correct operation challenge performances is set to 0 in the new advantageous zone.

With this configuration, even if someone tries to extend the correct operation challenge effect by using a gameplay method not performed in normal gameplay, it will be reset when the advantageous zone ends, thereby reducing the damage caused by fraudulent ball output manipulation.

Furthermore, while the correct operation challenge performance has been described as being executed by guessing the button press order, it may also be executed by guessing the button press pattern, or by guessing both the button press order and the button press pattern.

<Processing when the correct operation challenge performance when the 6-choice push order bell is won is limited to 4 or 2 choices>
A mode of notifying some operation modes when the correct operation challenge performance is executed to increase the probability of performing the correct operation will be described.

As mentioned above, certain operation modes may be announced when the correct operation challenge is performed. For example, there is a four-choice challenge in which, when a six-choice push order bell is won, one incorrect push order is announced at the first stop (the first stop has two correct push orders), and if the answer is correct, the second stop is not announced, allowing the player to guess one of four possible push orders; a two-choice challenge in which, when a six-choice push order bell is won, the correct push order is announced at the first stop but the second stop is not announced, or, one incorrect push order at the first stop (the first stop has two correct push orders), and if the answer is correct, the second stop is announced, allowing the player to guess one of two possible push orders; and a two-choice challenge in which, when a four-choice push order bell is won, two incorrect push orders at the first stop (the first stop has one correct push order), and the second stop is not announced, or,, the correct push order at the first stop has not been announced, allowing the player to guess one of two possible push orders.

Specifically, let's explain what happens when Winning-A1 is won. When Winning-A1 is won and the correct operation challenge effect is executed, and the first stop is announced as correct and a two-choice challenge is executed, "1??" is displayed in the area of the LCD that displays the push order. The "1" on the left corresponds to the left reel, the "?" in the middle corresponds to the middle reel, and the "?" on the right corresponds to the right reel.

If the player makes the left reel the first stop, "-??" will be displayed in the area of the LCD that displays the push order. Additionally, a bell A symbol or a bell B symbol will stop on the active line in the middle of the left reel. The "-" on the left of the LCD indicates that the correct operation has been performed, and other suitable display modes can be designed, such as displaying nothing or displaying a "○". When "-??" is displayed on the LCD, it is unclear whether the correct operation for the second stop was the middle reel or the right reel, providing the player with the fun of guessing between two options.

If the player makes the middle reel stop for the second time, the area of the LCD displaying the push order will display "-??". Also, a bell A symbol or a bell B symbol will stop on the active line in the middle of the middle reel. The LCD display does not change upon the second stop, but it may also change, such as displaying "--?". When "-??" is displayed on the LCD, it is unclear whether the second stop was correct or incorrect, maintaining a sense of anticipation until the very end. In this embodiment, a correct answer is confirmed when two bells A or B stop on an active line, so a player checking the main reels can tell whether they got it right or wrong based on the symbols that stop. It is also possible to make it so that the main reels do not reveal whether they got it right or wrong until the third stop.

When the player stops the right reel for the third time, the LCD screen will display a congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" or an additional bonus such as "+100." Additionally, a Bell A symbol or a Bell B symbol will stop on the active line in the middle of the right reel, resulting in one of the following symbol combinations: Bell A, or Bell B - Bell A, or Bell B - Bell A, or Bell B. Note that processing related to instruction functions such as the bonus lottery is performed based on the symbol combination or push order information when all reels have stopped, so the timing for displaying a congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" or an additional bonus such as "+100" is after processing related to instruction functions when all reels have stopped has been performed.

Furthermore, if a player hits the center or right reel with a first stop when a Win-A1 win occurs, the "1??" displayed on the LCD screen may be hidden entirely, or a failure effect may be performed before the "1??" display is hidden. Furthermore, the symbol combination displayed when all reels stop will be one of the following: "Replay - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven." In this case, since one of the "Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" symbols stops on the center or right reel at the time of the first stop, the push order will be deemed incorrect when the center or right reel first stops, and the instruction function executed when all reels stop will not be executed, or a lower profit will be awarded compared to when the push order is correct.

Furthermore, if a player makes the left reel stop for the first time and the right reel stop for the second time when a win-A1 is won, the symbol combination displayed when all reels stop will be one of the following: "Bell A or Bell B - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven." In this case, since one of the "Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" symbols stops on the right reel at the time of the second stop, the push order is deemed incorrect when the right reel stops for the second time, and the instruction function executed when all reels stop will not be executed, or a lower profit will be awarded compared to when the instruction function is correct. For wins 09-40, if the correct operation challenge effect is not executed, the instruction function will be executed. However, if the effect stops when the correct operation challenge effect is executed, a lower expected profit will be awarded than the expected profit that could be earned if the instruction function is not executed or the correct operation challenge effect is not executed.

<The correct operation challenge effect will be executed depending on the eye-pressing skill when the replay is won>
The condition device for executing the correct operation challenge effect can be a push order bell, a replay, or a common bell. Below, we will explain how to execute the correct operation challenge effect when replaying. Note that the instruction monitor display is hidden when executing the correct operation challenge effect when replaying.

This section explains an example of executing the correct operation challenge effect when Replay-A shown in Figure 69 is won.

When a correct operation challenge effect is executed when Replay-A is won, the symbol combination that stops varies depending on the player's stop operation position.

For example, if you press the red seven exactly on the top row of the center reel when it first stops, the red seven symbol will stop on the top row of the center reel (and the cherry symbol will stop on the middle row of the center reel, which is the active line). Then, if the left and right reels are stopped in any order and at any timing, replay 01 will stop, and if replay 01 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will be executed. In this case, if you are unable to press the red seven exactly on the top row of the center reel when it first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will not be executed, or processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when replay 01 has stopped will be executed.

Furthermore, if a white seven is pressed within the frame when the center reel first stops, a white seven symbol will stop on the top row of the center reel (a blank symbol will stop in the middle row of the center reel, which is the active line). Then, if the left and right reels are stopped in any order and at any timing, replay 02 will stop, and if replay 02 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will be executed. In this case, if a white seven cannot be pressed within the frame when the center reel first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will not be executed, or processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when replay 02 has stopped will be executed. Note that processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 02 stops will execute processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 01 has stopped. This is because it is easier to hit the white seven symbol within the frame of the middle reel with precision than it is to hit the red seven symbol on the top row of the middle reel (more symbols are drawn).

Furthermore, if the red seven is pressed within five frames when the left reel first stops, the red seven symbol will stop in the middle of the left reel (the red seven symbol will stop in the middle of the left reel, which is the active line). Then, if the center and right reels are stopped in any order and at any timing, replay 03 will stop, and if replay 03 is stopped when all reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will be executed. In this case, if the red seven cannot be pressed within five frames when the left reel first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 is stopped when all reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will not be executed, or processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when replay 03 has stopped will be executed. Note that processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 03 has stopped will execute processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 02 has stopped. This is because it is easier to hit the red seven symbol within five frames on the left reel than it is to hit the white seven symbol within the frame of the middle reel (more symbols are drawn).

In this way, by varying the symbol combinations that can be stopped depending on the stop position when Replay-A is won, the symbol combination that corresponds to the stop position will stop, and when all reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function can be executed according to the symbol combination. An example of processing related to the instruction function according to the symbol combination is when Replay 01 stops, the number of AT games increases by 20 games, when Replay 02 stops, the number of AT games increases by 10 games, when Replay 03 stops, the number of AT games increases by 5 games, and when Replay 04 stops, the number of AT games does not increase.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a common bell is won, where the payout amount does not change depending on the button press order regardless of whether replay is selected, a different mode of processing related to the instruction function depending on the button press position may be used, similar to when replay-A is selected.

<In the case of specifications that combine 12-choice push order + push-button bell and 8-choice push order + push-button bell (biased bell)>
As specifications for a gaming machine equipped with a correct operation challenge performance, we will explain specifications that combine a 12-choice push order + eye-pressing role and an 8-choice push order + eye-pressing role.

As shown in Figures 67 to 69, for Winners - C1 to C12 and Winners - D1 to D8, Winners - C1 to C12 are balanced 12-choice push order + keystroke bells, while Winners - D1 to D8 are balanced 8-choice push order + keystroke bells.

<<When the correct operation challenge is performed with a 12-choice button sequence + a button press bell, and when the correct operation challenge is not performed with an 8-choice button sequence + a button press bell>>
The target of the correct operation challenge performance could be a winning combination - a balanced 12-choice pressing sequence from C1 to C12 + a timing bell.

If the target of the correct operation challenge effect is a balanced 12-choice button sequence of Winning - C1 to C12 + timing bell, the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect is executed when Winning - C1 to C12 is won, and the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect is not executed when Winning - C1 to C12 is won.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a correct operation challenge effect is executed when a winning combination -C1 is won, and one of the winning combinations 01 to 04 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area used to calculate the instruction-inclusive combination ratio, thereby improving the flexibility of ball payout design. Furthermore, by not displaying an instruction monitor when a correct operation challenge effect is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they can perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when one of the winning combinations C1 to C12 is selected during the AT, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when one of the winning combinations C1 to C12 is selected during a non-AT, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is not executed when one of the winning combinations C1 to C12 is selected during a non-AT, and the instruction monitor display may be displayed when the push order + button press notification effect (push order + button press navigation) is executed when one of the winning combinations C1 to C12 is selected during the AT.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning combination -C1 is won, a correct operation challenge effect is executed, and even if one of winning combinations 01 to 04 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area used to calculate the instruction-included combination ratio, thereby improving the flexibility of ball design. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge effect is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they can perform the stop operation at their own discretion. Furthermore, because the instruction monitor is only displayed when the push order + eye push is notified during the AT, the absence of the instruction monitor display allows the player to more intuitively recognize that they can perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of a 12-choice button sequence + keystroke bell with the winning probability of an 8-choice button sequence + keystroke bell, the winning probability of an 8-choice button sequence + keystroke bell is configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel when not in AT mode.

Furthermore, when comparing the winning probability of a 12-choice button sequence + keystroke bell with the winning probability of an 8-choice button sequence + keystroke bell, the winning probability of a 12-choice button sequence + keystroke bell may be configured to be higher.

This configuration increases the probability of winning the role eligible for the correct operation challenge effect, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge effect at any time.

In addition, the payout number for high-value bells in the 12-choice push order + key push bell mode is configured to be the same as the payout number for high-value bells in the 8-choice push order + key push bell mode.

By configuring it this way, even if the high-key bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount will be the same, making it difficult to tell whether the 12-choice push order + push order bell or the 8-choice push order + push order bell has been won.

Furthermore, when comparing the number of payouts for high-ranking bells with a 12-choice push order + keystroke bell and the number of payouts for high-ranking bells with an 8-choice push order + keystroke bell, the number of payouts for high-ranking bells with an 8-choice push order + keystroke bell may be configured to be greater.

This configuration prevents an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT play. It also reduces the stress of users who fail the correct operation challenge, preventing a decline in their interest in the game.

In addition, when the 12-choice push order + button press bell is won, the correct operation challenge performance is as follows: the first stop correct push order and button press pattern are not announced, and the second stop correct push order is not announced either, so the player must guess one of the 12 types of push orders + button presses; or the first stop incorrect push order is announced, but the button press pattern is not announced (the first stop correct push order + button press is made into four choices), and the second stop correct push order is not announced, so the player must guess one of the 12 types of push orders + button presses. There are eight-choice challenges where you have to guess one of the push-button sequences; six-choice challenges where the correct push-button sequence and the push-button symbol on the first stop are not announced, but the correct push-button sequence on the second stop is announced; or the correct push-button sequence on the first stop is not announced, but the push-button symbol is announced, but the correct push-button sequence on the second stop is not announced, so you have to guess one of six push-button sequences + push-button sequences; and a six-choice challenge where the correct push-button sequence on the first stop is announced, but the push-button symbol is not announced, and the correct push-button sequence on the second stop is not announced, and the incorrect push-button sequence on the first stop is announced. The player is notified of one of the four push sequences + pressing patterns (the first stop correct push sequence + pressing patterns are set to four options) and the second stop correct push sequence is announced, or the player is informed of one of the four push sequences + pressing patterns (the first stop correct push sequence is set to two options) and the second stop correct push sequence is not announced, making it a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of the four push sequences + pressing patterns. There are three-choice challenges, where the player must guess one of three different push sequences; two-choice challenges, where the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced but the button press pattern is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced; the correct push sequence for the first stop and button press pattern are announced but the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; or one incorrect push sequence for the first stop and button press pattern are announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced, whereby the player must guess one of two types of push sequences + button presses. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, no instruction monitor display is performed.

<<When the correct operation challenge is performed with an 8-choice button sequence + a button press bell, and when the correct operation challenge is not performed with a 12-choice button sequence + a button press bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct operation challenge performance could be a prize-winning bell with a biased eight-choice push order from D1 to D8.

If the target of the correct operation challenge effect is an 8-choice push order bell with a bias towards winning - D1 to D8, the instruction monitor will be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when one of winning - D1 to D8 is selected, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is not executed when one of winning - D1 to D8 is selected.

If the correct operation challenge effect is performed with a biased bell, when the left reel is stopped for the first time, the AT lottery that is normally performed will not be performed, and instead an AT lottery will be performed with a lower probability than the AT lottery that is normally performed, or no AT lottery will be performed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a win -D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed, informing the player that the high bell will not stop when the left reel first stops, thereby increasing the player's chances of performing the correct operation.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor may be displayed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning symbols D1 to D8 is selected during the AT, when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning symbols D1 to D8 is selected during the non-AT, and when the push order + timing notification effect is executed when any of the winning symbols D1 to D8 is selected during the AT.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a win-D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed, informing the player that the high bell will not stop when the left reel stops first, thereby increasing the player's chances of performing the correct operation. Furthermore, because the instruction monitor display is executed when the correct operation challenge effect or the push order notification effect is executed, it is possible to clearly indicate when it is okay to stop the left reel first and when it is not okay to stop the left reel first.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of a 12-choice button sequence + keystroke bell with the winning probability of an 8-choice button sequence + keystroke bell, the winning probability of an 8-choice button sequence + keystroke bell is configured to be higher.

This configuration prevents an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT mode. It also increases the probability of winning a winning combination eligible for the Correct Operation Challenge effect, making it easier to execute the Correct Operation Challenge effect at any time.

In addition, the payout number for high-value bells in the 12-choice push order + key push bell mode is configured to be the same as the payout number for high-value bells in the 8-choice push order + key push bell mode.

By configuring it this way, even if the high-key bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount will be the same, making it difficult to tell whether the 12-choice push order + push order bell or the 8-choice push order + push order bell has been won.

Furthermore, when comparing the number of payouts for high-ranking bells with a 12-choice push order + keystroke bell and the number of payouts for high-ranking bells with an 8-choice push order + keystroke bell, the number of payouts for high-ranking bells with an 8-choice push order + keystroke bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel when not in AT mode.

In addition, when the 8-choice push order + button press bell is won, the correct operation challenge performance is as follows: the 8-choice challenge requires the player to guess one of the 8 types of push orders + button presses by not announcing the correct push order and button press pattern for the first stop, nor the correct push order for the second stop; the 8-choice challenge requires the player to guess one of the 8 types of push orders + button presses by not announcing the correct push order and button press pattern for the first stop, but announcing the correct push order for the second stop; the correct push order for the first stop is announced, but the button press pattern is not announced, and the correct push order for the second stop is not announced; or the correct push order for the first stop is not announced, but the button press pattern is announced. There are four-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of four different push sequences + timing by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the correct push sequence for the second stop, and two-choice challenges in which the player is informed of the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the timing symbol and is informed of the correct push sequence for the second stop, the correct push sequence for the first stop and timing symbol are announced but not the correct push sequence for the second stop, or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced but the timing symbol is announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced, and the player must guess one of two different push sequences + timing symbols. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, the instruction monitor will be displayed.

<<When executing the correct operation challenge effect with an 8-choice button sequence + a button press bell, and executing the correct operation challenge effect with a 12-choice button sequence + a button press bell>>
It is possible to consider setting the correct operation challenge performance to be either a winning combination of a 12-choice button press sequence with no bias from C1 to C12 + a button press bell, or a winning combination of a biased 8-choice button press sequence with bias from D1 to D8 + a button press bell.

If the target of the correct operation challenge effect is a 12-choice push order + button press bell with no bias toward winning - C1 to C12, the instruction monitor will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect would be executed if any of winning - C1 to C12 is won, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect would not be executed if any of winning - C1 to C12 is won. Also, if the target of the correct operation challenge effect is a 8-choice push order + button press bell with a bias toward winning - D1 to D8, the instruction monitor will be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect would be executed if any of winning - D1 to D8 is won, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed in situations where the correct operation challenge effect would not be executed if any of winning - D1 to D8 is won.

By configuring it in this way, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to recognize whether the correct operation challenge presentation is for 12 choices or 8 choices, preventing the erroneous operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of a 12-choice button sequence + keystroke bell with the winning probability of an 8-choice button sequence + keystroke bell, the winning probability of an 8-choice button sequence + keystroke bell is configured to be higher.

This configuration prevents an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT mode. It also increases the probability of winning the eight-choice correct operation challenge effect, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge effect at any time.

Furthermore, when comparing the winning probability of a 12-choice button sequence + keystroke bell with the winning probability of an 8-choice button sequence + keystroke bell, the winning probability of a 12-choice button sequence + keystroke bell may be configured to be higher.

This configuration increases the probability of winning the 12-choice correct operation challenge effect, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge effect at any time.

In addition, the payout number for high-value bells in the 12-choice push order + key push bell mode is configured to be the same as the payout number for high-value bells in the 8-choice push order + key push bell mode.

By configuring it this way, even if the high-key bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount will be the same, making it difficult to tell whether the 12-choice push order + push order bell or the 8-choice push order + push order bell has been won.

Furthermore, when comparing the number of payouts for high-ranking bells with a 12-choice push order + keystroke bell and the number of payouts for high-ranking bells with an 8-choice push order + keystroke bell, the number of payouts for high-ranking bells with an 8-choice push order + keystroke bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel when not in AT mode.

In addition, when the 12-choice push order + button press bell is won, the correct operation challenge performance is as follows: the first stop correct push order and button press pattern are not announced, and the second stop correct push order is not announced either, so the player must guess one of the 12 types of push orders + button presses; or the first stop incorrect push order is announced, but the button press pattern is not announced (the first stop correct push order + button press is made into four choices), and the second stop correct push order is not announced, so the player must guess one of the 12 types of push orders + button presses. There are eight-choice challenges where you have to guess one of the push-button sequences; six-choice challenges where the correct push-button sequence and the push-button symbol on the first stop are not announced, but the correct push-button sequence on the second stop is announced; or the correct push-button sequence on the first stop is not announced, but the push-button symbol is announced, but the correct push-button sequence on the second stop is not announced, so you have to guess one of six push-button sequences + push-button sequences; and a six-choice challenge where the correct push-button sequence on the first stop is announced, but the push-button symbol is not announced, and the correct push-button sequence on the second stop is not announced, and the incorrect push-button sequence on the first stop is announced. The player is notified of one of the four push sequences + pressing patterns (the first stop correct push sequence + pressing patterns are set to four options) and the second stop correct push sequence is announced, or the player is informed of one of the four push sequences + pressing patterns (the first stop correct push sequence is set to two options) and the second stop correct push sequence is not announced, making it a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of the four push sequences + pressing patterns. There are three-choice challenges, where the player must guess one of three different push sequences; two-choice challenges, where the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced but the button press pattern is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced; the correct push sequence for the first stop and button press pattern are announced but the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; or one incorrect push sequence for the first stop and button press pattern are announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced, whereby the player must guess one of two types of push sequences + button presses. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, no instruction monitor display is performed.

In addition, when the 8-choice push order + button press bell is won, the correct operation challenge performance is as follows: the 8-choice challenge requires the player to guess one of the 8 types of push orders + button presses by not announcing the correct push order and button press pattern for the first stop, nor the correct push order for the second stop; the 8-choice challenge requires the player to guess one of the 8 types of push orders + button presses by not announcing the correct push order and button press pattern for the first stop, but announcing the correct push order for the second stop; the correct push order for the first stop is announced, but the button press pattern is not announced, and the correct push order for the second stop is not announced; or the correct push order for the first stop is not announced, but the button press pattern is announced. There are four-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of four different push sequences + timing by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the correct push sequence for the second stop, and two-choice challenges in which the player is informed of the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the timing symbol and is informed of the correct push sequence for the second stop, the correct push sequence for the first stop and timing symbol are announced but not the correct push sequence for the second stop, or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced but the timing symbol is announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced, and the player must guess one of two different push sequences + timing symbols. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, the instruction monitor will be displayed.

<Guaranteed lottery if the eye-pressing challenge fails>
This description explains a mode in which a correct operation challenge presentation (eye-pressing challenge presentation) is executed when 12-choice pressing sequence + eye-pressing bell, 8-choice pressing sequence + eye-pressing bell, or replay-A is won, and a certain amount of profit is given even if the player fails the eye-pressing challenge as a result of performing a stop operation.

If a player fails to stop the machine during the eye-pressing challenge, a guaranteed lottery will be held based on the symbol combinations when all reels have stopped.

For example, if WIN-C1 is won, and the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, one of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 04 will stop when all the reels have stopped, and if the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, one of the winning symbol combinations 25 to 40 will stop when all the reels have stopped. If one of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 04 has stopped during the processing when all the reels have stopped, an AT addition lottery will be executed, and if one of the winning symbol combinations 25 to 40 has stopped, a guarantee lottery will be executed.

In this case, when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, the number of AT games will be increased by 50 with a 100% probability, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, the number of AT games will be increased by 50 with a 50% probability; when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, the number of AT games will be increased by 50 with a 100% probability, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, the number of AT games will be increased by 10 with a 100% probability; Possible modes include when aiming for the red seven symbol on the left reel and the first stop, there is a 100% chance that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games, and when aiming for the white seven symbol on the left reel and the first stop, there is a 10% chance that the number of AT games will be increased by 10 games, or when aiming for the red seven symbol on the left reel and the first stop, there is a 100% chance that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games, and when aiming for the white seven symbol on the left reel and the first stop, there is a 10% chance that the number of AT games will be increased by 100 games.

In other words, the expected value of the profit awarded to the player is lower if the Eye-Striking Challenge fails than if it is successful.

By configuring it in this way, even players who are not confident in their eye-pressing skills can actively take on the eye-pressing challenge, increasing the fun of the game.

<Left push recommended lamp>
When the biased bell is won, as mentioned above, if the left reel is stopped first, the AT lottery will be executed with a higher probability than if a reel other than the left reel is stopped first, so during normal times, the player will have a lower frequency of obtaining a high-value bell if the left reel is stopped first, but since the AT lottery can be entered, it is a relatively advantageous operation mode. Also, even if the biased bell is won during normal times (non-AT), the instruction monitor will not be displayed (instruction information will not be displayed).

However, since there is a possibility that an uninformed player may stop the middle or right reel first without realizing that the game requires the left reel to stop first, a left push recommendation lamp is provided, and is configured to light up when the left reel is to stop first.

The left push recommendation lamp consists of a single red LED and is located in a position visible to the player (for example, on the middle panel, operation panel 11, or lower panel 5). However, the left push recommendation lamp may also be composed of a green LED or a full-color LED.

The left push recommendation lamp has a smaller lighting area than the instruction monitor, making the instruction monitor easier for players to see than the left push recommendation lamp.

The left push recommendation lamp may be a lamp managed by the main control means or a lamp managed by the sub-control means, and as long as each control means is configured to be able to determine whether it is non-AT or AT, the lamp can be switched on and off.

The left push recommendation lamp remains lit when not in AT mode, and lights up if not in AT mode after power is turned on and remains lit until AT is started.

Also, in non-AT situations where the payout remains the same whether the middle or right reel makes the first stop or the left reel makes the first stop (for example, when there is a miss win or when a conditional device that does not care about the press order wins, and the AT lottery is not held or the AT lottery is held regardless of the press order), the left push recommendation lamp will remain lit.

This configuration prevents players from detecting a winning combination based on the lighting status of the lamp. It also reduces the amount of eye movement required by players as the lamp repeatedly lights up and goes out, reducing fatigue during play.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is designed to display a demo screen a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after all reels have stopped (the demo time counting timing of the sub-control means), but the left push recommendation lamp remains lit even while the demo screen is being displayed (it stays lit when the left push recommendation lamp is lit, and off when it is off).

By configuring it in this way, players who start playing while the demo screen is displayed can be made aware that the left reel will be the first stop.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the menu screen is displayed when the sub-switch 20 is pressed at a certain timing after all reels have stopped (timing when the menu screen can be displayed), but the left push recommendation lamp remains lit even when the menu screen is displayed (it stays lit when the left push recommendation lamp is lit, and it stays off when it is off).

By configuring it in this way, players who start playing while the menu screen is displayed can be made aware that the left reel will be the first stop.

In addition, when starting an AT from a non-AT, the left push recommendation lamp will turn off. The AT can be started after all reels have stopped and the AT state has been set (after the game immediately prior to the AT start has ended), or it can be triggered by operating the start switch for the next game (AT start game) that has set the AT state when all reels have stopped.

In addition, when the AT changes to non-AT (when the AT ends), the left push recommendation lamp will light up. This change from AT to non-AT may be triggered by all reels stopping in the final AT game, by operating the start switch for the game after the final AT game, or by the end of the advantageous zone. In addition, to avoid cases where the lighting of the left push recommendation lamp confirms that the AT will not continue (for example, a revival suggestion is made during a defeat presentation but the left push recommendation lamp lights up), when a revival suggestion is made, the left push recommendation lamp will light up only after it is confirmed that there will be no revival.

Also, if the left press recommendation lamp is lit when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the left press recommendation lamp may be turned off or may remain lit. If the left press recommendation lamp is turned off, it will be turned on again when the setting confirmation mode is exited.

By configuring it this way, the settings during setting check mode are made by the administrator, so there is no need to notify the player. It is also possible to have the administrator confirm that the left press recommendation lamp is being controlled normally (the lamp can be switched on and off) by turning it off during setting check mode. In this case, if the left press recommendation lamp is off when entering setting check mode, the left press recommendation lamp may remain off or may be switched on (if the left press recommendation lamp is off when entering setting check mode and the left press recommendation lamp is lit, the left press recommendation lamp will be turned off when setting check mode ends).

If the power is cut off while the left press recommended lamp is lit, and the setting key is turned ON when the power is turned back on and the setting change mode is entered, the left press recommended lamp may be turned off or may remain lit. If the left press recommended lamp is turned off, it will be turned on again when the setting change mode is exited.

By configuring it this way, the settings during setting change mode are made by the administrator, so there is no need to notify the player. It is also possible to have the administrator confirm that the left press recommendation lamp is being controlled normally (the lamp can be switched on and off) by turning it off during setting change mode. In this case, if the left press recommendation lamp is off when entering setting change mode, the left press recommendation lamp may remain off or may be switched on (if the left press recommendation lamp is off when entering setting change mode and the left press recommendation lamp is lit, the left press recommendation lamp will be turned off when setting change mode ends).

The left push recommendation lamp may also remain lit during the AT. In this case, the left push recommendation lamp will remain lit whether the first left stop correct bell is won, the first middle stop correct bell is won, or the first right stop correct bell is won. This is because the lamp is lit to recommend pressing left for the gaming machine as a whole, and is a possible configuration when not corresponding to individual condition devices. Furthermore, since an instruction monitor is displayed during the AT, the player will be able to understand the push order even if the left push recommendation lamp is lit.

In this case, the left-press recommendation lamp will not be controlled to light up depending on the state, which reduces the program size and simplifies the program.

If the power is cut off while the left press recommended lamp is lit, and the left press recommended lamp lights up when the power is turned back on, but if the power is cut off while the left press recommended lamp is off, and the left press recommended lamp does not light up when the power is turned back on.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players from thinking they need to press left even if the light is only lit for a moment.

<BGM related modes>
In this embodiment, the modes relating to BGM include a normal mode (sometimes referred to as a first mode) and a distribution mode (sometimes referred to as a second mode).
In the normal mode, the device is configured to be able to output from a speaker S BGM preset for each performance stage, continuous performance and chance performance, regardless of whether the BGM is for which a music usage fee is charged or is copyright-free (not protected by copyright) for which no music usage fee is charged.
In the distribution mode, the speaker S is configured to output only copyright-free BGM, without outputting BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred, and when BGM for a performance stage, BGM for continuous performances, BGM for chance performances, etc. is set in advance, the copyright-free BGM is output from the speaker S instead of the BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred. Note that output from the speaker S is sometimes simply referred to as BGM being played.

In this way, even for the same performance stage, the same continuous performance, or the same chance performance, the background music output from speaker S may differ depending on whether it is set to normal mode or distribution mode.

Previously, to avoid copyright infringement when uploading video footage of gameplay to social media or video distribution sites, it was necessary to edit out the parts of the video where background music was playing, or to mute the video or overlay it with other background music.

In this embodiment, when the distribution mode is set, copyright-free background music is played instead of background music that incurs a music usage fee. Therefore, if the distribution mode is set and the gameplay is filmed, uploading the filmed video to social media or a video distribution site will not constitute copyright infringement of the music stored on the gaming machine. By setting the game to distribution mode in this way, the effort required to avoid copyright infringement can be significantly reduced.

Even when the streaming mode is set, the BGM output from the speaker S may be configured not to be changed to copyright-free BGM in certain situations (for example, during bonus scenes or endings, which are important for portraying the worldview of the original anime or drama, or situations where the video and BGM are closely linked and changing the BGM would diminish the quality of the video). By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid drastically reducing the interest of the presentation.

In addition, in this embodiment, copyright-free background music is played when the distribution mode is set, but this is not limiting; background music that incurs a music usage fee may also be played silently (volume level 0). In this configuration, background music that incurs a music usage fee is played silently regardless of the set volume level, while sound effects such as winning sounds, payout sounds, and stop sounds, as well as copyright-free background music, are preferably output from speaker S at a volume that corresponds to the set volume level. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid copyright infringement for the music, while not drastically reducing the entertainment value of the presentation.

<Explanation regarding the period during which the BGM mode can be switched> In this embodiment, the BGM mode can be switched during the period from a predetermined timing after the end of a game (for example, two seconds after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has finished, after the payout process has finished, etc.)) until the start operation for the next game (betting operation or start switch operation) is performed. In other words, the BGM mode cannot be switched during the period from the start of a game to the end of that game.

This configuration prevents the player from accidentally switching background music modes during play, which could stop the game's progress or prevent the player from being able to concentrate on the presentation. It is also possible to configure the system so that background music modes can be switched even during play.

Furthermore, while it is possible to switch the BGM mode, it is possible regardless of whether the game screen or the demo screen is being displayed. However, this is not limiting, and it may be configured so that the BGM mode cannot be switched while the demo screen is being displayed. Furthermore, it may be configured so that the BGM mode cannot be switched after a specified game has ended (for example, after a game in which a continuous effect is being played has ended, or after a game in which a specified chance effect has been executed has ended) or while the menu screen is being displayed.

The system may also be configured so that the BGM mode can be switched regardless of whether the player is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone. By configuring the system in this way, the player can switch the BGM mode without waiting for the transition to an advantageous zone.

It may also be configured so that the BGM mode can only be switched in advantageous zones. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to tell whether the zone is normal or advantageous based on whether the BGM mode can be switched.

<Explanation on how to switch background music modes>
If you want to set it to distribution mode, in a situation where you can switch the mode related to background music, you can switch from normal mode to distribution mode by touching the LCD (in this embodiment, it is a so-called touch panel that combines a display device and an input device) a predetermined number of times (for example, five times).
Furthermore, if you wish to end the distribution mode, you can switch from the distribution mode to the normal mode by pressing and holding the LCD for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) in a situation where you can switch the BGM mode.

In this way, by making the operation when setting the distribution mode more complex, it is possible to prevent players from accidentally setting the distribution mode, and by simplifying the operation when returning to normal mode, it is possible to reduce the effort required by players.

In this embodiment, the BGM mode can be switched by touching the LCD screen, but this is not limiting; a BGM mode item may be provided as a configurable item on the menu screen, allowing switching between normal mode and distribution mode. By configuring it in this way, game-related setting items that can be set by the player can be consolidated on the menu screen, allowing even first-time players to easily recognize that they can switch BGM modes by opening the menu screen.

In addition, instead of touching the LCD, the BGM mode may be switched by operating a specific switch (for example, a special effect switch or the middle stop switch 13b). Specifically, if you want to set it to streaming mode, you can switch from normal mode to streaming mode by touching the specific switch a specific number of times (for example, five times) when the BGM mode is switchable. If you want to end streaming mode, you can switch from streaming mode to normal mode by pressing and holding the LCD for a specific period of time (for example, five seconds) when the BGM mode is switchable.

In addition, in this embodiment, the background music mode can be set at the player's discretion, but this is not limiting; it may also be configured so that it can only be set by gaming facility staff. Specifically, it may be configured so that it can only be set using an administrator menu that can be set while checking or changing settings (details will be omitted, but this is generally a mode that allows the setting of power saving mode, checking error history, etc.). This configuration can prevent players from accidentally setting it to distribution mode through mischief.

Next, using Figure 70, we will explain the LCD display when set to normal mode and when set to distribution mode.

Figure 70(a) shows an example of the game screen when normal mode is set. As shown in the figure, when normal mode is set, the LCD screen is configured not to display the currently set BGM mode.

Figure 70(b) shows an example of a game screen when the game is set to distribution mode. As shown in the figure, when the game is set to distribution mode, "Distribution Mode" is displayed on the left edge of the LCD screen to indicate the currently selected background music mode, making it visible that the game is set to distribution mode. Furthermore, when two seconds have passed since the end of a game (after all reels have stopped, the winning determination process has been completed, the payout process has been completed, etc.), and it is possible to switch to normal mode, a message explaining the mode switch, "Press and hold the LCD screen to switch modes," is displayed below the "Distribution Mode" message. If the start operation for the next game (betting or start switch operation) is performed and it is no longer possible to switch to normal mode, the message explaining the mode switch is removed. In this way, if a game ends while in distribution mode, the next player will know that the game is in distribution mode and how to return to normal mode.

Note that (1) the display indicating the currently set BGM mode and the explanation for switching modes may be continued even while the demo screen is displayed, (2) the display indicating the currently set BGM mode and the explanation for switching modes may not be displayed while the demo screen is displayed, or (3) the display indicating the currently set BGM mode may be displayed while the demo screen is displayed, but the explanation for switching modes may not be displayed.

In this way, the "Broadcast mode" display is always displayed (it may be configured not to display during CZ, continuous effects, or on the demo screen), but the explanation of mode switching (the display of "Modes can be switched by long pressing the LCD" in Figure 70 (b)) is configured to only be displayed when the game is set to broadcast mode and it is possible to switch from broadcast mode to normal mode.

By only displaying notification on the LCD when the machine is set to distribution mode in this way, it is possible to reduce displays that are not directly related to the effects that affect the progress of the game, allowing players who are not interested in video streaming to enjoy the effects to the fullest. Also, since "Distribution Mode" is displayed on the LCD when the machine is set to distribution mode, players can see at a glance that they can simply return to normal mode if they want to listen to background music that incurs a music usage fee, and it also prevents players from mistakenly thinking that a particular song is not included in the gaming machine.

Even when normal mode is set, the display may be configured to display "Normal Mode" on the left edge of the LCD screen to indicate the currently set BGM mode. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display to display an explanation of the mode change when it is possible to change the BGM mode even when normal mode is set. This configuration allows the player to properly understand the BGM mode.

<About the music selection function during streaming mode and AT>
In this embodiment, a music selection function is provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the BGM to be output from the speaker S during the AT. For example, in a situation where BGM1 is output from the speaker S as the default BGM predetermined for each performance stage or game state, if BGM2 is selected by the music selection function, the BGM output from the speaker S will change from BGM1 to BGM2.

Music selection is possible at a predetermined timing after the end of play during the AT (for example, 2 seconds after the end of play (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has been completed, after the payout process has been completed, etc.)), and at that predetermined timing the name of the BGM currently being played is displayed on the LCD screen; each time the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated, the selected BGM is switched in sequence and the name of the selected BGM is displayed on the LCD screen; and when the sub-switch 20 is operated, the BGM corresponding to the currently displayed (selected) song name is played. For example, if the music list is configured in the following order: "BGM1 (copyright-free)" → "BGM2 (music usage fee applies)" → "BGM3 (copyright-free)" and the BGM currently being played is BGM1, then "BGM1" will be displayed in a predetermined display area of the LCD (for example, the edge of the LCD, such as the top right or bottom right) at a predetermined timing after the game ends, and each time the sub cross key switch 21 is operated, the display will switch in the following order: "BGM2" → "BGM3" → "BGM1" → "BGM2" ...

The music selection function may be configured to be unavailable after a game ends in a specific situation, such as when a game is in the middle of a continuous performance or when a specific chance performance has been executed. In this case, the name of the currently playing background music will not be displayed even at a specific timing after the game ends (for example, two seconds after the game ends (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has finished, after the payout process has finished, etc.)), and the background music will not change even if the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated. This configuration allows the player to properly understand that music selection is not possible.

The music selection function is available when the machine is set to normal mode, but is disabled when the machine is set to distribution mode. Specifically, when the machine is in distribution mode during AT, copyright-free background music is played as the default background music, and the name of the currently playing background music is not displayed even at a predetermined timing after the end of play (for example, two seconds after the end of play (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has finished, after the payout process has finished, etc.)), and the background music cannot be changed even if the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated. This configuration allows the player to properly understand that music selection is not available.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the song selection function can be used for copyright-free background music even when the AT is in distribution mode. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that even when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated, only the song names of copyright-free background music are displayed, and the song names of background music for which a music usage fee is incurred are not displayed (cannot be selected). For example, if the music list is configured in the following order: "BGM1 (copyright-free)" → "BGM2 (music usage fee required)" → "BGM3 (copyright-free)" and the BGM currently being played is BGM1, then "BGM1" will be displayed on the LCD at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, two seconds after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has finished, after the payout process has finished, etc.)), and when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated, "BGM3" will be selected and "BGM3" will be displayed on the LCD. In other words, the BGM that incurs a music usage fee is skipped, and copyright-free BGM is selected and displayed on the LCD. This configuration prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the gaming machine has malfunctioned because they can select BGM that incurs a music usage fee but it does not play.

In addition, in this embodiment, in intermediate plays other than the final play of a consecutive performance or CZ, an effect is configured to be executed in which the currently playing background music is changed to dedicated background music (sometimes referred to as confirmation background music) and a specific LED lamp used for the effect lights up in rainbow colors (sometimes referred to as confirmation effect A) as an effect to notify in advance that a bonus will be awarded in the final play (an effect in which the success of a consecutive performance or CS is confirmed in an intermediate play).

In this embodiment, since BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred is used as the confirmed BGM, when confirmed performance A is executed in distribution mode, the BGM currently being played is not switched to the confirmed BGM but is instead continued to be played. Even when distribution mode is set, as in normal mode, as part of confirmed performance A, certain of the LED lamps used for performance are configured to light up in rainbow colors. On the other hand, when confirmed performance A is executed in normal mode, the BGM currently being played is switched to the confirmed BGM.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to properly notify players that a bonus will be awarded in the final play of a consecutive performance or CZ, while avoiding copyright infringement of the music.

It should be noted that if you use copyright-free BGM as the fixed BGM, there is no problem with switching to the fixed BGM as fixed effect A, even when set to distribution mode, just as in normal mode.

<Explanation regarding ball output specifications across advantageous zones>
Because the RAM initialization process (also referred to as RAM initialization process at the end of a favorable zone) when a favorable zone ends and a transition to a normal zone updates all parameters affecting the performance of the instruction functions to zero, conventional gaming machines cannot carry over any information about the instruction functions from the previous favorable zone when a favorable zone ends, passes through a normal zone, and then transitions to a new favorable zone. For this reason, even if there are 500 AT games remaining in a favorable zone, if the upper limit of the favorable zone is reached, the AT is terminated and the remaining number of AT games is initialized, often leaving the player feeling like they've lost out. In light of this issue, we describe a method for indirectly carrying over certain parameters (e.g., certain AT winning modes, certain AT winning points, etc., also referred to as carryover parameters) that affect the performance of the instruction functions to the next favorable zone by winning a bonus before the end of the favorable zone.

Note that the reel arrangement, symbol combination, condition device, and number of internal lottery draws are basically the same as those in Figures 12 to 22, but the replay probability is configured not to change (maintain non-RT) even if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop during a game in which a Type 1 BB is won. In other words, the system is configured not to have an RT1 (within a Type 1 BB). It is also configured to have an RT2 that transitions after the Type 1 BB ends and ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, five games). It is also configured so that a transition to an advantageous zone is determined even in games in which Replay-A or Replay-B is won, so that a transition to an advantageous zone is determined at approximately 1 in 1 (65,532/65,536) in the normal zone. Also, for ease of explanation, a state where there is no RT and the Type 1 BB is not activated will be referred to as Non-RT1, and a state where there is no RT and the Type 1 BB condition device is activated will be referred to as Non-RT2, but Non-RT1 and Non-RT2 are the same RT, and the internal lottery placement numbers are also the same, except that a Type 1 BB single win with a placement of 4 in Non-RT1 will result in a loss in Non-RT2.

RT transitions are configured to start from non-RT1, and if a Type 1 BB symbol combination is won during non-RT1 and the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of that game) will be non-RT2. If a Type 1 BB symbol combination stops during non-RT2, non-RT2 ends and Type 1 BB is activated from the next game (also referred to as during Type 1 BB). When Type 1 BB activation ends, the next game will transition to RT2. After a predetermined number of games are played in RT2, RT2 ends and the next game will transition to non-RT1. Note that if a Type 1 BB symbol combination stops during RT2, RT2 ends and Type 1 BB is activated from the next game. If the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, RT2 does not end, and after five games are played in RT2, RT2 ends and the next game will transition to non-RT2. Additionally, when the settings are changed, the system starts from non-RT (non-RT1), so if the setting change device is activated while the Type 1 BB condition device is operating (non-RT2) or while Type 1 BB is operating, non-RT (non-RT1) will be set when the operation of the setting change device ends. Note that in the event of a power outage that does not activate the setting change device (sometimes called a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB operating state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, the system will start from the state before the power outage.

In addition, the system is configured so that the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped by operating certain stop switches in games where a Type 1 BB is won during non-RT1, games where a loss occurs during non-RT2, or games where one of the Push Order Bell Group C (winning - C1 to C6) is won during non-RT2. Furthermore, in games where one of the Push Order Bell Group C is won during an advantageous zone, the system notifies the user of the operation mode of the stop switch that will not stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination, except in certain circumstances, so the user can maintain non-RT2 by playing in accordance with the notified operation mode.

In this embodiment, in order to indirectly carry over carryover parameters (also referred to as the degree of expectation related to the AT, the degree of expectation related to the notified game state, and predetermined information related to the notified game state) in one advantageous zone (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous zone 1) to the next advantageous zone (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous zone 2), if a specific condition is met during the AT in advantageous zone 1 (for example, the number of coins won during the AT exceeds 2000, the number of games played during the AT reaches a predetermined number, or the number of games played in one advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number; also referred to as an ending condition), the AT is configured to continue until the specified condition is met (for example, until the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as 2350)), regardless of the remaining period of the AT at the time the specific condition is met (for example, the number of games remaining in the AT, the remaining difference in the number of coins that can be won during the AT, etc.).

After that, in games in which the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value and in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination. Note that when the predetermined effect to prompt the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination is executed, the system is configured to notify the player of the operation mode of the stop switch that can stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination, rather than the operation mode of the stop switch that does not stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination even if one of the push order bell group C is won. Also, if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which a predetermined effect to prompt the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination is executed, the system is configured to again execute a predetermined effect to prompt the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination in a subsequent game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped.

After that, when the activation of the Type 1 BB ends, the next game will transition to RT2, and advantageous zone 1 will end in either the game where the activation of the Type 1 BB ends or in any game during RT2, and all parameters will be updated to 0, and the next game will transition to the normal zone and non-RT1. Note that which game, either the game where the activation of the Type 1 BB ends or any game during RT2, will end advantageous zone 1 in can be determined at the end of the game in which the ending conditions were satisfied in advantageous zone 1, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the game in which the ending conditions were satisfied.

After that, the game moves through the normal zone and into advantageous zone 2, and the carryover parameter value can be newly determined based on the number of games played in RT2.

Specifically, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game that satisfies the ending conditions in advantageous zone 1 is a first value, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the operation of Type 1 BB ends, and it is determined that the game will transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the first game of RT2, so that four games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameter is set to the first value.
Furthermore, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game that has satisfied the ending conditions in advantageous zone 1 is the second value, after the operation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is determined that advantageous zone 1 will end in the first game of RT2 and that the game will transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the second game of RT2, so that three games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameter is set to the second value.
In this way, the value of the carryover parameter at the time of transition to non-RT in advantageous zone 2 is configured to differ depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the game when the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In this way, by changing the number of times RT2 is played at the start of the next advantageous period depending on the value of the carryover parameter in one advantageous period, it is possible to roughly determine the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the previous advantageous period based on the number of times RT2 is played at the start of the advantageous period, and the value of the carryover parameter can be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous period.

In this embodiment, the timing for determining whether the advantageous zone 1 ends in the game where the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or in any of the games during RT2 is the end of the game where the ending conditions are met in the advantageous zone 1, but it is not limited to this. It may also be the end of the game where a predetermined condition is met in the advantageous zone 1 (for example, the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as 2350)), or the end of the game where the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops after the predetermined condition is met in the advantageous zone 1.

In addition, even if the ending conditions are not met during the AT but the advantageous zone ends after the AT ends, the carryover parameter value may be configured to be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous zone using a similar method. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system to execute a predetermined effect that encourages the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the AT ends. In this case, the system may be configured to determine which game will end the advantageous zone at the end of the final game of the AT, either the game in which the Type 1 BB operation ends or any game during RT2, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the final game of the AT.

In addition, if a player accidentally stops a Type 1 BB symbol combination when a specified effect encouraging the stop of the Type 1 BB symbol combination is not being executed, the advantageous zone will continue without ending even after the Type 1 BB operation has ended. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the advantageous zone from ending at an unintended time. This configuration also makes it possible to prevent players from using strategies such as intentionally ending the advantageous zone depending on the game situation.

<<Example 1 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 75, we will explain the case where certain points related to winning the AT are carried over to the next advantageous period as carryover parameters.

The specified points related to winning the AT are managed by a specified counter, the details of which will be omitted, and are accumulated when an event unfavorable to the player occurs during gameplay, such as when a consecutive performance fails or a CZ fails. When the points reach 100, specified benefits such as winning the AT or adding to the remaining AT period are awarded.

Pattern A in Figure 75 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 0 to 30 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A of Figure 75, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB is completed, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 30.

Pattern B in Figure 75 shows the case where the predetermined points for winning the AT are 31 to 50 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B in Figure 75, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, the first play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines that the transition will occur from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so three plays will be executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 50.

Pattern C in Figure 75 shows a case where the predetermined points for winning the AT are 51 to 70 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of Figure 75, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, advantageous zone 1 ends with the second play of RT2, and it is determined that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 will occur with the third play of RT2, so two plays will be executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 70.

Pattern D in Figure 75 shows the case where the predetermined points for winning the AT are 71 to 100 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of Figure 75, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, advantageous zone 1 ends on the third play of RT2, and it is determined that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 will occur on the fourth play of RT2, so one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play has been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 100.

<<Example 2 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 76, we will explain the case where a specified mode related to winning the AT is carried over to the next advantageous period as a carryover parameter.

Details of the predetermined modes for winning the AT are omitted, but there are four modes: Normal A, Normal B, Heaven Preparation, and Heaven, and the expected probability of winning the AT in the general advantageous zone state differs depending on which mode you are in.

Pattern A in Figure 76 shows the case where the player is in normal A at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A in Figure 76, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB is completed, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, normal A is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 76 shows the case where the player is in normal B at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B in Figure 76, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, the first play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, normal B is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 76 shows the case where the player is in Heaven Preparation at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in Advantageous Zone 1.

In pattern C of Figure 76, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, advantageous zone 1 ends with the second play of RT2, and it is determined that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 will occur with the third play of RT2, so two plays will be executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven preparation is set as a predetermined mode related to winning the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 76 shows the case where the player is in heaven at the end of the game after satisfying the ending conditions.

In pattern D of Figure 76, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, advantageous zone 1 ends on the third play of RT2, and it is determined that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 will occur on the fourth play of RT2, so one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play has been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

<<Example 3 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 77, we will explain the case where specified information regarding the AT execution period is carried over to the next advantageous period as a carryover parameter.

Here, the RT2 play that will end the advantageous zone is determined based on the number of remaining stocks in the AT at the end of the advantageous zone, but if the remaining stocks in the AT are configured to be cleared when the ending conditions are met, the RT2 play that will end the advantageous zone can also be determined based on the number of remaining stocks in the AT when the ending conditions are met. Also, rather than the number of remaining stocks in the AT, the carryover parameter for a game number-managed AT can be the number of remaining games in the AT, or the carryover parameter for a difference-number-managed AT can be the number of remaining wins that can be won in the AT.

The number of remaining stocks in an AT is information regarding the remaining period of the AT in a so-called set-managed AT; details will be omitted, but for example, in the case of an AT that lasts for 50 games per set, if there are remaining stocks after 50 games of the AT, the AT will move on to the next set, and if there are no remaining stocks, a lottery to continue the AT is held and if there is no winner, the AT will end.

Pattern A in Figure 77 shows the case where the remaining stock number in the AT is 0 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A of Figure 77, it is decided that advantageous zone 1 will end in the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB has ended, and it is decided to transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the first game of RT2, so four games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number in the AT is set to 0 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 77 shows the case where the remaining stock in the AT is 1 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of Figure 77, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is decided to end advantageous zone 1 in the first play of RT2, and it is decided to transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the second play of RT2, so three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number in the AT is set to 1 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 77 shows the case where the remaining stock number in the AT is 2 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of Figure 77, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is decided to end advantageous zone 1 on the second play of RT2, and it is decided to transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 on the third play of RT2, so two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 2 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 77 shows the case where the remaining stock number in the AT is 3 or more at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of Figure 77, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is decided to end advantageous zone 1 on the third play of RT2, and it is decided to transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 on the fourth play of RT2, so one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 3 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

By configuring the above specific examples 1 to 3, the values of the carried-over parameters in one advantageous zone can be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous zone, preventing the carried-over parameters in one advantageous zone from being initialized by the initialization process at the end of the advantageous zone, which would result in the player suffering a loss. Furthermore, it is possible to create an incentive to continue playing even when one advantageous zone ends and the game moves on to the next advantageous zone.

As shown in Figures 75 to 77, the timing at which the advantageous period ends is delayed the larger the carryover parameter value. This is because there is a 4/65536 probability that the normal period will continue. For example, in pattern B of Figure 75, the specified point related to winning the AT is set to 50 at the start of advantageous period 2, but if the normal period continues for two plays, two plays will be executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous period 2, and the specified point related to winning the AT will be set to 70. In this way, by configuring the timing at which the advantageous period ends to be delayed the larger the carryover parameter value, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money even if the normal period happens to continue for more than two plays.

The system may also be configured so that the timing of ending the advantageous period is earlier the larger the carryover parameter value. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the gaming facility from incurring losses even if the normal period happens to continue for two games.

Note that while RT2 is configured to end after five plays, the number of plays after which RT2 ends can be set appropriately depending on the carryover parameters you wish to indirectly carry over to the next advantageous period.

In addition, by increasing the number of games that will end RT2, it is also possible to indirectly carry over multiple carryover parameters to the next advantageous period.
For example, any one of the specified points related to winning the AT, the specified mode related to winning the AT, and the specified information related to the remaining period of the AT may be used as a carryover parameter, any two of them may be used as carryover parameters, or all three may be used as carryover parameters.
It should be noted that carry-over parameters may be set to four or more in addition to the three described above.

Furthermore, a method for indirectly carrying over a specified parameter that affects the performance of the indication function to the next favorable interval has been described, but the above-described method can also be used for other purposes.
For example, if a specific flag is won (e.g., part of a game in which a 4/65536 winning combination is won), the AT continues in one advantageous zone until the MY counter value exceeds a predetermined value (e.g., 2350). After the MY counter value exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which a Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped. The advantageous zone then ends with a game in which the Type 1 BB activation is completed. The first game of RT2 then determines the transition from the normal zone to the next advantageous zone, and four games are played in RT2 at the start of the next advantageous zone. Based on the four games played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous zone, the AT is transitioned to after a predetermined number of premonition games (e.g., 32 games), and the AT continues until the MY counter value exceeds 2400, fulfilling the conditions for ending the advantageous zone. This configuration allows a player to be awarded game value exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous zone based on winning a specific flag.

For example, if the ending conditions are met in one advantageous zone, the AT continues until the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value, and a predetermined effect is executed to encourage the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the MY counter value exceeds the predetermined value, and the advantageous zone ends in a game in which the Type 1 BB operation is completed. After that, the first game of RT2 determines that the player will move from the normal zone to the next advantageous zone, and at the start of the next advantageous zone, the remaining games of RT2 may be configured to be in a high probability state with a high chance of winning the AT. In addition to creating a high probability state, the configuration may also be such that a lottery is held to add to the remaining period of the AT when the AT is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the next advantageous zone even when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous zone ends.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may also be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may also be the subject of the lottery.

<Processing for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media>
In the past, among gaming machines that had a normal zone and a favorable zone as game zones, there were gaming machines that ended the favorable zone when the MY in the favorable zone exceeded 2,400. (Prior art document: JP 2020-010896 A)

Here, in conventional gaming machines (prior art documents), the MY of the advantageous zone is defined as the point at which the player's ball output is lowest since the advantageous zone began (0), and the advantageous zone ends when the difference from that point exceeds 2400. Note that the point at which the player's ball output is lowest is synonymous with the point at which the difference in gaming media is lowest.

As a result, conventional gaming machines (prior art documents) could only award players a maximum profit of a difference of 2414 in a single advantageous zone. As a result, if a player spent a large amount of gaming media while playing in an advantageous zone, they were unable to recover the gaming media they had spent in that advantageous zone, which made conventional gaming machines unattractive to players.

For example, in conventional gaming machines, even if a game where the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000 reaches a specified game state (e.g., AT state), the game ends if the MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. As a result, at most, only about 2400 gaming media could be obtained in a single advantageous zone (the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone would end at about -600).

Therefore, rather than ending the advantageous zone when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the system is configured so that the start of the advantageous zone is used as the starting point (0) and the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2400). Specifically, the total number of gaming media inputs in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of inputs or total number of bets) and the total number of gaming media output in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of payouts or total number of inputs) are taken into consideration. In other words, the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference between the number of gaming media output in the advantageous zone and the number of gaming media inputs in the advantageous zone (hereinafter referred to as the difference in gaming media in the advantageous zone) exceeds 2400. This configuration makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with improved playability compared to conventional machines while keeping gambling within a certain range.

For example, with a gaming machine according to the present invention, if a certain game state (e.g., AT state) is reached from a certain game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000, the advantageous zone can end when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, starting from the start of the advantageous zone. Therefore, it becomes possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media from a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000 (the advantageous zone ends when the difference in the number of gaming media in one advantageous zone reaches +2400).

In addition, if the system is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2,400), it is acceptable to end the advantageous zone at a value less than this predetermined number. In other words, when the start of the advantageous zone is taken as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone will be a predetermined number (to be precise, the predetermined number + α (α is the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game)).

Furthermore, even if the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous zone can also be ended if any termination condition is met before the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds the predetermined number.

In this way, in order to terminate the game when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined value, it is necessary to be able to store the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone even if it is a negative value.

Below, we will use diagrams to explain the specific process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

<<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (addition version)>>
78 is a diagram showing an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference number of gaming media. This process corresponds to a modified example of the advantageous zone clear counter management process of FIG.

Figure 78 shows a favorable zone difference counter. The favorable zone difference counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the (total) difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the RWM is cleared following the end of an advantageous zone. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the power is turned on following a setting change (RWM is cleared following a setting change). Information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area, and is not cleared when the stop state is reached.

Note that turning on the power with a setting change specifically refers to turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on. In other words, turning on the power with a setting change will cause the machine to enter setting change mode, and once the conditions for ending setting change mode are met (for example, the setting key switch being turned off after the start switch being turned on), the machine will end setting change mode and become playable.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated by playing in the advantageous zone.

Note that while the explanation will be given using an example in which the advantageous zone difference counter is composed of two bytes, the advantageous zone difference counter may also be composed of three bytes or four bytes.

First, "Favorable Zone Clear Counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter does not result in a value below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value of 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

As mentioned above, the advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

The question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0. Specifically, the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for this game is 1 or greater. In other words, this means that this game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

The question "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?" is determined based on the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone) and the game state at the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores the game state at the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone based on information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the answer is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the answer is NO.

In "Save initial value of advantageous zone clear counter," the initial value is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. Also, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in one advantageous zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, and can be any predetermined value. For example, it is possible to set the number of plays that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535).

The "Set initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter" function sets the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter in a register. In other words, when the advantageous zone begins (when the current game is a normal zone game and the next game is a advantageous zone game), the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is set in a register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535 - 2400) and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area for the advantageous zone difference number counter). Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, the initial value would be 60735 (65535 - 4800).

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value should be 16774815 (16777215 - 2400).

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be discussed later.

"Before subtracting advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the advantageous zone clear counter was 1 before "advantageous zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is stored in a specified register (e.g., HL register).

For "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a replay game), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 0, the result is determined to be NO.
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the IN number minus OUT number calculation (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES; if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the bet number for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the bet number was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the IN number for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the IN number and OUT number will not be judged as "IN number < OUT number?" In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of bets for the current game will not be treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game will not be treated as the OUT number.

Note that in the "IN number < OUT number?" test, we calculated the IN number - OUT number, but it is also possible to make a determination by calculating the OUT number - IN number. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the IN number and OUT number.

In "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?" is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, HL register). Note that if a carry is caused by "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register is 65535 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 2-3 = -1, but registers cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

When "favorable zone difference number counter < 0", "favorable zone difference number counter subtraction" determines whether a borrow has occurred. If a borrow has occurred, a YES result is determined, and if a borrow has not occurred, a NO result is determined. In the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter is 2, a) a YES result is determined if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter is 2, b) a NO result is determined if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter is 2, a NO result is determined if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

If the "favourable section difference counter < 0" returns YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

When a borrow occurs due to "advantageous interval difference counter subtraction," "Set lower limit value of favorable interval difference counter" stores a predetermined lower limit value (0) in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). In the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter is 2, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, "Advantageous interval difference counter subtraction" causes the HL register to equal 65535. In such a case, "Set lower limit value of favorable interval difference counter" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Even when "Set Lower Limit Value of Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set Lower Limit Value of Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" is executed, the processing in FIG. 78 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that while Figure 78 includes a "Set Lower Limit Value of Favorable Zone Difference Counter" process, it is not necessary to include this process. Specifically, if a YES determination is made based on "Favorable Zone Difference Counter < 0," the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game may be used. For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 2 and the IN number and OUT number for the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter may be 2 (the same value as the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (values with borrowed digits) from being stored in the "Favorable Zone Difference Counter." Furthermore, because the process equivalent to "Set Lower Limit Value of Favorable Zone Difference Counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a downgrade occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the downgrade, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter Addition," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN Number < OUT Number?" (IN Number - OUT Number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register.

Note that the complement in "advantageous section difference counter addition" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 2 + 7, 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2 + 7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65530,
D) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, by calculating 65530 + 7, 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since this is greater than 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag is set to 1.

"Save advantageous zone difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the advantageous zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if 63135 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 63135 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activated" returns YES, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" stores the same value as the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter < 0?" is NO, the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "Save Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit value (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit value (0) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "adding the advantageous zone difference number counter," the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving the advantageous zone difference number counter," the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter.

"Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition." On the other hand, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone with a constant (2400).

In this way, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 63135 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area for the favorable zone difference number counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will be set to 1.

Furthermore, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, a situation in which the value of the advantageous period difference counter is 13135 means that the difference is -50000, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0).

As described above, by storing 63135 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2,400. Furthermore, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. While an example is given of storing 63135 as the initial value, values other than 63135 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

"RWM initialization" updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function to 0 and ends the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. By updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be played in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. When playing in an advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be played in an advantageous zone (the advantageous zone will not end).

In other words, if an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to borrowing, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference number of the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Furthermore, even when "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 78 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that in "Is IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may also be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. If configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number, when "Is IN number < OUT number?" returns NO (when a borrow occurs in the A register), the "favourable zone difference number counter subtraction" calculates the complement using a predetermined calculation and stores it in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game), and then subtracts the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter). In other words, when "Is IN number < OUT number?" returns NO, it is sufficient to configure the system to subtract the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game from the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is configured, then when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES (when no borrowing occurs in the A register), the "advantageous interval difference number counter addition" simply adds the value stored in the A register (the difference number of gaming media for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO, the absolute value of the difference number of gaming media for the current game is added from the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter.

<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (subtraction version)>
79 is a diagram showing an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference number of gaming media. This process corresponds to a modified example of the advantageous zone clear counter management process of FIG.

Figure 79 shows a favorable zone difference counter. The favorable zone difference counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the RWM is cleared following the end of an advantageous zone. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the power is turned on following a setting change (RWM is cleared following a setting change). Information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area, and is not cleared when the stop state is reached.

Note that while the explanation will be given using an example in which the advantageous zone difference counter is composed of two bytes, the advantageous zone difference counter may also be composed of three bytes or four bytes.

First, "Favorable Zone Clear Counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter does not result in a value below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value of 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

As mentioned above, the advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

The question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0. Specifically, the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for this game is 1 or greater. In other words, this means that this game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

The question "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?" is determined based on the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone) and the game state at the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores the game state at the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone based on information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the answer is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the answer is NO.

In "Save initial value of advantageous zone clear counter," the initial value is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. Also, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in one advantageous zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, and can be any predetermined value. For example, it is possible to set the number of plays that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535).

The "Set initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter" function sets the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter in a register. In other words, when the advantageous zone begins (when the current game is a normal zone game and the next game is a advantageous zone game), the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is set in a register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 is the value "2400" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, then the initial value would be 4800.

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value will be 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone, which is set as the end condition for the advantageous zone," will be discussed later.

"Before subtracting advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the advantageous zone clear counter was 1 before "advantageous zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is stored in a specified register (e.g., HL register).

For "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a replay game), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 0, the result is determined to be NO.
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the IN number minus OUT number calculation (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES; if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the bet number for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the bet number was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the IN number for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the IN number and OUT number will not be judged as "IN number < OUT number?" In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of bets for the current game will not be treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game will not be treated as the OUT number.

Note that in the "IN number < OUT number?" test, we calculated the IN number - OUT number, but it is also possible to make a determination by calculating the OUT number - IN number. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the IN number and OUT number.

In "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, the HL register) is added to the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?". Note that if a carry occurs as a result of "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register is 1 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in a value of 1.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register value is 65534 and the carry flag is 0.

In "Favorable Zone Difference Counter > Upper Limit?", "Favorable Zone Difference Counter Addition" determines whether a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it judges as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it judges as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 65534, a) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, it judges as YES. Also in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 65534, b) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 1, it judges as YES. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 65534, c) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 3, it judges as NO.

If the answer to "Is the advantageous section difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

When a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter upper limit value set," a predetermined upper limit value (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). In the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter is 65534, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, the HL register = 1 due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction." In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register by "advantageous zone difference number counter upper limit value set."

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Even when "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference counter" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference counter" is executed, the processing in FIG. 79 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that while Figure 79 includes the "Set upper limit value of favorable zone difference counter" process, it is not necessary to include the "Set upper limit value of favorable zone difference counter" process. Specifically, if a YES determination is made because "Favourable zone difference counter > upper limit value", the value stored in the favourable zone difference counter for the previous game may be used. For example, if the value stored in the favourable zone difference counter is 65534 and the IN number and OUT number for the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favourable zone difference counter may be 65534 (the same value as the value of the favourable zone difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (values with borrowed digits) from being stored in the "Favourable zone difference counter". Furthermore, since the process equivalent to "Set upper limit value of favorable zone difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry occurs due to the "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the value at the time of the carry is not used to update the advantageous zone difference number counter, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, while 65,535 (the maximum value that can be stored by the advantageous zone difference number counter) has been used as an example of the upper limit, this is not limited to this. For example, it may be a value such as 12,400, which is a number less than the maximum value that can be stored by the advantageous zone difference number counter. If 12,400 is used as the upper limit, the advantageous zone difference number counter can store a value up to -10,000 as the difference in gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter Subtraction," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN Number < OUT Number?" (IN Number - OUT Number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register.

Note that the complement in "advantageous interval difference counter subtraction" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived by subtracting the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2-7 is less than 0 (because there is a carryover), the carry flag is set to 1.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 10,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 10-7, 3 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 10-7 does not go below 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag will be 0.

"Save advantageous zone difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the advantageous zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if 2400 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 2400 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activated" returns YES, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" stores the same value as the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is advantageous zone difference counter > upper limit?" is NO, the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "Save advantageous zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so the "Save advantageous zone difference counter" command stores the upper limit (65535) in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, after "subtracting the advantageous zone difference counter," the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving the advantageous zone difference counter," the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the advantageous zone difference counter.

"Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry is made by "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction." On the other hand, if a carry is made by "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone with a constant (2400).

In this way, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 2400 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 2400 is a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1.

Furthermore, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, a situation in which the value of the advantageous period difference counter is 30,000 means that the difference is -27,600, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0).

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400. Furthermore, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. While an example is given of storing 2400 as the initial value, any value other than 2400 (for example, 2401) can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

"RWM initialization" updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function to 0 and ends the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. By updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be played in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. When playing in an advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be played in an advantageous zone (the advantageous zone will not end).

Note that while "IN number < OUT number?" subtracts the OUT number from the IN number, it may also be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. If configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number, when "IN number < OUT number?" returns NO (when a borrow occurs in the A register), "advantageous zone difference number counter addition" calculates the complement using a predetermined calculation and stores it in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game), and then adds the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game) to the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter). In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" returns YES, it is sufficient to configure the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game to be added to the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is configured to be subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with YES (no borrowing has occurred in the A register), then the "favourable zone difference number counter subtraction" can simply subtract the value stored in the A register (the difference number of gaming media for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with NO, the absolute value of the difference number of gaming media for the current game can be subtracted from the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter.

As mentioned above, Figures 78 and 79 have been used to explain the specific processing for ending the advantageous period with the difference in the number of gaming media, but this is not limited to these. In other words, it is sufficient if the advantageous period can be ended with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In addition, in Figures 78 and 79, one of the conditions for ending an advantageous zone is that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number, but the condition for ending an advantageous zone does not have to be that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number. In that case, the advantageous zone clear counter in Figures 78 and 79 does not need to be provided.

If a favorable zone clear counter is not provided, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clear counter -1" in Figures 78 and 79, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" and the process corresponding to "save favorable zone clear counter initial value" do not need to be provided.

<About the difference counter that stores the difference number from when the power was turned on>
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the number of medals inserted (sometimes referred to as the number of inserted medals, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of inserted points, the bet points, or the number of INs) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out (sometimes referred to as the number of paid out medals, the number of awarded medals, the number of awarded medals, the number of awarded game media, the number of acquired medals, the number of acquired game media, the number of paid out points, the number of awarded points, the number of acquired game media, the number of acquired points, the number of acquired points, or the number of OUTs) to calculate a difference (a difference) for each game, and a difference counter capable of storing the cumulative value of this difference (total difference) is provided in a predetermined RWM area. If the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value (e.g., 19,000), a process is executed to stop the progress of the game (hereinafter also referred to as a "stopping process"). The process of determining whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded the predetermined value is referred to as a difference counter determination process. Furthermore, the process of updating the difference counter before the execution of the stop process and the process related to the judgment are collectively referred to as the stop monitoring process.

Note that the following explanation mainly focuses on an example in which the stop processing is executed when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a predetermined value, with the start point (0) being the time when the power is turned on, but this is not limited to this. For example, the point at which the player's ball output is lowest after the power is turned on may be set as the reference point (0), and the stop processing may be executed when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference point exceeds a predetermined value. In other words, the stop processing may be executed by MY.

For example, if, after power is turned on, the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0), and a stopping process is executed when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds a predetermined value, the difference counter can store the difference in the number of gaming media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest (0), or a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest (0) (a value that allows the difference in the number of gaming media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest (0) to be determined).

This end-of-game monitoring process is performed not only in advantageous zones but also in normal zones (it is performed regardless of the play zone).

For example, in a certain game in which the total number of medals paid out since power-on is 50,001 and the total number of medals inserted since power-on is 31,000, the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, so information indicating that the stop condition has been met for that game is stored in the stop flag memory area, making it possible to execute the stop processing.

The limit flag storage area is an area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (e.g., a predetermined number such as "1" or "255") is stored in the limit flag storage area as information indicating that the limit condition has been met.

Then, if information indicating that the halt condition has been met is stored in the halt flag storage area, the halt process can be executed.

The information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized by simply turning the power on without changing the settings (normal power on) or turning the power off normally (turning the power switch off). Furthermore, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable period. An example of turning the power on without changing the settings would be turning the power switch on when the setting key switch is off.

In other words, if the power is turned off (the power switch is turned off) while the stop processing is being executed, and then the power is turned on again without changing the settings, the stop processing will not be canceled and the stop processing will be executed. Also, even if the game at the end of the advantageous zone is a game that meets the stop conditions, clearing the RWM at the end of the advantageous zone will not initialize the value of the difference counter related to the stop conditions or clear the information stored in the stop flag memory area, and the stop processing will be executed.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met can be cleared).

Alternatively, an RWM clear switch separate from the setting key switch may be provided, and the information stored in the stop flag storage area may be cleared even when the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated (when the RWM clear switch is on). If the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated, the device will not enter setting change mode, but the RWM clear process associated with the RWM clear switch will be performed.

The RWM clear switch may also serve as the reset switch. In other words, if the power is turned on while the reset switch is being operated (while the reset switch is on), the information stored in the termination flag storage area may be cleared.

As described above, if the power is turned off while the game limit process is being executed and then turned on again with a setting change, the game will enter setting change mode. After that, once the conditions for terminating setting change mode are met and the setting change mode is terminated, the game limit process will not be executed and the game will become playable (a situation in which betting is possible).

In addition, the information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by operating a reset switch that can clear certain error conditions (door open error, medal retention error, etc.), and the stop processing is executed.

In other words, even if the reset switch is operated while the stop process is being executed, the stop process will not be canceled and will continue to be executed.

Note that while the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the cap flag storage area have been explained here, the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the temporary cap flag storage area, described below, are similar to the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the cap flag storage area.

The stop processing may be any or all of the following: not adding bets or credits when medals are inserted; turning off the blocker so that bets or credits are not added even when medals are inserted; not executing bet processing even when operation of the MAX BET switch or 1 BET switch is accepted; not accepting operation of the MAX BET switch or 1 BET switch; not executing reel spin start processing even when operation of the START switch is accepted; not accepting operation of the START switch; not executing reel stop processing even when operation of the STOP switch is accepted; or not accepting operation of the STOP switch.

In other words, the stop processing prevents operations to start the next game (this is also referred to as stopping the progress of the game). In this way, the state in which the stop processing is being executed is sometimes referred to as the stop state or the activation of the complete function.

Even when game progress is halted by the game termination process, the operation of the settlement switch remains valid, and the settlement process can be executed. In gaming machines that do not use physical medals (so-called medal-less gaming machines), the operation of the settlement switch to move betted medals (electronic medals) to the medal count display device (a device that can store up to 16,383 medals, similar to the tray 28 of conventional gaming machines) and the operation of the counting switch to move the number of medals stored in the medal count display device to the lending unit are valid, and the process based on the operation of each switch can be executed.

When game progress is stopped by the stop processing, it cannot be released by turning the power on. Instead, the stopped game progress (stopped state) can be released by turning the power on and changing the settings, which executes the RWM initialization process. In other words, if a gaming machine enters a stopped state during the opening hours of the gaming center, that gaming machine will not be able to operate during the opening hours of that day.

In this way, if the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, it may cause the player to become overly gambling-minded. Therefore, by stopping the game when the value of the difference counter exceeds the predetermined value, it is possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

The difference counter may also be referred to as a difference number counter, difference number storage means, difference number storage means, difference number storage area, difference number storage area, number of gaming media storage means, number of gaming media storage area, number of gaming medals storage means, number of gaming medals storage area, power-on MY counter, power-on MY storage means, power-on MY storage area, limit counter, difference number counter for limiting, difference number counter for limiting, MY counter for limiting, MY storage means for limiting, or MY storage area for limiting.

The value stored in the difference counter is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on, whether the game is in a stalled state or not. In this embodiment, the initial value of the difference counter is 0 and it increments from that initial value, so initialization when the power is turned on means setting the value of the difference counter to 0. However, if the initial value of the difference counter is 19,000 and it is a counter that decrements, initialization when the power is turned on means setting the value of the difference counter to 19,000. Note that power-on includes not only normal power-on, but also power-on that involves a setting change and power-on that involves an RWM abnormality. Furthermore, the value stored in the difference counter is not initialized by the RWM initialization process that is executed when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met (for example, MY during an advantageous period exceeds 2,400, or the number of games played during an advantageous period reaches a predetermined number).

In addition, since the difference counter is susceptible to fraudulent initialization if it is initialized simply by turning on the power, the difference counter may be configured to be cleared by turning on the power while pressing a specific switch that cannot be operated by the player, such as a setting change switch, reset switch, or RAM clear switch, when power is not being supplied.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value and game progress has stopped, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the OFF position and the device starts up normally (normal power-on), the value of the difference counter will be initialized, but game progress will remain stopped. This is because a stop process is executed when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, and this stop process is configured to repeat the same process indefinitely using jump commands, etc., so even if a power outage occurs during the stop process and the power is turned on again, the stop process will begin. Note that when the stop process is executed, an interrupt process is executed as usual, but the interrupt process does not return to the normal main loop process from the interrupt process, and the stop process will loop.

In addition, because interrupt processing is executed normally while the termination process is being executed, the power-off process described above can be executed normally even if an event that shuts down the power supply (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs during the termination process.

This configuration prevents unauthorized power-off and power-on operations that would allow gameplay to continue after gameplay has been halted by the game-stopping process.

The difference counter stores the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out for each game, and a specific example of updating the value of the difference counter will be explained below. The process of updating the value of the difference counter is executed at a predetermined timing between after all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (bet for the next game can be placed). Because the process of updating the value of the difference counter is executed when one game has ended, the predetermined timing is sometimes referred to as when one game has ended. The difference counter will also be explained as 2-byte data. The "/" indicating 2-byte data separates each byte, and the number in parentheses after the binary value represents the binary value in decimal.

<When the difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/01101011b (107).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/01100001b (97).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/00000111b (7).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771).

The calculation result explained in <When difference counter = 00000000b (0), number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)> is -00000011b (-3), but the value stored in the difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771) because a 0 in the most significant bit indicates a positive value, and a 1 in the most significant bit indicates a negative value. With a 2-byte counter, values up to 01111111/11111111 (32767) in the difference counter can be stored correctly without using the most significant bit. In other words, if the value of the difference counter is 11111111/11111111b, it indicates -32767, so in the example above, -3 would be 10000000/00000011b.

Note that some parts of the above calculation examples have been omitted. In more detail, the current value of the difference counter is obtained, and a determination is made as to whether the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0. If the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, and the subtracted value is added to the obtained difference counter value, and the added value is updated as the value of the difference counter. Furthermore, if the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 1, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, and the subtracted value is calculated by subtracting a fixed value of 10000000/00000000b (32768) from the obtained difference counter value, and the subtracted value is updated as the value of the difference counter.

Also, if the result of calculating the value to be updated as the difference counter value is a negative value, the most significant bit of the absolute value of the result of calculating the value to be updated as the difference counter value is set to 1, and the value is updated as the difference counter value.

In addition, in each of the above calculation examples, the result of subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals in the register was added to the obtained value of the difference counter, but the order of calculations may be such that first the number of paid out medals is added to the obtained value of the difference counter, and then the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the result of that addition, or first the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the obtained value of the difference counter, and then the number of paid out medals is added from the result of that subtraction.

Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out is not 0, it means that a small role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role has stopped. Note that when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals paid out may be 3 or 0. If the number of medals paid out when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped is 3, the number of medals inserted should be 3, and if the number of medals paid out when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped is 0, the number of medals inserted should be 0.

Furthermore, when a replay role is won, the update process of the difference number counter may be executed, or the update process of the difference number counter may not be executed.
Also, when a replay role is won, the difference number counter determination process may be executed, or the difference number counter determination process may not be executed.

The difference counter does not need to be 2 bytes; it can be 3 or 4 bytes. If the difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value is 10,000,000/00000000/00000000b (8388608), and if the difference counter is 4 bytes, the fixed value is 10,000,000/00000000/00000000/00000000b (2147483648). Note that the difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on, so even if the number of medals paid out is 0 after 10,000 plays, which corresponds to approximately one day during the arcade's business hours, the counter will only store up to -30,000 (10,000 (number of plays possible in a day) x 3 (number of medals inserted)). Therefore, 2 bytes of storage capacity for the difference counter is sufficient.

<Another aspect of updating the difference counter>
The gaming machine may be equipped with a payout medal count memory area that stores the total number of payout medals since the gaming machine was powered on, a medal count memory area that stores the total number of medals inserted since the gaming machine was powered on, and a difference counter that stores the difference since the gaming machine was powered on, wherein the payout medal count memory area, medal count memory area, and difference counter are configured to be initialized when the power is turned on, and when updating the difference counter in a difference counter update process that is executed after one game is completed, if the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a positive value, the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is stored in the difference counter, and if the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a negative value, the difference counter may be configured to store 0.

With this configuration, it is desirable that the payout medal count storage area, the inserted medal count storage area, and the difference counter each be a 2-byte storage area, but the payout medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, the inserted medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, and the difference counter may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more.

The medal payout count storage area, medal insertion count storage area, and difference counter are initialized when the power is turned on, and the initialization process involves storing 0 in each storage area. Power-on events include setting changes and RWM abnormalities, as described above.

The payout medal count memory area is a memory area that stores the cumulative number of payout medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the payout medal count memory area update process). For example, if 100 is stored in the payout medal count memory area and the Nth game is played and 10 medals are paid out, 110 will be stored in the payout medal count memory area after the Nth game is completed; if the N+1th game is played and 0 medals are paid out (no medals were paid out), 110 will be stored in the payout medal count memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The number of inserted medals memory area is a memory area that stores the cumulative number of inserted medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of inserted medals memory area update process). For example, if 50 is stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and the Nth game is played and three medals are inserted, 53 will be stored in the number of inserted medals memory area after the Nth game is completed; if the N+1th game is played and two medals are inserted, 55 will be stored in the number of paid out medals memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The difference counter stores the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game. If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is a positive value, the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is updated as the value of the difference counter. However, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is a negative value, the value of the difference counter is updated to 0. For this reason, the value of the difference counter is not necessarily the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals for each game, but this is not a problem because the difference counter is a counter used to determine whether the difference counter has exceeded 19,000.

In addition, while the embodiment has been described in which 0 is stored in the difference counter if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the embodiment is not limited to this. If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the difference counter may not be updated, a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 may be stored in the difference counter, a fixed value greater than 19,000 may be stored in the difference counter, or the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game may be stored as is.

If the difference counter is not updated when the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game minus the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, or if a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 is stored in the difference counter, the game will not be halted because the value of the difference counter will never exceed 19,000 even if the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 is performed for each game. Furthermore, if the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game minus the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game is positive, the correct value is stored in the difference counter, so there is no problem. Alternatively, if the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game minus the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 may not be performed.

If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the difference counter stores a fixed value of 19,000 or more, or if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is stored as is, there is a possibility that the value of the difference counter will be determined to be greater than 19,000 if the process to determine whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 is performed every game. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, there is no problem in not performing the process to determine whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000.

The difference counter update process is similar to that described above and is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (bet for the next game can be placed). Note that the difference counter update process may also include a medal payout memory area update process and a medal insertion memory area update process.

<Difference counter judgment process when the special device continuous operation device or the first type special device is operating>
Before executing the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 as the difference counter determination process, it may be possible to determine whether the reel continuous operation device is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, or whether the reel continuous operation device or the first type special reel is operating, and if it is determined that they are operating in either case, the difference counter determination process may not be executed.

This is because if play were to stop while the continuous device operation device or the first-class special device is operating (during a bonus), it is highly likely that the player's motivation to play would be significantly diminished. Therefore, by allowing play to continue during a bonus even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, and stopping play after the bonus ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment without diminishing their motivation to play. It can also increase the player's motivation to increase the number of balls won during a bonus.

Even in this configuration, the difference counter update process is performed even when the reel continuous operation device or the first-class special reel is operating. Therefore, it is preferable that the program processing order be configured as follows: "difference counter update process" → "processing to determine whether the reel continuous operation device is operating, whether the first-class special reel is operating, or whether the reel continuous operation device or the first-class special reel is operating" → "difference counter determination process."

Also, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and the value of the difference counter falls below 19,000 when the bonus ends, the game may be stopped after the bonus ends.

In this case, even during a bonus, a determination is made as to whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000, and if it is determined that the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in the temporary stop flag (temporary stop flag storage area), and when the bonus ends, a determination is made as to whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value, and if it is, the progress of the game is stopped. Note that when the bonus ends, a determination is made as to whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value, and if it is determined that it is not the predetermined value, the progress of the game is not stopped. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag even when it is determined that the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 when not in a bonus, one possible configuration is to determine whether the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value after each game has ended, whether or not a bonus is in progress, and stop the game depending on the value of the temporary stop flag.If the configuration is such that a predetermined value is not stored in the temporary stop flag when it is determined that the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 when not in a bonus, one possible configuration is to stop the game depending on whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000, without determining whether or not the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value after each game has ended when not in a bonus.

The temporary stop flag is not initialized by the initialization of the RWM at power-on, but is cleared by the initialization of the RWM at power-on that involves a setting change.

In the above-described embodiment, an example was described in which game progress is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, but this is not limiting and game progress may not be stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during an AT. However, as mentioned above, the AT's termination conditions can be extended (changed), so game progress will not be stopped only in ATs in which the termination conditions are not extended.

Note that when there are multiple prescribed numbers for starting play, there are cases where the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one of the prescribed numbers, and when the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one of the prescribed numbers, it cannot be said that the termination condition has changed, so game progress will not be stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000. Specifically, when the prescribed numbers for starting play allow for betting three or two coins, the AT termination condition can be updated with three coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number can be updated), but the AT termination condition cannot be updated with two coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number cannot be updated), and when the difference counter reaches 19,000 during the AT, game progress will not be stopped until the AT termination condition is met.

This means that even if the AT is designed to look like a bonus, it will operate in the same way as a bonus, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game. It also increases the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during the bonus.

In addition, if the progress of play is not stopped even when the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus or AT, lotteries advantageous to the player, such as AT lotteries or CZ lotteries, will not be executed during the bonus or AT play after the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000.

This will prevent players from becoming overly gambling-minded when it is certain that the game will stop.

Note that the above describes an embodiment in which a determination is made as to whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and if it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in the temporary stop flag (temporary stop flag storage area), and when the bonus ends, a determination is made as to whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value, and if so, the progress of the game is stopped; however, it is not necessary to provide a temporary stop flag.

Specifically, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the value of the difference counter may not be updated during subsequent bonus play, and a stoppage process may be executed based on the difference counter determination process after the bonus ends. For example, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus (e.g., 19001), the difference counter may not be updated during subsequent play, and the value of the difference counter at the end of the bonus may be set to exceed 19,000.

<Initializing the difference counter>
In the above-described embodiment, when the value of the difference counter is initialized at power-on, the initial value is set to 0 if the counter is an additive type and 19,000 if the counter is a subtractive type. However, this is not limited to this, and any value may be used as the initial value.

For example, if the difference counter is a 2-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65,535. If gameplay is to be stopped when the difference since power-on exceeds 19,000, the difference counter only needs to count up to 19,000, so its initial value is set to 46,535 (65,535 - 19,000). In this case, gameplay will be stopped when the difference counter exceeds 65,535, so it is easy to determine whether the difference since power-on has exceeded 19,000 by checking whether the carry flag stores a value of 1 or 0. The carry flag also stores a value of 1 even when it falls below 0. However, as mentioned above, the theoretical maximum number of coins inserted per day is around 30,000, so there is a sufficient margin of 16,535 coins (46,535 - 30,000). In reality, since small wins and replay wins mean that the number of coins rarely decreases by 30,000 in a single day, the probability of the count falling below 0 is extremely low.

By configuring it in this way, the process of updating the difference counter can be simplified and the program size can be reduced.

Also, for example, as mentioned above, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus, game progress may be stopped at the end of the bonus. In such a case, if the difference counter can only count up to 19,000, the increase during the bonus cannot be counted. Therefore, if the difference counter is a 2-byte counter, the initial value may be set to a value smaller than 46,535. A value smaller than 46,535 could be considered, for example, 40,000. In this case, there is room to win up to a maximum of 6,535 coins after the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, so even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus, the difference can continue to be counted until the bonus ends. Furthermore, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the AT can only win up to a maximum of 2,414 coins due to its advantageous zone. Therefore, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the difference can continue to be counted until the AT ends. When the initial value of the difference counter is 40,000, determining whether the difference exceeds 19,000 can be determined by whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 59,000. Additionally, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 59,000, it will determine whether the game is currently in a bonus mode, and if so, the game will continue until the bonus mode ends.

Although we have given an example in which the initial value of the difference counter is a value smaller than 46,535, it is preferable to set the initial value to a value (32,767 or greater) greater than half the maximum value (65,535) that can be counted using two bytes. This is because when gaming machines are set to a value that indicates the smallest payout rate (for example, set value 1), the payout rate is often designed to be below 100%, making it more likely that the difference will decrease rather than increase. For this reason, by setting the initial value of the difference counter to a value greater than half the maximum value that can be counted, the possibility of the difference counter value becoming 0 can be reduced, making it easier to achieve normal operation in the market.

It is also possible that the difference counter does not count the difference correctly when it exceeds 19,000. In this case, even if the initial value of the difference counter is 46,535, gameplay will not be stopped even if the difference exceeds 19,000 during a bonus. In this case, when the difference counter exceeds 65,535 (when it is determined that it has exceeded 65,535, or when it is determined that 1 has been stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag, and a decision is made as to whether or not to stop gameplay depending on whether the temporary stop flag is set to the predetermined value. In this way, if the difference exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the difference counter will exceed 65,535 and start counting from 0, but because the decision as to whether or not to stop gameplay is made based on the temporary stop flag, normal operation can be achieved overall, even though the value of the difference counter is not normal.

In the above explanation, the difference counter subtracts the number of medals inserted and adds the number of medals paid out, but it may also be configured to add the number of medals inserted and subtract the number of medals paid out. In this case, the initial value of the difference counter may be set to 19,000, or a value between 19,000 and 32,766 inclusive.

Although the difference counter was explained as a 2-byte counter, it can also be a 3-byte or 4-byte counter. If the difference counter is a 3-byte counter, the initial value can be set to 16758215 so that the carry flag will be set to 1 when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins. Furthermore, by making it 3 bytes or more, even if there are gaming parlors that do not turn off the power to their gaming machines, and the payout rate is always set to a value below 100%, and 10,000 games are played every day, the difference counter will not fall below 0 for several years, further reducing the possibility of malfunctions in the market.

<Test signals related to the termination of the test>
As described above, when the stop processing is executed, game progress stops (a stop state occurs). If game progress suddenly stops during testing by a testing institution, it is impossible to accurately determine whether game progress stopped due to a malfunction or due to the activation of the stop processing. Therefore, when the stop processing is executed, a process for outputting a test signal related to the stop processing that enables the user to determine that game progress has stopped due to the execution of the stop processing may be executed. By configuring in this way, when game progress stops due to the stop processing, the testing institution can determine that the stop of game progress was due to the execution of the stop processing, rather than due to a malfunction, and the testing institution can conclude that the test results are correct.

In this case, the process for outputting the test signal related to the termination may be executed continuously during the termination state, or may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)).

Furthermore, when a game-stopping process is executed, it is possible to execute a process for outputting a test signal related to the stoppage, which allows the player to know that the game has stopped due to the execution of the stoppage process. However, it is also possible to execute a process for outputting a test signal related to the stoppage from a game before the stoppage process occurs. In other words, it is also possible to execute a process for outputting a test signal related to the stoppage in advance. For example, in a specification that executes a game-stopping process when the difference in the number of units since the time of power-on exceeds 19,000, it is also possible to execute a process for outputting a test signal related to the stoppage from when the difference in the number of units since the time of power-on reaches 18,900. Note that in this configuration, game play can continue even when a test signal related to the stoppage is being output, because the difference in the number of units since the time of power-on has not yet reached 19,000. This configuration allows the testing organization to be notified in advance that a game-stopping process may be executed, making testing by the testing organization smoother.

In this case, the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may be executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)). Furthermore, it may be executed when the difference in the number of times since power-on is 18,900 or greater (if the difference in the number of times since power-on is less than 18,900, the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may not be executed).

Note that the timing for executing the process to output the test signal related to advance termination was set to when the difference in number from the time the power was turned on reaches 18,900, but this can be set to any value, such as 18,000 or 18,985, from the time the power was turned on.

In addition to the test signal, processing may also be performed to output an external signal. In this case, the output mode and output timing of the test signal related to the stoppage described above can be applied to the external signal (e.g., a security signal). By outputting an external signal in this way, it is possible to notify waiting staff in advance that the stoppage process may be executed.

<Regarding processing by the sub-control means based on the difference counter>
The main control means is configured to be able to transmit information about the value of the difference counter to the sub-control means, thereby making it possible to notify the player before the progress of the game is stopped.

For example, if the remaining difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000, the LCD display could display an ending message saying "100 coins remaining" or play a sound. Then, as the difference is updated and gets smaller, the ending message could be updated to say "90 coins remaining" or "85 coins remaining," etc. If the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory message such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" could be displayed or a sound could be played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, increasing the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000 coins and an ending display of "100 coins remaining" is displayed on the LCD display, if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100 coins, the ending display of the remaining difference can be erased (made non-display). When the remaining difference again reaches 100 coins, the LCD display will display the ending display of "100 coins remaining".

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference remaining below the number and the ending display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Furthermore, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment will not be hindered by the disappearance of the congratulatory display, and a decrease in interest in the game will be prevented.

In the example above, the remaining difference was displayed as the ending display, but this is not limited to this; a story-like presentation may also be displayed. Even in this case, the ending display can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below the threshold that triggers the execution of the ending display, thereby preventing the ending display from being displayed more than necessary.

In addition, if a celebratory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, this may discourage players who are unaware of the existence of the stop process, which could reduce their motivation to continue playing. Therefore, a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Regarding external signal output based on the value of the difference counter>
When the main control means or monitoring process updates the value of the difference counter during the stop process and the result reaches a specific value (18,900 in this embodiment) that is just before the predetermined value (19,000 in this embodiment) at which the stop process is executed, a process is executed to output a test interrupt request signal to the test IF board.

This allows the gaming machine test to be interrupted before the machine reaches a dead end and game progress halts. When the test is interrupted, the tester can turn the power off and then back on to initialize the difference counter value, allowing the gaming machine test to continue until the difference counter value exceeds 19,000 again. In other words, by turning the power off and back on when the difference counter value is 18,900, it is possible to prevent game progress from halting until the difference counter value effectively exceeds 37,900, allowing for stable testing.

Note that the specific value just before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed (19,000 in this embodiment) is set to 18,900, but this is not limiting and any value between 9,500, which is half the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed, and 18,985, which is the value at which the stop processing is not executed even if the maximum payout number is reached, can be used as the specific value.

In addition, in this embodiment, processing was performed to output a test interruption request signal to interrupt the test, but any signal may be output as long as it is conveyed to the tester. As a result, the signal output to the test IF board when a specific value is reached just before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed may be referred to as a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal), and the processing for outputting to the test IF board may be referred to as processing for outputting a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding processing by the sub-control means based on the value of the difference counter>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, the sub-control means is configured to be able to transmit information based on the value of the difference counter to the sub-control means, thereby making it possible to notify the player that the game has stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "stop notification").

For example, if the remaining number of coins exceeds 19,000 with a difference of 100 coins, the LCD display may display "100 coins remaining," and an ending effect or sound may be played. Then, as the difference is updated and decreases, the remaining difference display may be updated to "90 coins remaining," "85 coins remaining," etc. When the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory display such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" may be played, or sound may be played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. A state in which such a sub-control means displays the remaining number of coins until the end of the game, plays an ending effect, or sounds, or a state in which the remaining number of coins until the end of the game is not displayed but an ending effect or sound related to the end of the game is played, is referred to as an operation advance notification state (related to the end of the game). Note that the operation advance notification state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, increasing the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference is 100 and the total exceeds 19,000, and the LCD display shows "100 remaining," if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100, the remaining difference display can be erased (hide). When the remaining difference again reaches 100, the LCD display will show "100 remaining."

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference continuing to fall below the target and the remaining difference display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Furthermore, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment will not be hindered by the disappearance of the celebration display, and a decrease in interest in the game will be prevented.

The ending performance or sound may be a continuous performance with a storyline, or a still image. Even in this case, the ending performance or sound can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below the threshold that triggers the execution of the ending performance or sound, so that the ending performance or sound is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, if a celebratory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, this may discourage players who are unaware of the existence of the stop process, which could reduce their motivation to continue playing. Therefore, a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Performance in the operation advance notice state>
A possible display mode on the display device in the activation notification state is as shown in Fig. 85. In Fig. 85, as the effect images in the normal state (which is neither an activation notification state nor a stop state, and includes various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means), which is neither an activation notification state nor a stop state, a lion and girl character display, a heart effect display, a line display such as "Today was fun," and a total winning number display such as "TOTAL: 18,000 coins" are displayed. In addition to the effect images displayed in the normal state, as the effect images in the activation notification state (which includes various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means), a remaining difference display such as "The complete function will be activated soon. 100 coins remaining until activation" is displayed. Furthermore, as the effect image in the limit notification state (a state in which the progress of the game has stopped), the effect image displayed in the normal state and the activation notice state is not displayed, and instead a black background and a limit notification (notification regarding the limit processing, limit notification) saying "The complete function has been activated" are displayed. Note that the total number of wins display in the normal state does not need to be displayed all the time, but is displayed when the total number of wins reaches or exceeds a predetermined threshold (for example, 18,000 shown in FIG. 85 or 18,900, which is the value at which a test interrupt request signal is sent to the test IF board).

In the activation notification state, the remaining difference display obscures the entire display of the total number of wins, part of the girl character display, and all of the effect display. However, because the display area of the remaining difference display is smaller than 50% of the full screen display area, the player can generally see the effect image being executed. Note that in Figure 85, the transparency (transparency) of the remaining difference display is set to 0%, so the display of layers behind the remaining difference display cannot be seen, but the transparency of the remaining difference display can be set to any value between 10% and 90%. This makes it possible to see both the remaining difference display and the effect image.

In addition to the congratulatory display described above, the limit notification may also include the display of limit text such as "The limit has been reached" or "The game has ended" or a sound. The limit text may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be terminated after the limit text is displayed and the limit text or sound may be displayed. In addition, a warning display or sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch" may also be displayed together with the limit text.
Furthermore, while the remaining difference display in the operation advance notification state is displayed at the top of the display area of the display device, this is not limiting, and the remaining difference display may also be displayed at the bottom or center of the display area of the display device. However, if displayed at the bottom or center, there is a possibility that it will overlap with the display area of various information displays (number of game medals displayed, number of awarded medals displayed, or number of bets displayed) not shown, and most of the effect images, so by setting the transparency of the remaining difference display to any value between 20% and 90%, the player can view the various information displays and effect images.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT plays, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigation plays) are met in the activation notification state, the addiction prevention display is displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. This allows the player to see the addiction prevention display before the remaining difference display, effectively preventing addiction to the game.

Also, contrary to the above-described embodiment, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are met in the activation advance notification state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the addiction prevention display. This allows the player to quickly visually confirm the remaining difference until the game is stopped.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are met in the activation notification state, the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be displayed in different display areas. This allows the player to view both pieces of information. In this case, if the display area for the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display are configured to be displayed in overlapping display areas, the display area for the anti-addiction display may be changed, or the display area for the remaining difference display may be changed. Furthermore, the display areas for the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be predetermined to be non-overlapping display areas even when displayed simultaneously.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal, a notification (counting switch prompt display) is displayed to encourage counting. Therefore, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the operation advance notification state, both the remaining difference display and the counting switch prompt display are displayed. This allows the player to be aware of both the remaining difference display and the need to operate the counting switch.

Also, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notification state, the counting switch prompt display may be displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. In this case, if the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompt display is displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the remaining difference display will be displayed. This allows the total score threshold reached state to be canceled by quickly operating the counting switch, and the player can then become aware of the remaining difference display.

Furthermore, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notification state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the count switch prompt display. This can provide a sense of satisfaction to players who want to prioritize knowing the remaining difference.

<Effects in the end notification state>
In the limit notification state, the lion and girl character displays, the effect display, the dialogue display, and the total number of wins display are all invisible. Also, a limit display is displayed instead of the remaining difference display. In Figure 85, the limit display is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device, but no effect image is displayed (the transparency of the limit display is 0%), so it may be displayed anywhere in the display area, including the top or bottom.

In addition, the limit display in the limit notification state may occupy 50% or more of the display area of the entire screen. However, when other information is displayed (such as a display indicating that the menu screen can be displayed by operating a sub-switch or a warning display), it is desirable that the limit display in the limit notification state be any value between 50% and 90% of the display area of the entire screen.

In the game end notification state in Figure 85, no congratulatory display is displayed, but a congratulatory display using a character may be displayed instead of a black background image. However, even when the congratulatory display is displayed, the in-game effect image is not displayed.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during an AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of AT plays, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and a limit display is displayed, an addiction prevention display may be displayed. This prevents the addiction prevention display that would normally be displayed on the AT end screen from not being displayed. The addiction prevention display at this time may be the same display format and display time as when it is displayed on the AT end screen, or it may be a different display format and display time than when it is displayed on the AT end screen. In addition, the display area of the addiction prevention display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area of the limit display, but if the addiction prevention display is configured to be hidden (not made visible) after a predetermined time, the display area of the addiction prevention display and the display area of the limit display may overlap.

In addition, contrary to the above-described embodiment, when a stop notification state is reached during an AT (when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the stop condition is met), and the stop display is displayed, the addiction prevention display does not need to be displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the stop display has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the stop display.

In addition, even if a stop notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the stop conditions are met), and the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the stop indication is displayed, if any of the AT's termination conditions are met and the stop conditions are also met (when any of the AT's termination conditions and the stop conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may be displayed when the stop indication is displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the AT has ended even when the stop state is reached, giving them a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when a stop notification state is reached during an AT (when any of the AT's termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the stop conditions are met), the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the stop indication is displayed. Even when any of the AT's termination conditions are met and the stop conditions are also met (when any of the AT's termination conditions and the stop conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may not be displayed when the stop indication is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the stop state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the stop indication.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or sub-control means during the termination processing>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, the main control means and/or the sub-control means notifies the player that the progress of the game has stopped (hereinafter, this may be referred to as a "stop notification").

The main control means may notify the user that a stop has occurred by displaying a message on a specified display device controlled by the main control means.

Examples of specified indicators controlled by the main control means include an acquired coin count indicator and a credit count indicator.

For example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the number of coins acquired display is displaying a message indicating that the limit has been reached (e.g., EE), the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display a message indicating that the specific error has occurred (e.g., E1). Then, if the specific error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display again a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that the specified error has occurred, even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that the stalled state has been reached.

Furthermore, for example, if a specified error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the acquired coin count display is displaying a message indicating that the limit has been reached (e.g., EE), the acquired coin count display may not display a message indicating that the specified error has occurred (e.g., E1). In other words, even if a specified error occurs, the acquired coin count display may continue to display a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, the player will no longer be confused as to whether a specific error has occurred or whether a play-stop state has occurred, and the player can be accurately notified that a play-stop state has occurred.

Note that while the number of coins acquired indicator was mentioned as an example of a predetermined indicator controlled by the main control means, as mentioned above, it may also be a credit number indicator.

For example, the credit number display displays the number of credits. However, if the limit condition is met (if information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area), automatic settlement, as described below, may be performed. In this configuration, once the limit condition is met and automatic settlement is performed, the number of credits becomes 0, and the credit number display can display (for example, EE) to indicate that a limit state has occurred.

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle accounts when a play-stop condition is met, after the player operates the settlement switch and the number of credits reaches 0, a display (e.g., EE) can be displayed on the credit number display to indicate that a play-stop condition has occurred.

If a specified error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the number of coins acquired is not displaying anything and the credit number display is displaying an indication that a play limit has occurred, the number of coins acquired may display an indication (e.g., E1) that the specified error has occurred, and the credit number display may display an indication that a play limit has occurred. Then, when the specified error is resolved by operating the reset switch, the display on the number of coins acquired indicating that the specified error has occurred may disappear (terminating the display process), and the credit number display may continue to display an indication that a play limit has occurred.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that the specified error has occurred, even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that the stalled state has been reached.

Furthermore, for example, if a specified error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the credit number display is displaying a message indicating that the game has reached its limit (e.g., EE), the acquired coin count display may not display a message indicating that the specified error has occurred (e.g., E1). In other words, even if a specified error occurs, the credit number display may continue to display a message indicating that the game has reached its limit.

By configuring it in this way, players will no longer be confused about whether a specific error has occurred or whether a play-stop state has occurred, and players can be accurately notified that a play-stop state has occurred.

In addition to the congratulatory display described above, the sub-control means may also display or sound an end of play such as "The complete function has been activated," "The end of play has occurred," or "Play has ended," as shown in FIG. 85. The end of play display may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be displayed and then ended, and the end of play display or sound may be displayed. Furthermore, a warning display (various switch prompt displays) such as "Please press the settlement switch" or sound may also be displayed together with the end of play display.

To notify the user of the limit, the limit process may be executed before the congratulatory display is executed, and the congratulatory display may be displayed during the limit process, or a freeze may be executed for a predetermined period before the limit process is executed, and the congratulatory display may be executed during the predetermined period, and the limit character may be displayed when the limit process is executed after the predetermined period.

In addition, when a stop character is displayed after a blessing display, the warning display will not be executed while the blessing display is being executed, and the warning display will be executed when the stop character is displayed.

This prevents players from forgetting to operate the settlement switch or counting switch, and does not hinder the sense of accomplishment that comes from displaying the celebration, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, during the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text audio such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning audio such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch" are not output, and silence remains. In addition, during the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text audio such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning audio such as "Please press the settlement switch" may be output at a volume lower than the volume during error notification.

By configuring it in this way, players are less likely to have a negative impression of a dead end, and are more likely to recognize it as something to aim for, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, the functions of the sub-switches managed by the sub-control means are enabled during the end notification. For this reason, even during the end processing (end notification), it is possible to open the menu screen or volume change screen by operating the sub-switch. Note that the volume that can be changed from the volume change screen does not include the volume related to the end notification, so it is not possible to change the volume during the end notification.

In addition, by opening a menu screen during the limit-play process and displaying a two-dimensional code including the game history, a service (a so-called "game machine linked service") can be provided to the player in which the game history is read by a mobile device and saved on a server. Note that since the limit-play display is displayed on the display device, when the two-dimensional code is displayed from the menu screen except during a limit-play notification, it is displayed in a specified area in the center of the display device's screen. However, since the specified area overlaps with the limit-play display during a limit-play notification, the display area for the two-dimensional code during a limit-play notification is displayed in an area different from the specified area that does not overlap with the limit-play display.

As an alternative method for displaying the limit indication and the two-dimensional code, even if the display areas of the limit indication and the two-dimensional code overlap, the limit indication and the two-dimensional code may be displayed alternately, allowing the limit notification to be issued while the two-dimensional code can be read.

In addition, when a play-stop process is executed, the gaming media may be automatically settled. For example, if a play-stop process is executed when the number of credits stored is "50," "50" gaming media will be automatically settled (paid out to the bottom tray) even if the settlement switch is not operated. By configuring it in this way, the gaming media electronically stored in the gaming machine can be returned to the player without the player having to operate the settlement switch. In other words, it is possible to avoid issuing warning audio such as "Please press the settlement switch" or warning displays such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch."

Furthermore, the stop notification will not end due to the passage of time during the stop processing. In other words, the stop notification will continue until the stop state is released (until a setting change process or RWM abnormality process is executed).

During the abort process, even if an event occurs that could result in one of the aforementioned recoverable errors, the system may be configured not to detect the error, or it may be configured to detect the error but not execute the specified error processing. In either case, the system is configured not to notify the user of the specified error.

As mentioned above, this is because the stop processing is looped during the stop processing, so even if a specified error is detected in the interrupt processing, the specified error processing within the main loop processing will not be executed. Note that if interrupt processing is prohibited during the stop processing, the specified error will not be detected.

This prevents the hassle of having to clear errors when gameplay cannot proceed by executing a game stop process, reducing the workload of game parlor staff.

Note that if the system is configured to execute a specified error process within an interrupt process, the specified error process will be executed even during a stop process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specified error process from being executed during a stop process by determining whether or not a stop process is in progress before executing the specified error process, and if so, not executing the specified error process. This can also be achieved by disabling interrupt processing during a stop process.

Furthermore, considering that fraud can be detected quickly by executing a specified error process even during the termination process, it may be possible to configure the system so that a specified error process can be executed during the termination process.

In this case, interrupt processing is permitted even during the termination processing, and when a specified error is detected during the interrupt processing, the specified error processing is executed within the interrupt processing and the specified error notification processing is performed, or when a specified error is detected during the termination processing, the specified error processing is executed during the specified error processing within the termination processing loop after the specified error is detected during the interrupt processing.

By doing this, fraudulent processing can be carried out even during the termination process, preventing fraudulent activity.

It is also possible to configure the system to output an external signal when the game-stopping process is executed. For example, it is possible to output an external signal as a security signal. A security signal is a signal that is output in response to a specific error (such as an open door). When the security signal is output, the gaming facility can determine that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine on which the game-stopping process was executed, and therefore, even if an error notification is not issued during the game-stopping process, fraudulent behavior can be deterred.

<Other configurations related to stop monitoring processing or stop processing>
The limit monitoring process and the limit process are configured to be executed outside the use area. Alternatively, the limit monitoring process may be configured to be executed outside the use area and the limit process may be executed within the use area, or the limit monitoring process and the limit process may be configured to be executed within the use area.

In addition, in the case of medal-less gaming machines, the stoppage monitoring process and stoppage process may be performed outside the use area of the main control board, or the stoppage monitoring process and stoppage process may be performed outside the use area of the gaming medal count control board.

It is configured to continue executing the process to output an external signal while the termination process is in progress.

This configuration allows an external notification that the game is being stopped, allowing the gaming center manager to quickly grasp the status of the gaming machine.

The end of the game notification may be not only by the LCD display or sound output from the speaker, but also by the lighting of various LEDs such as the frame lamp, lower panel lamp, number of coins acquired indicator, or credit indicator.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify players that a game has stopped even on gaming machines that do not have LCD screens.

The following describes a specific example of the end-of-game monitoring process using the figures. Here, the end-of-game monitoring process is configured to be executed at a predetermined timing after the awarding of gaming media (the winning awarding process related to the displayed symbol combination in Figure 9) has ended. For example, the end-of-game monitoring process may be configured to be executed as one of the processes executed in the game end check in Figure 9.

The end-of-game monitoring process is also executed in all games. Specifically, it is executed regardless of the game zone (normal zone, advantageous zone). It is also executed regardless of the game state (non-AT state, AT state, during bonus (bonus game state), inside bonus state). It is also executed regardless of the number of gaming media betted (game with one bet, game with two bets, game with three bets).

<End monitoring process (version without difference counter)>
In FIG. 80, there is a storage area for the number of inserted medals and a storage area for the number of paid out medals.

The inserted medal count memory area (also known as the total IN counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media inserted (total number of bets). For example, the inserted medal count memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area that can store values from 0 to 65535).

The medal payout count memory area (also known as the total OUT counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out (total payouts). For example, the medal payout count memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area that can store values from 0 to 65535).

The value stored in the medal count memory area is set to the initial value (0) when the power is turned on. Similarly, the value stored in the medal count memory area is set to the initial value (0) when the power is turned on. In other words, if a power outage occurs when the value stored in the medal count memory area is 1000 and the value stored in the medal count memory area is 2000, and the power is then turned on, the initial value (0) will be stored in the medal count memory area and the initial value (0) will be stored in the medal count memory area.

Note that "power-on" includes both power-on without a setting change and power-on with a setting change. However, it is also possible for the initial values to not be stored when the power is turned on without a setting change, and for the initial values to be stored when the power is turned on with a setting change.

Furthermore, the values stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and the number of paid out medals memory area are not stored as their initial values (0) when the RWM is cleared following the end of the advantageous period. In other words, the advantageous period ends (the RWM is cleared following the end of the advantageous period) when the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area is 1000 and the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area is 2000, and the next game (game in the normal period) starts with 1000 stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and 2000 stored in the number of paid out medals memory area. Note that it is assumed that the power is not turned off between the end of the advantageous period and the start of the next game.

First, in "Replay activation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed as a result of this game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role is won through an internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed, the result is YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role is won through an internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not stopped and displayed), the result is NO. Note that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay can also be referred to as a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role (the same applies below).

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in a static state during this game, "Replay activation symbol displayed?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

The "total OUT counter update process" updates the value stored in the payout medal count storage area. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is added to the value stored in the payout medal count storage area. The result of adding the number of medals paid out in the current game to the value stored in the payout medal count storage area is then stored in the payout medal count storage area. For example, if "1000" is stored in the payout medal count storage area and the payout number obtained as a result of the current game is "9," then "1009" is stored in the payout medal count storage area.

The "total IN counter update process" updates the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. Specifically, the number of inserted medals for the current game is added to the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. The result of adding the number of inserted medals for the current game to the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area is then stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. For example, if "3000" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the number of bets for the current game is "3," then "3003" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area.

Note that even if the current game is bet on via automatic betting, the number of bets on that automatic bet will be considered the number of balls thrown in this game. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed statically in the previous game and a "3" is bet on via automatic betting, the number of balls thrown in this game will be "3." However, for example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed statically in both the previous game and the current game (two consecutive games), the answer to "Is a replay activation symbol displayed?" in the end-of-game monitoring process for this game will be YES, and the end-of-game monitoring process will end without executing the "total-in counter update process."

"Total OUT counter < Total IN counter?" determines whether the total number of dispensed coins after being updated by the "Total OUT counter update process" is less than the total number of inserted coins after being updated by the "Total IN counter update process."

Specifically, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total in counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total out counter update process'". If the carry flag is 1 as a result of this subtraction process, a YES judgment is made and the limit monitoring process is terminated. In other words, the next process, "difference number > 19000", is not executed. On the other hand, if the carry flag is not 1 as a result of this subtraction process (if it is 0), a NO judgment is made.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "1000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the result is determined to be NO.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "1000", then "1000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, a borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 1. In other words, the answer is YES.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the result is determined to be NO.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19000, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). Specifically, the determination is made by comparing the result of the subtraction process performed in "Total OUT counter < Total IN counter?" with the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state." Here, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state" is set to "19001," and the determination is made.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total number of coins dispensed after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", the result of subtracting "2000" from "1000" is "1000". As a result of the comparison between "1000" and "19001" (1000 - 19001), the carry flag becomes 1, so the result is NO (the difference does not exceed 19000).

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total number of coins dispensed after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,000," the result of subtracting "29,000" from "10,000" is "19,000." As a result of the comparison between "19,000" and "19,001" (19,000 - 19,001), the carry flag becomes 1, so the result is determined to be NO (the difference does not exceed 19,000).

For example, if the total input number after updating by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total output number after updating by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,005," the result of subtracting "29,005" from "10,000" is "19,005." The result of the comparison between "19,005" and "19,001" (19,005 - 19,001) is that the carry flag is 0, so the answer is YES (the difference is greater than 19,000).

The "Save Shutdown Flag" function stores information indicating that the shutdown conditions have been met in the shutdown flag storage area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the shutdown flag storage area.

In addition, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power-off process). Furthermore, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change). (If information indicating that the stop conditions have been met is stored, the information indicating that the stop conditions have been met can be cleared.)

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Limit Flag" stores information indicating that the limit conditions have been met in the limit flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the values stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the number of paid out medals storage area will be reset to their initial values (0), but the information stored in the limit flag storage area (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

For this reason, if the power is turned off and then turned on again without changing any settings while the power-on flag storage area stores information indicating that the power-on conditions have been met, the power-on state will be reached even though the difference between the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the value stored in the number of paid-out medals storage area does not exceed 19,000 (the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on is the starting point (0) does not exceed 19,000).

If information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (if the stop state has been reached), betting operations for the next game cannot be performed. For example, bet button operations are disabled, or the blocker is (set) to a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position that allows inserted medals to be returned from the return slot).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the settlement condition has been met is stored in the settlement flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In other words, the stoppage monitoring process in Figure 80 performs a subtraction process to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". If the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is greater than the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", it determines whether it is greater than the specified value (19,000). If it determines that the value is greater than the specified value (19,000), information indicating that the stoppage condition has been met is stored in the stoppage flag memory area. Therefore, the next game cannot be played unless the settings are changed.

In addition, the stoppage monitoring process in Figure 80 performs a subtraction process to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". If the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is less than the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", no determination is made as to whether it is greater than the specified value (19,000). Therefore, information indicating that the stoppage condition has been met is not stored in the stoppage flag memory area, and the next game can be played.

In other words, if the total number of dispensed coins is greater than the total number of inserted coins, it is compared with the specified value, but if the total number of dispensed coins is less than the total number of inserted coins, it is not compared with the specified value.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to avoid performing unnecessary processing when the total payout number is smaller than the total input number. In other words, it is possible to shorten the processing time of the main control means and reduce the number of incorrect decisions made due to noise, etc.

Note that while the initial value stored in the inserted medal count storage area and the paid-out medal count storage area has been explained as "0" as an example, the initial value is not limited to "0." As long as the initial value stored in the inserted medal count storage area and the initial value stored in the paid-out medal count storage area are the same, any value can be used.

In addition, the inserted medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, and the paid-out medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, but the inserted medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area, and the paid-out medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area.

In addition, if the difference in the number of gaming media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0), the values stored in the inserted medal count storage area and the paid out medal count storage area may be configured not to be updated.

For example, if the lower limit is set to -10,000, and the difference in the number of gaming media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0) and the game is playing, the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of bets in that game. Also, the value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of paid out medals in that game.

By setting a lower limit in this way, the game can be capped off when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a maximum of 29,000 (the absolute value of the lower limit, (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when a lower limit is not set, the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the game is capped can be reduced. In other words, the tendency to gamble can be prevented from becoming too high.

Although the lower limit has been described as -10000, the lower limit is not limited to -10000 and can be any value.
stomach

<End monitoring process (difference counter addition version)>
81, a difference counter is provided. The explanation of the difference counter has been given above, so it will be omitted. The size of the storage area for the difference counter will be assumed to be 2 bytes.

Note that the initial value of the difference counter in Figure 81 is the value obtained by subtracting the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is to be stopped" from the "value corresponding to the memory area of the difference counter."

The "value corresponding to the difference counter's storage area" is 65,535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the difference counter's storage area if the difference counter's storage area is 2 bytes. Also, if the difference counter's storage area is 3 bytes, it is 16,777,215, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the difference counter's storage area.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause a stoppage" would be 19,000, for example, if the stoppage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0). Also, for example, if the stoppage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0), the value would be 10,000. Also, for example, if the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is used as the base (0), and the stoppage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media from that base exceeds 19,000, the value would be 19,000.

In Figure 81, the explanation will be given assuming that the "value corresponding to the memory area of the difference counter" is 65,535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is stopped" is 19,000, and the initial value is 46,535.

The initial value of the difference counter is stored in the difference counter when the power is turned on without any setting changes (not shown). Note that the initial value of the difference counter is also stored in the difference counter when the power is turned on with any setting changes (not shown).

First, in "Replay Activation Symbol Display?", it determines whether the symbol combination corresponding to the replay was stopped and displayed as a result of this game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role was won through an internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay was stopped and displayed, it determines YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role was won through an internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to the replay was not stopped and displayed), it determines NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in a stopped state during this game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "Difference Counter Set," the value stored in the difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, if the value stored in the difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the difference counter at this time is the value before the difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins inserted less than the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins inserted.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the determination is NO.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the result is determined to be NO.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inserted games minus the number of paid-out games is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the number of inserted games minus the number of paid-out games (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of paid-out games, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of inserted games media for the current game is less than the number of paid-out games, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls inserted and the number of balls paid out will not be considered as "number inserted < number paid out." In other words, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls bet on the current game will not be considered as the number of balls inserted. Similarly, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls awarded (or automatic bets) on the current game will not be considered as the number of balls paid out.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we calculated number of inserts - number of payouts, but it can also be determined by number of payouts - number of inserts. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

"Difference counter < 0?" determines whether the absolute value of the difference in the gaming media for the current game is subtracted from the value stored in the difference counter and the result is below the lower limit (0). Specifically, it determines whether there is a borrowing result when the value stored in the A register (number of coins inserted for the current game - number of coins paid out for the current game) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the difference counter). If there is a borrowing result, the result is YES; if there is no borrowing result, the result is NO. If there is a borrowing result, the carry flag is set to 1, and if there is no borrowing result, the carry flag is set to 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, if the difference counter (HL register) stores 2, the result of this game is:
A) When the input number is 3 and the output number is 0 (when the A register is 3), the HL register is 65535 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 2-3 = -1, but registers cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1 (when the A register is 2), the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3 (when the A register is 0), the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins out = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is NO. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

If the answer to "Difference counter < 0?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

When "Set Lower Limit" causes a borrow due to "Difference Counter < 0?", a predetermined lower limit (0) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this case, the HL register). In the above example, when the value stored in the Difference Counter is 2, if a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 0, "Difference Counter < 0?" causes the HL register to read 65535. In such a case, "Set Lower Limit" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference number of gaming media as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Lower Limit Value Set" is executed, the next game will be possible. In other words, the processing in Figure 81 will be executed even in games after "Lower Limit Value Set" is executed.

Note that while Figure 81 includes a "lower limit value set" process, this does not necessarily have to be included. Specifically, if "Difference counter < 0?" returns YES, the value stored in the difference counter for the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the difference counter is 2 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for that game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the value of the difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (values with borrowed digits) from being stored in the "difference counter." Furthermore, since the process equivalent to "lower limit value set" is eliminated, the program size can be reduced.

In other words, when a borrow occurs due to "Difference Counter < 0?", the difference counter is not updated using the value at the time of the borrow, preventing abnormal values from being entered as the difference counter value. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media becomes a negative value, the difference number of gaming media can be used as accurately as possible to trigger a capped state. Furthermore, for values below the lower limit, the lower limit or the previous value is used as the value of the difference counter, preventing too many gaming media from being awarded before the capped state is reached. In other words, excessive gambling can be prevented.

In "Difference Update," the complement of the value (value stored in the A register) of the calculation result (number inserted - number paid out) in "Difference Counter < 0?" is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register. In other words, the calculation is "value stored in the difference counter" + "absolute value of the difference between the gaming media in the current game."

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register is 249, but in the "difference update" step, the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 2 + 7 is calculated, and 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2 + 7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but in the "difference counter update", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65530 + 7 is calculated, and 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since this is greater than 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

"Update difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Difference Counter < 0?" is NO, the value updated by the absolute value of the difference between the previous game's difference counter and the current game's gaming media (number of inserts - number of payouts, or number of payouts - number of inserts) is stored in the HL register, and "Difference Counter Update" stores the value obtained by subtracting or adding the absolute value of the difference between the previous game's difference counter value and the current game's gaming media.

For example, if the answer to "Difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit value (0) is stored in the HL register, so "Update difference counter" stores the lower limit value (0) in the difference counter.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19000. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry is made due to "Difference Update." On the other hand, if a carry is made due to "Number Deposited < Number Paid Out?", the carry flag is temporarily set to 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point 0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program size compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point 0) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, "Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power-on starting point (0) has exceeded 19000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so 46535 is stored as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 46535 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "19000", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the count will be capped, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area for the difference counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media, starting from the point (0) at power-on, exceeds 19000, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will be set to 1.

Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 46535, a situation in which the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is 16535 means that the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), is -30000.

Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value and setting the lower limit to 0, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before reaching a limit can be limited to approximately 65535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46535) and the lower limit (0) (46535) + 19000).

As described above, by storing 46535 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the difference counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the limit is reached," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on has exceeded 19,000. Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -46535 as the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on. While this example shows the storage of 46535 as the initial value, values other than 46535 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

The "Save Shutdown Flag" function stores information indicating that the shutdown conditions have been met in the shutdown flag storage area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the shutdown flag storage area.

In addition, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power-off processing is executed). Furthermore, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Stop Flag" stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON again (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the difference counter will be reset to its initial value (46535), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met is stored in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings, the difference counter will return to its initial value, but the system will remain in the stopped state.

If information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (if the stop state has been reached), betting operations for the next game cannot be performed. For example, bet button operations are disabled, or the blocker is (set) to a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position that allows inserted medals to be returned from the return slot).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the settlement condition has been met is stored in the settlement flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In addition, "Difference counter < 0?" determines whether the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently played from the value stored in the difference counter falls below the lower limit (0). However, taking into account the case where the lower limit is not 0, "Difference counter < 0?" can also be expressed as "Difference counter < lower limit?"

For example, if the lower limit is set to 36,535, "Difference Counter < Lower Limit?" determines whether the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently played from the value stored in the difference counter is below the lower limit (36,535). If the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently played from the value stored in the difference counter is below the lower limit (36,535), "Set Lower Limit" may be used to store 36,535 in the HL register.

By setting the lower limit to 36,535 in this way, the game can be capped off when the maximum difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46,535) and the lower limit (36,535) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the lower limit is set to 0, the number of gaming media that the player can potentially obtain before the game is capped can be reduced. In other words, the risk of gambling becoming too high can be prevented.

Also, even if the lower limit is set to 36535, if the answer to "Is the difference counter < lower limit?" is YES, the value stored in the difference counter from the previous game may be used.

Note that although the example above uses 36535 as the lower limit, the lower limit is not limited to 36535 and can be any value.

In addition, while the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the system can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is used as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

If the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0) and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the lower limit to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 46,535, which is the "value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the difference counter" minus the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the game to be stopped," the lower limit will also be 46,535. By doing this, if the difference in the number of gaming media becomes smaller than the initial value, the answer to "Is the difference counter < lower limit?" (in the illustration, "Difference counter < 0?") will be YES, and 46,535 will be stored as the lower limit. Therefore, the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest can be set as the reference (0), and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

Similarly, if the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0) and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000, by setting the initial value to 0 and the lower limit to 0, when the difference in the number of gaming media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Difference counter < lower limit?" (shown in the figure as "Difference counter < 0?") will return YES, and 0 will be stored as the lower limit. Then, "Difference > 19,000?" will determine whether the value stored in the difference counter updated by "Difference counter update" is less than 19,001. By configuring it in this way, the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed can be set as the reference (0) and the game can be stopped when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

<End monitoring process (subtraction version of difference counter)>
82, a difference counter is provided. The explanation of the difference counter has been given above, so it will be omitted. The size of the storage area for the difference counter will be assumed to be 2 bytes.

Note that the initial value of the difference counter in Figure 82 is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game will be stopped."

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the limit to be reached" would be 19,000, for example, if the limit to be reached is reached when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the start point (0) being when the power is turned on. Also, for example, if the limit to be reached is reached when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the start point (0) being when the power is turned on, the value would be 10,000.

In Figure 82, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped" is set to 19,000, and the explanation will be given assuming the initial value to be 19,000.

The initial value of the difference counter is stored in the difference counter when the power is turned on (not shown). Note that the initial value of the difference counter is also stored in the difference counter when the power is turned on with a setting change (not shown).

First, in "Replay Activation Symbol Display?", it determines whether the symbol combination corresponding to the replay was stopped and displayed as a result of this game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role was won through an internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay was stopped and displayed, it determines YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role was won through an internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to the replay was not stopped and displayed), it determines NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in a static state during this game, "Replay activation symbol displayed?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "Difference Counter Set," the value stored in the difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, if the value stored in the difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the difference counter at this time is the value before the difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins inserted less than the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins inserted.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the determination is NO.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the result is determined to be NO.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inserted games minus the number of paid-out games is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the number of inserted games minus the number of paid-out games (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of paid-out games, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of inserted games media for the current game is less than the number of paid-out games, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls inserted and the number of balls paid out will not be considered as "number inserted < number paid out." In other words, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls bet on the current game will not be considered as the number of balls inserted. Similarly, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls awarded (or automatic bets) on the current game will not be considered as the number of balls paid out.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we calculated number of inserts - number of payouts, but we could also determine this by subtracting number of payouts from number of inserts. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

"Exceeding Upper Limit?" determines whether the absolute value of the difference in the gaming media for the current game is added to the value stored in the difference counter and the result exceeds the upper limit (e.g., 65,535). Specifically, it determines whether a carry occurs when the value stored in the A register (number of balls inserted for the current game - number of balls paid out for the current game) is added to the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the difference counter). If a carry occurs, the result is YES; if no carry occurs, the result is NO. If a carry occurs, the carry flag is set to 1; if no carry occurs, the carry flag is set to 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the HL register will be 1 and the carry flag will be 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in a value of 1.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the HL register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in a 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the HL register will be 65534 and the carry flag will be 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins out = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is YES. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

If "Exceeds upper limit?" returns YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Set Upper Limit," if a carry occurs due to "Exceeds Upper Limit?", a predetermined upper limit (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 65535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in 2 bytes, but the upper limit is not limited to 65535 and can be any predetermined value.

In the above example, when the value stored in the difference counter is 65534, if a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 0, the HL register = 2 due to "Upper limit exceeded?". In this case, "Upper limit set" stores 65535 in the HL register.

Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the difference counter is 65534, if (a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the HL register is set to 0 due to "Exceeds upper limit?". In such a case, the HL register is set to 65535 by "Set upper limit."

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Set Upper Limit Value" is executed, the next game will still be possible. In other words, the processing in Figure 82 will be executed even in games after "Set Upper Limit Value" is executed.

Note that while Figure 82 includes a "set upper limit" process, this does not necessarily have to be included. Specifically, if "Exceeds upper limit?" returns YES, the value stored in the difference counter for the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the difference counter is 65534 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for that game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the difference counter may be set to 65534 (the same value as the value of the difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (carried-over values) from being stored in the "difference counter." Furthermore, because the process equivalent to "set upper limit" is eliminated, the program size can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry occurs due to "Exceeding Upper Limit?", the difference counter is not updated using the value at the time the carry occurred, preventing abnormal values from being entered as the difference counter value. In other words, even if the difference in the number of gaming media becomes a negative value, the stop state can be triggered as accurately as possible using the difference in the gaming media.

In addition, for values above the upper limit, the difference counter value is set to either the upper limit or the previous value, so it is not possible to award a difference that greatly exceeds the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached (for example, 19,000). Specifically, by storing 19,000 as the initial value and setting the upper limit to 65,535, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the limit is reached can be limited to approximately 65,535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit (65,535) (46,535) + 19,000). In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

In "Difference Update," the complement of the result of the calculation in "Exceeds Upper Limit?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, the "value stored in the Difference Counter" - "Value of the Difference in the Game Media for the Current Game" is executed.

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65534,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register is 249, but in the "difference update" step, the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65534-7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of the calculation of 65534-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but the "difference counter update" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2-7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (because there is borrow), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is borrow, the carry flag becomes 1.

"Update difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Upper limit exceeded?" is NO, the value updated by the difference between the value of the difference counter from the previous game and the number of gaming media for the current game (number inserted - number paid out, or number paid out - number inserted) is stored in the HL register, and the "Update difference counter" function updates (subtracts or adds) the value updated by the absolute value of the difference between the value of the difference counter from the previous game and the number of gaming media for the current game, and stores the updated value in the difference counter.

For example, if "Exceeds upper limit?" returns YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so "Update difference counter" stores the upper limit (65535) in the difference counter.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19000. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry is downgraded due to "Difference Update." On the other hand, if a carry is upgraded due to "Number Deposited < Number Paid Out?", the carry flag is temporarily set to 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point 0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program size compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point 0) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, "Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power-on starting point (0) has exceeded 19000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so 19000 is stored as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 19000 is the value "19000" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media, starting from the point of power-on (0), exceeds 19000, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1.

Furthermore, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46,535 as the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19,000, a situation in which the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is 49,000 means that the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), is -30,000.

As described above, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000. Furthermore, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46,535 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. While this example shows the storage of 19,000 as the initial value, values other than 19,000 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

The "Save Shutdown Flag" function stores information indicating that the shutdown conditions have been met in the shutdown flag storage area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value is stored in the shutdown flag storage area.

In addition, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power-off processing is executed). Furthermore, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Stop Flag" stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON again (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the difference counter will be reset to its initial value (19000), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met is stored in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings, the difference counter will return to its initial value, but the system will remain in the stopped state.

If information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (if the stop state has been reached), betting operations for the next game cannot be performed. For example, bet button operations are disabled, or the blocker is (set) to a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position that allows inserted medals to be returned from the return slot).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the settlement condition has been met is stored in the settlement flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In the above explanation, an upper limit value of 65,535 was used as an example. However, if the upper limit value is set to 29,000, "Exceeds Upper Limit?" determines whether the value stored in the difference counter plus the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently played exceeds the upper limit value (29,000). If the value stored in the difference counter plus the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently played exceeds the upper limit value (29,000), "Set Upper Limit" may be used to store 29,000 in the HL register.

By setting the upper limit to 29,000 in this way, the game can be capped off when the maximum difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit (29,000) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the upper limit is set to 65,535, the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the game is capped can be reduced. In other words, the risk of gambling becoming too high can be prevented.

Also, even if the upper limit is set to 29,000, if the answer to "Upper limit exceeded?" is YES, the value stored in the difference counter from the previous game may be used.

Note that although the upper limit has been set to 29,000 in the above explanation, the upper limit is not limited to 29,000 and can be any value.

In addition, while the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the system can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is used as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

If the point at which a player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0) and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the upper limit to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 19,000, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the game to be stopped," the upper limit will also be set to 19,000. By doing this, if the difference in the number of gaming media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Exceeded upper limit?" will answer YES, and 19,000 will be stored as the upper limit. Therefore, the point at which a player has the lowest number of balls dispensed can be set as the reference (0), and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in Figures 80, 81, and 82, an example has been shown in which, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the halt condition has been met can be stored in the halt flag memory area (the halt processing can be executed).

In addition, by performing the processing shown in Figures 81 and 82, the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0), and when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the stop condition has been met can be stored in the stop flag memory area (the stop processing can be executed) as an example.

Note that the control processes shown in Figures 80, 81, and 82 are merely examples, and any order of control processes may be used as long as the same effect is achieved, even if the order of control processes is different.

Similarly, the control processes shown in Figures 80, 81, and 82 are merely examples, and any calculation process that produces a similar effect can be used, even if the control process involves different additions and subtractions (for example, when addition and subtraction are reversed). In other words, "adding" and "subtracting" can be expressed as "updating."

The stoppage monitoring process shown in Figures 80, 81, and 82 is also executed in the bonus game state. In other words, even in the middle of the bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the stoppage conditions have been met (predetermined value) is stored in the stoppage flag memory area, so that the game is stopped even in the middle of the bonus game state.

Similarly, the stoppage monitoring process shown in Figures 81 and 82 uses the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest as the reference (0) even in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), and when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, stores information (predetermined value) in the stoppage flag memory area indicating that the stoppage conditions have been met, so that the game is stopped even in the middle of a bonus game state.

By configuring it in this way, even in bonus game mode, the game can be stopped when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, starting from the point of power-on (0), providing a gaming machine that does not excessively increase gambling.

However, stopping the bonus game midway through can be frustrating for players.

Therefore, in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for ending the bonus game state are met), even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), the game is not immediately put into a halt state. Instead, when the conditions for ending the bonus game state are met, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the halt condition has been met is stored in the halt flag memory area, and an example of putting the game into a halt state is explained below.

<End monitoring process (subtraction version of difference counter, end state after bonus game state ends due to temporary end flag)>
Fig. 83 is a modified example of Fig. 82. Fig. 83 has a temporary flag storage area.

The temporary limit flag memory area is one of the RWM areas on the main control board. Specifically, it is a memory area that stores information (for example, a predetermined value such as "1") indicating that the temporary limit condition is met when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, starting from the point of power-on (0).

The information stored in the temporary limit flag storage area is not initialized simply by turning the power on and off. Furthermore, the information stored in the temporary limit flag storage area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable period.

In addition, the information stored in the temporary limit flag storage area can be initialized (e.g., to "0") by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with a setting change) (the information indicating that the temporary limit condition has been met can be cleared).

Note that if a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping are met is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area and the game is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the stop condition has been met is not stored in the stop flag storage area. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping are met is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area and the game is in a bonus game state, the game will not enter a stop state.

If a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping are met is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area for the game in which the bonus game state has ended. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping are stored in the provisional stop flag storage area is in a bonus game state, the game will enter a stop state after the game in which the bonus game state has ended has ended.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 82.

First, "Temporary stop flag ON?" determines whether information indicating that the temporary stop condition is met is stored in the temporary stop flag storage area.

If the answer to "Temporary stop flag ON?" is YES, the system determines whether the game is in bonus play mode.

If the answer to "Is the temporary stop flag ON?" is NO, the system checks whether "Replay activation symbol is displayed?"

"Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 82, so explanation will be omitted.

The "difference counter set" is the same as the "difference counter set" in Figure 82, so explanation will be omitted.

"Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 82, so explanation will be omitted.

"Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 82, so explanation will be omitted.

The "Upper limit set" is the same as the "Upper limit set" in Figure 82, so explanation will be omitted.

Since "Difference Number Update" is the same as "Difference Number Update" in Figure 82, explanation will be omitted.

Since "Difference counter update" is the same as "Difference counter update" in Figure 82, explanation will be omitted.

Since "Difference > 19000?" is the same as "Difference > 19000?" in Figure 82, explanation will be omitted.

In "Save temporary limit flag," information indicating that the temporary limit condition is met is stored in the temporary limit flag storage area. For example, information indicating that the temporary limit condition is met corresponds to numerical information such as a predetermined value (e.g., "1").

"Bonus game state?" determines whether the next game will be a bonus game state game. Specifically, it checks the bonus activation flag to determine whether Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB is activated.

Here, the bonus activation flag is one of the RWM areas on the main control board. For example, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a Type 1 BB is displayed, the bit of the bonus activation flag corresponding to Type 1 BB turns on (1), and changes from on to off (0) when the Type 1 BB is completed. Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a Type 2 BB is displayed, the bit of the bonus activation flag corresponding to Type 2 BB turns on (1), and changes from on to off (0) when the Type 2 BB is completed. Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to an RB is displayed, the bit of the bonus activation flag corresponding to RB turns on (1), and changes from on to off (0) when the RB is completed.

Note that the on/off status of the bonus activation flag is stored in a process that precedes the end-of-game monitoring process.

For example, even if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), if the current game ends in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the "Bonus game state?" will be judged as NO.

For example, if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) and the current game did not end in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the "Bonus game state?" question will be answered with YES.

For example, if the previous game was not in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) (it was in a non-bonus game state), and the current game is in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), then the answer to "Bonus game state?" will be YES.

Since "Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 82, explanation will be omitted.

As described above, by providing a temporary limit flag storage area, even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during bonus game mode, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), information indicating that the limit condition is met is not stored in the limit flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during bonus game mode, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), the limit state will be reached after the bonus game mode ends.

Furthermore, once information indicating that the provisional stop condition is met is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area, the difference counter is not updated. By configuring it in this way, unnecessary processing can be avoided.

However, the difference counter may be updated even after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met has been stored in the provisional limit flag storage area. This configuration allows for standardization of processing.

Furthermore, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, no determination is made as to whether the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000. By configuring it in this way, unnecessary processing can be avoided.

Furthermore, as is clear from Figure 83, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, the information stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is not updated (the information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is not cleared) even if the difference in the number of gaming media falls below 19,000. By configuring it in this way, if the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, the game can be put into a limit state even if the difference in the number of gaming media is below 19,000 in the game where the bonus game state ends.

Note that while Figure 83 has been explained as a modified example of Figure 82, it can also be applied to Figures 80 and 81.

For example, processing corresponding to "Temporary stop flag ON?" in FIG. 83 is provided before "Replay activation symbol display?" in FIG. 80, processing corresponding to "Temporary stop flag save" in FIG. 83 is provided after "Difference > 19,000?" in FIG. 80 returns YES, and processing corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 83 is provided before "Save stop flag" in FIG. 80. By configuring in this manner, even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, with the power-on as the starting point (0), information indicating that the stop condition is met is not stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, with the power-on as the starting point (0), the stop state can be established after the bonus game state ends.

Similarly, for example, processing corresponding to "Temporary stop flag ON?" in FIG. 83 is provided before "Replay activation symbol display?" in FIG. 81, processing equivalent to "Temporary stop flag save" in FIG. 83 is provided after "Difference number > 19,000?" in FIG. 81 returns YES, and processing equivalent to "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 83 is provided before "Save stop flag" in FIG. 81. By configuring in this manner, even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, with the power-on as the starting point (0), information indicating that the stop condition is met is not stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, with the power-on as the starting point (0), the stop state can be established after the bonus game state ends.

Note that Figure 83 can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the base (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

For example, if the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, information indicating that the conditions for stopping the game are met is not stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

<End monitoring process (subtraction version of difference counter, end state after bonus game state ends by difference counter)>
Figure 84 is a modified example of Figures 82 and 83. Like Figure 83, Figure 84 is identical in that, with the power-on time as the starting point (0) during the bonus game state, if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the game is stopped after the bonus game state ends. However, unlike Figure 83, it does not have a temporary stop flag storage area.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will be put into the stop state" is set to 19001. In other words, when the power is turned on from an off state without changing the settings, the initial value stored in the difference counter is 19001. Similarly, when the power is turned on from an off state with changing the settings, the initial value stored in the difference counter is 19001.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 83.

First, "Difference counter = specific value?" determines whether the value stored in the difference counter is a specific value. For example, if the specific value is 0, it determines whether the value stored in the difference counter is 0. Note that in Figure 83, the specific value is explained as 0, but it can be any value other than 0 as long as it is a predetermined value.

Furthermore, games that result in a YES response to "Is the difference counter equal to a specific value?" are games that have occurred during bonus game mode, with the power-on time being the starting point (0) and after the number of game media has exceeded 19,000, and are games that have occurred up until the "Save Stop Flag" is executed. Details will be provided later.

"Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), so explanation will be omitted.

The "difference counter set" is the same as the "difference counter set" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), so explanation will be omitted.

Since "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), explanation will be omitted.

Since "Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), explanation will be omitted.

The "Upper limit set" is the same as the "Upper limit set" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), so explanation will be omitted.

In "Difference Update," the complement of the result of the calculation in "Exceeds Upper Limit?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, the "value stored in the Difference Counter" - "Value of the Difference in the Number of Gaming Media for the Current Game" is calculated. If the result of this calculation is below a specific value, the specific value is stored in the HL register.

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, if the value stored in the difference counter (HL register value) is 65534, and the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249. However, in the "difference update" step, the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65534 - 7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of the calculation of 65534 - 7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag is 0.

When there is no borrow (when the carry flag is 0), the value of the HL register is not updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register is the result of the calculation "value stored in the difference counter" minus "value of the difference between the gaming media currently played."

For example, if the value stored in the difference counter (HL register value) is 2, and the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249. However, the "difference counter update" function first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, by subtracting 2 from 7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2 minus 7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (due to borrowing), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is borrowing, the carry flag is set to 1.

When there is a borrow (when the carry flag is 1), the value of the HL register is updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register becomes a specific value (0).

Since "Difference counter update" is the same as "Difference counter update" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), explanation will be omitted.

"Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media, starting from the point (0) when the power was turned on, exceeds 19,000. Specifically, it determines whether the value stored in the difference counter is a specific value (0). If the value stored in the difference counter is the specific value (0), it determines YES; if the value stored in the difference counter is not the specific value (0), it determines NO.

The value stored in the difference counter is a specific value (0) when: a) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" (the value stored in the difference counter) minus "the value of the difference in the gaming media currently played") is below the specific value (0); or b) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" (the value stored in the difference counter) minus "the value of the difference in the gaming media currently played") is a specific value (0).

Specifically, the above a) corresponds to the case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the start point (0) at power-on is greater than 19001, and the above b) corresponds to the case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the start point (0) at power-on is 19001.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point: 0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the value stored in the difference counter is a specific value (0).

Furthermore, by storing 19001 as the initial value when the power is turned on without a setting change or when the power is turned on with a setting change, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46534 as the difference in gaming media, with the time of power-on being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19001, a situation in which the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is 49001 means that the difference in gaming media, with the time of power-on being the starting point (0), is -30000.

As described above, by storing 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped," as the initial value, whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on has exceeded 19,000 can be determined by whether the value of the difference counter is "0," thereby reducing program capacity. Furthermore, by storing 19001 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46534 as the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on. While this example shows the storage of 19001 as the initial value, values other than 19001 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

Since "Bonus Game State?" is the same as "Bonus Game State?" in Figure 83, some of the explanation will be omitted. If "Bonus Game State?" is judged as YES, the "Save Stop Flag" is not executed and the stop monitoring process is executed. In other words, if "Bonus Game State?" is judged as YES, a specific value (0) is stored in the difference counter, and the next game (game in the bonus game state) can be played in a situation where no information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area.

In other words, when the next game is played while the specific value (0) is stored and the game limit monitoring process is executed, the first determination in the game limit monitoring process, "Is the difference counter equal to the specific value?", will be judged as YES. In other words, if the number of game media since the power-on start point (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state and "save game limit flag" has not been executed, the determination of "is the difference counter equal to the specific value?" will be made as YES, and it will be determined whether or not the game is in the bonus game state without performing processes such as "update the difference counter."

Since "Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), explanation will be omitted.

As described above, the stoppage monitoring process shown in Figure 84 does not require a temporary stoppage flag storage area (without taking up space in the RWM storage area), and can enter a stoppage state after the bonus game state ends, even if the number of gaming media since the power-on start point (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state.

Furthermore, if the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0), exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the machine can be put into a stop state even if the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0), is below 19,000 in the game in which the bonus game state ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not require players to have any strategy.

In addition, since the stoppage monitoring process shown in Figure 84 does not have a temporary stoppage flag storage area, if a power outage occurs (the power is turned off) during a specified game in the bonus game state after the number of gaming media, starting from the point of power-on (0), exceeds 19,000 and a specific value is stored in the difference counter, and then the power is turned on without a setting change, the difference counter will return from the specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state continues), and the game will not be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

In other words, if a power outage occurs during bonus game mode after the number of gaming media, starting from the point of power-on (0), exceeds 19,000, and the power is then turned back on and the bonus game mode resumes, the game will not be stopped. This configuration makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not mislead players into thinking that a power outage in the middle of a bonus game caused the game to be stopped.

Note that while Figure 84 has been described as a modified version of Figures 82 and 83, it can also be applied as a modified version of Figure 81.

Specifically, in Figure 84, the initial value is set to 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state." However, when applied as a modified example of Figure 81, the initial value is set to "value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the difference counter" - "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state." For example, if the storage area of the difference counter is 2 bytes, the "value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the difference counter" is 65535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state" is 19001, and the initial value is 46534.

Also, in Figure 84, the specific value is set to 0, but when applied as a modified example of Figure 81, the specific value is set to 65535.

As described above, the initial values and specific values in Figure 84 can be set to any predetermined values.

Furthermore, while Figure 84 provides an explanation using specific examples, the processing order and content are not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends, even if the number of gaming media since the power-on start time (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, without providing a temporary stop flag storage area (without putting pressure on the RWM storage area).

Note that Figure 84 can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the base (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

For example, if the point at which a player has the lowest number of balls dispensed during a bonus game state is set as the base (0), and the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends. However, if the power is turned off during a bonus game state and then turned on again without changing the settings, the difference counter will be reset from a specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state will continue), so the game will not be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

<Regarding another gaming machine specification (referred to as "specification 1") applicable to this embodiment>
Specification 1 applicable to the gaming machine described in this embodiment will be described.

In Specification 1, the required number of coins required to start a game is two or three when the device is not activated (inside or outside BB), and only three when RB is activated.

In Specification 1, the active line consists of one line on the top row of the left reel, the top row of the middle reel, and the bottom row of the right reel.

Specification 1 has 10 different designs. They are called Seven, Bar, Replay A, Replay B, Lemon, Hat, Apple A, Apple B, Cherry, and Blank.

The reel arrangement for Specification 1 will be explained using Figure 86. As shown in Figure 86, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations for specification 1 are shown in Figures 87 to 93. The "Winning Symbol/Activation Symbol/Pattern Symbol Name" items in the figures show the names of the condition devices corresponding to the symbol combinations. Additionally, the "Specified Number and Game Status" items show the bonuses awarded when symbol combinations stop for each specified number. If "Type 1 BB" is written in the "Specified Number and Game Status" item, it indicates that a Type 1 BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if "Replay" is written, it indicates that a replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if a number is written, it indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops; and if "-" is written, it indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game status.

In Specification 1, the bonus has two types of Type 1 BBs; Type 1 BB01 has the end condition of paying out more than two game medals, and Type 1 BB02 has the end condition of paying out more than 20 game medals. Furthermore, Type 1 BB01 is a type in which RB-A is activated continuously, while Type 1 BB02 is a type in which RB-B is activated continuously. Both RB-A and RB-B end when either two wins or two games are met, and once the end condition of RB-A or RB-B is met, RB-A or RB-B will automatically be activated until the end condition of Type 1 BB01 or Type 1 BB02 is met. During RB-A, an internal lottery may determine a losing result.

As shown in Figure 87, there is only one type of symbol combination for Type 1 BB01 and Type 1 BB02, and the symbol draw rate (probability of the symbol related to the symbol combination stopping) for Type 1 BB01 symbol combination and Type 1 BB02 symbol combination on each reel is not 100%, so to display Type 1 BB01 symbol combination and Type 1 BB02 symbol combination, you will need to use your eyes to press each reel.

In specification 1, the RT transition starts from non-RT (not inside Type 1 BB01 and Type 1 BB02), and if Type 1 BB-A is won during non-RT and the Type 1 BB01 pattern combination does not stop, the transition will occur from the next play (which may be at the end of that play) to RT1 (also referred to as inside Type 1 BB-A), and if the Type 1 BB01 pattern combination stops during RT1, RT1 will end and Type 1 BB-A will be activated from the next play (also referred to as during Type 1 BB-A), and when the activation of Type 1 BB-A ends, the transition will occur from the next play to non-RT. Also, if a type 1 BB-B is won during non-RT and the type 1 BB02 symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of that game) will transition to RT2 (also referred to as being inside type 1 BB-B), and if a type 1 BB02 symbol combination stops during RT2, RT2 will end and type 1 BB-B will be activated from the next game (also referred to as being inside type 1 BB-B), and when the activation of type 1 BB-B ends, the next game will transition to non-RT. Also, when the setting is changed during type 1 BB-A, the type 1 BB-A state will be inherited, and when the setting is changed in a state other than type 1 BB-A (type 1 BB01, and not inside type 1 BB02, inside type 1 BB-A, inside type 1 BB-B, and inside type 1 BB-B), it will become non-RT. Furthermore, in the event of a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB operating state are not cleared, so when power is restored, the system will start from the state before the power outage.

The conditional device in Specification 1 is explained in Figure 94. The "Conditional Device Number" item in Figure 94 lists the number corresponding to the winning number. The "Conditional Device" item lists the conditional device that will be activated. The "Nickname" item lists the simple name of the conditional device that will be activated. The "Component" item shows the pattern combination that corresponds to the conditional device.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when three coins are bet in Specification 1 are explained using Figure 95. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when betting 3 coins are as follows: Type 1 BB-B, Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-A7, Winning-A8, Winning-A9, Winning-A10, Winning-A11, Winning-A12, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-B7, Winning-B8, Winning-B9, Winning-B10, Winning-B1 The results are: 1, Winner -B12, Winner -C1, Winner -C2, Winner -C3, Winner -C4, Winner -C5, Winner -C6, Winner -C7, Winner -C8, Winner -C9, Winner -C10, Winner -C11, Winner -C12, Winner -D1, Winner -D2, Winner -D3, Winner -D4, Winner -D5, Winner -D6, Winner -D7, Winner -D8, Winner -D9, Winner -D10, Winner -D11, Winner -D12, Winner -E, Winner -F, Winner -G, Winner -H, Winner -I, Winner -J, Winner -K, Winner -L, Winner -M, Winner -N, Winner -O, Winner -P, Winner -Q. There are no losing options.

In addition, the "Internal Lottery" item in Figure 95 indicates whether or not an internal lottery is applicable for each game state, with "○" indicating that it is applicable for the internal lottery and "×" indicating that it is not applicable for the internal lottery. Furthermore, the "Advantageous Zone Transition" item indicates whether or not an advantageous zone transition lottery is to be executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that an advantageous zone transition lottery is to be executed and "×" indicating that it is not to be executed. Note that in Specification 1, if an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, there is a 100% chance of winning and transitioning to the advantageous zone. Furthermore, the "R1" to "R6" items indicate the number of winning positions for the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, with 65,536 positions allocated for each game state. Note that "R1" corresponds to a setting value of "1," "R2" corresponds to a setting value of "2," "R3" corresponds to a setting value of "3," "R4" corresponds to a setting value of "4," "R5" corresponds to a setting value of "5," and "R6" corresponds to a setting value of "6."

In specification 1, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT1 when three coins are bet are shown in Figure 96, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT2 when three coins are bet are shown in Figure 97, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT3 when three coins are bet are shown in Figure 98, and the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when two coins are bet are shown in Figure 99. Explanations of each figure are the same as those in Figure 95, and will be omitted here. Note that the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT1 and RT2 when two coins are bet are omitted here, as they are the same as the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when two coins are bet, where the number of Type 1 BB-A placed is 0 and the number of Replay-A placed is 21,638 (8,978 + 12,660).

In Specification 1, three-coin play in RT1 is the normal play method. In other words, when the gaming machine is shipped from the factory (initial state), two-coin play is performed in non-RT, and if a Type 1 BB-A is won and the Type 1 BB01 symbol combination does not stop, the machine transitions to RT1, where three-coin play is performed. Note that play methods other than three-coin play in RT1 are also possible, but because two-coin play does not involve an AT lottery and because the probability of winning the AT is lower when playing three-coin play in RTs other than RT1, three-coin play in RT1 is the play method with the highest payout rate.

The stop control in Specification 1 will be explained using Figure 100. The "X" in Figure 100 indicates a condition device that does not draw a lottery in that game state. Also, "123: WINNING 01 (PB8000)" in the "WINNING-A1 CONDITION DEVICE" in Figure 100 indicates that when the buttons are pressed in the order of left, center, and right when a WINNING-A1 win occurs, WINNING 01 will be displayed. Furthermore, "(PB8000)" indicates that since 20 symbols are displayed on each of the three reels, the total number of all symbol combinations is 20 x 20 x 20 = 8000, and when the buttons are pressed in the order of left, center, and right, WINNING 01 will stop with a 100% (8000/8000 x 100) probability. If this reads "132: Winning 11 (PB4000)," this indicates that if the left, right, and middle buttons are pressed in the correct order, there is a 50% (4000/8000 x 100) probability that the winning 11 will stop, and a 50% probability that it will be missed. This is similar for other conditional devices, so explanations will be omitted. Also, where "-" is written in Figure 100, this indicates that the conditional device will always stop, regardless of the button press order. The "Notes" also list the symbol combination that will appear when the correct button press order is used. For example, the "Notes" for the "Winning - A1 Conditional Device" reads "Lemon Down Right," which indicates that if the device is pressed left, center, and right, a lemon will stop on the top row of the left reel, a lemon on the middle row of the middle reel, and a lemon on the bottom row of the right reel.

Specification 1 has the following push order roles: Winning - A1 to A12, Winning - B1 to B12, Winning - C1 to C12, Winning - D1 to D12. When the push order is correct, the lemon or hat symbols will line up in a straight line.

Here, in conventional so-called accelerator AT machines, when a push-order bell has six options (left-center-right, left-right-center, center-left-right, center-right-left, right-left-center, right-center-left), it is necessary to stop a different winning symbol with each push order. Therefore, in the most common gaming machine with three reels and three reel stop areas (top, middle, and bottom), there are only five straight lines: the top line, middle line, bottom line, right-upward line, and right-downward line. Therefore, it is necessary to include a curved line (for example, a so-called small V line on the top, middle, and top row, or a so-called small hill line on the bottom, middle, and bottom row) in the line on which the winning symbol stops when the push order bell is correct. However, the curved line makes it difficult to determine the winning symbol combination, making it difficult for players to tell whether they pressed the button correctly, and they are unable to feel a sense of excitement even if they press the button correctly.

An accelerator AT machine is one in which, as shown in Figures 95 to 98, the number of winning-P (winning 01-10, 53-63) placed when three coins are placed during Type 1 BB (when Type 1 BB-A is operating and RB-A is operating, or when Type 1 BB-B is operating and RB-B is operating) (6200) is greater than the number of winning-A1-A12 and winning-B1-B12 placed (923) when three coins are placed during a game state other than Type 1 BB (non-RT, RT1, or RT2), and is less than the total number of winning-A1-A12 and the total number of winning-B1-B12 placed (11076). In other words, a machine in which the number of predetermined winning roles that can be set to obtain a predetermined number (for example, 13 coins) during a Type 1 BB is greater than the number of each of the predetermined push order roles (for example, winning - A1 to A12) that can be set to obtain a predetermined number (the same number as the predetermined number during a Type 1 BB) if correct, but less than the total number of the predetermined push order roles is called an accelerator AT machine.

In contrast, Specification 1 has two types of symbol combinations that line up in a straight line when the button presses are correct: lemon symbol combinations and hat symbol combinations. This means that even on accelerator AT machines, all symbol combinations that line up in a straight line when the button presses are correct can be aligned without using curved lines.

For example, as noted in the notes for Winning - A1 to A12 in Figure 101, when you win Winning - A1 and A2, pressing left, middle, and right in that order will produce a downward-right lemon; when you win Winning - A3 and A4, pressing left, middle, and right in that order will produce an upper-row lemon; when you win Winning - A5 and A6, pressing middle, left, and right in that order will produce a middle-row lemon; when you win Winning - A7 and A8, pressing middle, right, and left in that order will produce an upper-row hat; when you win Winning - A9 and A10, pressing right, left, and middle in that order will produce a lower-row hat; and when you win Winning - A11 and A12, pressing right, middle, and left in that order will produce a downward-right hat. When the pressing order is correct, all the lemons or hats will line up in a straight line.

This configuration makes it possible to improve ball output performance with the accelerator AT while also increasing the player's interest in the numbers that come out.

Also, as noted in the notes for Winning - B1 to B12 in Figure 102, when you win Winning - B1 and B2, pressing left, center, and right will produce a top-row lemon; when you win Winning - B3 and B4, pressing left, center, and right will produce a bottom-right lemon; when you win Winning - B5 and B6, pressing center, left, and right will produce a middle-row lemon; when you win Winning - B7 and B8, pressing center, right, and left will produce a top-row hat; when you win Winning - B9 and B10, pressing right, left, and right will produce a bottom-row hat; and when you win Winning - B11 and B12, pressing right, center, and left will produce a bottom-right hat. When the pressing order is correct, the lemons or hats will all line up in a straight line. Furthermore, compared to Winning - A1 to A12, when you win Winning - A1 and A2, pressing left, center, and right will produce a bottom-right lemon, but when you win Winning - B1 and B2, pressing left, center, and right will produce a top-row lemon. Similarly, when you win A3 or A4, the lemon on the top row will stop if you press left, center, and right in that order, but when you win B3 or B4, the lemon on the bottom right will stop if you press left, center, and right in that order.

With this configuration, when a player presses the left stop switch for the first time, the middle stop switch for the second time, and the right stop switch for the third time (so-called sequential pressing), the downward-right lemon and the upper lemon may stop, resulting in different results even when playing with the same pressing order, making the game more interesting. Furthermore, when a player presses the left stop switch for the first time, the right stop switch for the second time, and the middle stop switch for the third time (so-called sequential sandwiching), the downward-right lemon and the upper lemon may stop, resulting in the same results appearing when playing with multiple pressing orders, making it possible to diversify the results and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Also, as noted in the notes for Winning - C1 to C12 in Figure 103, when you win Winning - C1 and C2, pressing left, center, and right in that order will produce a top-right hat; when you win Winning - C3 and C4, pressing left, center, and right in that order will produce a bottom hat; when you win Winning - C5 and C6, pressing center, left, and right in that order will produce a top-right hat; when you win Winning - C7 and C8, pressing center, right, and left in that order will produce a top-right lemon; when you win Winning - C9 and C10, pressing right, left, and center in that order will produce a middle lemon; and when you win Winning - C11 and C12, pressing right, center, and left in that order will produce a bottom-right hat. When the pressing order is correct, all the lemons or hats will line up in a straight line.

Also, as noted in the notes for Winning - D1 to D12 in Figure 104, when you win Winning - D1 and D2, pressing left, middle, and right in that order will produce the bottom hat, when you win Winning - D3 and D4, pressing left, middle, and right in that order will produce the top right hat, when you win Winning - D5 and D6, pressing middle, left, and right in that order will produce the top hat, when you win Winning - D7 and D8, pressing middle, right, and left in that order will produce the top right lemon, when you win Winning - D9 and D10, pressing right, left, and middle in that order will produce the middle lemon, and when you win Winning - D11 and D12, pressing right, middle, and left in that order will produce the bottom right hat. When the pressing order is correct, all the lemons or hats will line up in a straight line.

This configuration further diversifies the numbers that come out when pressing buttons in order. Also, the probability of winning WIN-C1, C2 and WIN-D1, D2 is set lower than the probability of winning WIN-A1, A2 and WIN-B1, B2. By setting the probability of winning WIN-C1, C2 and WIN-D1, D2 higher than winning WIN-A1, A2 and WIN-B1, B2, it is possible to diversify the numbers that come out when pressing buttons in order and create a sense of anticipation for winning the AT.

<Regarding another gaming machine specification (referred to as "specification 2") applicable to this embodiment>
Specification 2 applicable to the gaming machine described in this embodiment will be described.

In Specification 2, the required number of coins required to start a game is two or three when the device is not activated (inside or outside BB), and only three when RB is activated.

In Specification 2, the active line consists of one line in the middle of the left reel, the top of the middle reel, and the bottom of the right reel.

Specification 2 has 10 different symbols. They are called Black Bar, Blue Seven, Blank A, Blank B, Upper Ra, Lower Ra, Replay, Bell, Cherry, and Watermelon.

The reel arrangement for Specification 2 will be explained using Figure 106. As shown in Figure 106, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations for specification 2 are shown in Figures 107 to 112. The "Winning Symbol/Activation Symbol/Pattern Symbol Name" items in the figures show the names of the condition devices corresponding to the symbol combinations. Additionally, the "Specified Number and Game Status" items show the bonuses awarded when symbol combinations stop for each specified number. If "Specified Number and Game Status" items say "1st Type BB," this indicates that a 1st Type BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if it says "Replay," this indicates that a replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if a number is written, this indicates the number of coins that will be paid out when the symbol combination stops; and if it says "-," this indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game status.

In Specification 2, the bonus has three types of Type 1 BBs: Type 1 BB01 has the end condition of paying out more than 41 game medals, Type 1 BB02 has the end condition of paying out more than 41 game medals, and Type 1 BB03 has the end condition of paying out more than one game medal. Furthermore, Type 1 BB01 is a type in which RB-A is activated continuously, Type 1 BB02 is a type in which RB-A is activated continuously, and Type 1 BB03 is a type in which RB-B is activated continuously. Both RB-A and RB-B end when either two wins or two games are achieved, and once the end condition for RB-A or RB-B is met, RB-A or RB-B will automatically be activated until the end condition for Type 1 BB01, Type 1 BB02, or Type 1 BB03 is met. During RB-B, an internal lottery may result in a losing result.

As shown in Figure 107, there is only one type of symbol combination for Type 1 BB01, Type 1 BB02, and Type 1 BB03, and the symbol draw rate (probability of the symbol related to the symbol combination stopping) for Type 1 BB01, Type 1 BB02, and Type 1 BB03 symbol combinations on each reel is not 100%, so to display Type 1 BB01, Type 1 BB02, and Type 1 BB03 symbol combinations, you will need to use your eyes to press each reel.

In Specification 2, RT transition starts from non-RT (within Type 1 BB01, Type 1 BB02, and Type 1 BB03). If Type 1 BB-A is won during non-RT and the Type 1 BB01 symbol combination does not stop, or if Type 1 BB-B is won and the Type 1 BB02 symbol combination does not stop, RT1 (within Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-B) will start from the next game (which may be the end of that game). When a type 1 BB01 symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and type 1 BB-A is activated from the next game (also referred to as type 1 BB-A during), when a type 1 BB02 symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and type 1 BB-B is activated from the next game (also referred to as type 1 BB-B during), and when the activation of type 1 BB-A or type 1 BB-B ends, the next game transitions to non-RT. Also, if a type 1 BB-C is won during non-RT and the type 1 BB03 symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of the game) will transition to RT2 (also referred to as being inside type 1 BB-C), and if a type 1 BB03 symbol combination stops during RT2, RT2 will end and type 1 BB-C will be activated from the next game (also referred to as being inside type 1 BB-C), and when the activation of type 1 BB-C ends, the next game will transition to non-RT. Also, when the setting is changed during type 1 BB-C, the type 1 BB-C state will be inherited, and when the setting is changed in a state other than type 1 BB-C (type 1 BB01, type 1 BB02, and type 1 BB03 non-internal, type 1 BB-A, type 1 BB-B, type 1 BB-C, type 1 BB-A, and type 1 BB-B), it will become non-RT. Furthermore, in the event of a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB operating state are not cleared, so when power is restored, the system will start from the state before the power outage.

The conditional device in Specification 2 is explained in Figure 113. The "Conditional Device Number" item in Figure 113 lists the number corresponding to the winning number. The "Conditional Device" item lists the conditional device that will be activated. The "Nickname" item lists the simple name of the conditional device that will be activated. The "Component" item shows the pattern combination that corresponds to the conditional device.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT mode when three coins are bet in Specification 2 are explained using Figure 114. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT mode when three coins are bet are Type 1 BB-A, Type 1 BB-B, Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning The results are either -A7, Winning -A8, Winning -A9, Winning -A10, Winning -A11, Winning -A12, Winning -B1, Winning -B2, Winning -B3, Winning -B4, Winning -B5, Winning -B6, Winning -B7, Winning -B8, Winning -B9, Winning -B10, Winning -B11, Winning -B12, Winning -C, Winning -D, Winning -E, Winning -F, Winning -G, Winning -H, Winning -I, Winning -J, and there are no losing options.

In addition, the "Internal Lottery" item in Figure 114 indicates whether or not an internal lottery is applicable for each game state, with "○" indicating that it is applicable for the internal lottery and "×" indicating that it is not applicable for the internal lottery. Furthermore, the "Advantageous Zone Transition" item indicates whether or not an advantageous zone transition lottery will be executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that an advantageous zone transition lottery will be executed and "×" indicating that it will not be executed. Note that Specification 2 is configured so that if an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, there is a 100% chance of winning and transitioning to the advantageous zone. Furthermore, the "R1" to "R6" items indicate the number of winning positions for the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, with 65,536 positions allocated for each game state. Note that "R1" corresponds to a setting value of "1," "R2" corresponds to a setting value of "2," "R3" corresponds to a setting value of "3," "R4" corresponds to a setting value of "4," "R5" corresponds to a setting value of "5," and "R6" corresponds to a setting value of "6."

In specification 2, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT1 when three tickets are bet are shown in Figure 115, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT2 when three tickets are bet are shown in Figure 116, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means when RB-A is in operation when Type 1 BB-A or Type 1 BB-B is in operation when three tickets are bet are shown in Figure 117, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means when RB-B is in operation when Type 1 BB-C is in operation when three tickets are bet are shown in Figure 118, and the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when two tickets are bet are shown in Figure 119. The explanation of each figure is the same as Figure 114, so will be omitted. Furthermore, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT1 when two coins are bet are the same as the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when two coins are bet, where the number of Type 1 BB-C placed is 0, the number of Replay-A placed is 15,000 (8,978 + 6,022), and the number of losing places is 7,970 (13,992 - 6,022). The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT2 when two coins are bet are omitted because they are the same as the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when two coins are bet, where the number of Type 1 BB-C placed is 0, and the number of Replay-A placed is 22,970 (8,978 + 13,992).

In Specification 2, three-coin play in RT2 is the normal play method. In other words, when the gaming machine is shipped from the factory (initial state), two-coin play is performed in non-RT, and if a Type 1 BB-C is won and the Type 1 BB03 symbol combination does not stop, the machine transitions to RT2, where three-coin play is performed. Note that play methods other than three-coin play in RT2 are also possible, but because two-coin play does not involve an AT lottery and the probability of winning the AT is lower when playing three-coin play in RTs other than RT2, three-coin play in RT2 is the play method with the highest payout rate.

The stop control in Specification 2 will be explained using Figures 120 and 121. The "X" in Figures 120 and 121 indicates a condition device that does not draw a lottery in that game state. Also, "123:1/1 with WINNING 01" in the "WINNING-A1 CONDITIONAL DEVICE" in Figures 120 and 121 indicates that when the buttons are pressed in the left, middle, and right order when a WINNING-A1 win occurs, WINNING 01 will be displayed. Also, "132:1/2 with WINNING 17, WINNING 18" in the "WINNING-A1 CONDITIONAL DEVICE" indicates that when the buttons are pressed in the left, middle, and right order, there is a 50% chance that WINNING 17 or WINNING 18 will stop, and a 50% chance that it will be missed. The same applies to other conditional devices, so explanations will be omitted. Additionally, the "2--: 1/4 chance of winning 21" in the "Winning - A1 Conditional Device" indicates that whether you press center left/right or center right/left, there is a 25% chance that the winning 21 will stop, and a 75% chance that you will miss it. The "Notes" also lists the apparent symbol combination. For example, the "Notes" for "No Conditional Device" reads "3--: Blue 7 Fake," indicating that whether you press right/left center or right/center/left, the Blue 7 symbol combination will not appear to stop.

Note that "double line" in Figures 120 and 121 refers to a symbol combination that appears to stop on multiple straight lines, "single line" refers to a symbol combination that appears to stop on a single straight line, "left Dragon" refers to an upper and lower Dragon stopping on the left reel, and "left center Dragon" refers to an upper and lower Dragon stopping on the left and center reels. Other details can be explained above and will be omitted here.

In Specification 2, as shown in Figures 120 and 121, all of the Replay-A to M condition devices allow the Blue Seven symbol combination to stop on a single line or double line. However, if the left stop switch is operated as the first stop, the Blue Seven symbol combination cannot stop on a single line or double line. In Specification 2, if the left reel is not stopped first in a game other than the game for which the push order is specified, a penalty will be incurred, lowering the AT lottery for that game or preventing the AT lottery from being held. As a result, if one of the Replay-A to M condition devices is determined in a game for which the push order is not specified, the Blue Seven symbol combination will not stop by having the player stop the left reel first (by stopping the left stop switch as the first stop).

Specification 2 determines whether the Blue Seven symbol combination will stop on a single line or a double line when a sub-bonus is won. Having the Blue Seven symbol combination stop on a double line rather than a single line favors the AT lottery during the sub-bonus (higher AT win probability, or a larger bonus when a bonus is won), so it is more advantageous for the player to have the Blue Seven symbol combination stop on a double line. Then, depending on the stop line of the Blue Seven symbol combination determined when the sub-bonus is won, the push order navigation is executed when the Replay-A to M condition device is won.

For example, if a decision is made to stop the Blue Seven symbol combination on a single line when a sub-bonus is won in a certain game, and if Replay-A is won in a subsequent game, the LCD will display "Aim for the Blue Seven symbol with the first right stop switch." The player will be prompted to stop the Blue Seven symbol combination on a single line by first pressing the right stop switch. At this time, the instructions may or may not be displayed on the instruction monitor. If the player stops the right stop switch first and is able to stop the Blue Seven symbol combination, the sub-bonus will begin. Also, if the player ignores the push order and stops the middle stop switch first, the Blue Seven symbol combination may stop on a double line, but the sub-bonus will begin even if the Blue Seven symbol combination stops on a double line. However, during the sub-bonus, the same content (AT winning probability, etc.) will be implemented as when the Blue Seven symbol combination stops on a single line.

This configuration eliminates the tricky element of players intentionally ignoring the button press order and stopping the blue seven symbol combination on a double line, ensuring fair gameplay and allowing the sub-bonus to start quickly.

For example, if a sub-bonus is won in a certain game and it is decided that the Blue Seven symbol combination will stop on a single line, and if Replay-A is won in a subsequent game, the LCD will display "Aim for the Blue Seven symbol with the first stop on the right," and the player will be prompted to stop the right stop switch first, causing the Blue Seven symbol combination to stop on a single line. However, if the Blue Seven symbol combination does not stop on either a single line or a double line due to a player misjudging the button presses or pressing the button in the wrong order, the sub-bonus will not start. If the sub-bonus is not started, when Replay-A to -M is won in the next or subsequent game, a button press order navigation system will be displayed that will allow the Blue Seven symbol combination to stop on a single line again, causing the Blue Seven symbol combination to stop on a single line.

In Specification 2, the Blue Seven symbol combination can stop on a single line or a double line for all of Replay-A through M. Therefore, even if the player makes an operational error and is unable to start the sub-bonus, if any of Replay-A through M is won in the next or subsequent play, the sub-bonus can be started again, allowing the sub-bonus to start quickly. If there were cases where only single lines or only double lines stopped depending on the replay role, the push order navigation would not be possible if a replay role other than the line to be stopped was won, and the player would have to play until the replay role corresponding to the line to be stopped was won. This would make the disadvantage of failing to start the sub-bonus more apparent, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game.

The configuration of Specification 2 allows for appropriate technical intervention when the sub-bonus starts, increasing the enjoyment of the game, and even if the sub-bonus cannot be started, it provides an opportunity to start the sub-bonus quickly, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

<Regarding the gameplay of the AT in this embodiment>
The following describes the game characteristics of the AT applicable to this embodiment, specifications 1, and specifications 2. The following description is based on specification 2.

First, when the specified conditions for winning the AT are met (winning the specified condition device and winning the AT lottery, reaching the specified number of games and winning the AT lottery, etc.), the AT start screen is displayed on the LCD.

Next, a lottery will be held to determine the initial difference in the number of coins for this AT from the next game after the AT start screen is displayed until the specified termination conditions are met. Hereinafter, the period during which the lottery to determine the initial difference in the number of coins for this AT is held will be referred to as the introduction period.

<<Lottery to determine the initial difference in the number of sheets for this AT>>
The initial difference in the AT indicates the period during which the AT can be executed, and can be updated with each game. For example, if the initial difference is 500, and the result of the internal lottery for a 3-coin game is a winning -A1, and seven coins are paid out by stopping the machine on the left, center, or right, the remaining difference will be 500 - (7 - 3) = 496 coins. In this way, the increment is subtracted, and when the difference becomes 0 or less, the AT will end.

The lottery that determines the initial difference in the number of coins for this AT is a lottery to determine how many coins the initial difference will be, and the larger the initial difference, the more medals you can aim to win. Furthermore, even after the initial difference in number of coins is determined, the difference can increase if you win the additional lottery, so even if the initial difference in number of coins is small, there is still a chance to win a large number of medals.

The lottery method for determining the initial difference in number of coins for this AT will be explained based on Figure 122.

The LCD screen in Figure 122 will now be explained. The initial difference in number of coins (left), initial difference in number of coins (middle), and initial difference in number of coins (right) at the bottom of Figure 122 indicate the accumulated initial difference in number of coins. The initial difference in number of coins (left), initial difference in number of coins (middle), and initial difference in number of coins (right) correspond to the left reel (left stop switch), middle reel (middle stop switch), and right reel (right stop switch), respectively, and each value corresponding to the initial difference in number of coins is stored in each RWM memory area indicated by a different RWM address.

The reserved ball (corresponding) and three reserved balls on the right side of Figure 122 indicate the additional difference in sheets to be added to the initial difference in sheets, and which of the initial difference in sheets (left), initial difference in sheets (middle), and initial difference in sheets (right) will be added to. For example, the reserved ball (corresponding) has the number "+100" written with a right arrow, which indicates that +100 will be added to the initial difference in sheets (right). Also, of the three reserved balls, the one with the number "+500" written with a left arrow indicates that +500 will be added to the initial difference in sheets (left). Also, of the three reserved balls, the one with the number "+50" written with an up arrow indicates that +50 will be added to the initial difference in sheets (middle). Note that the proportion of whether or not to add to which of the initial difference in sheets (left), initial difference in sheets (middle), and initial difference in sheets (right) will be equally distributed.

The introductory period continues until a specified end condition is met. One of the specified end conditions is winning the end lottery that is held every time a game is played. However, if the end lottery is won at the start of the introductory period and the introductory period ends, interest in the game will decrease significantly. Therefore, a period during which the end lottery is not held is set, and the end lottery is not held for five games from the start of the introductory period. Note that the period during which the end lottery is not held is not limited to five games, and can be set to any number of games. It is also not necessary to set a period during which the end lottery is not held.

The reserved ball (in question) and three reserved balls on the right side of Figure 122 are updated with each game. For example, the state in Figure 122 is when all reels are spinning (after the start switch has been operated or an internal lottery has been executed), and the reserved ball (in question) indicates whether the initial difference in number of coins (right) will be increased by 100, and the three reserved balls will be used in the next game onwards. In other words, the reserved balls in the reserved ball (in question) are reserved balls that are entitled to add to the initial difference in number of coins for that game.

Whether or not this reserved ball (in question) is added to the initial difference in number of sheets depends on the result of the internal lottery and the order in which the stop switches are stopped. The reserved ball (in question) may be added to the initial difference in number of sheets when the result of the internal lottery is Replay -H, Replay -I, Replay -J, Replay -K, Replay -L, Replay -M, Winning -A1 to A12, Winning -B1 to B12, Winning -C, Winning -D, Winning -E, Winning -F, Winning -G, or Winning -H; under any other internal lottery results, the reserved ball (in question) will not be added to the initial difference in number of sheets. Furthermore, when the internal lottery results in Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H, the reserved balls (in question) are always added to the initial difference in number of sheets. However, in the case of Winning-A1 to Winning-A12 and Winning-B1 to Winning-B12, the reserved balls (in question) are not added to the initial difference in number of sheets unless the correct button presses are used. For example, when the Winning-A1 is won, if the stop switches are operated in the order left, center, and right, the reserved balls (in question) are added to the initial difference in number of sheets, but if the stop switches are operated in an order other than left, center, and right, the reserved balls (in question) are not added to the initial difference in number of sheets. In other words, when a rare combination, a common bell, or a button press order bell is won, there is a chance that the initial difference in number of sheets will be added. During the introductory period, the button press order will not be announced, so players will have to guess the order based on their intuition. Also, during the introductory period, there will be no penalty for button press order, so players can freely choose the order they want to press.

With this configuration, the game can be designed so that the fluctuations in the number of balls dispensed are turbulent due to the fact that there are cases where no additional balls are dispensed, and the fluctuations in the number of balls dispensed change depending on the player's intuition, increasing the excitement of the game.

It should be noted that when a rare combination is won, it is not necessary to add the additional value in the reserved ball (in question); it may be configured to be added when the addition lottery is won. Also, when a rare combination is won, the reserved ball (in question) displayed on the LCD and all three reserved balls, or any combination of these, may be acquired. Furthermore, when a rare combination is won, the additional value in the reserved ball (in question) plus an additional value may be added to the initial difference in the number of coins; in this case, the additional value may be determined by lottery, a predetermined value, or an integer multiple of the additional value.

After all reels have stopped and the process of adding the initial difference in the number of reserved balls (relevant) has been completed, the next reserved ball (reserved ball "+500" in Figure 122) moves to the location of the reserved ball (relevant) as shown in Figure 123a), and the next reserved ball becomes the reserved ball (relevant) and can be won depending on the results of the internal lottery for the next game. Furthermore, of the three reserved balls, the two reserved balls excluding the reserved ball that became the reserved ball (relevant) (reserved balls "+50" and "+200") move to the upper locations, and a new reserved ball (reserved ball "+10") is added to the vacant location. Furthermore, if the result of the internal lottery is a win for a conditional device other than Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Win-A1-A12, Win-B1-B12, Win-C, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, or Win-H, or if the result is a loss, the reserved ball (relevant) will disappear without adding the added value indicated by the reserved ball (relevant) to the initial difference in number of coins (including adding 0), and the next reserved ball will move to the reserved ball (relevant)'s location. In other words, even if the added value of the reserved ball in the reserved ball (relevant) is not obtained, it will be replaced by the next reserved ball at the end of that game. This increases the player's interest by creating anticipation about whether or not they will be able to obtain reserved balls each time they play.

When a rare combination is won, if you win the reserved ball (in question) displayed on the LCD screen and all three reserved balls, or multiple of any of them, you will need to replenish the used reserved balls with new reserved balls.

With this configuration, it is possible to play a game where players decide whether or not to acquire reserved balls until the conditions for ending the introduction period are met.

As shown in Figure 123b), if the end lottery, which is the condition for ending the introductory period, is won, an icon with the word "Judgment" (hereinafter referred to as the "Judgment Ball") will be displayed instead of the reserved balls. Even when the Judgement Ball is displayed, the game does not end immediately; it ends when it moves to the position of the reserved ball (in question). In the case of Figure 123b), the Judgement Ball moves to the position of the reserved ball (in question) on the fourth play, so the chance to add to the initial difference in number of coins continues for the three plays in between. Then, when the fourth play is completed, the introductory period ends, and the acquisition period (hereinafter referred to as the "Judgment Period") for determining the initial difference in number of coins for this AT begins. Note that the lottery and display of reserved balls after the Judgement Ball is displayed may or may not be carried out.

Note that the introduction period does not necessarily have to end with a game in which a referee ball is consumed; the introduction period may continue but a referee ball may be displayed (hereinafter, referee balls whose introduction period continues will be referred to as "fake referee balls"). This configuration increases the interest of the game, as it is unclear whether the introduction period will end even if a referee ball appears. Furthermore, referee balls and fake referee balls are displayed to look identical, so it is not apparent from the outside whether the introduction period has ended. Furthermore, since it is not possible to distinguish between referee balls and fake referee balls by appearance, a lottery is also conducted for reserved balls to determine the initial difference in number of balls and their display for games after the referee ball and fake referee ball are displayed. Furthermore, if the initial difference in number of balls is not added when continuing with a fake referee ball, the interest of the game may decrease. Therefore, when continuing with a fake referee ball, a lottery for the reserved ball's additional number of balls may be conducted at the same time, and the determined additional number may be added to one of the determined initial difference in number of balls.

Also, if play progresses without winning the lottery to end the introductory period, the introductory period may end when a specified number of games have been played during the introductory period. For example, if 50 games have been played during the introductory period, the introductory period ends and the judgment period begins even if the lottery to end the period has not been won. If the introductory period ends after the specified number of games, an icon different from the judgment ball (hereinafter referred to as a "blessing ball") is displayed. If a blessing ball is displayed in the reserved ball area, the player can visually recognize that the introductory period has ended (as the introduction period always ends when the blessing ball is displayed), so the reserved ball lottery and display are not performed in games after the blessing ball is displayed. Then, in games in which the blessing ball moves to the reserved ball's (relevant) position, a special blessing image is displayed to notify the player that the introductory period has ended.

During the introductory period, we explained an example in which the button press order is not announced when either the Winning-A1 to A12 or Winning-B1 to B12 condition device is determined, but it is also possible to announce only part of the correct button press order. For example, if only the first stop is announced, the correct button press order rate can be 50%. Also, whether the correct button press order is not announced or announced may be determined by lottery. For example, if the correct button press order is not announced, the correct button press order bell rate is approximately 17%, but if the correct button press order is announced, the correct button press order bell rate is 100%. Also, whether the correct button press order is not announced or announced or announced partially may be determined by lottery.

In the introductory period of the above-described embodiment, the proportion of whether or not to add to the initial difference number was evenly allocated among the initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right), but this is not limited to this, and there may also be a separate introductory period in which the proportion is unevenly allocated. Hereinafter, an introductory period in which the proportion of whether or not to add to the initial difference number is evenly allocated will be referred to as the "first introductory period," and an introductory period in which the proportion of whether or not to add to the initial difference number is unevenly allocated will be referred to as the "second introductory period," but when simply referred to as "introductory period," it means that either introductory period applies.

For example, the second introduction period may be set to initial difference in number of sheets (left): initial difference in number of sheets (center): initial difference in number of sheets (right) = 8:2:0. In this case, 80% is added to the initial difference in number of sheets (left) during the second introduction period, so the design is such that the added value of the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is large. Also, since the initial difference in number of sheets (right) is not allocated, the initial difference in number of sheets (right) will remain at its initial value (0) as the second introduction period ends and the transition to the judgment period begins.

Whether the introductory period will be the first or second introductory period may be determined by lottery when the transition to the introductory period is decided, or the player may decide whether the introductory period will be the first or second introductory period at the start of the introductory period by operation of the player. If the player decides whether the introductory period will be the first or second introductory period at the start of the introductory period by operation of the stop switch during the start of the introductory period, the player may make the selection by operating a switch connected to the main control means, such as a max bet switch, start switch, or stop switch, while the game is waiting just before the start of the introductory period, during the freeze at the start of the introductory period, or after all reels have stopped at the start of the introductory period.

By having a second introduction period, the amount of balls dispensed will be more volatile, making the game more exciting.

<<About the trial period>>
The judgment period is a period during which it is determined whether or not the initial difference in number of sheets (left), (center), or (right) added during the introductory period will be the initial difference in number of sheets for this AT.

For example, if the result of executing the introductory period is that the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is displayed as "+1000 sheets," the initial difference in number of sheets (middle) as "+200 sheets," and the initial difference in number of sheets (right) as "+500 sheets," then as a result of executing the judgment period, if the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is determined, the initial difference in number of sheets for this AT will start at 1000 sheets, if the initial difference in number of sheets (middle) is determined, the initial difference in number of sheets for this AT will start at 200 sheets, and if the initial difference in number of sheets (right) is determined, the initial difference in number of sheets for this AT will start at 500 sheets.

This configuration allows for the player to choose which initial difference in number of coins they can win from the initial difference in number of coins added during the introductory period, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

Whether or not an initial difference in number of coins can be obtained during the arbitration period will be determined when one of the following condition devices is determined as a result of an internal lottery during the arbitration period: Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H.If a condition device other than Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H is determined as a result of the internal lottery, or if a loss is determined, the arbitration period will continue. In other words, the judgment period continues from the start of the trial period until one of the following condition devices is determined: Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H. During the trial period, the initial difference in the number of coins for this AT is determined in the first play in which one of the following condition devices is determined: Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H, and the trial period ends.

The initial difference in sheets during the trial period is determined by the game in which either Winning -A1 to A12 or Winning -B1 to B12 is won during the trial period. The initial difference in sheets corresponding to the first correct reel (first correct stop switch) will be acquired. For example, if the initial difference in sheets (left) shows "+1000 sheets," the initial difference in sheets (center) shows "+200 sheets," and the initial difference in sheets (right) shows "+500 sheets," and Winning -A1 (left-center-right correct bell) is determined by internal lottery, the initial difference in sheets for this AT will be 1000 sheets, corresponding to the initial difference in sheets (left). Also, for example, if the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+1000," the initial difference number (middle) as "+200," and the initial difference number (right) as "+500," and if the winning result of -A5 (center left/right correct bell) is determined by internal lottery, the initial difference number of 200, corresponding to the initial difference number (middle), will be the initial difference number of this AT. Also, for example, if the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+1000," the initial difference number (middle) as "+200," and the initial difference number (right) as "+500," and if the winning result of -A9 (right left center correct bell) is determined by internal lottery, the initial difference number of 500, corresponding to the initial difference number (right), will be the initial difference number of this AT.

As a method for determining the initial difference in number of sheets during the adjudication period, in games in which any of Replay -H, Replay -I, Winning -D, Winning -E, Winning -F, Winning -G, or Winning -H is won during the adjudication period (games in which a weak rare role is won), one of the initial difference in number of sheets can be obtained by lottery (processing related to the instruction function). For example, if the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is displayed as "+1000 sheets," the initial difference in number of sheets (center) as "+200 sheets," and the initial difference in number of sheets (right) as "+500 sheets," and Replay -H is determined by internal lottery and the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is determined by lottery, then the initial difference in number of sheets for this AT will be 1000 sheets, which corresponds to the initial difference in number of sheets (left). Also, for example, if the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is displayed as "+1000 sheets," the initial difference in number of sheets (middle) as "+200 sheets," and the initial difference in number of sheets (right) as "+500 sheets," and if a replay -H is determined by an internal lottery and the initial difference in number of sheets (middle) is determined by lottery, the initial difference in number of sheets for this AT will be 200 sheets, which corresponds to the initial difference in number of sheets (middle). Also, for example, if the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is displayed as "+1000 sheets," the initial difference in number of sheets (middle) as "+200 sheets," and the initial difference in number of sheets (right) as "+500 sheets," and if a replay -H is determined by an internal lottery and the initial difference in number of sheets (right) is determined by lottery, the initial difference in number of sheets for this AT will be 500 sheets, which corresponds to the initial difference in number of sheets (right).

As a method for determining the initial difference in sheets during the adjudication period, in games in which any of Replay -J, Replay -K, Replay -L, Replay -M, or Winning -C are won during the adjudication period (games in which a strong rare role is won), all of the initial difference sheets can be won. For example, if the initial difference sheet (left) displays "+1000 sheets," the initial difference sheet (middle) displays "+200 sheets," and the initial difference sheet (right) displays "+500 sheets," and Winning -C is determined by internal lottery, the initial difference sheet for this AT will be the sum of 1000 sheets corresponding to the initial difference sheet (left), 200 sheets corresponding to the initial difference sheet (middle), and 500 sheets corresponding to the initial difference sheet (right), totaling 1700 sheets. Note that even if a strong rare role is won, it may be determined by lottery whether any or all of the initial difference sheets can be won. Additionally, a strong rare role is one that has a lower probability of winning in the internal lottery than a weak rare role.

With this configuration, the results of the internal lottery during the judgment period affect the initial difference in the number of coins in this AT, creating a sense of anticipation for the results of the internal lottery for each game, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If the result of the internal lottery during the adjudication period is that one of the following condition devices is determined: Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H, a freeze will be executed for a specified period before all reels are spun, and the reels corresponding to the initial difference in number of coins obtained during the freeze will be spun.

For example, if the internal lottery determines that the winning combination is A1 (the correct left, center, and right bells), the system freezes the display before displaying the correct button sequence on the LCD screen, and spins the left reel during the freeze to notify the player that the initial difference in coins (left) has been achieved. After the freeze ends, the system displays the correct button sequence corresponding to the correct left, center, and right bells on the LCD screen, allowing the player to achieve the correct combination.
The correct button press sequence can be displayed on the LCD screen before the freeze ends, but in this case, by displaying the sequence after notifying the player that the initial difference in number of coins (left) has been obtained, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the correct button press sequence.

This configuration allows players to visually see how they will obtain the initial difference in number of coins, ensuring fairness in the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The freeze period may also be changed depending on the amount of initial difference in coins that can be obtained. For example, if the initial difference in coins (left) is displayed as "+1000 coins," the initial difference in coins (middle) as "+200 coins," and the initial difference in coins (right) as "+500 coins," and the internal lottery determines that the winning combination is A1 (left, middle, right correct bell), the freeze period will be 5 seconds; if the winning combination is A5 (middle, left, right correct bell), the freeze period will be 2 seconds; and if the winning combination is A9 (right, left, middle correct bell), the freeze period will be 3 seconds.

With this configuration, the longer the freeze, the greater the initial difference in coins, which helps build anticipation for the trial period.

Note that if the result of the internal lottery during the trial period is a condition device other than Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Win-A1-A12, Win-B1-B12, Win-C, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, or Win-H, or if a loss is determined, no lottery or freeze will be executed, but a freeze may be determined and executed by a freeze lottery. In this case, the freeze period will be relatively short (for example, 2 seconds), and after the freeze, a notification will be given that the trial period will continue, or no effect will be given.

In the above-described embodiment, the initial difference in number of coins was determined during the introductory period and the judgment period, but this is not limited to this; the initial number of plays and the initial number of navigations (number of times the correct button sequence is announced) may also be determined. Also, while the description was given with three reels (left, center, and right), there may be four reels, in which case there will be a display area for the initial difference in number of coins corresponding to the four reels.

<<How to manage reserved balls>>
In FIG. 122, four reserved balls (including the reserved ball (in question)) are displayed. The reserved balls are stored in the corresponding RWM memory areas of the main control means. In the situation shown in FIG. 122, there is a first memory area corresponding to the reserved ball (in question), a second memory area corresponding to reserved ball 1, a third memory area corresponding to reserved ball 2, a fourth memory area corresponding to reserved ball 3, and a fifth memory area corresponding to reserved balls not displayed on the LCD (hereinafter referred to as "reserved balls (spare)"). The following explanation will be based on the assumption that "30" is stored in the fifth memory area in the situation shown in FIG. 122. Note that the additional value, or the additional value and the location of the additional value, is determined by lottery at the start of the introductory period, and the determined values are stored in the first to fifth memory areas, respectively.

As a method of managing reserved balls, the correspondence between the location of reserved balls and memory areas is changed. In other words, "500" is stored in the second memory area as +500 corresponding to reserved ball 1 in Figure 122. Even when the game ends and reserved ball 2 is moved to reserved ball 1 as displayed on the LCD screen, "500" remains stored in the second memory area as the value corresponding to +500. Similarly, "50" is stored in the third memory area as +50 corresponding to reserved ball 2 in Figure 122. Even when the game ends and reserved ball 3 is moved to reserved ball 2 as displayed on the LCD screen, "50" remains stored in the third memory area as the value corresponding to +50. Similarly, "200" is stored in the fourth memory area as +200 corresponding to reserved ball 3 in Figure 122. Even when the game ends and a new reserved ball is displayed in the position of reserved ball 3 as displayed on the LCD screen, "200" remains stored in the fourth memory area as the value corresponding to +200. Similarly, "30" is stored in the fifth memory area as +30 corresponding to the reserved ball (reserve) in Figure 122, but even when the game ends and all reserved balls are moved as displayed on the LCD, "30" remains stored in the fifth memory area as the value corresponding to +30. Also, "100" is stored in the first memory area as +100 corresponding to the reserved ball (relevant) in Figure 122, but when the game ends, the added value of the reserved ball (relevant) is either converted to the initial difference in number of coins or discarded, so when reserved ball 1 is moved to the reserved ball (relevant) as displayed on the LCD, a new added value is determined by lottery in the first memory area and stored.

In this case, the main control means processes the counter values corresponding to each memory area, and stores the counter values in a memory area. The counter values, the values of the first through fifth memory areas, and information on the initial difference number to which the values corresponding to the first through fifth memory areas are added (addition location information) are sent to the sub-control means to ensure consistency on the LCD.

For example, the counter value corresponding to the first storage area is "1," the counter value corresponding to the second storage area is "2," the counter value corresponding to the third storage area is "3," the counter value corresponding to the fourth storage area is "4," and the counter value corresponding to the fifth storage area is "5." In other words, a counter value of "1" indicates the first storage area, a counter value of "2" indicates the second storage area, a counter value of "3" indicates the third storage area, a counter value of "4" indicates the fourth storage area, and a counter value of "5" indicates the fifth storage area.

The value in the memory area indicated by the counter value will correspond to the added value of the reserved ball (in question).

For example, in Figure 122, the counter stores a value of "1," which indicates the first memory area. Note that the first memory area at this time stores "100."

When the game shown in Figure 122 ends (all reels stop), the value stored in the first memory area is initialized (cleared to 0), a new additional value is drawn and stored in the first memory area, the counter value is updated to "2" indicating the second memory area, and information is sent to the sub-control means regarding the additional value stored in each memory area, the counter value, and information regarding which initial difference number the value corresponding to the first through fifth memory areas will be added to. In other words, at the start of the introductory period, an additional value determined by lottery is stored in each of the first through fifth memory areas, but thereafter, an additional value determined by lottery is stored sequentially in one of the first through fifth memory areas for each game.

Then, when the sub-control means receives information from the main control means regarding the added value and counter value stored in each memory area, it moves the display of "+500" related to the "500" defined in the second memory area indicated by the counter value on the LCD display to the position of the reserved ball (in question), and displays the other reserved balls moving to fill the empty space.

The above process is performed every time a game is played during the introductory period. The counter value increments with each game, and when the counter value reaches "5," the next value becomes "1." In other words, the counter value cycles between 1 and 5.

With this configuration, the display effect on the LCD screen can be instructed simply by changing the counter value, thereby reducing the program capacity of the main control means.

In the above explanation, the first to fifth memory areas store additional values, but this is not limited to this, and the information may include the additional value and information on which initial difference number it is added to. For example, the first to fifth memory areas each have storable values of "0" to "13", where "0" indicates "empty (additional value 0)", "1" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (left) + 10 sheets", "2" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (left) + 50 sheets", "3" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (left) + 100 sheets", "4" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (middle) + 10 sheets", "5" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (middle) + 50 sheets", "6" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (middle) + 100 sheets", "7" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (right) + 10 sheets", "8" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (right) + 50 sheets", "9" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (right) + 100 sheets", and "10" indicates "Judgment ball".

With this configuration, the information for the first through fifth memory areas can be stored in one byte, and since it also contains information on which initial difference number to add to, there is no need to set up a new memory area, which allows for further compression of the program capacity of the main control means.

In addition, the range of values that can be stored in each of the first through fifth memory areas is not limited to "0" through "13," and may be increased depending on the specifications. For example, "14" indicates "double the value of the initial difference in number of sheets (left)," "15" indicates "double the value of the initial difference in number of sheets (middle)," "16" indicates "double the value of the initial difference in number of sheets (right)," and "17" indicates "double the values of the initial difference in number of sheets (left), initial difference in number of sheets (middle), and initial difference in number of sheets (right)."

In addition, if an additional value is to be added to the predetermined additional value determined by lottery when a rare combination is won, a sixth memory area is provided to store the additional value. For example, if a rare combination is won in the game shown in FIG. 122 and it is determined that +50 will be added to the initial difference in number of coins (left), after storing "2" in the sixth memory area, the "9" stored in the first memory area and the "2" stored in the sixth memory area are sent to the sub-control means (values in other memory areas are also sent), and when the sub-control means receives the "9" stored in the first memory area and the "2" stored in the sixth memory area, the initial difference in number of coins (left) is displayed as "+50 coins" and the initial difference in number of coins (right) is displayed as "+100 coins."

In this way, adding to a predetermined additional value can be achieved with a simple program, thereby reducing the program capacity of the main control means.

As an alternative method for managing reserved balls, the correspondence between the position of reserved balls and memory areas may be fixed. In other words, "100" is stored in the first memory area as +100 corresponding to reserved ball (relevant) in Figure 122, but when the game ends and reserved ball 1 is moved to reserved ball (relevant) as displayed on the LCD, "500" is stored in the first memory area as a value corresponding to +500. In other words, the first memory area always stores a value corresponding to the position of reserved ball (relevant). Similarly, "500" is stored in the second memory area as +500 corresponding to reserved ball 1 in Figure 122, but when the game ends and reserved ball 2 is moved to reserved ball 1 as displayed on the LCD, "50" is stored in the second memory area as a value corresponding to +50. In other words, the second memory area always stores a value corresponding to the position of reserved ball 1. Similarly, "50" is stored in the third memory area as +50 corresponding to reserved ball 2 in FIG. 122, but when the game ends and reserved ball 3 is moved to reserved ball 2 as displayed on the LCD, "200" is stored in the third memory area as a value corresponding to +200. In other words, the third memory area always stores a value corresponding to the position of reserved ball 2. Similarly, "200" is stored in the fourth memory area as +200 corresponding to reserved ball 3 in FIG. 122, but when the game ends and a new reserved ball is displayed in the position of reserved ball 3 as displayed on the LCD, "30" is stored in the fourth memory area as a value corresponding to +30. In other words, the fourth memory area always stores a value corresponding to the position of reserved ball 3. Furthermore, when the game ends and all reserved balls are moved as displayed on the LCD, a new added value is determined by lottery, and the determined new added value is stored in the fifth memory area.

With this configuration, the relationship between the main control means's memory area and the apparent number of reserved balls remains unchanged, making it possible to implement the sub-control means's method of displaying reserved balls using a simple program.

When the introductory period ends and the trial period begins, the added values stored in memory areas 1 through 5 are initialized (cleared to 0), so that the added values will not be carried over even if the introductory period begins again after play has ended.

<<Other Contents>>
The initial difference in number of coins (left), initial difference in number of coins (middle), and initial difference in number of coins (right) have upper limit values on display, and if the upper limit values are exceeded, a special display is displayed. For example, if the upper limit values on display for the initial difference in number of coins (left), initial difference in number of coins (middle), and initial difference in number of coins (right) are "+2400 coins," and "2500" is stored in the memory area for the initial difference in number of coins (left), the LCD display for the initial difference in number of coins (left) will display "Congratulations." In this way, if the upper limit values are exceeded, the number of coins that can be won is not clearly displayed, and only information indicating that the number of coins has exceeded 2400 is displayed, thereby suppressing gambling and preventing addiction to the game.

Also, during the judging period, if a strong rare role is won and the total value of the initial difference in number of coins stored in the initial difference in number of coins (left), initial difference in number of coins (center), and initial difference in number of coins (right) exceeds 2400, "Congratulations" will be displayed instead of the number of coins won.

If an initial difference of 2,400 or more is achieved during the judgment period, a special effect (the so-called ending effect) will be executed when the AT begins.

The upper limit of 2400 mentioned above can be any value, and since it is possible to win more than 2400 coins in the same advantageous zone, especially when the upper limit of the difference is 2400, the upper limit may be varied depending on the situation, or may be fixed at 5000 coins. For example, if the difference from the start of the advantageous zone during the trial period is -1000 coins, the upper limit may be set to 3400 coins, and if the difference from the start of the advantageous zone during the trial period is +400 coins, the upper limit may be set to 2000 coins. The upper limit may be varied depending on the situation.

With this configuration, the number of coins that can be won changes flexibly depending on the progress of the game, increasing the excitement of the game.

<Control of other performance modes using the performance switch according to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the device is equipped with an effect in which the effect switch is continuously pressed (a so-called "long press effect"), and the long press effect can be used to announce the number of added bonuses or to announce that the right to an AT or a higher-level AT has been obtained.

The execution timing (start timing) of the long press effect is either after the start switch operation or after the third stop operation (after all reels have stopped); it is not executed after the first or second stop operation. The first stop operation is often an operation to prevent missing small winning combinations, while the second stop operation is often an operation to prevent missing small winning combinations or to determine whether the symbols are in tenpai or not. Therefore, if the long press effect is executed after the first or second stop operation, the long press effect will be executed if the player does not achieve the desired result (if the player misses a small winning combination or if the symbols are not in tenpai or not), which may result in the player not being able to enjoy the long press effect. Furthermore, if the long press effect is executed after the first or second stop operation, the player may be too focused on the long press effect, which may make them more likely to miss small winning combinations. To prevent this from happening, the long press effect is executed either after the start switch operation or after the third stop operation (after all reels have stopped). However, this is not limited to this, and the timing for executing the long press effect may be any of the following: after operating the start switch, after the first stop operation, after the second stop operation, or after the third stop operation (after all reels have stopped). If the timing for executing the long press effect is not specifically specified, this means that the long press effect may be started at any time.

In the following embodiment, an example will be described in which the AT is managed by the number of plays. For example, the AT ends when the number of plays reaches a predetermined number since the start of the AT. However, this example is not limiting, and the AT may also be managed by the difference in number of coins, the number of points, or the number of push order navigations. In these cases, the unit of the added number will be the unit that conforms to each management method.

The long press effect when announcing the additional number will be explained with reference to Figure 124. In Figure 124a), an image of "0000", which is the initial value of the additional number, and an image of the effect switch are displayed on the LCD. Figure 124b) shows what happens when the effect switch is pressed once from Figure 124a), with the additional number increased by +1 and "0001" displayed. Note that the additional number is increased by +1 when the press of the effect switch is detected, even if the effect switch is not pressed and held down, so the additional number will be increased by +1 even if the effect switch is pressed and released repeatedly. Furthermore, the additional number is predetermined when the long press effect begins, so the long press effect ends when the predetermined additional number is reached by continuing to press the effect switch. For example, if an additional 300 plays is determined by a lottery during play before the long press effect begins or during play at the start of the long press effect, the long press effect will end when the number of plays reaches +300 (the image will show "0300").

In addition, when the effect switch is continuously pressed during the long press effect and a predetermined number of bonuses is reached, the effect mode is configured to clearly notify the player of the final bonus result. For example, the effect mode changes depending on whether the effect switch is released while the bonus number is being added and the bonus number is stopped from being updated, or whether the predetermined number of bonuses is reached and the bonus number is stopped from being updated. Specifically, when the effect switch is released while the bonus number is being added and the bonus number is stopped from being updated, the bonus number is displayed as if it is oscillating up and down slightly. When the predetermined number of bonuses is reached and the bonus number is stopped from being updated, the bonus number is displayed as if it is stopped. Furthermore, when the effect switch is released while the bonus number is being added and the bonus number is stopped from being updated, the bonus number is displayed larger than when the effect switch is released while the bonus number is being added and the bonus number is stopped from being updated. Furthermore, when the predetermined number of bonuses is reached and the bonus number is stopped from being updated, a special sound effect is output.

When the number to be added is added, the display may show only the digits to be added, or the digits that are not to be added may also be displayed in a variable manner. For example, when changing from 0 to 1, only the number corresponding to the rightmost digit of 0000 may be displayed in a variable manner, or the 0s corresponding to the second, third, and fourth digits from the right may be displayed in a rotating manner. A configuration that displays only the digits to be added in a variable manner makes it easier for players to recognize that the digits that are displayed in a variable manner will be added by the addition. A configuration that displays the digits that are not to be added in a variable manner also shows all digits in a variable manner, making it unclear how much the number to be added will be, creating a sense of anticipation for the player.

In addition, the display mode when the additional number is being added may be such that the time it takes for the number to change from n (a positive integer) to n+1 is shorter than the time it takes for the number to change from 0 to 1. By configuring it in this way, players can focus their attention on whether 1 is added first and whether the digit goes up, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In Figure 124, the number is four digits, and the upper limit of the added number displayed is "9999," but if the actual added number exceeds 9999, the displayed added number may be switched to the text "Congratulations." Alternatively, the upper limit of the added number may be set to an arbitrary value such as "2400," and if the added number exceeds an arbitrary value such as 2400, the displayed added number may be switched to the text "Congratulations."

Note that while the example has been described in which pressing the effect switch once or holding down the effect switch increases the added number by +1, this is not limiting; pressing the effect switch once or holding down the effect switch may also display an added number of +2 or +3. Furthermore, when the effect switch is pressed, a command indicating that the effect switch has been pressed is sent from the sub-control means to the effect control means.

In addition, when the effect switch is pressed during the long press effect, the frame lamp on the front door lights up in a special lighting pattern, a special sound effect is played, and the LED built into the effect switch lights up in a special lighting pattern to add to the excitement of the effect.

As a method of determining whether the effect switch is pressed and held, a timer for the long press of the effect switch (hereinafter referred to as the "long press timer") is provided in a specified memory area of the sub-control means. For example, if the timer interrupt period of the sub-control means is 1 ms and the long press timer is managed by the interrupt processing of the sub-control means, the long press timer is set to "0" (initialized) when operation of the effect switch is accepted. At this time, the LCD display will display an additional number incremented by +1. In other words, regardless of whether the effect switch is a short press (an operation method in which the effect switch is released before 500 ms has elapsed since the operation of the effect switch was accepted) or a long press, the additional number displayed will be incremented by +1 when the effect switch is pressed. Then, as long as operation of the effect switch continues to be detected, the long press timer will be incremented by +1 with each interrupt processing. Then, when the long press timer reaches "500" (when 500 ms have elapsed since the effect switch was pressed), it is determined to be a long press, and a long press flag is stored in a certain memory area (for example, "1" is stored in a certain memory area). Even after it is determined to be a long press, the long press timer continues to be updated, and every time the long press timer is updated 100 times (every 100 ms has elapsed since it was determined to be a long press), the number added is increased by +1 and displayed on the LCD (every 100 ms has elapsed since it was determined to be a long press, and the sub-control means sends a command to the effect control means indicating that the long press timer has been incremented by 100). Furthermore, if the effect switch is released while the long press timer is counting, the long press timer and the long press flag are initialized. Alternatively, after the long press timer reaches "500" and the long press flag is set, the tap interval timer (stored in a specific memory area) can be set to 100, and the tap interval timer can be decremented by 1 with each interrupt process of the sub-control means. When the tap interval timer reaches "0", the added number can be increased by 1 and displayed on the LCD. The period from when the effect switch is pressed until it is determined to be a long press can also be the same as the tap interval.

When executing a long press effect, a feedback command (hereinafter referred to as "FB") is sent from the effect control means to the sub-control means. FB is a command sent from the effect control means to the sub-control means, and is used to determine the timing for executing the effect of the sub-control means. In a long press effect, FB is sent from the effect control means to the sub-control means when the timing is right to press the effect switch.

For example, if an image prompting the user to press the effect switch is displayed one second after the start of a long press effect, when the time comes to display the image prompting the user to press the effect switch after the start of the long press effect, the effect control means sends an FB to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means executes processing to enable the pressing of the effect switch. Note that "enabling the pressing of the effect switch" means that even if the effect switch is pressed before one second has elapsed since the start of the long press effect, the effect corresponding to the pressing of the effect switch is not executed, but if the effect switch is pressed one second after the start of the long press effect, the effect corresponding to the pressing of the effect switch is executed. Furthermore, the timing at which the effect control means sends an FB to the sub-control means is a predetermined timing, and is associated with the timing at which the image prompting the user to press the effect switch is displayed.

In other words, by using FB without using a timer to manage the elapsed time of the effect when the effect switch is pressed, the relationship between the effect and the control of the effect switch can be appropriately controlled.

With this configuration, the timing for activating the effect switch and the timing for executing the effect prompting the user to press the effect switch coincide, so the effect switch will not be activated before the effect prompting the user to press the effect switch is executed.

If the effect switch is pressed and held during a long press effect, causing the additional number to repeatedly display +1, and then the effect switch is released, the addition of the additional number will be paused at the number displayed at the time the switch was released. For example, if the additional number displayed is "0100," the display of the additional number will pause at "0100." If the effect switch is then pressed again, the display of the additional number will change to "0101," and the additional number will continue to be displayed in +1 increments until the long press effect ends.

If the effect switch is released during a long press effect, the sub-control means sends a command to the effect control means indicating that the effect switch has been released, and when the effect control means receives a command indicating that the effect switch has been released while a long press effect is being executed, it can execute processing to pause the executing long press effect. In other words, without the sub-control means periodically sending information indicating that the effect switch is being pressed to the effect control means during a long press effect, the sub-control means sends to the effect control means information indicating that the effect switch has been pressed when the effect switch is pressed, and information indicating that the effect switch has been released when the effect switch is released. This links the operation of the effect switch and the effect mode of the long press effect, and therefore reduces the number of commands sent by the sub-control means to the effect control means.

With this configuration, even if a player leaves their seat during a long press effect, they can continue enjoying the long press effect when they return to their seat. Furthermore, if the long press effect starts after all reels have stopped, not switching to a demo screen during the long press effect will allow players to continue enjoying the game even if they are away from their seat for a longer period of time.

During the long press effect, in addition to an image prompting the user to press the effect switch and an image showing the number of bonuses added, a series of moving images that tell a story are displayed. If the effect switch is released while the moving images are being displayed, the moving images will also pause, along with the display of the number of bonuses added.

This configuration allows the long press effect to be paused at the player's discretion, increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Also, when a video is paused during a long press effect, only some layers may be stopped, while other layers continue playing. For example, a layer displaying a character may be paused, while a layer displaying a background may continue playing without pausing. Another example is a layer displaying the number of added bonuses may be stopped, while surrounding layers, such as a concentrated line display to emphasize the number of added bonuses, continue playing.

This configuration makes it visually easier to understand that the long press effect is continuing, increasing the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, if a layer for overlay display is incorporated into some of the moving images, when executing the partial moving images and overlay display, the sub-control means can issue a single command to display the partial moving images and overlay display (to issue a command to play the partial moving images and overlay display, or to pause the partial moving images and overlay display). This means that the number of effect commands can be reduced even when the long press effect is interrupted and resumed, thereby reducing program capacity and improving processing speed. For example, by configuring the display of the added number and the converged line display to highlight the added number on the same layer, it becomes possible to control the update of the added number and the highlighting of the added number with the same effect command.

Furthermore, when a long press effect is paused, it may be paused immediately even while the effect is changing, or it may be paused after progressing a certain amount. For example, in the case of a display mode in which the numbers 1 to 9 arranged in a ring are rotated and updated to update the display of the added number as shown in Figure 125, it is possible to pause the effect after rotating the numbers to the correct position as shown in Figure 125a), or to pause the long press effect at a position even if the numbers are not in the correct position as the timing for pausing, as shown in Figure 125b. Furthermore, not limited to the example of Figure 125, if the effect switch is released while the effect is changing during a long press effect, a special effect may be generated to indicate that the effect is in the process of changing.

When the effect switch is pressed and the added number is added, resulting in a first-stage value (when the first period has passed since the effect switch was pressed), the long press effect switches to the second-stage video (before switching to the second-stage video, the first-stage video is displayed). Also, when the effect switch is pressed and the added number is added, resulting in a second-stage value (when the second period has passed since the first period passed since the effect switch was pressed), the long press effect switches to the third-stage video (before switching to the third-stage video, the second-stage video is displayed).

When switching between stages of the long press effect, the effect control means sends an FB to the sub-control means at the timing of the stage change, and the sub-control means then sends an execution command for the next stage of the effect to the effect control means.

Note that the lengths of the first and second periods (the size of the added number) may be the same, or the first period may be longer than the second period, or the first period may be shorter than the second period.

The length of the period during which the effect switch is repeatedly pressed during the long press effect in the first and second periods may also be changed. For example, during the first period, the effect switch may be repeatedly pressed every 100 ms, but during the second period, the effect switch may be repeatedly pressed every 50 ms.

The length of the period during which the video switches (the magnitude of the added number) may also be configured to become wider as the video switches in the second half, and the period during which the effect switch is repeatedly pressed may become shorter. For example, one possible configuration is that the added number when switching from the first period to the second period is 100 and the repeated pressing period is 100 ms, the added number when switching from the second period to the third period is 300 and the repeated pressing period is 50 ms, the added number when switching from the third period to the fourth period is 1000 and the repeated pressing period is 30 ms, and from the fourth period onwards there is no upper limit on the added number and the repeated pressing period is 10 ms.

Furthermore, if the length of the continuous pressing period of the effect switch in the long press effect of the first period and the second period changes, when the effect switch is released during the second period and pressed again, the continuous pressing period of the second period may be restarted, or the moving image of the second period may be displayed from the time the effect switch is pressed again until the first period has elapsed, but the continuous pressing period may correspond to the first period.

With this configuration, the moving image changes depending on the progress of the effect when the effect switch is pressed, increasing the player's interest in the game even when the player is holding down the effect switch. In particular, the update speed of the added number increases as the added amount increases, creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

The long press effect is also configured to continue even if the front door is opened during the long press effect. For example, if the effect switch is pressed during the long press effect and an additional number is being added, and the front door is opened (a door open error occurs), the additional number based on the pressing of the effect switch continues to be displayed. At this time, the lighting pattern of the LED built into the effect switch switches to the door open lighting pattern. The front door frame lamp also switches to the door open lighting pattern. A portion of the LCD screen displays "Door is open." A voice message stating "Door is open" is also output from the speaker. Even if the effect switch is pressed and held, the door open error can be cleared if the front door is closed. Furthermore, if the front door is opened while the effect switch is pressed and the additional number is being added during a long press effect (when a door open error occurs), a door open error message stating "Door is open" may be displayed superimposed on part of the additional number display based on the effect switch being pressed, or may be displayed in a separate display area (a non-superimposed display area). When the door open error is cleared (when the door is closed, or when the error clear switch is operated after the door is closed), or when a predetermined period of time has passed since the door open error was cleared (the door open error notification mode in various devices continues for the predetermined period of time), the lighting patterns of the various LEDs, the LCD display, and the audio output from the speaker are controlled to display modes corresponding to the additional effect.

With this configuration, even if the front door is opened during the long press effect, the long press effect can continue, and the fact that the door is open can be notified by the lighting patterns of various lamps, the content displayed on the LCD screen, and the sound output from the speaker.

Also, for example, if the front door is opened while the effect switch is pressed during a long press effect and the bonus number is being added (a door-open error occurs), the process of adding the bonus number based on the effect switch being pressed continues, but information about the door-open error may be displayed across the entire LCD screen. In this case, the lighting pattern of the LED built into the effect switch switches to the door-open lighting pattern, the front door frame lamp switches to the door-open lighting pattern, and a voice message stating "The door is open" is output from the speaker. Even if the effect switch is pressed and held, the door-open error can be cleared by closing the front door. Then, when the door-open error is cleared (when the door is closed or the error-clear switch is operated after the door is closed), or when a predetermined period of time has passed since the door-open error was cleared (the door-open error notification mode on various devices continues during the predetermined period), the lighting patterns of the various LEDs, the LCD display, and the voice output from the speaker are controlled to display modes corresponding to the bonus effect. In this case, the LCD will display the additional number of times the effect switch was pressed and held while the front door was open. If the effect switch was pressed and held while the front door was open and the predetermined additional number was reached, the additional number will be displayed after the door open error is cleared.

With this configuration, the door open display is displayed first, while processing based on the operation of the effect switch can also proceed, and the progress or results of the long press effect can be notified after the door is closed.

In addition, if a specified error occurs during the long press effect (while all reels are spinning) that began after the start switch was operated and game progress continues (when game progress is stopped due to a specified error at the end of game play after the third stop), the long press effect can be executed even if a specified error has occurred.

Furthermore, if a specified error (a recoverable error such as a selector error or hopper error) occurs during the long press effect that begins after the third stop, game progress will be halted due to the specified error, the LCD will display an error, and various lamps and speakers will be controlled to notify users of the error, making it impossible for the long press effect to be executed. In this case, the long press effect may be restarted from where it left off after the specified error is cleared, or it may be made impossible to resume the long press effect after the specified error is cleared. Even if the long press effect cannot be resumed, an additional bonus is added internally before the long press effect begins, so no damage will be done to the player. Furthermore, even if the effect switch is pressed and held, the specified error can be cleared by operating the reset switch.

If a predetermined error (a recoverable error such as a selector error or hopper error) occurs during the long press effect initiated after the third stop, causing game progress to halt, the LCD to display an error, and various lamps and speakers to notify the user of the error, rendering the long press effect unable to be executed. If the long press effect cannot be resumed after the predetermined error is resolved, the result of the bonus may be announced at a predetermined timing. Examples of predetermined timing include acceptance of operation of the MAX BET switch for the next play, acceptance of operation of the 1 BET switch, detection of inserted medals, acceptance of operation of the START switch for the start of the next play, or the start of the spin of the reel for the next play. One possible mode for announcing the result of the bonus may be to not announce the bonus during the long press effect, but to display the remaining number of plays already added to the number of remaining plays displayed before the long press effect began. This configuration eliminates the need for a dedicated effect pattern for recovering from the predetermined error, thereby optimizing the number of effects and reducing program capacity. Another possible mode of announcing the result of the additional bonus is to notify the player using the long press effect, but instead display the remaining number of plays that was displayed before the long press effect began, and then increment the display to add to the additional bonus. With this configuration, even if the long press effect is interrupted by a specific error, the remaining number of plays will be displayed when the error is resolved, allowing the player to recognize how much bonus has been added.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during a long press effect, the long press effect may be resumed when power is restored, or it may not be resumed. If the long press effect is resumed, it may be resumed from the beginning of the long press effect, from the point where the long press effect was interrupted, or from the point where the long press effect ends (for example, if power is restored during the second period, it may be resumed from the beginning of the second period).

Also, if a power outage occurs during a long press effect and the long press effect is not resumed when power is restored, the number of added bonuses may be announced at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be when various switches connected to the main control means are operated (for example, when the start switch for the next game after the long press effect is executed is operated, when the first stop, second stop, or third stop of the game in which the long press effect is executed is operated, or when the settlement switch is operated after the game in which the long press effect is executed is completed), when the AT executed after the long press effect ends (because the amount that was supposed to be added during the long press effect remains internally), or when power is restored. Furthermore, the amount that was added up until a certain point may be added up, and the amount that was not added from that point on may be displayed at a predetermined timing, or even if the amount was added up until a certain point, the entire amount may be displayed at a predetermined timing, regardless of whether the amount was added up until that point.

Furthermore, if the front door is opened and the setting key is turned ON during the long press effect that occurs after the third stop, and the setting confirmation mode is entered, the long press effect will not be executed during the setting confirmation mode, and the bonus number will not be added even if the effect switch is operated. However, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the long press effect can be resumed and the effect switch operation acceptance can be enabled, or when the setting confirmation mode ends and the front door is closed, the long press effect can be resumed and the effect switch operation acceptance can be enabled.

The long press effect that begins after the third stop is accepted ends when the MAX BET switch, 1 BET switch, medal insertion, or the start switch for the next game is accepted. In other words, the long press effect can be canceled, and when canceled, the display mode for the added number may announce the full added number at the time of cancellation, or may not announce the added number at the time of cancellation but may announce it at a predetermined timing.

FB may also be used in stage change effects. For example, the effect control means sends an FB to the sub-control means when the stage change effect ends, and the sub-control means sends a post-stage change effect command to the effect control means when it receives the FB. With this configuration, the post-stage change effect can be executed immediately after the end of the stage change effect, allowing for appropriate display without any discrepancy in the execution timing of the stage change effect and the post-stage change effect.

In this embodiment, a slot machine (reel-type gaming machine) is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, jankyu gaming machines, Parrot, or casino machines.

The technical details of this embodiment described above for the purpose of explaining the present invention can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub-control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Center reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Center stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal insertion slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation indicator lamp 24a: Left operation indicator lamp 24b: Center operation indicator lamp 24c: Right operation indicator lamp 25: Bet number display lamp 25a: 1 bet lamp 25b: 2 bet lamp 25c: 3 bet lamp 26: Credit number display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Acquired coin count display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Sticker storage section 32 : Display device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply unit 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout outlet 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board

Claims (1)

It has a start switch,
It has a stop switch,
having an information display means capable of displaying information,
having an internal lottery means;
A predetermined counter is provided,
Main processing can be executed,
The timer interrupt process can be executed when a predetermined counter times out .
The main processing has a predetermined interrupt disable period from a first instruction that disables interrupts to a second instruction that enables interrupts,
The timer interrupt process has a second instruction that enables the interrupt;
When the designed processing time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt process is "P" and the period at which a predetermined counter times out is "T", T/2>P is satisfied,
The processing time of the second instruction in the main processing is the same as the processing time of the second instruction in the timer interrupt processing,
When a predetermined counter times out at timing A during a predetermined interrupt disable period, timer interrupt processing is not executed at timing A, but the value of the predetermined counter is updated even after timing A, and timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing B after the predetermined interrupt disable period has ended, and thereafter timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing C,
When the period at which a predetermined counter times out is "T" and timing B is a specific timing before T has elapsed since timing A, timing C is the timing at which T has elapsed since timing A,
In a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means, stop operation information corresponding to a predetermined stop operation mode can be displayed on the information display means;
As the stop operation information, first stop operation information which is information relating to the first stop operation, second stop operation information which is information relating to the second stop operation, and third stop operation information which is information relating to the third stop operation can be displayed,
The display mode of the first stop operation information includes at least a normal mode and a success mode,
The display mode of the second stop operation information includes at least a normal mode and a success mode,
The success mode is a display mode that can be displayed based on the operation of the stop switch,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game in which a start switch is operated and a predetermined result is determined by an internal lottery means, when stop operation information corresponding to the predetermined stop operation mode is displayed on an information display means, a stop switch corresponding to the first stop operation information is operated as a first stop operation, the first stop operation information is displayed in a successful mode and then hidden, and the second stop operation information is displayed, a power outage occurs, and after power is restored, the first stop operation information can be re-displayed on the information display means in a successful mode, and the second stop operation information can be re-displayed on the information display means.